Electrical Specs Jan. 2019

AL WAAB COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DISTRICT
ZONE B
AL WAAB, DOHA, STATE OF QATAR
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
January 2019
Project Specification – Index GP18022 – Al Waab Com’l and Res’l District Zone B
AL WAAB COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DISTRICT

ZONE B
AL WAAB, DOHA, STATE OF QATAR
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
JANUARY 2019
CONSULTANT
MZ & P W.L.L.
Architectural and Engineering Consultancy
P.O. Box 5785
Doha, The State of Qatar
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
INDEX
January 2019 MZ & Partners W.L.L. Page i of i

Electrical Specification MZ & Partners GP18022 – Al Waab Com’l and Res’l District ECQ
Division 16 – ELECTRICAL
16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT

16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16124 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16139 - CABLE TRAYS
16140 - WIRING DEVICES
16231 - GENERATOR
16233 - FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS
16264 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
16265 - CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
16289 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
16350 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
16441 - SWITCHBOARDS
16442 - PANELBOARDS
16466 - BUSDUCTS
16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
- PUBLIC ADDRESS/VOICE ALARM & BACKGROUND MUSIC
16736
SYSTEMS
16737 - IP NETWORK
16740 - VOICE DATA NETWORK PASSIVE CABLING
16741 - FIRE ALARM
16742 - FIRE STOPPING
16743 - CONSOLE FOR FIRE COMMAND CENTER ROOM
16744 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION
16745 - IP CCTV SYSTEM
16746 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16747 - MOTOR STARTER
16748 - VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLS
16749 - ELECTRIC MOTORS
16750 - OBSTRUCTION WARNING LIGHT
16860 - LIGHTING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS
16870 - MASTER ANTENNA SYSTEM TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
16999 - LIST OF APPROVED AND RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
INDEX January 2019 Page 1 of 1

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT

SECTION 16010
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the latest Qatar Construction
Specification, relevant Kahramaa, QCCD, MOI-SSD requirements and the Conditions of
Contract, the drawings and other tender contract documents. In case conflict between QCS
and these specifications, the higher standard performance and specifications shall be
deemed to be applied.
B. This section generally specifies administrative and procedure requirements regarding

Electrical Work. Additional requirements are specified in various sections of Division 16 and
also may be required during the execution work due to project conditions.
C. The requirements of this Section do not supersede or take precedence over any
provision of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, and should any
discrepancy become apparent between these requirements and the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, and
the Engineer shall interpret and decide such matters in accordance with the applicable
provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.02 EXTENT OF WORK
This shall include installation, testing, pre-commissioning, commissioning, snags

attendance, spares, training, O&M manuals, as-built drawings including all labor, material,
equipment, tools, appurtenances, storage, services, temporary work, re-routing of existing
services necessary to complete the work in accordance with these specifications, drawings,
BOQ, circulars, etc.
Work, materials, equipment or services not specifically mentioned in other clauses of these
specifications or elsewhere, or indicated on the drawings but found necessary for the
completion and perfect functioning of the installations must be included in the Contractor’s
price.
The work shall include also operation of the installations after completion and acceptance
including maintenance and guarantee of the works as described hereinafter.
The work shall be designed and carried out in accordance with the contract drawings and
specifications as well as the standards of the country of origin.
The following builder’s work shall be considered as part of this work:
i. Concrete foundations and pads under generator, fuel tanks and other
equipment.
ii. All Builders’ work in connection with fixing brackets support, hangers, anchors,
etc.
iii. Cutting or forming all openings, mortar, chase, etc., in floors, walls and ceilings
required for the installation and making good after.
iv. Excavation and break filling, including compaction of trenches.
v. Painting items of equipment and exposed pipes and supports, including

decorative painting wherever required.
v. Labeling and identification.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-1

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Division 16 of this specification covers the supply and installation of the Electrical
systems and services as shown on the design drawings and in this specification.
B. GENERAL
The works comprised this Contract are the complete Works, all as described in the
Specification and in accordance with the drawings , preliminaries and other Contract
Documents.
The words “compete works” shall mean not only the major items conveyed by the
Contractor Drawings and Specification, but all incidental sundry items necessary for the
complete execution of the works and for the proper operation of the works.
The Contractor shall allow for working with the Engineer and relevant Government
Departments, including attending meetings at the requests of the Engineer, and for
providing calculations, designs and the like. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining
all necessary Government approvals and consents including providing all necessary
information in its complete and final format suitable for submission purposes, for all
relevant Government approvals and any other consent to be obtained for these Works,
to the Engineers, so that the Engineers can submit this information on behalf of the
Contractor.
C. HIGH AND LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
 High voltage works shall be as per KM-ENA Compound agreement.

 High Voltage Switchgear & Room shall be provided at First Basement.
 HV switchgear and cables shall be provided by the owner, to be part of Contractor
scope of work and implemented as per local company Qatar General Electricity and
Water Corporation Regulations.
 HV Feeder shall be available at the Basement building boundary limit. However, the
Contractor shall provide cables from that point onwards up to HV Switchgear and
terminate as necessary.
 Transformers shall be provided in First Basement for 8 Nos. These are dry type cast
resin.
 415 Main Distribution Boards, alternatively called MV Panels are located in First
Basement. Power is conveyed from Transformer to MV panels by busducts. Power
is distributed to various electric load centers and equipment, Client is metered
accordingly.
 Bunds are provided to all electrical and telephone risers including the mechanical
plantroom to prevent damage by local flooding. Bottom of every riser is provided
with leak detection system.
D. LIGHTING
1. High efficiency LED light fittings are considered throughout the Project. Wiring and
containment serving the light fixtures within all areas will be part of this contract.
2. Lighting the areas, i.e. plant rooms, stores, circulation areas, car park etc. shall
comprise surface or suspended LED light fittings.
3. A central battery emergency lighting system also fed by standby generators will be
provided throughout serving all means of escape, fire exits, etc. in accordance with
local code requirements. Lighting within critical areas such as generator rooms, fire
services plant rooms, MDF and building management offices to be provided with
emergency lighting.
E. STANDBY POWER
1. Essential Standby Diesel Generators, providing emergency power supply to

statutory life and life safety systems, elevators, essential services.

2. Two standby Diesel Generator sets are located at First Basement, and sized to
provide limited lighting, power and associated support services of life and fire safety.
3. Diesel generator exhaust and ventilation systems incorporating acoustic treatment
are provided with flues and terminate at the Ground level.
4. A centralized fuel oil storage and distribution system is located in the First
Basement. Distribution system to incorporate dual (feed and return) fire rated pipe
distribution system complete with integral controls.
F. EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION
1. Substation and MV room earthing in accordance with the latest KM regulations.

2. A generator base building earthing in accordance with the latest KM regulations.
3. An Independent “clean” earth system is provided in main telecommunication room.
4. A lightning protection system using air terminals and down conductors.
5. A transient voltage suppression for low voltage power, control and communication
equipment.
G. FIRE DETECTION, ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SERVICE
1. Fully automatic addressable fire alarm system is provided throughout including

smoke and heat detectors, break glass stations, audible and visual alarms, and fire
alarm and repeater panels. The fire alarm and detection will be fully integrated with
other services, fire prevention and extinguishing facilities all in accordance with local
code requirements, and capable of expansion to incorporate monitoring of systems
and/or areas as may be required.
2. The public address announcement and evacuation system for life safety is provided
independently, and may NOT utilize Background Music speakers. The system shall
have the ability to address each room.
H. BUILDING MANGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) AND CONTROLS
1. A fully addressable, direct digital control (DDC) building management system (BMS) is
provided for the monitoring and automatic control of all building service systems. The
control system will be designed to minimized reliance on any central control system
and will fail safe to a local controls in the event of a system communications failure.
Essential and emergency system will not rely on the BMS for their control and will
provide with hardwire.
2. The BMS will provide general monitoring and alarm reporting of all ancillary mechanical
and electrical systems including fire, security and transportation systems.
3. The BMS will be capable of integrating with other systems with high level interface and
will be a minimum of BACnet/Lonmark compliant.
4. The BMS features will include the ability for future expansion with minimum disruption
to the existing system and permit secure & local. The BMS should also offer an option
for programmed planned maintenance for future consideration.
5. The base BMS system will incorporate a minimum of 10% spare point capacity equally
shared between analogue and digitals points. LAN and Bus systems to be sized with
30% spare capacity. The LAN will be configured as a loop(s) to enable remote
communication to DDC’s etc in the event of a single break with in the loop.
6. The BMS shall be supported by standalone UPS equipment with each controller fed
from generator to ensure the system remains on line in the event of a power failure.
7. All incoming and outgoing current breakers shall be motorized type fed from
emergency supply that are required to be operational or generator supply. This shall be
achieved and fully managed at the BMS system. Described in Division 15.
I. CCTV SYSTEMS
 An IP based Closed Circuit Television Security System (CCTV) compliant with the
latest MOI-SSD regulations & specifications shall be provided.
 The CCTV system will be supported by UPS equipment and standby generators to
ensure the system remains on line in the event of a power failure.

J. ACCESS ALARM AND CONTROL SYSTEM
 An Intrusion Detection System (IDS) and CCTV system comprising cameras

monitors monitored door contacts and passive presence detection to all perimeter
entrances, escape doors and strategic internal areas. The system should be fully
addressable to enable normal daytime passage of client and have capabilities of
interfacing to provide monitoring alarm Systems and integrating with other system
(BMS, PA etc.)
 A fully programmed smart card access control system is provided throughout the
areas to all entrances, toilet plant riser etc. with electronic locks.
 Car park barrier access control system.
K. IP & SMATV TELEVISION SYSTEMS
 A centralized television distribution system is provided incorporating Cable television

and data distribution systems. Interactive TV will be processed through Data
Network with the system provider.
L. IP TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND DISTRIBUTION
 Complete IP based System serving the Client.

 The Telecom works shall be carried out accordingly, but not limited to the details
shown in the drawings and requirements in the specifications.
M. DATA NETWORK
 The Complete data network shall be carried out accordingly, but not limited to the
details shown in drawings and requirements in the specification,ie Structured
cabling system with horizontal and vertical cabling, patch panels, patch cords, data
racks, termination blocks and cross connect wires and cables.
N. ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY FOR VARIOUS MECHANICAL/OTHER

EQUIPMENT
a. All HVAC Equipments - Electrical

b. All Plumbing Equipments - Electrical
c. All Fire Fighting Equipments - Electrical
d. All Kitchen Equipments - Electrical
e. Window Cleaning Equipment
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Reference Standards
The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition,
amendments and supplements of the following regulations and standards, unless
otherwise specified.
a. State of Qatar “Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical

Equipments and Air Conditioning Equipment and Air Conditioning Equipment” 2nd
Edition March 2010, and all circulars or revisions.
b. Regulation for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by the Institute of
Electrical Engineers (IEE Regulations), 17th Edition 2008, including all
subsequent amendments.
c. Regulation for Passenger and Commercial Lifts in Buildings” issued by the MEW,
Doha Qatar.
d. Qatar Construction Specifications, issued by Civil Engineering Department of
Ministry of Municipality Affairs and Agriculture.

e. Regulations, specification, guidelines, instruction and circulars dictated or

circulated by Ooredoo for Telephone installation.
f. Regulations, specifications, guidelines, instructions and circulars dictated or
circulated by the Civil Defense Department for fire and safely requirements.
g. Regulations, specifications and guidelines and circulars dictated or circulated by
Environments; Protection Authority, Qatar.
h. Ministry of Interior (MOI-SSD) latest regulations and specifications.
2. Comply with the latest applicable standards of the following:
1) ASME American Society of Engineers.

2) Underwriters’ Laboratories
3) ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
4) ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.
5) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
6) NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
7) BS British Standards Institute
8) DIN Deutsches Institute for Normalisierung
9) FM Factory Mutual.
10) ISO International Standardization organization.
11) CIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
12) IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Definitions: The required submittals of this division, in addition to the definitions of the
General Conditions, and elsewhere in the contract documents, are further categorized for
convenience as follows:
1. Product data shall include manufacturer’s latest standard printed literature such as
manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, color charts, roughing diagrams,
wiring diagrams and performance curves on materials, equipment and systems for this
project. Product data shall include references to applicable specification section and
item number. Product data shall be provided in addition to the required shop drawing
submittals.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval as described

hereinafter.
3. Samples shall include physical examples of materials in complete units for visual
inspection. Samples shall indicate applicable specification section number and item
numbers within that section.
4. Certificates shall include statements of applicability, certifying reports from governing

and testing agencies, industry standards and applicable certificates specified in each
Section of the specifications.
5. Test and inspection reports shall include reports specified in each section of the
specifications.
6. Miscellaneous submittals shall include submittals related directly to the work (non-
administrative) including warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds,
reports, physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field
measurement data and similar information applicable to the work and not processed as
shop drawings, product data, samples or certificates.
8. No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to site until the required

submittals have been approved.
1.06 INTENT

The purpose of the shop drawings and specification is to provide an approach for intended
complete installations, finished, fully adjusted, tested commissioned and put in perfect
operating condition. The spirit as well as the letter of the drawings and specification shall be
followed, and all work shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning of the
drawings and specifications.
1.07 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is the responsibility of the Contractor, to inform the Engineer of any discrepancies in the
drawings and specifications before signing the Contract, default of which will make him
responsible for any errors or omissions in the drawings and specifications even though
these have been approved by the Engineer.
All costs incurred by any changes or alterations necessitated by any errors or omissions
shall be on the Contractor’s own expense without having the right to ask the employer for
any indemnity.
1.08 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS
The Engineer's drawings are generally diagrammatic and include general layouts and typical
details of the various systems to be installed. No deviations from the drawings shall make
without receipt of prior written approval from the Engineer.
The drawings shall not be scaled. The Contractor shall base all measurements both
horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these
established lines and levels. All measurements shall be verified on Site and checked as to
correctness of same as related to the work.
The Contractor shall check all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical drawings in laying
out work for verifying the adequacy of space in which work will be installed. Maximum
headroom and space conditions shall be maintained all points. Where head room or space
conditions appear inadequate the Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with
installation.
1.09 SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
Prior to starting the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed
shop and installation drawings showing to scale dimensions of equipment, pipes, etc. in plan
and elevation with clearances and relation of same to the space assigned. Minimum scale of
shop drawings shall be 1/50.
Where the work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with the work of other
trades, the Contractor shall coordinate space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.
The Contractor shall prepare composite installation drawings and sections to a suitable
scale of not less than 1/50, clearly showing how work will be installed in relation with work of
other trades.
Prior to submissions of the drawings and approximately 30 days after award of the Contract,
The Contractor shall submit lists of all equipment and materials with the names of proposed
manufactures. Lists shall show submission dates. The drawings will not be accepted prior to
submission of such lists. Drawings of interrelated items shall be submitted at approximately
the same time.
Drawings of equipment and material shall include detailed manufacturer’s drawings, cuts of
catalogues and descriptive literature, showing specifications, type, performance
characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions, size arrangements, operating
clearance, capacity, electrical characteristics, power requirements, motor, and drive and
testing information. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
Catalogues, pamphlets or manufacturer’s drawings submitted for approval shall be clearly

marked in ink for proper identification of the item being proposed.

Deviations from the specifications and drawings shall be indicated clearly with the reason for
each deviation.
All submissions for approval shall be furnished in three copies and submitted sufficiently in
advance of requirements to allow the Engineer ample time for checking and approving.
Failure of the Contractor to submit the drawing in ample advance time shall not entitle him to
an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be
allowed.
The Engineer shall have 21 days to answer any submittal either shop drawing or material
submittal. Any resubmitted shall entitle the Engineer to an additional of 14 days.
No equipment or material shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the
contractor has in his possession the approved drawings for the particular equipment or
material.
Approval rendered on drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to
provide equipment and material to meet the performance and quality standards as indicated
on the drawings and as described in the specification or to be of physical size to fit the
space assigned for it.
Material not covered by drawings shall be submitted for approval in letter form giving ratings
and names of manufacturers.
During the progress of the work, drawings shall be submitted as required by the Engineer
and as specified elsewhere in this specification. These drawings shall comprise but not
necessarily be limited to concrete bases for equipment with location of anchors bolts,
manufacturers certified installation drawings and instructions, certified performance
characteristics of equipment, wiring diagrams, control systems, etc.
Where required by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit for approval samples of material
to be used and workmanship proposed. The Contractor shall not use material or
workmanship that does not correspond to the approved samples.
1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
The Contractor shall plan and coordinate the work with all other trades in advance of
requirements and shall provide all necessary resources to ensure compliance with the
construction program. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a set of composite
coordination drawings in plans and sections with minimum scale of 1/50.
The Contractor shall coordinate the space requirements of all other trades involved and shall
be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and adequate clearance in
double partitions, hung ceilings, etc. for the proper installation of the work.
The Contractor shall give full cooperation to all other trades to permit the work of the trades
to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns,
setting plans and shop details for the proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.
The Contractor shall undertake to make, without extra charge, minor changes and
modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for
proper execution of the work.
Any extra cost incurred due to lack of coordination on the part of the Contractor shall be at
his own expense.
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for record a complete set of as-built drawings
including three sets of soft copies on CAD 2007 and electrical wiring diagrams, in tracing or

other reproducible form reflecting all the changes made from the original drawings during the
progress of the work. The drawings and electrical wiring diagrams shall show all labeled
equipment, valves, controls, instruments and electrical devices.
1.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS, SUPPLY OF SPARE PARTS AND LISTS
The Contractor shall supply spare parts for each and every equipment supplied under
Contract.
The Contractor shall furnish four copies of an instruction manual bound in booklet form
containing the following information:
Brief description of every system and equipment with basic operating features.
Descriptive literature of all equipment and components with manufacturer’s name, model
number, capacity rating and operating characteristic.
Service manual for every major piece of equipment giving operating and maintenance
instructions, starting and shutdown instructions, lubrication instructions and possible
breakdown and repairs, the service manual shall be prepared specially by the manufacturer
for the particular equipment.
Manufacturer’s list of recommended spare parts for every piece of equipment with unit
prices.
Detailed and simplified one line, color coded flow diagrams of every system with tag
number, location and function of each valve and instrument.
The instruction manual shall be submitted in draft form to the Engineer for his review and
approval as to the fulfillment of the specified requirements prior to final issue.
The instruction manual shall be submitted to the Engineer at least four weeks in advance of
the complete date of the system to be available for the final inspection prior to acceptance of
the respective systems.
1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver products to the project properly identified with name, model number, types, grades,
compliance labels and other information needed for identification.
1.14 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP
All equipment and material provided by the Contractor shall be new, free from defects and of
the same type, standard and quality as set forth in the specification.
Equipment and material of similar application shall be of the same manufacturer unless
otherwise specified.
All workmanship shall be of the highest standards of the industry, of accepted engineering
practice and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Poor workmanship shall be rejected
and the work reinstalled when in the judgment of the Engineer, the workmanship is not of
the highest quality.
1.15 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
Reference in the drawings and specifications to any equipment or material by name, make
or catalogue number, as well as any list of approved manufacturers, shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality and performance and shall not in any way be construed as
an intention to eliminate the products of other manufacturers and suppliers having approved
equivalent products.

Approval of a manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of his equipment as

equal to those specified. After award of Contract and before start of construction, the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer a complete summary of proposed
equivalent to be furnished indicating service, manufacturer, figure number, type and
pressure rating.
The Tender shall be based on the trade name and catalogue reference named in the
specification and products of the approved manufacturers. Should the Contractor wish to
use any equipment, material or products other than those specified, he should so state as
an alternative to the Tender, naming the proposed substitutions and indicating what
difference, if any, will be made to the Contract, price and detailing all differences entailed by
the substitution.
All the times the Engineer shall be the only judge of equality between the proposed
alternative and the item specified. No alternative shall be implemented without the written
approval of the Engineer.
Where the Contractor proposes to use equipment other than that specified or indicated
which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any
other part of the works, all such redesign, new drawings and detailing required shall be
prepared by the Contractor at his own expense. All additional costs resulting from such
substitution if approved by the Engineer in writing shall be paid by the Contractor.
Where such approved substitution requires a different quantity or arrangement of piping,

wiring, conduit and equipment from that specified or shown on the drawings, the Contractor
shall provide all such piping, structural supports, installation, controllers, motors, starters,
electrical wiring and conduits and any other additional equipment required by the system, at
no additional cost to the Employer.
1.16 PROTECTION
The Contractor shall order all equipment from the manufacturer specifying adequate packing
for export at the factory to avoid damage during shipment to the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage and the adequate protection of all
material and equipment until finally installed, tested and accepted.
He shall protect work against theft, injury or damage and shall carefully store material and
equipment received on Site in their original crates or containers until they are installed. Any
equipment containing components sensitive to high ambient temperature must be stored in
an air conditioned storage area. This responsibility shall embrace any delay pending final
testing of systems and equipment due to any condition.
The Contractor shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during
construction and storage to prevent entry of obstructing material.
The Contractor shall coordinate the protection of the work of all trades and shall be liable for
any damage sustained to other trades resulting from his work.
If any equipment is damaged during shipment be before it is tested and accepted, the
Contractor shall replace or repair the equipment depending on the extent of damage and as
determined and decided by the Engineer, on the Contractor’s own account and without
additional cost to the Employer.
1.17 ACCESSIBILITY
Contractor shall be responsible for determining in advance of purchase that equipment and
materials proposed for installation shall fit into the confines indicated areas, allowing
adequate space for maintenance.

All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and
repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, after the written
Concealed valves and devices shall be grouped together in as practical a way as possible in
order to be accessible through access doors.
1.18 ACCESS DOORS
The Contractor shall arrange for access doors and frames to be provided for easy access to
concealed equipment, components, pull boxes and devices that require operation,
inspection or maintenance.
However, the dimensions and locations of access doors shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall have the approval of the Engineer before the work is installed.
Requirements of access doors shall be submitted in sufficient advance time to be installed in

the normal course of the work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct identification of access doors by means
of buttons, tabs or markers to indicate the location of concealed work. The method and
schedule for identification of access doors shall be approved by the Engineer.
1.19 NAMEPLATES
Each piece of equipment provided shall carry, at a conspicuous location, attached in a

permanent manner to the equipment at the factory, a certified nameplate on which shall be
printed or stamped clearly the name and address of the manufacturer, the equipment model
number, serial number, date of manufacture, Electrical characteristics, performance rating,
temperature or other limitations and all other pertinent data as deemed necessary by the
manufacturer for any future reference to the equipmen
1.20 LABELING
The Contractor shall label and identify all equipment, instruments, controls, electrical
devices, switchgear, etc. as to duty, service or function.
Labels on equipment shall generally be of laminated bakelite with black surface and white
core unless approved otherwise, with incised lettering nomenclature written in English.
Labels shall be attached to equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, etc. or to

adjacent permanent surfaces, in an approved permanent manner.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval prior to installation a schedule
of all equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested nomenclature.
Controls and electrical devices shall be labeled to indicate clearly which equipment they
control.
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
All works are to be guaranteed for a period of two years as minimum, and as reflected to
each specific sections of the specification shall prevail dated from the final acceptance of the
work by the Owner.
Repairs or replacements made under the guarantee shall bear an additional one year
guarantee dated from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement.
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment, date
of beginning of warranty or bond, duration of warranty or bond, and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers and procedures for filling a claim and obtaining warranty services.

The guarantee is to cover perfect electrical and mechanical operation of systems,

acceptable noise and vibration levels, reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water,
and perfect attainment of performance within specified design conditions.
If during the guarantee period any equipment or material proves defective or any part of a
system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions
corrected as directed by the Engineer.
If during the guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or rebuilt, the guarantee
period for this equipment is to be extended for a new period equal to the original guarantee
period.
During the guarantee period, provide necessary skills and labor to assure proper operation
and to provide regular and preventive maintenance for equipment and controls, on a
continuous 24 hour basis.
Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or system.
Provide Owner with monthly inspection certificates of equipment, record findings on a check
list and certify that each piece of equipment has been examined, is operating as intended
and has been properly maintained as recommended by manufacturer.
Check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as designed.
Spare parts for normal wear and tear during guarantee period are to be provided Free of
cost by Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions at the job site where Electrical Work is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. The Engineer’s drawings issued with these specifications show the approximate
location of mechanical apparatus, the exact locations are subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems,

materials and equipment. Comply with the following requirements.
B. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment and material installation with other

building components.
C. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
D. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.

E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
F. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, material,
and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
I. Install systems materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that
portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the
Engineer.
J. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel; and
perpendicular to the other building systems and components, where installed
exposed in finished spaces.
K. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
L. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
M. Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems

required to be installed at a specified slope.
N. Painting
1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for surface preparation and application

procedures for paints and finishes.
2. Thoroughly clean surfaces requiring prime painting of rust, loose scale, oil,
grease and dirt by the use of wire brushes, solvent and other required means.
3. Do not paint on damp or frosty surfaces or during wet, foggy or freezing
weather.
4. Spread and brush paint evenly to eliminate drips, runs or sagging.
5. Fill voids, open or hollow places and irregularities with compound.
6. Thoroughly clean and retouch damaged or dirtied shop coat surfaces.
7. Do not paint controls, nameplates or labels.
8. Paint thickness is measured when dry.
9. Machinery: Before shipment, paint all equipment that require painting with the
manufacturer’s standard shop prime coat.
10. Supports and Brackets
a. Prime coat steel and cast iron supports. Apply prime coat in accordance with
manufacture’s specifications. Do not prime galvanized metals.
b. Decorative painting to match the colour of the adjacent services /Finishes to be
done.
O. Cutting and Patching
1. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the provisions of the Contract
Documents. In addition to the requirements specified, the following
requirements apply:

a. Perform cutting, fitting and patching of equipment and materials required to :
1) Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

2) Remove and replace defective Work.
3) Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the
Contract Documents.
4) Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
5) Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
6) Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work
to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.
2. Cut remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, component

and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical
items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new work.
3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated
or scheduled to be removed.
4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the
spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect

adjacent installations.
6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials
matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installer’s qualifications
refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building
components being patched.
9. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified
for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications refer
to the materials and methods required for the surface and building
components being patched.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests
1. Perform tests on individual equipment, systems and controls in the presence of

the Representatives of the Employer, Engineer and such other parties as may have
legal jurisdiction.
2. Supply labor, materials, properly calibrated instruments, power, etc., required for
testing, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Before conducting any tests on system or equipment, thoroughly clean the

associated systems or quipment just prior to testing.
4. Test equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons
during the appropriate seasons. Where the equipment or system under test is
interrelated with and depends upon other equipment, systems, and/or controls
for proper operation, functioning and performance, operate the latter
simultaneously with the equipment or system under test.
5. The duration of tests shall be as determined by authorities having jurisdiction,

but in no case less than the time prescribed in each section of the
specifications.

6. Promptly repair or replace defective work and repeat the tests until the particular
system and components parts thereof receive the approval for the Engineer.
Replace any damages resulting from tests, as directed by the Engineer.
7. Submit test records on reproducible sheets to the Engineer for approval and
include approved copy in the instruction Manual. The Engineer shall approve
the format of the record sheet prior to actual testing of equipment.
8. During tests of equipment and systems, fully instruct the Employer’s

representative on the operation and maintenance of the equipment and
systems. This period is in addition to any required special instruction, elsewhere
specified.
B. Third Party Inspection
1. All Electromechanical systems and equipments should be inspected, witnessed,

commissioned, and certified by a third party qualified testing and commissioning
authority.
2. Life and safety systems should only be inspected and certified by a QCDD approved
third party agency.
C. Final Inspection
1. At final inspection, it is essential that certain trades be properly represented

including the following:
a. Electrical Contractor including people thoroughly familiar with the project, its
intent, equipment and system installation and operation.
b. Dynamic rotating machinery and specialist systems equipment manufacturer and
system installer.
c. The automatic control manufacturer representatives familiar with the installation
who can demonstrate to the Employer’s satisfaction that the controls perform
according to the specified requirements.
d. The Mechanical Contractor’s, representatives familiar with the installation’s
wiring and interlocking.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall verify the actual operation of equipment and controls
prior to final inspection
3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING -GENERAL
A. Thoroughly clean any apparatus before placing in operation. Restore finished

surfaces if damaged and deliver the entire installation in an approved condition.
B. Adjust and balance systems to operate as shown and specified.
3.06 INSERTS AND SLEEVES
A. Inserts in concrete for supports are to be provided.
B. Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place,
in advance of placing of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts and sleeves necessary
to complete the Work.
C. Cable Sleeves: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, pipe sleeves are to be as

follows:

1. General floor sleeves are to be standard weight PVC with bottom and flush with
surface, calked with glass wool and sealed at top and bottom with butyl mastic.
Top end is to extend 25 mm above floor level in electrical and plant rooms. Top
end of sleeves is to be flush with finished floor surface in finished rooms.
3. Sleeves in Foundation Walls: HDPE or Standard weight galvanized steel

fabricated sleeves with puddle flange, flush inside and outside, calked water tight.
3. Sleeves in Concrete Walls: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe, flush with wall
surface at both ends, calked with glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl
mastic.
4. Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings: UPVC or LDPE.
5. Sleeves for cables and services trunking are to be approximately 30 mm larger than
passing through.
6. Fire Rated Wall or Floor Sleeves-Galvanized Pipe: Annular space between pipe
and sleeve in the fire rated wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated
sealant. Refer to Fire stopping in Division 16.
3.07 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES
A. Excavation and backfilling of trenches required for the installation of all utility services
and underground cabling within the building, and to points of connection with exterior
underground utilities outside of the building, are to be performed by each trade for its
work as specified.
B. Excavate to the required depths and grade. Rock or existing concrete, where
encountered, are to be excavated to a minimum depth of 150 mm below the bottom
of cable. Where mud or otherwise unstable soil is encountered in the bottom of the
trench which is incapable of supporting the cables or utility lines, such soil is to be
removed to firm bearing and the trench is to be backfilled with sand to the proper grade
and tamped to provide uniformly firm support.
3.08 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO FINAL

ACCEPTANCE
A. Take necessary measures to insure adequate protection of equipment and materials

during delivery, storage, installation up to testing and commissioning and shutdown
conditions. This responsibility shall include provisions required to meet the conditions
incidental to the delays pending final test of systems and equipment
under seasonal conditions.
B. Operate the completed systems for a period of time prescribed by the Engineer to
determinate the capability of the equipment and controls to conform to the
requirements of the drawings and specifications.
C. Guarantee period for works shall be two years from the date of issuance of handing
over certificate, unless otherwise stated to be more in relevant section of the
specification.
D. Make final operating tests with systems in simultaneous operation and building in
normal operating modes.
3.09 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall instruct and train the Owner’s designated personnel in the
operation and maintenance of every part, device and piece of equipment in the systems
with emphasis on proper startup and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and

lubrication procedures with recommended services, overhaul and maintenance

methods, adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, use of special tools
and safe practices.
The duration of training shall be for a total period of ninety working days, eight hours
a day up to the complete satisfaction of the end users.
This period shall follow the final inspection date and shall not necessarily consist of a
single series of consecutive days. Apportion time between summer, winter, and
intermediate operating seasons as mutually agreed.
- Details of training: Comprising Training manuals from original manufacturer to be

submitted and approved by the Client well in advance.
- Training shall be classroom and site based.
- Training to be different for different grade of employees, i.e. supervisor, technician,
engineer level, etc.
B. All expenses for training Owners personnel shall be at Contractor’s own cost.
C. Commencement date of training shall be subject to the Owner approval.
END OF SECTION 16010

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 16050
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Divisions 1 and 5 of Specifications, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. General provisions applicable to Division 16 work and other Sections of the

Specification that refer to this Section.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Covers, brackets and supports.
5. Electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7. Electrical demolition.
8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
9. Touchup painting.
B. Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing
and commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and materials
shown on the Drawings and/or described in the Specification together with all
associated ancillary work, support work and builder's work in connection.
1.3 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of
the Qatar General Electricity and Water Regulations and regulation for the
Electrical and Installation, latest Edition as issued by the Institution of Electrical
Engineers, UK where not in contradiction with the local codes of practice and
regulations.
B. Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in

which material or construction methods called for is less than minimum
requirement of the Regulations, immediately inform the Engineer in writing.
Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the materials and perform the work
as though called for to minimum code standards.
C. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be

manufactured and installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations
of the following or other equal and approved standards:
1. BS: The British Standards Institute

2. IEC: The International Electro-technical Commission
3. ISO: The International Standardization Organization
4. CCITT: The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative
Committee
5. CCIR: The International Radio Consultative Committee
6. CISPR: The International Special Committee on Radio Interference
D. Local standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over
the Standards.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS January 2019 16050-1

1.4 POWER SUPPLY
A. The Local Power Authority will provide incoming power supply and connection
at 11,000V to the location shown on the Drawings.
B. Power Supply: Liaise with the Local Power Authority to confirm:
1. Characteristics of supply and system earthing.

2. Location of incoming supply shown on the Drawings.
3. Space requirements and associated builder's work for the Authority's
installations.
4. Make necessary arrangements at the earliest opportunity to ensure
connection as and when required, and inform the Engineer in the event of
any foreseen delay.
C. kWH-metering: Liaise with the Local Power Authority and provide necessary
instrumentation, enclosures and accessories required by them to effect a complete
kWH-metering installation.
D. kWH-metering will be at low voltage as shown on the Drawings.
E. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:
1. Medium voltage: 11 kV, 3 phase, 3 wire.

2. Low voltage: 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed neutral.
3. Frequency: 50 Hz.
F. Distribution systems are to be supplied or derived from the voltage system

previously described, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
1.5 TELEPHONE PUBLIC EXCHANGE LINES
A. The Local Telephone Authority will bring telephone public exchange lines into
the premises to the location shown on the Drawings and/or to be agreed with
the Authority. Liaise with the Local Telephone Authority to confirm location of
connection of public telephone exchange lines into the premises.
During execution at the Owner’s request Local Telephone Authority could be in

valve in bulk wiring cabling and installation of cabinet and termination. In such
situation the Contractor shall provide access to the premises without delay and
interruption of other works.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment Spaces and Rooms: Verify that dimensions, structure, ventilating

and cooling arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and rooms
are suitable for installation, operation and maintenance of proposed
equipment. Note any discrepancies on the shop and construction drawings.
B. Equipment is to be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously

described, unless otherwise specified. Special provisions are to be made for
equipment sensitive to power supply frequency and voltage variations and for
equipment operated at other voltages/frequencies or by direct current sources.

1.7 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A. Equipment, including transformers, switchgear, cables, relays, lighting fixtures, motors

etc., is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble free service under the Doha
climatic conditions.
a. Max Ambient Temp. in shade: 50ºC (Dry Bulb) in Winter

8ºC (Dry Bulb) in summer
b. Altitude Sea Level
c. Maximum Relative Humidity 95% to 98%
d. Maximum Wind Velocity 170 Kms per hour
e. Prevailing Wind North or North-Westerly
f. Storms Dusty, Sporadic and Irregular
g. Annual Rainfall 50mm between January and April
h. Atmosphere Salt ladden and very corrosive
All Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation without deterioration and
breakdown, twenty four hours a day, seven days a week, throughout its normal
rated life except for interruption due routine maintenance.
B. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required
for particular equipment, they are described in the specification of the
equipment concerned.
1.8 DRAWINGS
A. Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations and

general layout of equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts together with
dimensions, weights, mounting methods and accessories, where relevant, are to be
shown on Contractor's shop and construction drawings.
B. Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the
Drawings, the symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted
devices, take up more space on the Drawings than the device does on the wall.
Because of drafting limitations these locations must be considered as being
indicative rather than exact physical locations of the devices. The devices shall be
installed with prime regard for convenience of operation and the proper usage of the
wall space rather than to coincide with the scaled locations of the symbols. In
locating the outlets, follow the criteria provided on detail Drawings where provided,
and coordinate with furniture. Do not scale from design Drawings.
C. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings are to be used as a guide only to defining
basic positions, circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and
details of routing of circuits are to be shown on the Contractor's shop and
construction drawings.
D. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical
Work, such as motor control centers/panels, cables to motors and other similar
electrically operated equipment are shown for convenience and reference only.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and

construction drawings and other information required by the Specification,
before ordering equipment or materials and before executing any related work
on site.
B. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment, covers and supports.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings:

1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity- metering

equipment.
a. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design requirements
are understood by indicating all equipment and material proposed to be supplied
and installed and by detailing fabrication and installation methods proposed to be
used. Shop and construction drawings are to clearly state the name and location
of the work, the names of Engineer and Contractor, submission date, cross-
references to the Drawings and Specification and the specific reference number,
location, service and function of each item.
2. Shop and construction drawings are to be submitted at a scale of 1:50 for

general layout plans, and 1:10, or 1:20 as approved by the Engineer for
sections, details, elevations, congested layouts, etc. Drawings shall include
but not be limited to the following:
a. Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades

concerned, showing sleeves and openings for passage through floor
structure.
b. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing
locations of cables, conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, ceiling spaces and all other critical locations
c. Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to
clearances, access, sleeves, electrical connections, location and elevation
of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc.
d. Plans, sections and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate
compliance with Standards for allocation of spaces for maintenance,
movement, installation, etc.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
E. Coordination Study: Carry out a short circuit and protection coordination study,
for the electrical distribution network, and submitted to Engineer for approval.
F. Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original

catalogues or catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number, application and
operating criteria of all equipment and materials, together with other
information necessary to satisfy Engineer that proposed equipment and systems
are suitable and adequate.
G. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all

items for which choice of manufacturer is at own discretion, is to be submitted
for approval.
H. Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for the project is

to be assembled by the manufacturer or his authorized assembler. Submit the
necessary documents to substantiate the above including the assembler staff
training, quality control, etc. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any local
assembler if the information submitted is not sufficient. The Engineer's rejection in
that respect is final and not subject to discussion.
I. Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test
certificates and reports for equipment and devices. Complete test results are to be
submitted in clearly identified and organized booklets, indicating item of equipment,
make, model, type, date of tests, and type of tests, descriptions and procedures.
Include in the test reports the Quality Assurance Certification, the standards to
which the equipment comply, and the standards to which the equipment was tested.

J. Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment is to comply with the

relevant standards recommendations and are to be witnessed by Engineer. If the
manufacturer's test certificates/tests are not complying with the standards, then
independent laboratory tests are to be carried out on equipment in accordance
with the Specification and the Standards, and as required by Engineer. The
Engineer's requirements in that respect are final and not subject to discussion.
K. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare
parts to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each
item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
L. Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules
of tools and instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and
state against each item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and
delivery to site.
M. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all

equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position
and fixing methods of each label indicating its application.
N. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major
items of equipment for which samples cannot be submitted are to be
demonstrated in existing installations or by manufacturer's information, test
certificates and reports.
A. Comply with related Standards, specified therein.
B. Installations are to be carried out by qualified personnel.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general

construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of
construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and

other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment
requiring positioning before closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility

companies.
1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility
company providing electrical power and other services.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are
concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in
Division 8 Section "Access Doors."
E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces,

coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished
surface.

F. Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical

identification markings and devices, coordinate installation of these items
before ceiling installation.
1.12 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in

the work prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or
materials cease to be available, submit alternative items of equal quality and
type for approval.
B. Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material

characteristics where required are compatible with the requirements of the
Local Power Authority or other Authorities having jurisdiction and are
acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any modifications necessary to comply
with the Local Power Authority's requirements.
C. Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment is to be the latest standard product of

the manufacturer. Component parts are to be the product of a single
manufacturer, unless otherwise approved and provided that components made
by other manufacturers are of a standard design and are interchangeable.
D. Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the Specification

does not necessarily constitute approval of their standard products as equal to
those specified. Ascertain that listed manufacturers are able to supply equipment
and material in conformity with the Specification.
E. Factory Assembly: Equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory

assembled units ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for
transportation or other purposes is to be arranged to limit site work to simple
reassembly and inter-wiring of control and power cabling.
F. Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved

location, under cover, free from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment
sensitive to heat and humidity is to be kept in climatically conditioned areas
until installed and handed over.
G. Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable

defective equipment during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed
from service for repair or replacement.
1. Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by

the manufacturer (including his agreement to replace promptly, defective
equipment or parts thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering materials
and workmanship for the period stated in the Specification, starting at substantial
completion. Assign the benefits of such warranty to the Employer.
H. Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare
parts required by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying,
storing and securing same.
1. Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide
sets of tools and instruments required by the Specification, together with suitable
means of identifying, storing and securing same.
I. Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices
etc. to indicate duty, service or function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels
are to have English and Arabic whenever required by the Client. Alternative
methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with non-

corrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent surfaces or as

approved by Engineer.
J. Systems used before substantial completion are to have all consumable elements,
such as lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced by new, within 7 days prior
to the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm
diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel
supports.
D. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed,

glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 14-mm diameter holes at a
maximum of 200-mm centers in at least one surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels

and angles.
2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except
metal items may be stainless steel.
E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps,
threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and
spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.
F. Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
G. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in
riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as
required suiting individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting
with hot-dip galvanized finish.
H. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each

application category. Use colors prescribed by these Specifications.
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size to meet Standards.
1. Type: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted,

color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Color: Black letters on orange background.
3. Legend: Indicates voltage.

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self- adhesive
vinyl tape, not less than 25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.
D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed,

vinyl tape with the following features:
1. Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type

with preprinted numbers and letters.
F. Equipment Nameplates: Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and

firmly fixed to equipment at factory. Nameplates are to indicate name and
address of manufacturer, model, serial number, basic characteristics and
ratings of equipment and are to include elementary diagrams etc., all in
accordance with the Standards.
G. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
H. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock,

melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm
minimum thickness for signs up to 129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness
for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.
I. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-

finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend,
and size appropriate to the application.
J. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted,

cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 1-mm, galvanized-steel backing, with
colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 6-mm grommets in
corners for mounting.
K. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or

No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.3 COVERS FOR TRENCHES
A. Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on
the Drawings, are to be flanged checkered steel plates with angle or channel-
section frames, suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and finished
with zinc chromate primer and two coats gray enamel.
2.4 BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS
A. Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to be
galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic
inserts and lead anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific light duty
installations.
2.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Equipment Foundations and Bases: Reinforced concrete, as approved by

Engineer after submission of design calculations. Dimensions, levels and
surface finishes are to be suitable for equipment installed, as shown on the
Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed

equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Installations Generally:
1. Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification

and Regulations, ensuring compliance with design and performance
requirements, to provide safe and protected systems with equipment readily
accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
2. Installations are to be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated
and coordinated with all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types
specified or recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the
equipment or accessories.
B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not

indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the
maximum possible headroom.
C. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular
to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement

of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
with other installations.
E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required

slope.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-

channel system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a

safety factor of at least four; minimum of 90-kg design load.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical
components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support
raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware
necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-

type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased

by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe

hangers or clamps.
F. Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed

conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on
raceway terminals.
H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture
support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar
hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the
box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 600 mm
from the box.
J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect

switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other
devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of
adequate strength.
K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls
unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway
penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated
floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and
masonry walls.
L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless
otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other
fastening methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on
solid masonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and
provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for
conduits, pipe straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25
percent of its proof-test load.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation
and maintenance of equipment.
B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical
identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents
or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout
Project.
C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:
1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored

adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 50-mm wide, completely
encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at
15-m maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 8-m maximum intervals in
congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

b. Security System: Blue and yellow.
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source
and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box.
Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.
F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for

exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located
directly above power and communication lines. Locate 150 to 200 mm below
finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope does not exceed 400 mm, overall, use a single line marker.
G. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe
operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they
connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved
legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
H. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red

background with minimum 9-mm- high lettering for emergency instructions on
power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
3.5 FIRE STOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire stopping
materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop System."
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but

not less than 100 mm larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow
supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting

templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use
21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified
in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.7 SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR
A. Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on
the Drawings or required by equipment design, are to be installed prior to
pouring concrete.
3.8 HOLES AND ANCHORS
A. Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and
in approved positions.
B. Holes and chases in in situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened
concrete or drill holes larger than 10-mm diameter without prior approval.
C. Holes and Chases in Pre-cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete
without prior approval.
D. Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without

prior approval.
E. Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:
1. Size of holes: 300-mm square.

2. Depth of vertical chases: 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 leaf
thickness.
3. Depth of horizontal chases: 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
F. Cutting Masonry:
1. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.

2. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to
surrounding structure.
3. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified
dimensions.
4. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only; do not set
back to back; offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.
G. Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for
ducts etc. which exceed 450-mm width.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces
required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of
trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match
adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire
stopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces
by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.
3. Electricity-metering components.
4. Concrete bases.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.
B. Test Employer's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy,

and usability of output data.
1. Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied

by the metered feeder.
2. Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the
"off" condition.
3. Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a
measurable meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting
that ensure continuous, safe operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual
electricity used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample
measurements of supply voltage at the test load connection. Record test
results.
5. Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup;
then retest. Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of
entire system is verified.
3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and
finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and
for timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect

exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that

coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.

GROUNDING AND BONDING

SECTION 16060
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. The following Sections contain special requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding

materials.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy and to provide
protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system arrangement to
achieve an earth resistance value: less than 5 ohms, including:
1. Transformer neutral earthing

2. Main earthing terminals or bars
3. Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment
4. Extraneous conductive parts
5. Standby generator neutral earthing
6. Feeder and branch circuits
7. Motor and appliance branch circuits
8. Signal and communication systems
9. Bonding to the lightning protection system
B. Earthing requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special

requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and may
be used interchangeably: "earth" and "ground"; "earthing" and "grounding".
B. Earth: Conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.
C. Earth Electrode: Conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing
electrical connection to, Earth.
D. Exposed Conductive Part: Any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live
part, but which may become live under fault conditions.
E. Extraneous Conductive Part: Any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes,
heating tubes etc. and non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators,
cooking ranges, metal sinks etc. and non-insulating floors and walls.
F. Protective Conductor: Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric
shock and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
GROUNDING AND BONDING January 2019 16060-1

1. Exposed conductive parts.

2. Extraneous conductive parts.
3. Earth electrode(s).
4. Main earthing terminal or bar(s).
5. Earthed point of the source(s).
G. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such distance from
one another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly
affect the potential of the other(s).
H. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: The terminal or bar provided for the connection of protective
conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if any to the
means of earthing.
I. Equipotential Bonding: Electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive

parts at a substantially equal potential.
J. Earthing Conductor: Protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of an

installation to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not limited
to, manufacturer’s catalogues for each type of product indicated including the following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Connecting clamps.
3. Earthing conductors, protective conductors, and bonding conductors.
4. Connectors and other accessories.
5. Exothermic welding kits and tools.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners,
and other information specified or required by Engineer.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used and test conditions.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections.
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth of
laying and covering.
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.
4. Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms, switchgear,
distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates and marking,
passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves, grooves, niches etc.,
giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
E. Records: Submit the following:
1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all

components of earthing system.
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.

3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used.
F. Samples: Submit samples of conductors, as requested by Engineer.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing

lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Standards: Carry out work in accordance with the following:
1. IEC 364-3 and 364-4-41: Electrical Installations in Buildings.

2. Latest edition IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings – London.
C. Comply with BS 6651 when interconnecting with lightning protection system or any revision
applied during the Construction phase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Refer to Section 16999 Lists of Approved and Recommended Manufacturers.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Component parts of earthing system are to include the following:
1. Earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)

2. Main earthing terminals or bars.
3. Earthing conductors.
4. Protective conductors.
5. Equipotential bonding conductors.
6. Electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems.
7. Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.
B. Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried earthing
tape or cable, which is to have a total combined resistance value, during any season of the
year and before interconnection to other earthed systems or earthing means, not exceeding
5 ohms. Distance between two rods is not to be less than twice the length of one rod driven
depth.
C. Ring type earth electrode is to consist of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in
exterior wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively at 0.6 m around the
perimeter of the building foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing
conductors to this ring. Insulated connection flags into the building, of same material as
earthing conductors, are to be located at positions of service entrance and main
switchboard rooms, terminating in bolt-type earth points (studs) or test- links for connection
of main earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting with the earth ring are to be
provided, as necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to an acceptable value.
D. Functional earth electrode is to be provided separately from, but interconnected to, other
earth electrode(s) through suitably rated (470 V) spark gap. Functional earth electrodes
are to be used for earthing electronic equipment (communication equipment, digital
processors, computers etc.) as required by the particular Section of the Specification and
recommendation of manufacturer.

E. Main earthing bar is to be provided at the main LV distribution room, and as described in
the Specification or shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing conductors, protective
conductors and bonding conductors to the main earthing bar. Provide two insulated main
earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing joints to the earth
electrode at two separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to carry maximum earth fault
current of system at point of application with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160
deg. C for at least 5 seconds. Main earthing conductors are to be minimum 120 mm2 or as
otherwise required by the particular Section of the Specification.
F. Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main
earthing conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
G. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor is
common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the largest
of the conductor sizes.
1. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54F of IEE Regulations.
H. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like. Where
armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective conductor, if
approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I. Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor from one

piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive parts
of equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected by
bolted clamp type connectors and/or brazing to continuous protective conductors which are
to be insulated by molded materials.
J. Earth Fault Loop Impedance: For final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective device on
over-current occurs within 0.4 seconds. For final circuits supplying only fixed equipment,
earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization is to be such that disconnection
occurs within 5 seconds.
1. Use appropriate tables and present same for approval by the Engineer (IEE
Regulations: Tables 41A1 and 41A2, Appendix 7 and Regulation 543).
K. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the

building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting, metallic
conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armor to nearest earthing terminals by
equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor shall not
be less than half of the protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with
a minimum of 4-mm2.
L. Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to
main earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between
point of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding
is to be made on the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be
less than half that of the earthing conductor connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.
M. Identification: Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every

bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance with the
Regulations, as follows:
1. SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.

N. Identification: Protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of

green-and-yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as
approved.
O. Identification: Source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be identified

along its entire length by continuous black insulation labeled 'neutral earthing'.
2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Buried Earth Conductors: Bare annealed copper strip conductors 25 x 2.5 mm, or annealed
stranded copper conductors 70 mm2 cross-section.
B. Earthing Conductors: Insulated or bare copper conductor as described in the Specification

for the particular application.
C. Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables,
having rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor forming
part of a multi-core cable, color coded.
D. Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper
cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in Article
"General Requirements" hereof.
E. Main Earthing Bar: Hard drawn copper, 40 x 4 mm where formed into a closed loop, and 50
x 6 mm where open-ended. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Main Earth Bar' and is to be drilled,
for connection of conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with
copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and wall mounting insulators.
F. Testing Joints (Test Links): Copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections,
disconnectable by use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth bar
connection. Links are to be fixed to porcelain or other approved insulating supports.
Contact surfaces are to be tinned.
2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS AND EARTHING ACCESSORIES
A. Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with points of
connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.
B. Bolted Connectors and Clamps: Bolted-pressure-type connectors and clamps, or

compression type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or
copper silicon alloys.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rod: 20-mm diameter high strength, with 99.99% pure electrolytic solid copper
conductor. Driving head is to be high strength steel. Couplings are to be long length silicon
bronze, internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of
copper and strength. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and bolted connector
of sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated thereto.
1. Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m, extendible as necessary to obtain required earth

resistance. The electrode shall penetrate at least 1m into summer water table level.
B. Tape Mats: Where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist of
parallel and perpendicular copper strip, 2.4 m apart, welded together by exothermic welds
to form a grid. Tape is to be 25 x 2.5-mm strip conductor.

C. Earth Pit: Precast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum 450 mm internal
diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm below top of earth rod.
Earth pit is to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor.
Cover is to have inset brass plate with inscription 'Earth Pit - Do Not Remove'.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRANSFORMER SUBSTATION EARTHING
A. MV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth bar
of each item by bare conductor and the earth-electrode by two insulated earthing
conductors, one at each end of bar, via testing joints. Earthing conductor is to be minimum
50 mm2.
B. Outdoor ring main units, which are individually mounted, are to be connected to earth
electrode by one insulated earthing conductor, bolted at earthing terminal.
C. LV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth bar
of each item by bare conductor and the earth electrode at two extreme ends by two
insulated earthing conductors through testing joints. Earthing conductor size is to be
minimum 120 mm2.
D. Transformer earthing terminal is to be connected to LV main earthing bar by bare copper

earthing conductor not less than 20 mm2 per 100 kVA of transformer rating, with a
minimum of 35 mm2.
E. Transformer neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor (color

black) to LV side main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be sized for maximum
earth fault current for 5 seconds with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C
or sized not less than 30 mm2 per 100 kVA of transformer rating, and with a minimum of 50
mm2. Where a neutral is directly connected to earth electrode, an insulated disconnecting
device is to be provided at the transformer.
F. Outdoor package substation earthing is to comprise at least four earth rods, each providing
a connection point of an earthing conductor connected to one end of the earthing bars at
MV and LV switchgear sections respectively. The four rods are to be interconnected
together and to the earth electrode.
G. Lightning arresters are to be directly connected to earth electrode, following the shortest
path. Each lightning arrester is to be connected at a dedicated earth rod.
3.2 EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS, LIGHTING

INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. Main earthing bar is to be provided in main distribution room and connected to earth
electrode by two insulated conductors (minimum 120 mm2) via testing joints.
B. Earthing bars of main distribution boards are to be connected, by bare earthing conductor,
directly to main earthing bar at main distribution room and by protective conductor run with
incoming feeder from respective supply point.
C. Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective conductors

run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in panelboards with
respective main distribution board earthing bar.
D. Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch
circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet
terminal is to be connected.

E. Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to be in the
form of a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of circuit in
panelboard.
F. Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as
switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth
conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
3.3 GENERATOR PLANT EARTHING
A. Generator neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor through

the neutral earthing link or device to main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be
suitably sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it takes the system protection to
operate with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C, but not less than 30
mm2 per 100 kVA of generator rating, with a minimum of 50 mm2.
B. Generator earthing terminal is to be connected to main earthing bar by bare copper

conductor of cross section not less than 20 mm2 per 100 kVA of generator size, with a
minimum of 35 mm2.
C. Switchgear (ATS) and Control Gear: Earthing terminals or bars of switchgear and control
gear are to be connected by separate protective conductors to respective normal and
emergency main distribution board earth bars.
D. Extraneous conductive parts including steel frames, battery racks, day-tank, pumps and
piping are to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar in
compliance with bonding regulations.
3.4 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY
A. Main earthing bar or loop is to be conveniently located in mechanical plant rooms, and
connected by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control centre at its
earthing bar, and to motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc. at their earthing
terminals, using 20 x 2 mm bare copper strips or 35 mm2 bare copper conductor
(minimum size) or as required to carry maximum earth fault current for 1 second with final
conductor temperature not exceeding 200 deg. C. Conductors are to be securely fixed,
recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar or
loop is to be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
B. Main earthing bar or loop is to be connected at two extremely separate points to earth
electrode, directly through two test joints by insulated earthing conductors, or connected to
main earth bar by protective conductors.
C. Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective earth
conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or
distribution unit.
3.5 SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
A. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide 16mm2 minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 6.4-by-50-by-300-mm grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.6 INSTALLATION
A. Continuity: Ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and

mechanically secure.
B. Earth Rods: While citing earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with individual
rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 600 mm from
foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be drilled
before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal filler that
will not corrode, is to be provided around the rod.
C. Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m from ground
surface.
D. Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main earthing
terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to building structure by
approved supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against
mechanical damage and corrosion.
E. Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable, are to
be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F. Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at

threads, contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed
to make secure bonds.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either by filling
with vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.
B. Connections: Earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth

connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be
employed.
C. Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds

that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable.
E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked
against specified resistance.
B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
C. Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.

D. Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against calculated
impedance figures.
E. Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
3.9 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace
it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include
application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2
Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 16120
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. All Kahramaa specifications and regulations for cables and wires shall apply.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and
signal cables, termination, jointing and splicing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities,

de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
B. Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and
branch circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination
between various trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with final
conduit routing.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements
of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES January 2019 16120-1

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice
and terminate low-voltage cables.
B. Standards: Wires and cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved standards
and are to bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured.
Wires and cables not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying capacities
and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers,
wound on factory reels.
B. Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris, etc.
C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable
insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is
maintained.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions
and as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERALLY
A. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other
feeders are to have copper conductors. Cable conductors are to be stranded for sections 4
mm2 and above, based on IEC 228 Class 2. Signal and control cables are to have solid
conductors unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords are to have finely stranded
conductors. Conductors of single-core cables 25-mm2 and above are to be compacted.
Multi-core cables 35-mm² and above is to be sectoral shape.
B. Conductor sizes are to be metric and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-
sectional area smaller than specified will not be accepted.
C. Building wiring insulation is to be color coded or otherwise identified as required by the

Regulations and as follows:
1. Neutral is to be black.
2. Protective earth is to be green/yellow striped.
3. Phase colors are to be consistent throughout the installation; use Red, Yellow, and
Blue for the Phases L1, L2, and L3.

D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is
not color-coded are to have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded heat-
shrinkable sleeves.
E. Buried Cables: Cables buried directly in the ground are to be armored type, unless
otherwise indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.
2.3 LV WIRES AND CABLES (REFER TO DWGS FOR TYPE OF CABLES)
A. Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified, single
conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper conductors, compacted,
generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant PVC to IEC 227 (or to BS 6746), suitable for wet locations and for conductor
temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V grade.
B. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed, copper conductors,
compacted, insulated with PVC to IEC 227 (or to BS 6746), flame retardant, moisture and
heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid up,
bedded with suitable filler and sheathed with PVC. Armored cables are to have single layer
of galvanized steel wire armor with PVC over-sheath. Cables are to comply with IEC 502
and IEC 540.
C. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core circular stranded,
annealed copper conductors, compacted, insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and conductor
temperatures of 90 deg. C. and PVC over-sheath. Armored cables are to have taped
bedding, single wire aluminum armor and PVC over-sheath.
D. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single core annealed copper
conductors, compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, laid up
and bedded with suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation and PVC
over-sheathed, color black. Armored cables are to have single layer of galvanized steel
wire applied helically over extruded PVC bedding (which may be an integral part of filling)
and over-sheathed with PVC, color black. PVC over-sheaths are to be type ST2 to
IEC502.
E. Low Smoke and Fume (LSF) Cables: 600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted,
insulated with extruded LSF material in compliance with BS 6724 for armored cables and
BS 7211 for un-armored cables. Materials used in construction of LSF cables are to be
nominally free from halogens (fluorine, chlorine and bromine). When material is tested in
accordance with BS 6425, Part 1 and IEC Publication 754, Part 1, the acidic gas evolved
during combustion is to be less than 0.5%. When tested in accordance with BS 2782,
method 141D or ASTM method S2863, the oxygen index of bedding and sheathing
materials is not to be less than 30. Completed cable is to meet the requirements for tests
under fire conditions when tested in accordance with BS 4066, Part 1 and NMV 1.5 of BS
4066 Part 3. Cores and cross sectional area are to be as shown on the Drawings. Phases
are to be color coded in conformity with the Standards, and overall cable sheath is to be
extruded black LSF material.
F. Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. is to be 300/500 V
grade to BS 6500, three or four core, with tinned finely stranded copper wires, EPR
insulated, twisted and Sheathed With Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene (CSP) Compound
And With Strengthening Cord.
G. High Temperature Cable - Type MICC: 1000 V grade, annealed solid copper conductors,
embedded in densely compacted mineral insulated, and contained in seamless annealed
tubular copper sheath for continuous operation at 250 deg. C, and for short duration at
temperatures up to 1000 deg. C, and waterproof. Cable is to be supplied with standard
fittings, terminations etc. by the manufacturer.

H. High Temperature Cable - Solid or stranded plain annealed copper conductors to BS 6360
(in sizes up to 4 mm2), extruded silicon rubber insulation to BS 6899 (0.6 mm radial
thickness), aluminum/PVC laminate and LSF composite sheath with tinned earth continuity
conductor/drain wire. Cable is to be rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges
up to 5 kV, to operate continuously at 150 deg. C and for short duration at 200 deg. C. It is
to be certified to have passed IEC 331 and IEC 332 flame resistance and fire retardant
tests.
I. High Temperature Cable (125 deg. C) - TYPE SA: Single conductor, rated for maximum
600 V service, suitable for special applications. Silicone rubber insulated with outer
covering of asbestos, glass or other suitable braid material.
2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES
A. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm², 2.5 mm² or
stranded 4 mm² plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/E to IEC 227
(PVC type 5 to BS 6746), rated for 85 deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores are to
be laid up together and filled with non-hygroscopic material, PVC over-sheathed, to form
compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and generally for control of
power and lighting systems. Armored cable is to have extruded PVC bedding which may
be an integral part of the filling, galvanized steel wire armoring, and over-sheath of PVC
type ST2 to IEC 502, color black. Core identification is to be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3
etc. over black insulation.
B. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, are to be generally 300 V
rating, polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter),
twisted together into pairs. Multi-pair core assembly is to be covered with binder tape,
spirally wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain wire and
overall PVC sheath.
C. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, are to be
insulated for same voltage grade.
2.5 CONNECTORS (LV POWER)
A. Connector - Type A-1: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and splices
on conductors 10 mm² and smaller. Connector is to be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to
conductor by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or phenolic
insulating covers.
B. Connector - Type A-2: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and
splices on conductors 16 mm² and larger. Connector is to be cast non-ferrous copper alloy
applied to conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with phenolic
insulating cover.
C. Connector - Type B-1: Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
Connector is to be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes receiving wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires
and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is free
of burrs and is dry and clean.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Building wires and cables are to be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors
and in conduit outdoors, unless otherwise shown the Drawings.
B. Circuits: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring is to be run
inside trunking or conduits, D.C. wiring is to be run in separate conduits from A.C. wiring,
and emergency lighting and power circuits are to be run in separate conduits from normal
circuits.
C. Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards is to be arranged as
shown on the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards are to be balanced.
Ensure that the lighting load and other loads are balanced with a difference of not more
than 10% between the phases.
D. Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in conduit
and trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
E. Bunching of wires in raceways is to be in accordance with raceway filling factors permitted

by the Regulations.
F. Lubricants are to be used for pulling wire or cable if character of pull would otherwise
damage conductors, insulation or jacket. Lubricants are to be approved by the Engineer.
G. Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the
same raceway.
H. Support: Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers are to be supported at
upper end of risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any
stresses on conductors, where required.
I. Wiring at Outlets: Leave a slack of at least 200mm at each outlet.
J. Extra Length: At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through is to
be left slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables terminating in
outlet boxes are to be left with at least 250-mm extra length for terminations.
K. Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, are to be permanently accessible or made
only in boxes or cabinet gutters.
L. Connectors for terminating or making T-taps and splices are to be Type A-1 on conductors
10 mm² or smaller, Type A-2 for conductors 16 mm² and larger, and Type B-1 for branch
circuit and fixture wiring.
M. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.
N. Switch legs for local wall switches are to have distinctive color, selected as complementary
to cable color coding used in the project.
O. Terminations: Conductors of wires and cables up to 16mm² are to be tightly twisted and
where possible doubled back before being clamped with set screws. Where two or more
wires are looped into same terminal these conductors are to be tightly twisted together
before inserting into terminals. In no case is bare conductor to be allowed to project
beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line terminal. Cables sizes 16 mm² and
larger are to terminate in tunnel lugs with setscrew, or by using bolted or sweated
compression connectors.
P. Tagging: Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of
panelboards or distribution cabinets. Tags are to identify cable or circuit number and
conductor size in accordance with the Schedules.

Q. Tagging: Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or
ceiling junction box, each circuit is to be tagged as a guide in making connections.
3.3 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV)
A. Cables generally are to be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped to
steel racks or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts are to be installed in steel
conduits.
B. Fixing: Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces are to be fixed
directly to walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run in
parallel, they are to be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved
special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.
C. Clamps: Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved
galvanized cast steel clamps (or molded plastic clamps for single core cables) are to be
used at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
D. Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables are to be supplied
in lengths sufficient for straight-through un-jointed termination to termination pull.
E. Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, are to be laid in
heavy duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete, in
masonry or in floor finishing.
F. Buried cables liable to mechanical damage are to be drawn through PVC conduit or
asbestos cement pipe. If steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and
protective earth circuits are to be in the same conduit.
G. Exposure to Heat: Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to
corrosive agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables are to be type designed for
particular condition.
H. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.

Insulating cover is to be purpose made and is to provide minimum insulation level equal to
that of conductor insulation.
I. Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables are to be purpose made and suitable
for rigid mounting to equipment enclosure.
J. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material
according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
K. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths
are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or
manholes.
B. Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct specified
materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and bonds as
applicable.
C. Jointing: Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and
through-joints are to be submitted prior to commencing work on site. Samples are to be

constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for test and inspection
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit
or equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations
and Standards.
B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 500 V megger on installations
with nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with nominal voltage
over 500 V up to 1000 V.
C. Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations is to be carried out in

accordance with IEE Regulations 613-5 through 613-8 and 713-04.
D. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 Megohm-km for
PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-
core and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.
E. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
F. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuit.
G. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then
retest to demonstrate compliance.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

SECTION 16124
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. All Kahramaa specifications and regulations for Medium Voltage Cables shall apply.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for
medium-voltage electrical distribution systems above 1000V rating.
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable and termination
supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable markers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities,

de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
B. Samples of each cable and, if requested by the Engineer, other accessories.
to, the following:
1. Exact routing layouts, showing coordination between various trades.

2. Details of supports and fixings for trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchgear, etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, Standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements
of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables and accessories certifying that the
products furnished comply with requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES January 2019 16124-1

H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
I. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of cables and accessories with requirements
based on comprehensive testing of current products.
J. Maintenance Data: For cables and accessories to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1. Include periodic tests of cables in service.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice,
and terminate medium-voltage cable.
B. Standards:
1.0 Cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved Standards, and are to
bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured.
Cables not having this identification will be rejected.
2.0 Kahramaa Specification EP-MS-03-030 latest version during Construction Stage.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by the Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying
capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
A. Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels complying with applicable Standard.
B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a dry location. Protect from weather, fumes,
water, debris, etc.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer at least 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Kahramaa Approved Manufacturers.
2.2 11 kV MV CABLE

A. Three Core MV Cable (17.5 kV maximum between phases), XLPE insulated, for use on
systems with voltages between 12 kV and 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and have the
following characteristics:
1. Conductor: Copper, circular, stranded and compacted.

2. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
3. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 thick.
4. Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting
material, readily strippable.
5. Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap.
6. Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact circular
bedding.
7. Armor: Single layer of round galvanized steel wire.
8. Outer Sheath: Extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 502.
9. Embossing: "Electric cable 11000 V".
10. Short-circuit: 21.7 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 185 mm2 cables, and 40 kA
(minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
11. Cables are to be waterblock type if installed in high water tables (in ducts or directly
buried).
12. Comply with Kahramaa specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways to receive medium-voltage cables for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cables. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for feeder and sub-feeder cable
installation requirements applicable to this Section.
B. Install cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where

necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that
will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to
cable.
E. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
G. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped 75-mm bed of clean sand at bottom of
trench. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping from those items by a minimum of
100 mm of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in
direction, and buried splices.
H. Install "buried cable" warning tape 305 mm above cables.
I. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around
walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to
prevent sag.

J. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping
material according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
K. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths
are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or
manholes.
B. Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct specified
materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and bonds as
applicable.
C. Jointing: Qualifications of operatives are to be submitted to Engineer prior to work

commencing on site. Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to
cable manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and
through-joints are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing work on site.
Samples are to be constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for
test and inspection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit
or equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations
and Standards.
B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 1000 V megger on installations
with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V megger on MV installations (up
to 13.8 kV) for initial checks. Equipment shall be certified and calibrated.
C. Testing: On installation of medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C. output voltage and ampere range
sufficient to test MV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct bank),
jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment and clear of
ground.
2. MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and the
screen in steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the A.C. rms
rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum test voltage.
At each step, and for the last 5-15 minutes duration at maximum test voltage, the
ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to be monitored closely and recorded. If,

except as voltage is increased, the current starts to increase, test is to be stopped and
the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
3. MV Cable Testing: Each cable/core is to be tested independently. Maximum D.C. test
voltage for grounded neutral system is to be 2 times rated A.C. rms voltage of cable.
4. MV Cable Testing: Alternative test is to apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times A.C. rms
rating of cable (26 kV for 17.5 kV cable), applied for 5 minutes and until equipment
reading is stable, by an approved A.C. test set. Readings are to be within same range
and in accordance with IEC 502.
A. Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer, to prevent entrance of moisture into the cables and to ensure medium-voltage
cables are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

SECTION 16130
PART 1- GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes boxes and raceways including conduits, wireways, and related
installations and accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders,
branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box
supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, manufacturers'
catalogues with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking, boxes, etc. and
related accessories
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. with indication of boxes, accessories and
expansion joints, size and type of conduits and boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, trays etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure,
connection of flexible conduits, vapour-tight installations in cold rooms, weatherproof
installations outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
C. Samples of each type of raceway, box, and accessory.
A. Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wireways, cable trays and fittings are to be designed,
constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical protection for
wires and cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products are to be as
specified.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements
to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES January 2019 16130-1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 RIGID HEAVY GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT
A. Material: Heavy gauge drawn and welded steel, threaded at both ends, to CEE 23, BS 4568
Part 1 and BS 31 Class B (threaded), with class 4 protection for rigid steel conduit, zinc
coated inside and outside by hot-dip process or sherardizing.
B. Fittings Generally: Threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron.
Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated. Fittings and components
are to comply with CEE 23, BS 4568 Part 2 and BS 31.
C. Locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure are to be heavy hexagonal or castellated
pattern, for fastening.
D. Bushings for terminating conduits are to be smooth rounded brass rings.
E. Miscellaneous fittings including reducers, chase nipples, three piece unions, split couplings
and plugs are to be standard fittings designed and manufactured for the particular
application.
2.3 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT (ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING-EMT)
NOT ACCEPTABLE.
2.4 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
A. Material: Steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type, formed from continuous length
of helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with fused zinc coating on inside and outside,
and to BS 731.
B. Liquid-tight flexible conduit is to have PVC jacket extruded over core.
C. Fittings Generally: Threadless, hinged clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
D. Straight Connectors: One piece body, female end, having hinged clamp and deep slotted
machine screws for securing to conduit, male end having thread and locknut.
E. Angle connectors of 45 or 90 degree and terminal connectors are to be as specified for

straight connectors, except that body is to be two-piece with removable upper section.
2.5 RIGID HEAVY GAUGE PVC CONDUIT
A. Material: Rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride with high impact and high temperature
resistance, flame retardant, non-hygroscopic and non-porous, to CEE 26, BS 4607 and BS
6099, DIN 49016 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC 423, 614-1 and
614-2-2.
B. Fittings Generally: Unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy moulded plastic.

Expansion couplings are to be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner water-
tight neoprene rings.

C. Assembly: Conduits, boxes and accessories are to be assembled by cementing, using

manufacturer's recommended products and appropriate connectors or spouts. Where no
spouts are available use smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
2.6 FLEXIBLE PVC CONDUIT
A. Material: Flame retardant, heat resistant, non-hygroscopic PVC, high resistance to impact,
ribbed on circumference for flexibility.
2.7 STEEL CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
A. Sleeves Through Outside Walls: Cast iron, with end and intermediate integral flanges, and
internal diameter larger than diameter of through-conduit. Length is to correspond to wall
thickness. Space between sleeve and conduit is to be packed with oakum to within 50 mm
of both faces of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or lead, held in
place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of sleeve.
Alternatively, sleeves or other equal and approved, with cable or conduit bolted pressure
sealing.
B. Supports and Hangers: Galvanized malleable cast iron straps or structural steel sections
with hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.
C. Expansion Joint for Embedded Steel Conduits - Type A: Watertight, flexible conduit with end
fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length is to allow movement within range of joint and is not
to be less than 20 times diameter of conduit. Conduit is to be covered with thick rubber
tubing with 5 mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumper with earth clamp is to
electrically connect both sides of joint.
D. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type B: Sleeve with fittings to permit
telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable conduit is to be fitted with watertight
bushing. Joint is to be weatherproof, of galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding jumper
with earth clamp is to electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting is or other
equal and approved.
E. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type C: PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit
terminating in pull boxes and securely fixed on each side of structural expansion joint.
Bonding jumper is to electrically connect both sides of joint.
F. Tags: 50 mm diameter steel with indented lettering, rust inhibiting treatment and baked
enamel finish.
2.8 WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Components are to include wireway base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall
flanges, panel to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary
hangers, supports and accessories.
B. Steel Trunking: To BS 4678 Part 1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick,
protected internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium
with top coat of enamel.
C. PVC Trunking: high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC with grooved double
locking action of the clip-on cover. Design is to be approved by Engineer before ordering
materials. Trunking is to be capable of receiving functional slot-in hangers and demountable
separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.
D. Sizes: As required to accommodate number of conductors permitted by the Regulations

and/or as shown on the Drawings.

2.9 WEATHERPROOF WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Type: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking and cover, similar to Simplex, Power Center
type or other equal and approved.
B. Construction: Trunking is to have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal
sleeve coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.
C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets are to be fitted throughout, between any two
attached surfaces.
D. Screws: Removable flanged covers are to be secured with galvanized steel holding screws.
2.10 SKIRTING TRUNKING
A. Type: Comprising wireway base, snap-on cover, couplings, end plates, wall flanges, elbows,
tees, adapters, if required, and necessary clamps, hangers, supports and accessories.
Wires and cables are to laid from front and held in place by clamps.
B. Steel Skirting Trunking: Sheet steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, protected internally and
externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium with top coat of enamel.
C. UPVC Skirting Trunking: High impact resistant, flame retardant UPVC (unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride) to BS 476 Part 5 and Part 6.
D. Partitions: Trunking is to be partitioned continuously into compartments for separate circuits.

Size of each compartment is to be determined by size and number of conductors housed, in
accordance with the Regulations and/or as shown on the Drawings.
E. Dimensions: As shown on the Drawings and as required to accommodate specified wiring

devices.
2.11 OUTLET BOXES, GENERAL
A. Surface or recessed boxes are to be suitable for type of related conduit or cable system.
Shapes and sizes of boxes are to be of compatible standards as switches and socket outlets
specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices", and lighting fixtures selected and of
various types and mounting methods required.
B. Unused openings in outlet boxes are to be closed with knock-out closers manufactured for
the purpose.
C. Floor outlets and plates are to be water-tight and impact resistant. Floor boxes provided
inside the apartments shall be to the approval of the Interior Designer, similar to Legrand
"650 300" or other approved equal and shall include frames, covers and supporting
accessories.
2.12 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES
A. Recessed and Concealed Boxes: Galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy field
installation. Special boxes are to be punched as required on Site.
B. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs.
C. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and PVC
gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-ferrous, corrosion resistant
screws.

D. Floor Boxes - Type A: Watertight, cast iron or cast metal alloy with corrosion resistant finish,
adjustable mounting, standard duty, round or square, factory drilled and tapped for required
conduit sizes, and with brass cover and flange with brushed finish free from markings other
than required for mounting screws.
E. Floor Boxes - Type B: Non-standard size, flush floor mounted, cast metal alloy, with
watertight neoprene gasketed and hinged cover, and with drilled and tapped conduit entries
and adjustable mounting. Metal barriers are to separate services for power and low current.
F. Flame-Proof Boxes: Malleable iron or cast iron, with gas threaded hubs, special covers with
silicon rubber gaskets, gas tight, and water-tight. Boxes are to comply with the Regulations
for explosive areas.
2.13 MOULDED PLASTIC OUTLET BOXES
A. Type: Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems are to be heavy gauge pressure
moulded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing, with softening point not less than
85 deg. C. Boxes are to have provision for securely terminating conduits and are to be
manufacturer's standard for required application.
B. Fittings: Boxes are to have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting
devices or accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide
additional support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets are to be
provided for weatherproof installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONDUIT, WIREWAYS, AND BOXES, GENERAL
A. Use: Unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications,
signal and low current systems wiring are to be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to the
various electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Separate conduits and wireway installations are to be used for medium voltage cables, low
voltage feeders and sub-feeders, normal light and power circuits, emergency light and
power circuits and communication, signal and other low current systems wiring. Cables of
different voltages are not to be mixed within the same conduit or wireway as per the
regulations.
C. Boxes: Junction, pull, and splice boxes of ample capacity are to be provided as indicated or
required. Boxes are to remain permanently accessible.
D. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
E. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishings, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishings to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
F. Boxes Mounting Heights and Location: As specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring
Devices".

G. Tools and accessories for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems are to be
purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
H. Fixing: Conduits and wireway installations are to be concealed as much as possible.
I. Sizes of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, are to be selected in
accordance with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of conductors and
the space factor as recommended by the regulations. Minimum size of conduit for all
applications is to be 20 mm diameter, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
J. Mechanical Continuity: Conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined together and
connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm mechanical assembly.
Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where required to ensure effective
electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate protective earth conductor is required
or not.
K. Metal conduits and enclosures are to be mechanically fastened, and to be connected to

electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to form low electrical resistance continuity and firm
mechanical assembly.
L. Dissimilar Metals: Use of dissimilar metals is to be avoided throughout the system to

eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, treat surfaces
with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.
M. Miscellaneous fittings such as reduces, chase nipples, 3 – piece unions, split couplings and
plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application
are to be installed as necessary.
N. Conduits are to be tested with a mandrel. Conduits that reject a mandrel are to be replaced.
Restore conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.
3.3 CONDUITS AND WIREWAYS APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conduits and wireways installations are to be as described below, unless otherwise shown
on the drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
B. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit is to be used for all exposed installations comprising
lighting, power, low current, communication and signal system wiring, including mechanical
equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and service areas. Use rigid steel conduit in
areas classified as hazardous explosive area. Flexible conduit is not acceptable.
C. Light gauge steel conduit (EMT) is to be used for exposed installations over false ceilings
when the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.
D. Light gauge steel conduit (EMT) is to be used for exposed and above false ceiling wiring
installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route lighting.
E. Conduit termination in sheet metal enclosures is to be fastened by lockouts, and terminate

with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
F. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used for lighting and power circuits, low current,
communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in concrete, masonry or
underfloor, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or described in the particular
section of the Specification.
G. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used above false ceilings for lighting and power
circuits, low current, communication and signal system wiring, when the false ceiling is not
used as return plenum – and in furred walls. Use flexible PVC conduits from outlet boxes to
fixtures in conjunction with the use of PVC conduits.

H. Flexible conduit of same material as corresponding conduit system is to be used for

connection to motors, vibrating and non-rigidly fixed equipment and to fixtures installed in
false ceilings.
I. Flexible steel conduit is to be used in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to fixture
over false ceilings when used as a return plenum. Conduits are to be liquid tight in damp
areas.
J. Liquid-tight flexible steel galvanized conduit is to be used in one or more of the following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmospheres where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
K. Exposure to Damage: Conduit considered to be subject to undue risk of damage by shock or

corrosion is to be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Copper silicone alloy tubes may
be used in corrosive atmospheres.
L. Crossing: Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts, vents or openings.
M. Clearances: Install conduits at least, 150 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of other
non- electrical services. (Hot water pipes, etc.). Wherever possible, install horizontal conduit
and wireways runs above water and steam piping.
N. Sleeves: Obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforces
concrete. Additional opening may be allowed in finished slabs, but are to be drilled. Fix
sleeves rigidly to maintain position and alignment during construction work.
O. Waterproof Construction: Conduits are not to cross waterproof construction unless permitted
by Engineer. Specially designed and approved fittings are to be used.
P. Expansion Fittings: Provide in each conduit and wireways run every 30 meters, or wherever
structural expansion joints are crossed.
Q. Make good all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement or
similar fire-resisting material to full thickness.
R. Bends: Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting are not
to contain more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).
S. Bending is to be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending are to be approved.
T. Cut ends are to be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.
U. Conduits entering cold stores are to be made vapour tight, so that vapour from outside
cannot enter conduit.
V. Draining: Arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at lowest
point.
W. Before wiring, conduits are to be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section of
system until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position, and the raceway installation is
completed.
X. Capping: Conduits are to be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.

Y. Conduit and fittings installed outdoors are to be watertight and highly resistant to corrosion.
Use appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with screw on covers and the
like.
Z. Terminations: Do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.
AA. Length and radius of flexible conduit used for motors and vibrating equipment are to permit
bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.
BB. Flexible conduit for slide rail mounted motor is to have sufficient slack to allow for movement
of motor over entire slide rail length.
CC. Pulling Wire: Install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with
wooden blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and signal).
DD. Standard elbows are to be used for conduit sizes over 40 mm. For smaller sizes, field
bends may be used provided no damage occurs to conduit.
EE. Tags: Fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of conduit
and circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the system.
FF. Non – ferrous conduit is to be installed for circuits operating above 60 Hz.
3.4 STEEL CONDUITS
A. Termination: Conduit entering sheet metal enclosure or outlet boxes, when not terminated in
a threaded hub, is to be securely held in place by two lock-nuts, placed inside and outside
enclosure, and terminated with an insulating bushing.
B. Running Threads: Do not use running threads at joints and terminations, but use 3-piece
unions or split couplings.
C. Additional threaded cuts on galvanized steel conduits are to be painted with zinc based
coating resistant to corrosion.
D. Damage to protective coating of conduits is to be repaired to original degree of protection.
E. Outdoor Mounted Steel Conduit: Apply anti-corrosion coating of zinc-chromate based paint
and two weather resistant finish coats of enamel, of approved colour, or other equal and
approved coating.
F. Galvanized conduit run in screed is to be painted with heavy coat of emulsified bitumen.
G. Galvanized steel conduits buried in ground or placed in wet or damp locations are to be
coated with two heavy coats of hot bitumen. Conduits are to be covered by at least 600 mm
of earth if buried in planting soil and by 300 mm if under walkway.
H. Plugs: Use hardwood or threaded iron plugs for blanking ends of steel conduit not used.
3.5 PVC CONDUITS
A. Coupling of conduit and/or termination into spouted fittings are to be made watertight and
permanent using special cement.
B. Termination: Connect conduits terminating in switchgear, fuseboards, trunking, adaptable

boxes or other non-spouted enclosures etc. with smooth bore male PVC bushes and
sockets.

C. Ends of conduit and conduit fittings are to be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement
D. Semi-Permanent Adhesive: Use in joints requiring expansion couplers.
E. Bends: Conduits not exceeding 25 mm diameter may be cold bent using bending springs.
Conduits over 25 mm are to be hot bent by an approved method.
3.6 EMBEDDED CONDUITS
A. Conduits in Concrete Slabs: Place conduits parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing
steel, between bottom reinforcing and top reinforcing steel. Fasten conduits to reinforcing
steel by positive wire, fasteners at the proper distance from the concrete face. Embedded
conduit diameter is not to exceed 1/3 of slab thickness. Special cases shall be referred to
Engineer.
B. Conduits In Partitions or Side Walls: Horizontal or cross runs are to be avoided.
C. Pull-boxes are not to be used. If unavoidable, pull-boxes may be approved if located

inconspicuously.
D. Conduits in floor of beds on grade: Encase in concrete, minimum thickness 50 mm or to

thickness allowed by architectural detail.
E. PVC conduits in reinforced concrete structures are generally to be installed after placing
reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or are to be placed in
grooves formed in the concrete, if approved.
3.7 EXPOSED CONDUITS
A. Conduits on walls are to be run neatly, horizontally or vertically.
B. Supports: Use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to expansion
sleeves in inserts or to lead anchors.
C. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting steel conduits is not to be greater than:
Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm metres 20 (3/4)
1. 3.00 (10)
2. 25 (1) 3.60 (12)
3. 32-38 (1-1/4 - 1-1/2) 4.25 (14)
4. 50-63 (2 - 2-1/2) 5.00 (16)
5. 75 (3) and larger 6.00 (20)
D. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting PVC conduits is not to be greater than:
Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm metres
Conductors Rated Conductors Rated

60 deg.C and below more than 60 deg.C
1. 20 (3/4) 1.25 (4) 0.60 (2)

2. 25-50 (1 - 2) 1.50 (5) 0.75 (2-1/2)
3. 63-75 (2-1/2 - 3) 1.80 (6) 0.90 (3)
4. 90-125 (3-1/2 - 5) 2.00 (7) 1.00 (3-1/2)
5. 150 (6) 2.50 (8) 1.25 (4)

E. Bends and Fittings: Firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of each
outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
F. Outlets: Do not run more than the permissible numbers of conduits to any surface wall
outlet.
G. Exposed conduit work is to be installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation ducts or outlets.
3.8 CABLE TRUNKING
A. Installation: Secure trunking of all sizes at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. Joints are not
to overhang a fixing by more than 500 mm.
B. Trunking passing through walls and ceilings is to have the cover fixed solidly for 25 mm
either side of walls and for 150 mm either side of floors and ceilings.
C. Vertical sections of trunking over 900 mm long are to have staggered insulated tie-off studs
to support weight of cables.
D. Cabling Provisions: Separation of power, low current and control circuits is to be by two
channel trunking or by barriers inserted in trunking before installation of cables. Cable
retaining straps are to be provided at not more than 600 mm centers. Openings in front of
trunking are to facilitate drawing-in cables.
E. Coupling: Trunking parts are to be mechanically and electrically coupled without causing
abrasion to wiring.
F. Earthing: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Provide protective
conductor in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.
3.9 UNDERGROUND DUCTS
A. Lay and assemble ducts in accordance with Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and
Utility Structures".
3.10 PROTECTION

and Installer that ensure coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.11 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.

CABLE TRAYS
SECTION 16139
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cable trays, cable ladders and related installations and accessories
necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch circuit wiring and
wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable tray / ladder
supports not specified in this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of cable trays / ladders and related

accessories.
2. Samples of each type of tray / ladder and accessory.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray / ladder, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, fittings and earthing
connections.
C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Include scaled
cable tray / ladder layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural
and mechanical elements.
D. Design Calculations: Verify loading capacities for supports, and Cable Tray Sizes.
E. Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with related BS Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray / ladder with other installations.
CABLE TRAYS January 2019 16139-1

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions
and as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS (HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED)
A. Components: To include cable trays or ladders (as shown on the Drawings), bends,
elbows, tees, couplings and plates, rubber grommets, hangers, bracket supports and other
system accessories required for safety and protection of the cable installations.
B. Trays: Provide to carry the maximum load of cables with a factor of safety 300%.
C. Trays: Heavy gauge perforated sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, minimum
1.5 mm thick, with sides not less than 45 mm deep, and as shown on drawings. Fittings
are to be same material as tray.
D. Ladders: to be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, fabricated from 2mm mild carbon
steel. Ladder side channels are to be minimum 127 x 32 mm, strengthened by reinforcing
inserts for torsional rigidity. Rungs are to be slotted to take cable cleats or ties and conduit
clamps. Rungs are to be minimum 50 x 25 mm channels, spaced at 300 mm centers.
E. Galvanizing to be in accordance with BS 729 (335 g/m²), applied after fabrication.
F. Bolts and Screws: Cadmium plated or electrolytically galvanized.
G. Coating applied to cable tray or cable ladder is to be applied after priming coat.
H. Sizes: Trays and ladders are to be standard metric sizes, 300, 450, 600, 750 & 900 mm
wide, and at least 2.4 m length of section. Size of tray or ladder is to be determined by
number and sizes of cables in accordance with the Regulations and / or as shown on the
Drawings. Tray or ladder is to have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables
contained within. Deflection between supports is not to exceed 1/350 under full loading
capacity.
I. Earthing connector for plastic coated trays or ladders is to be provided on each coupling
between adjacent sections.
J. Cable Tray Cover : Provide cable tray cover for all installation at exposed areas.
K. Cable Trays / Ladder serving Life Safety equipment shall be fire rated for at least 2 hours or
as shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray / ladder level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Each run is to be completed before installation of cables.
C. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / ladders. Fix trays / ladders using
approved suspension rods or steel angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and
generally as shown on the Drawings.

D. All bends and tee shall be from manufacturer.No site fabrication is allowed.
E. Cables: Secure to tray / ladder with purpose made straps or saddles and arrange in one
layer only, evenly spaced, or as shown on the Drawings, with minimum spacing of one
diameter of the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core
cable circuit.
F. Fasten cable tray / ladder supports securely to building structure as specified in Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," unless otherwise indicated.
G. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / ladder and to
equipment. Support cable tray / ladder independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of
cable tray / ladder on equipment enclosure.
H. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / ladder crosses a building expansion joint
and in cable tray / ladder runs that exceed 27 m. Make changes in direction and elevation
using standard fittings.
I. Make cable tray / ladder connections using standard fittings.
J. Locate cable tray / ladder above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray / ladder is
required or unless otherwise indicated.
K. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
L. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through fire stopping-
sealed cable tray / ladder penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
M. Workspace: Install cable trays / ladders with sufficient space to permit access for installing
cables. Minimum clearance of 250 mm is to be maintained between top of tray / ladder and
ceiling, beams and other services and between tray / ladders in multi-tier formation.
N. Barriers: Where tray / ladders carry conductors of different systems, such as power,
communications and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600V, 5000V,
and 20, 000 V use separate cable tray / ladders. In case of absolute necessity, install
insulating barriers to separate the systems after obtaining the Engineer’s approval.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays / ladders according to manufacturer's instructions.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values.
A. Grounding: Test cable trays / ladders to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and
grounding connections.
B. Grounding: Do not use metal trays / ladders as earth continuity conductor. Connect trays /
ladders by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and at
maximum 30-m spacing.
C. Replace malfunctioning units.
3.4 CLEANING

A. On completion of cable tray / ladder installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
3.5 PROTECTION

and Installer that ensure cable tray / ladder is without damage or deterioration at the time of
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray /
ladder manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended
by cable tray / ladder manufacturer.

WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16140
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets,
automatic and manual lighting control equipment, dimmers, outlet boxes and plates, etc.
B. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.
C. Related Sections include the following:

2. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each item.
to, the following:
1. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout drawings,
with box and equipment types and sizes.
2. Installation details of special devices including fans etc.
3. Wiring diagrams of special items.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of device for approval, unless otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
A. Comply with related Standards.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish 2% (with minimum of one each) extra materials for all products that match those
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
WIRING DEVICES January 2019 16140-1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLATES, GENERALLY
A. Blank Plates: Blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes, specified under Division 16
Section "Raceways and Boxes", on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus
installed does not have suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be
attached by a bridge with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.
B. Floor outlets and plates are to be watertight and impact resistant.
2.2 PLATES AND CORD-OUTLETS
A. Design: Square, rectangular or round designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit
electrical device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws.
Combination plates are to be used for grouped outlets and devices.
B. Cord extension plates are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and finish
as plates.
C. Plastic Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color, for
general use in service areas.
D. Cable/cord outlet (electric outlet) is to be used for up to 20 A, 250 V rating for connection of
power/control cable of fixed appliances. Plate is to have threaded cord grip to anchor cable
securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable clamp for termination of
cable/cord within.
E. Lighting outlet is to consist of outlet box, cover plate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to lighting fixture.
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Generally: Quick-make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting molded
base, with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive loads up to
full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
B. Types: Single, two-way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the
Drawings.
C. General Lighting Switch: 20A, 250 V ac rocker operated, grid-switch with plastic plate.
D. Push Button Switch: similar to with push button control (push to make, push to break) and
indicator for remote control of lighting contactors and relays.
E. Remote Lighting Control Panel for Contactor Control: Multiple two ways momentary on/off
push button switch assembly, with an 'on' pilot light for each circuit controlled (remote
contactor). Panel and box are to be sheet steel construction, with see-through steel-framed
acrylic door and trim, handle and lock. Enclosure protection IP 42 to IEC 144 for indoor
installation and IP 55 for outdoor installation.
F. Weatherproof Switch (S15): 10 A, 250 V, for installation outdoors, with weatherproof plate,
synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 55 enclosure.
G. Electric Outlet for Water Heater, Cooker, Dishwasher, etc..: Double Pole Switch (S20):
Rated as shown on the drawings, 250 V ac with molded plastic plate, marked (etched) with
equipment controlled (e.g. water heater, cooker, dishwasher, etc…) and with red neon pilot
light for "on" position. Switch is to be provided with cord outlet and cord extension to
equipment controlled.

H. Fused connectors units with 20ADP switch and unswitched with or without flex outlet as
shown on drawings.
2.4 SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Types: BS compliance, General-purpose socket outlets shall conform to BS standard.
B. Duplex sockets are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break-off
feature for two-circuit connection.
C. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in surface
mounted polycarbonate box and with cover comprising spring-retained gasket hinged flap.
Enclosure is to comprise a pre-designed box and cover for type of socket outlet specified.
D. Standard British Socket - Single phase, three-wire, to accept three pin plugs (2P +E) and
rated 13A, 250 V ac, for ring main circuit.
E. Standard British Socket: Single phase, three-wire, (2P +E) and rated 16A, 250 V for use
with sockets of high power appliance.
Selection of Finishes
All indoor areas common services and for technical use of dry nature devices coverplate of
switches and socket outlets shall be function unit of high impact with PVC having a smooth
finish full complying with BS and European standards.
All indoor devices in plant rooms, car parks and non-air conditioned areas shall be of
polycarbonate housing and ingress protected at least IP 54.
Outdoor area devices, socket outlets and isolation shall be metal clad die-cast aluminum
enclosure or glass-fibre reinforced polyester at least IP 65.
All other area finishes shall be determined on case by case basis, to the approval of the Design
Engineer.
2.5 PLUGS
A. Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant
molded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip and
of shape providing easy hand-grip for removal.
B. Quantity: Supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket outlet
supplied.
2.6 SPECIAL DEVICES
A. Lighting Contactors
1. Type: Double pole for single phase and neutral circuits, and triple pole for three phase
circuits, mechanically held, electrically operated, rated 500 V, of current ratings shown
on the Drawings, and complying with IEC-158-1 category AC 3.
2. Contacts: Copper alloy, with silver cadmium alloy double break contacts designed for
switching inductive ballast loads and switching of tungsten lamp loads.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: As required to provide specified interlocks and signals as shown on

the Drawings, or required by the Specification, with one N.O. and one N.C. spare
contacts.

4. Enclosure: Unless forming part of system housed in sheet steel panel, contactor is to be
provided with IP 42 enclosure for indoor use or IP 65 enclosure for outdoor use.
5. Control: Each contactor whether part of a system or separately enclosed is to have

on/off pilot lights and set of on/off push buttons mounted on cover.
6. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
B. Photoelectric Cells
1. Photoelectric Cells: Omnidirectional cadmium sulfide, hermetically sealed, with 2:1

on/off adjustment possible by moving light level selector, set to operate at illuminance
levels shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Unit is to include timer giving 3-
minute delay to prevent false switching. Temperature range is to be -10 deg. C to +80
deg. C.
2. Safety: Control is to be designed such that in case of failure, unit fails in the on position.
3. Contacts are to close or open as illumination level increases to set level with respect to
requirements shown on the Drawings.
4. Enclosure: Heavy duty cast metal, with translucent dome of 'Lexan' (by G.E.) or other
equal and approved, to protect against high ultra violet rays, and 180 deg. swivel base
and 16 mm threaded conduit mounting. Enclosure is to be weatherproof and protected
against high winds and storms.
C. Door Entrance Systems
1. Door Bell Push Button: Momentary contact, low voltage, with illuminated label holder
under glassine, flush box and stainless steel plate, and electronic microphone for two-
way communication.
2. Chime: Electronic, with built-in double-wound transformer, 8V - 12V secondary protected

by fuses; primary voltage to correspond with building power supply voltage at location.
Chime is to be two-tone, double insulated, 80 dB at 1-m distance, adjustable output. It
is to be possible to operate chime by 9 V alkaline batteries.
3. Wiring: Minimum 1 mm2, PVC insulated copper conductor, run in separate conduit from
all other services. Multi-core cable to each apartment is to be supplied as required by
system.
4. Door bells and chimes installed at the Apartments are subject to the approval of the
Interior Decorator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition that
would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer. Locate
switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In locating outlets
allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finishing, window
trim, paneling and other engineering features.
B. Mounting heights for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the same
or similar areas. Mounting is to be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer.
Unless otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket outlets generally

at 1250 mm and 450 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount switches with long
dimension vertical and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up when in the on position.
C. Additional outlets to those shown on the Drawings are to be provided as required by

equipment manufacturers for control or other wiring.
D. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, allowing
for thickness of finishing, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishing to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
E. Appearance: Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall
surface. Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without
gaps, and fully covering the box.
F. Grouped Outlets: Arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.
G. Waterproof and Explosion-Proof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation

and connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
H. Damaged Fittings: Reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings
and plates against damage after installation and until handed over.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated,
identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use
machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and
durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Single pole switches are to switch the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through switches
having neutral shunt or bridge.
B. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts
or lead anchors.
C. Connection Of Appliances:
1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring to
incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install the connecting wiring in
flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on appliance.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-

tightening values.
A. Visual Inspection: Fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. Megger tests are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation
resistance of wiring installations.

C. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
D. Equipment is to be insulation tested and observed, under full-load for not less than 3 days
operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or
improperly painted wall plates or devices.

GENERATOR
SECTION 16231
PART 1- GENERAL
B. Generator should comply with NFPA 110, 2013 Edition and Local QCDD regulations and
approval.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes standby/emergency power plant installation comprising the following:
- Engine/Generator(s)
- Control panels(s) and interconnecting cables
- Main fuel oil tank and fuel oil day tank.
- Fuel oil piping and transfer pump system.
- Exhaust system piping and silencer
- Insulation of exhaust piping system
- Batteries and chargers
- Ducting between radiator and exhaust outlet.
- Cooling water piping between remote radiator and engine.
- Air inlet and discharge sound attenuators and louvers
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not limited
to the following:
1. General description and characteristics of engine- generating sets, standards with which
components comply, site rating and overload capability, overall efficiency, and fuel and
lubricant consumption at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of rated load.
2. Description and operating criteria of engine; type, model, manufacturer, fuel and
lubricating oil types and specific consumption, starting conditions and starting periods
from cold to full-load pick-up, governor and response characteristics due to sudden load
changes, super-charger, fuel injection system, cooling system and radiator, air filters,
fuel filters, oil filters and pumps.
3. Description and operating criteria of generator, exciter and voltage regulator, with
loading response and short-circuit characteristics, insulation, cooling and accessories.
4. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other
components specified, weights and forces, mounting methods, vibration protection etc.
5. Battery type, make, charge/discharge characteristics, capacity and constructional
features.
6. Battery charger, method of charging, equalizing and trickle charging.
7. Daily fuel tanks, pipes and accessories; materials and construction.
8. Exhaust system and silencers; materials and construction.
9. Control instruments, protection, alarms, cut-outs, indicating lamps, indicating
instruments and all other devices or components.
10. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
11. Synchronization system where specified for two or more sets are in parallel, including
technical data, instruments, governor and voltage regulation, with characteristic curves
etc.
12. Calculated noise levels in dBA at typical points within engine room and at various
locations inside and outside.
GENERATOR January 2019 16231-1

B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Certified manufacturers' dimensional drawings, templates and installation instructions for

equipment and accessories, showing weights and distribution of forces, location and
size of cabling (power and control), piping connections to equipment, and other pertinent
data.
2. Plans and elevations of all equipment.
3. Separate unit wiring diagrams, schematics and interconnecting wiring diagrams.
4. Constructional details of daily service fuel tank, including outline drawings showing
piping arrangements, connections and dimensions.
5. Complete execution drawings of associated auxiliaries.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Routine Tests and Factory Test Reports: Fully assembled plant or equipment is to be tested
at the factory, before shipping. Complete performance tests are to be carried out under site
simulated conditions, in accordance with the Standards and as described in the
Specification, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
E. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection
records relative to compliance with performance requirements.
F. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with specified

requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
G. Sound measurement test report.
H. Field test report of tests specified in Part 3.
I. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended being stored at the Project for ready
access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
2. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions.
J. IT IS A STRICT REQUIREMEMNT THAT ALL COMPONENTS OF THE DIESEL

GENERATOR SET ARE FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND THE DIESEL
GENERATOR SET IS FULLY TYPE TESTED BY A REPUTABLE 3RD PARTY
LABORATORY (i.e. ASTA, KEMA, TUV, UL or equivalent approved by the Engineer).
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with ISO 3046, ISO 8528, IEC
34, IEC 85 and CISPR, or equivalent NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and DIN Standards and
recommendations of ABGSM (Association of British Set Manufacturers) where such
standards meet with or supersede the ISO and IEC Standards.
C. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Type 10, Level 1 emergency power supply system.

D. Noise Control Compliance Certificate: submit technical data including drawings and
calculations as necessary to prove that the Generator Sets Installation meets noise level
requirements. Describe how noise control is to be affected without exceeding the maximum
allowable static pressures at radiator fans and without subjecting the generators to de-rating
or to overheating.
E. Exhaust System Compliance Certificate: submit technical data including drawings and
calculations as necessary to prove that the Generator Sets Installation does not induce
backpressures at the engines that exceed the maximum values sustained by the engines
and as stated by the manufacturer. Describe how Exhaust System backpressure is to be
kept below maximum allowable limits.
A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective
wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent
damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from
such hazards.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer. Include
monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed
and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.
1. Perform maintenance, during normal working hours.

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of
the plant. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together with
current prices. Pack with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing
contents.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection,
testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PLANT DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Class: Diesel generator set standby operation is to be class G3 15% voltage
dip / freq. dip at 100% loading) to IS08528-1.
B. Generator Set Assembly: Compact package type, with all equipment mounted on one rigid
steel bed frame suitable for skidding. Radiator is to be mounted on the set or remotely as
shown on the Drawings. Design is to permit easy operation, maintenance and repair.
C. Vibration reduction is to be achieved by appropriate design and careful balancing at factory.

Compact set is to have approved anti-vibration isolators of steel spring or resilient neoprene
between rotating equipment and bed-frame, limiting transmission of vibration to building to a
maximum of 0.04 mm amplitude throughout the operating vibration frequency range.
D. Noise reduction is to be achieved by silencer, sound attenuators for air inlet and outlets and
sound absorbing wall lining. Achieve an overall Noise Rating of NR 70 (or 75 dBA) at 1 m
outside the room in any direction.
E. Cold Starting: Engine is to be fully equipped to start and pick up initial load specified at
specified minimum ambient temperature. Provide coolant heater.
1. Cold starting aids, such as engine jacket water heater, lubricating oil heater, intake-air
heater, battery and all devices, accessories, connections, thermostatic switches and off-
duty disconnects with pilot lights and necessary protection, are to be supplemented as
recommended by the manufacturer and approved.
F. Equipment ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings or the next higher standard ratings
provided by the manufacturer. Ratings are to be net Prime power with no limited operational
hours (with capability of 10% overload for one hour in every 12 hours to consumer,
excluding fan and any auxiliaries, auxiliary drives and losses, delivered at specified
frequency, voltage and power factor and under worst climatic conditions on site.
2.3 DIESEL GENERATOR SET
A. Components: Set is to basically consist of diesel engine, brushless synchronous generator

with direct flexible coupling to engine and single or parallel control cubicle as required and
shown on the Drawings.
B. Governing is to be to ISO 3046/IV or BS 5514, electronic type governor with limits of speed
control as specified.
C. Starting and Stopping: When in the automatic mode the set is to start and stop automatically
by a signal sensed through an auxiliary contact in the load transfer switchgear. The set is to
stop, after an adjustable cool- down period (2 - 30 minutes).
D. Duty: Plant is to reach full speed within 10 seconds from start impulse and accept
immediately 100 % of net rated output (load being mixed, steady and inductive, with motor
starting loads as shown on the Drawings). Transient voltage variation is not to exceed 15 %
under any step-load application for which the system is intended, up to full rated load,
recovering to within +/-2% within a few cycles.
E. Failure To Start: Should engine fail to start following a start impulse, the system is to come
to rest for a few seconds. Two further starting attempts are to be automatically made with
intermediate 20-second maximum periods of rest. Should the set fail to start after three
attempts, an alarm is to sound and a 'start failure' signal illuminate.
F. Hand operation is to be possible for testing or normal operation through a

test/manual/off/auto selector switch.
G. Regular Exercising: While on 'auto', the set is to start regularly and automatically every week
and is to operate for 30 minutes before stopping.

2.4 DIESEL ENGINE AND AUXILIARIES
A. Design: Diesel engine is to be designed for type of load and application required. Engine
and governor are to be selected to meet operating requirements and response specified.
B. Engine Type: Compression-ignition type, with direct solid-injection, turbo-charged after-

cooled, for ratings over 100 kW, water cooled, with air-cooled radiator inline or V-type
cylinder arrangement suitable for direct coupling to driven machine.
C. Engine Cycle: 4-stroke cycle.
D. Engine Speed: 1500 rpm.
E. Type of Fuel: Number 2 diesel oil.
F. Flywheel is to be suitably sized for type of service and constraints specified, and capable of
being rotated at 125% of rated speed without failure. Torsion vibration dampers are to be
provided.
G. Engine rating is to be such that alternator can deliver net specified rated output as specified
earlier, with temperature rise not exceeding rise allowed by the Standards.
H. Accessibility: It is to be possible to:
1. Remove rocker-box covers without disturbing fuel injection pipes or other components.
2. Remove and replace pistons and piston rods, liners, big and small end shells and caps
without dismounting engine.
3. Bar engine over by hand for spill timing check and adjustment.
I. Measuring Instruments: Engine mounted instruments are to include, at least, water

temperature gauge, lubricating oil temperature gauge and pressure gauge, speedometer
and running time meter. It is to be possible to measure, with extra instrumentation, coolant
temperature at lower end of radiator, air depression after air filter, air boost and temperature
using methods recommended by manufacturer. Instrument accesses are to be normally
sealed by threaded blanking caps.
J. Cooling System: The engine shall be liquid cooled by means of one or more remote
mounted vertical core radiator. The radiator shall be adequately sized to cool the engine on
a continuous basis at the maximum ambient temperature and altitude specified. It shall
have an air flow restriction of not more than 0.5 inches Hg. Suitable expansion space, either
by means of surge tanks or radiator top tank shall be provided.
The Contractor shall consider alternative location for remote radiators by taking it to the roof
of the Parking Building. The Contractor shall execute any of the alternatives at no additional
cost for a complete system including additional pipes, alternative pumps, cables, etc.
The engine shall be equipped with a centrifugal type water circulating pump and thermostat
valve to maintain the engine at recommended temperature level.
The engine cooling system shall include one or more spin-on type engine water filters which
will treat the coolant and prevent corrosion and scale deposits inside the cooling system.
K. Cooling Airflow: Obstructions in path of cooling air flow (openings, louvers, grilles, mesh,
ducts, bends etc.) are not to reduce air flow below that needed at full rated output. Fan and
radiator characteristics are to be selected accordingly. Advise if additional booster fans are
required and provide necessary control gear for automatic operation.
L. Cylinders are to have removable liners. Wet type liners are to have witness hole between
liner sealing rings of each cylinder for early detection of coolant or oil leakage. Each
cylinder is to have drilled and tapped hole and valve for connections of pressure indicator.

M. Lubricating Oil System: Pressurized circulating type, using two engine-driven, gear type
lubricating oil pumps with full flow filters and replaceable elements and lubricating oil heat
exchanger. Filter system is to have spring loaded by-pass valve to permit oil circulation if
filters become clogged. Audible and visual alarms are to cut-in when valve starts opening.
Lubricating oil cooler is to be shell and tube heat exchanger with water from engine radiator
as the cooling medium. Direct acting thermostatic diversion valve is to control oil
temperature. Under normal operation by-pass is not to be fully closed.
N. Fuel system is to have injection pump and injectors that are easily removable and
replaceable for servicing. Engine is to have integral, gear type, engine driven transfer pump
to lift fuel against a head of 2.5 m and supply it through filters to injection pump at constant
pressure. Fuel filter elements are to be easily replaceable.
O. Exhaust system is to be complete with flanged, bolted, stainless steel pipe sections, positive
pressure, double wall, long sweep elbows, flexible expansion sections, clean-outs,
residential silencer, wall thimbles and supporting steelwork. Silencer is to be independently
supported. . Exhaust system is to be designed to reduce back-pressure to below maximum
specified by the manufacturer, in relation to actual exhaust pipe installation shown on the
Drawings. Refer to Division 15 for Specifications of the Exhaust System piping.
P. Electric Starting System: Engine starting is to be manual by push-button or automatic

through control system at control panel. System is to consist of heavy-duty 24 V D.C. starter
motor, heavy-duty batteries and battery charger. Cranking motor and battery are to be rated
for cranking the engine when cold and at lowest temperature recorded. Starting pinion is to
automatically disengage when engine fires. The system shall comply with BS 6290 and BS
6604.
Q. Storage Battery: Lead-acid, sealed-in-plastic type completes with battery rack and inter-cell
connectors. Battery is to have sufficient capacity to provide minimum four cranking periods.
R. Battery Charger: 25% over-rated, solid state, full-wave rectifier type, adequate to fully
recharge depleted battery in not more than 8 hours and to automatically control rate of
charge (providing a high-charge rate to a depleted battery and reducing to a trickle-charge
rate when battery is fully charged). Ammeter is to be provided to indicate charging rate,
which is to be adjustable. Battery charger is to be mounted in control cubicle, unless
otherwise approved.
S. Electronic Governor is to provide isochronous governing, paralleling and load sharing of

generator sets. Governor is to have zero percent (isochronous) setting and adjustable
droop from zero percent to 10% droop. System is to include power supply unit, magnetic
speed pick-up, control module and actuator using fast response D.C. motor drive or equally
approved alternative. Governor is to be designed for fast-response and high precision of
speed (frequency) control, automatic paralleling and load sharing and is to include speed
adjustment to +/-5% of normal, while running, and with remote control interface. Frequency
deviation under 25% sudden load change is not to exceed 0.5 Hz, recovering to stable
speed condition of +/-0.1 Hz in 0.5 seconds.
T. Governor over-speed trip is to automatically close fuel pump racks in event of engine over-
speed. Device is to be separate and independent from governing mechanism.
U. Protective system is to comprise automatic engine shutdown and generator trip with visual
and audible alarms in event of over-speed, low lubricating oil pressure, high cooling water
temperature and over cranking.
2.5 GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR)
A. Type: Synchronous, low reactance, high efficiency, revolving field type, with brushless PMG
exciter and flexible coupling, sized to pick up effective load without exceeding transient and
steady-state voltage deviation limits specified up to its full nominal rating and designed for

the performance stipulated in the Specification. It is to be two-bearing construction with

bearings of the sleeve or sealed ball type.
B. Leads and Cables: Phase leads are to be brought out fully insulated to a terminal cable box
of heavy gauge sheet steel, protection IP 44. Control and protection cables are to be
brought out to a separate terminal box.
C. Maximum voltage difference between the three phases at 100%-balanced load is not to
exceed 1%. With unbalanced load up to 8% on one phase at unity power factor and zero
loads on other phases, the line-to-neutral voltages are not to differ by more than 2%.
D. Characteristics:
Important: The rated power output stated on drawings shall be net after deducting for remote
radiator fans and ancillary equipment.
1. Number of Phases: 3.
2. Rated Voltage, Frequency, and Net Rated Output: As shown on the Drawings.
3. Rated power factor: 0.8.
4. Winding Connection: Re-connectable with ends brought out and fully insulated.
5. Maximum Unbalanced Load Current, (negative sequence component of current) with
none of the Phase Currents Exceeding Rated Current: 8% of the rated current.
6. Overload: 10% nameplate rating for 1 hour every 12 hours.
7. Rotor: Salient pole type, incorporating damping grid.
8. Excitation: Brushless, with rotating armature rectifiers and discharge resistors.
9. Voltage Regulator: Automatic, with readily accessible controls for voltage level.
10. Insulation: Class H for stator and class H for rotor & exciter, with class F temperature
rise, unless other indicated on the drawings.
11. Enclosure: Drip proof and screen protected (IP 21 to IEC 144).
12. Cooling: Built-in centrifugal fans.
13. Maintained Short Circuit: 250% for 2 seconds.
14. Over-speed: 120% (minimum) for 2 minutes.
15. Telephone Harmonic Factor (THF) at no Load: 3% max.
16. Waveform Distortion Factor at no Load: 5% max.
E. Voltage Regulation: Overall voltage deviation within normal speed variations is to be within
limits specified from no-load to full-load, from hot to cold and with load power factor from 0.8
lagging to unity. Regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity of
generator. Voltage build-up is to be positive and rapid even when full load is suddenly
applied. Line-to-line voltage waveform deviation factor is not to exceed +/-5%. Total
harmonic content is not to exceed 5% and that of one harmonic not to exceed 2%. Radio
interference suppression is to be within the limits set by the Standards, grade (N).
F. Exciter: Armature is to be 3-phase, directly mounted to generator shaft and connected to

generator field windings through six solid states, hermetically sealed, silicon rectifiers,
accessible for maintenance or repair. Exciter is to have field suppression system to
eliminate any source of diode failure resulting from high inductive loads and surges. Exciter
field windings are to be stationary. Exciter-regulator combination is to maintain output
voltage within limits specified for any load up to 110% generator rating and under any
sudden load changes specified.
G. Voltage Regulator: Solid state, volts/Hz type, utilizing silicon semi-conductor devices in
control and power stages, with built-in Electro-magnetic interference suppression and
designed for single or parallel operation. Manual adjustment to +/-5% of regulated voltage
level is to be possible by a potentiometer at control panel. All components are to be sealed,
moisture and heat resistant, with a suitable environmentally protected enclosure. Voltage
regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity of generator and is to
sustain a 3-phase short- circuit current at the generator terminals for the period for which the
short-circuit protection operates and at least for 3 seconds. Voltage regulator power is to be
supported by generator voltage and current to maintain excitation field power.

H. Two-position switch is to be provided for selection of manual or automatic mode of regulated

voltage control.
I. Sets Operating In Parallel: Cross-current compensation and necessary paralleling modules

are to be provided to effect sharing of active and reactive loads equally between generators.
2.6 INSTRUMENTATION, PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Generating Set Instruments, Protection and Controls: Control relays, sensing equipment,
switchgear protective relays and devices and start, stop and shutdown controls are to be
provided as necessary for operation specified. Generating set, instruments, protection and
controls are to be mounted preferably in one control cubicle.
B. Instruments and controls for a non-paralleled set are to include at least the following:
1. The genset shall have a digital communication interface for the BMS total integration.
All readings, faults, alarms and the like shall be made available for plug and play BMS
integration.
2. In Addition, the control panel shall have:
3. Voltmeter and 7-position selector switch.
4. Ammeter and 4-position selector switch.
5. Frequency meter.
6. Off/test/manual/auto duty switch.
7. Manual-start and stop push buttons.
8. Kilowatt-hour meter.
9. Power factor meter.
10. Service-hour running counter.
11. Plant exerciser.
12. Potentiometer for voltage level control.
13. Speed raise/lower device.
14. Cool-down time setting controls.
15. Illuminated indicator panel with LEDs at least for low oil pressure, high water
temperature, over-speed, fail-to-start, generator overload, reverse-power, generator on
load, battery low charge state
16. Lamp test push-button.
17. Indicating gauge and low level fuel alarm.
18. Battery charger, on/off switch, pilot lights.
19. D.C. ammeter.
20. Alarm sounder and reset controls.
21. Anti-condensation heater.
C. Protective gear is to ensure orderly engine stop or shutdown with reset relays, as required
for safety and operational reliability, and is to include the following:
1. Output power circuit breaker (PACB) with solid state trip unit, in accordance with
Division 16 Section "Switchboards", (electrically operated and electrically tripped by
shunt release) for over-current and external earth fault protection.
2. Over-voltage protection with voltage and time lag adjustment.
3. Loss-of-field/ under excitation protection.
4. Phase unbalance via negative phase sequence protection.
5. Restricted earth-fault protection, with current adjustable settings between 0 and 20% of
rated current, and time adjustable settings 0 to 3 seconds.
6. Reverse power relay (for sets operating in parallel).
D. Control and Protective Gear Cubicles: Generator set mounted instrument and/or control
cubicles are to be resiliently mounted, preventing transmission of vibration to the
components. Separately mounted instrument and control cubicles are to be self-supporting,
floor mounted and free- standing. Cubicles are to be sheet steel construction, ventilated
indoor type, vermin and dust-proof, (IP 42 to IEC 144), with lockable hinged doors and
instrument panels, separate compartments for control devices, protective relays, circuit

breaker(s) and neutral earthing device. Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures are to
be cleaned, phosphatized, primed with heavy-duty rust inhibiting primer and finished with
two coats of enamel. Wiring is to be 600 V, modularly arranged, with connections made at
front terminal blocks with no live conductors exposed. Wires are to have approved
numbered ferrules at each terminal. Printed circuit plug-in boards, where applicable, are to
be of industry standards, accessible and withdrawable, mounted in standard racks.
E. Relays: Front adjustable, sealed type, with dust-tight enclosures, removable covers, test
terminal blocks and plugs for testing relay without removal from case. Removal from casing
is to automatically short-circuit respective current transformer secondary windings.
F. Instruments are to be housed in enameled metal cases for switchboard flush installation,
with scales and markings protected and sealed. Indicating meters are to be minimum 76
mm square. Accuracy is to be within 2% unless otherwise specified. Voltmeters and
ammeters are to be moving iron type for A.C. measurements and moving coil type for D.C.
measurements.
G. Current Transformers: Class 2 for measuring and protection.
H. Voltage Transformers: Single phase, dry type, 0.5 accuracy class.
I. KWH Meter: 3-element type for unbalanced 3-phase, 4- wire loads, fitted with 6-digit
cyclometer.
2.7 FUEL STORAGE AND TRANSFER
A. Day-tank Construction: Closed cylindrical steel, inclined at least 3 degrees from horizontal
and fitted with drain plug, inlet and outlet pipe connectors and breather pipe.
B. Day-tank breather pipe is to have replaceable paper air filter or breather caps with air filters.
C. Day-tank instruments are to include float switch, solenoid valve and dial-type level indicator
to give alarm on over-fill and low-level.
D. Day-tank Filling Pumps: Electrically operated, automatically started and stopped, duplex
pumps and standby manual pump, installed on piping system between storage tank and one
or more day-tanks for fuel transfer. Motor is to be totally enclosed, fan-cooled, squirrel-cage
induction type, with integrally coupled pump-rotor contained on one base. Pump is to be
self-priming type against the specific head shown on the Drawings. Priming plug, sealed
and protected bearings and combination starter with thermal overload protection and circuit
breaker for short-circuit protection are to be provided. Operation is to be interlocked with
float switches in day-tank. All necessary check valves, bypass valves, float valves and
maintenance valves on piping system are to be provided as shown on the Drawings.
E. FST Connections: Female threaded, black forged steel pipe couplings, fitted through holes
in top of tank and welded all around inside and outside. Connections, except vent
connection, are to extend inside tank to within 150 mm of bottom and are to be seamless
black steel pipes of same size as connection and braced to tank walls. Vent connection is
not to extend inside tank more than 20 mm.
F. Fuel Lines: Heavy gauge, black seamless steel, to ISO/R65 or equal, treated internally with
corrosion resistant paint and with joints sealed with PTEE tape. Plumber's twine or gasket
sealing compound is not to be used. Changes in direction and branching and jointing are to
be with regular pipefitting. Field fabricated and bent fittings are not to be used.
G. Fuel Lines: Fuel feed line to day-tank is to have bypass with stopcock. Size of fuel return
line from day-tank to main fuel tank is to be to manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Valves Generally: 827.4 kPa (steam working pressure rating and 1380 kPa cold water non-
shock pressure rating and type that can be repacked under pressure.

I. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Galvanized steel.
2.8 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM
An air cleaner/silencer shall be supplied as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Air

cleaners shall be oil bath type with replaceable elements.
Engine exhaust outlets shall be coupled to the exhaust silencer(s) by means of an adequately
sized section of stainless steel corrugated flexible tubing. Flexible tubing connector(s) shall be
flanged at both ends for mating to the engine and exhaust system.
A critical grade exhaust silencer(s) shall be provided. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be sized to limit
exhaust back pressure to acceptable values. The exhaust silencer(s) shall be suitable for
horizontal mounting, shall be equipped with flanged bottom inlet and flanged end outlet. The
exhaust silencer(s) shall be double wall construction and shall have a high temperature
uniformly applied anti-corrosion coating on the outside surface.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Manually Operated Overhead Hoist: Chain operated, self aligning, low headroom type,
comprising trolley with gear mechanism combined into a compact unit, designed to run on
lower flanges of I-beam runway. Hoist is to have shock resistant suspension, positive action
Western type local brake; lifetime lubricated sealed bearings and load safety hook. Trolley
is to have four alloy cast iron wheels. Safety factor is to be minimum of 5. Capacity of hoist
is to be as indicated on the Drawings, and is to be tested to 1.5 times rated capacity.
B. Power and Control Cables: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables", and
Section “Control/Signal Transmission Media" of the Specification and as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Earthing Equipment: Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.
2.10 Remote Status Panels
Provide one panel for each generator set, in the Security Officer’s Room and the
Remaining shall be supplied as part of the generator control panel. Provide alarm indicators as
specified herein. When actuated, these alarms shall sound audible
Alarms and indicate, by means of individual lights at annunciator panels, related to
Particular malfunction initiating the alarm. Provide labeling to identify the alarm.
Provide a horn at each panel with silencing (override) switch to silence alarm.
Override switch shall have flashing pilot lamp labeled "Override" to indicate that
Alarm is silenced. Provide power for alarm system from generator battery system.
Alarm annunciators shall indicate the following malfunctions:
Indicators and controls shall be as follows:
Item Lens Cap Color

1. High water temperature Red
2. Low water temperature Red
3. Approach to high water temperature Yellow
4. Approach to low oil pressure Yellow
5. Over speed Red
6. Cranking failure (after 60 seconds) Red
7. Generator in operation Green
8. High and low battery charge Red
9. Battery charger input failure Red

Item Lens Cap Color

10. Transfer switch position lights for each Red & Green
automatic transfer switch. Two (2) lamps
for each switch.
11. Pilot light denoting engine selector switch Red
in "OFF" position
Item Lens Cap Color
12. Start/stop switch (Security Officer’s --
Room)
13. Test switch (Security Officer’s Room) --
14. Main circuit breaker tripped open Red
15. Running pilot lights for each fuel oil pump Red
(Security Officer’s Room)
16. Hand/off/automatic switch for each fuel --
oil pump
17. Low fuel oil (day tank) Red
18. Low fuel oil (main tank) Red
19. Load bank cooling failure Red
2.10.1- Generator Set Performance
The completed generator set shall meet or exceed the following performance
Criteria:
- Voltage regulation shall be ±1 percent rated voltage.
- Steady state voltage stability ±0.5 percent rated voltage.
- Maximum voltage dip with step application of rated continuous engine
Generator rating at 0.8 power factor not to exceed 20 percent.
- Voltage recovery time with step application of rated continuous engine
Generator rating at 0.8 power factor not to exceed 2 seconds.
- Balanced telephone interference factor (TIF) shall not exceed 50.
- Frequency regulation from no load to full load adjustable from
Isochronous to 5 percent.
- Steady state frequency stability shall be ±0.5 percent.
- Maximum recovery time to return to frequency stability, bandwidth shall
Not exceed 4 seconds.
- Generator set shall be capable of start-up and accepting rated load within
10 seconds.
2.10.2- Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints
a. - installation shall be in accordance with approved vibration isolation and

Seismic restraint submittal.
b. - Fuel oil and coolant line shall be flexible braided bronze hoses.
c. - Raceway connections to unit shall be in liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
2.10.3- Guard
a. - The Contractor shall include for the supply, delivery and erection of
Galvanized wire guard over all belt drive, flexible coupling and other
Exposed moving part of the apparatus. Belt guard shall be of substantial
Construction and must be fixed to the approval of the Engineer and to
Comply with the requirements of all relevant authorities.
b. - All guards shall be removable but provision shall be made so that easy access to
The end of motor and shaft is available without removal of the guard.

2.11 Generator Acoustic Treatment
2.11.1. - General
Include all necessary noise and vibration treatments to comply with the stipulated in tender
documents. These treatments shall, include, but not limited to, the following:
For Generator Room
- Intake Silencer (minimum 1500mm long)

- Discharge Silencer (minimum 900mm long)
- Industrial Type Exhaust silencer (critical)
- Floating Floor (minimum 200mm RC + 100mm isolation pad on the
existing 300mm RC slab as minimum requirement).
- Acoustic Ceiling and walls (2 layers of 12mm stagged joints cemboard,
100mm thick of a minimum density of 32 kg/m³ fibreglass and minimum
300mm air gap from ceiling soffit). This shall be provided on ceilings,
floors and walls in communication with public areas, such as offices, car
park accommodation quarters, etc.
Radiator, discharge and inlet silencers shall be splitter type or equivalent.
Exhaust muffler shall be industrial grade reactive chamber type or equivalent.
All power leads and connections shall be flexible braided fuel lines where practical.
2.11.2. - Submittals
The Contractor shall supply the following information on the generator and associated general
acoustic treatments:
- Noise level data of the proposed generators and radiators.

- A schedule of silencer types offered.
- A statement as to the pressure loss imposed by the silencers.
- General arrangement of the generators and acoustic treatment shop
drawings.
- Detailed calculations to show the vibration isolation efficiency of the
proposed vibration mountings.
- Detailed calculations to show the resulting noise level at the checkpoints
and at the areas directly below.
- A test certificate to demonstrate compliance with the specified sound
pressure levels of generator(s).
The Contractor shall supply the following information for the floating floor installation:
- A schedule of pad types and locations.

- The compressive stresses and resultant static deflections under dead load
only and dead plus live load, for each bearing point.
- Test data indicating the natural frequency of the proposed mountings
under the specified loads.
- Detailed information on routine and special requirements with regard to
pad storage, handling and installation, e.g. limitations on adjacent welding work.
- A list of installations of the proposed mountings for the specific purpose
of providing a high sound insulation.
- A list of installations of the proposed mountings within Qatar.
The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement for the installation of floating floor. This shall
include, but not be limited to:
- overall procedure for the installation of the floor

- method of fixing mountings and edge boarding

- program for installation of floor
The Contractor shall be required to submit all necessary information on the generator and
associated generator acoustic treatment.
- Acoustic test certificates to demonstrate compliance with the specified

sound pressure levels for the generator and the specified insertion loss of
silencers.
- A schedule of silencer types offered.
- A statement as to the pressure loss imposed by the silencers.
- Shop drawings of the arrangement of the generators and acoustic
treatments
- Detailed calculations to show the vibration isolation efficiency of the
proposed vibration mountings.
- Detailed calculations to show the resulting noise level at the checkpoints
and at the areas directly above and below.
- A schedule of pad types and locations.
- Test data indicating the natural frequency of the proposed mountings
under the specified loads.
- All other relevant information.
All test certificates shall be prepared by an independent acoustic laboratory.
2.11.3. - Noise Limits
The noise level resulting from simultaneous operation of all generators shall not exceed 88dB(A)
under full load conditions as measured at 3m from the inlet and discharge louvres.
The noise level resulting from the operation of the generators shall not exceed 110dB(A) inside
the generator room as measured at 1.0m away from the generator.
The noise level shall not exceed 90dB(A) under full load condition as measured at 1m from flue
gas exhaust.
Comply with QCS standards.
2.11.4. - Silencers
Supply and install silencers at both the inlet and the discharge sides of the generator and to
obtain, over the full range of system operation and within the space allocated, dynamic insertion
losses sufficient to ensure that the noise limits specified are not exceeded, without detriment to
the system performance.
Evidence of performance of silencers intended for use shall be tested in accordance with
BS4718: 1971 or its equivalent. Acoustic data shall include insertion loss, regenerated noise
levels and pressure loss across the silencer length at the design face velocity. Certified test data
shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
Report to the Engineer in advance and in writing any limiting effect of the intended location on the
system performance and make adequate compensation to ensure that the specified performance
will be achieved in practice.
The silencers shall have an outer casing of not less than 1.2mm thickness galvanised steel sheet.
Longitudinal joints shall be lock-formed and sealed during construction.
Sound absorbent materials used within silencers shall be inert, non-hygroscopic, incombustible,
rot and vermin proof, and must be capable of carrying passage velocities of up to 25m/s without
surface erosion or other forms of material migration. The infill shall be of a density sufficient to
obtain the specified performance and packed under not less than 10% compression to eliminate

voids due to settling. Splitter shall be faced with perforated galvanised steel sheet of not less
than 0.5mm thickness.
The airways shall be free from sharp edges, sharp screw ends or other undue projections into the
airstream.
ilencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential bursting pressure of up to 2kPa.
2.11.5. - Acoustic & Aerodynamic Performance of Silencers
The total pressure losses from the intake and discharge silencers shall not exceed a total of
100Pa. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the radiator fan provides sufficient
capacity to overcome the resistance of the acoustic treatment.
Calculations shall be presented for the pressure loss imposed by the silencers. The calculations
shall take into consideration the additional losses induced by turbulence in the discharge
airstream.
Calculations shall be presented to show that the acoustic performance of the generators fitted
with the proposed acoustic treatment shall meet the specified noise limits.
The insertion losses of the sound attenuators shall not be less than the following:
Min. Insertion Loss(dB)

Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k
Intake 10 16 14 21 18 19 18 17
Silencer
Discharge 3 13 12 19 16 18 17 15
Silencer
Exhaust 5 8 13 16 18 18 17 16
Muffler
2.11.6. - Acoustic Ceiling
The acoustic ceiling for the generator room shall consist of 2 layers of 12mm stagged joints
cemboards supported on 20mm static deflection spring isolators or as approved. 100mm thick
mineral wool with a minimum density of 32 kg/m³ fibreglass should be provided. A minimum air
gap of 300mm should be allowed between ceiling soffit and acoustic ceiling.
The mineral wool backing shall be provided and wrapped in suitable protective tssue to prevent
migration of mineral wool.
The mineral wool backing shall be inert, non-hygroscopic, incombustible, rot and vermin proof,
free from ant form of material migration and fireproof (to relevant legislation).
The acoustic ceiling shall include all accessories for the necessary installation of the acoustic
ceiling system including suspension rods, ceiling grid, etc where required.
The acoustic ceiling shall be installed by a specialist having at least 10 years coustic treatment
installation experience.
2.11.7. - Acoustic Panel
The acoustic panels shall be minimum 100mm thick and shall have an outer skin of galvanised
steel of minimum 1.5mm thick suitably reinforced and internally lined with inert, non-hygroscopic,
non-flammable glass or mineral fibre, stabilised by bonding with resin or approved equivalent.
The surface of the fibres shall be protected with a smooth layer of woven or tissue faced

fibreglass or mineral wool and a layer of perforated galvanised mild steel having a thickness of
not less than
0.8mm, and an open area of at least 23%.
The acoustic panels shall have no holes or other defects which would allow noise
leakage.
Panels joining method shall be neither tongue-and-groove construction, or with panel joiners of
sufficient strength and shaped to prevent direct leakage of sound, or otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Acoustic infill shall be applied at assembly joints.
2.11.8. - Floating Floor Construction
In basement or wherever generator is positioned on concrete slab, a floating floor shall be

provided. The floating floor shall be a fully-engineered system supplied and installed by a
specialist contractor who has completed previous similar installations.
The generator floating floor shall be bordered by an upstand concrete curb protruding above the
area floor slab. The enclosed bordered area of floating floor shall be lined with 25mm thick cork
on the sides and 75mm thick cork on the bottom. The cork shall be high density bitumen
impregnated.
Additional layer of fiberglass cloth shall be provided over the cork lining before fixing steel
reinforcement and pouring in the concrete. Concrete thickness shall not be less than 300mm,
adequately reinforced.
2.11.9. - Site Conditions
Check that the finish on the structural floor is adequate before commencing the installation of the
floating slab.
The worksite shall remain clean and tidy at all times. No materials shall be stored within the
structural floor void and the working area shall be roped off to ensure that access is controlled
until the floating floor slab is completed and the concrete is adequately cured.
Ensure that the site is adequately protected from water during the construction period.
The floor components shall not be delivered to the site until immediately before the installation will
commence.
All materials shall be stored such as to provide protection from extreme temperatures, prolonged
exposure to sunlight, moisture, fumes and vermin.
Any materials damaged prior, during or subsequent to installation shall be replaced.
2.11.10. - Installation
Provide written notice to the Enginner at least 24 hours before the following operations are to take
place. This is to enable site inspection by the Engineer and any concerned specialist.
2.11.11. - Vibration Isolation
Include the price for the supply, installation and adjustment of sufficient restrained spring type
anti-vibration mounts to support the generators. The spring mountings shall have a static
deflection of at least 30mm.
2.11.12. - Guarantee

Guarantee the installation for a period of 7 years. The guarantee shall cover all aspects of the
installation of the acoustic treatments including the anti-vibration mounting floating floor and the
water-proofing of the penetrations through the floor and at the perimeter of the floating floor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged
engine generator performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine roughing-in of cooling-system piping systems and electrical connections. Verify

actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required for packaged engine
generators.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings
and manufacturers' equipment drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including
removal of drivers and accessories.
C. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or
building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
D. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,

particularly in making connections and adjustments.
E. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
F. Generating Set: Install to maintain alignment and minimize engine and generator stresses.
Protect instrumentation and control equipment including engine mounted instruments from
machine vibration. Mountings and method of mounting are to be as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer.
G. Engine exhaust piping is to be slightly sloped away from engine to avoid condensation
returning to engine and is to have drain plugs or clean-out at lower end as required.
H. Engine Hot-Air Exhaust Duct: Install approved canvas duct with metal frames between
radiator and louvered opening in wall for radiator exhaust air.
I. Tank Vent Pipe: Extend to nearest outside wall of building and carry up to at least 2 m
above ground level with end at least 1 m away from any building opening. Slope vent pipe
back to tank without traps and support securely. Provide replaceable dust filter and
gooseneck bend or approved weatherproof vent cap at top of pipe.

J. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Fasten securely to building structure with approved masonry
expansion bolts, minimum 20 mm diameter and install in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
K. Earthing: Install earthing system in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding" of the Specification.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties.
1. Install piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.
2. Connect exhaust-system piping to diesel engines.
B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials

and Methods."
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any loss or damage to
Engineer.
B. Earthing resistance tests if any are to be carried out to verify specified requirements.
C. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for
air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
D. Load tests are to be carried out at low loads to overload conditions, at various power
factors. Measurements are to include voltage and frequency deviations and regulating time
under various step loading conditions, temperature measurements and pressure
measurements at various locations, and in accordance with an approved plan under
conditions equal to worst site ambient conditions.
E. Tests are to include:
1. Full load test for 8 hours continuous, immediately followed by 10% overload test,
without interruption.
2. Insulation measurement.
3. Functional tests for voltage sensing, automatic start and synchronization, transfer of
load and load sharing as applicable.
4. Operation of engine shutdown and alarm signaling and indication, under simulated fault
conditions.
5. Measurement of vibration transmission to building structure.
6. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. Verify

acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge. Verify

measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
7. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
F. Load Banks: If actual loads are not made available at time of acceptance testing, provide
load banks upto full load and overload to carry out complete test cycle of the system under
loading and switching conditions necessary to prove compliance with the Specification.
G. Piping System: Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test each
system to 1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or to
pressure exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate data or from
manufacturers' published data. Apply tests before connecting piping to equipment.
Remove or disconnect and blank off relief valves, instruments and devices that might be
damaged by test pressure. Maintain test pressure on system for 24 hours during which time
there is to be no noticeable drop in pressure. Check for leaks using soap solution. Isolate
source of pressure during testing.
H. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a
label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
K. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to
applicable standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make
calibration records available for examination on request.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Battery Equalization: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
3.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean
components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation.

FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS

SECTION 16233
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Diesel fuel oil tanks, piping, and accessories located outside, underground or aboveground as
shown on contract drawings.
B. Tank fluid level monitoring and alarm systems.
C. Leak detection system for tank room and generator room..
1.2 RELATED WORK:
Following special specifications shall be referred to Mechanical Sections of Specifications and
ASTM, WOQOD Qatar approved specifications, Qatar Civil Defense approved specifications &
equivalent standards.
A. Platforms, stairs, ladders and railings for aboveground tanks.
B. Sealing of pipe penetrations.
C. Primer and finish painting.
D. Fuel oil pumps for engine generators.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Approval by Engineer is required of products or services of proposed manufacturers, suppliers
and installers, and will be based on Contractor’s certification that:
1. Manufacturers regularly and currently manufacture tanks, tank and piping accessories, tank
fluid level monitoring and leak detection systems, fuel quality management systems.
2. Manufacturers of steel tanks have a certified Quality Assurance Program.
3. The design and size of each item of equipment provided for this project is of current
production and has been in satisfactory operation on at least three installations for
approximately three years. Current models of fluid level and leak detection systems with less
than three years service experience are acceptable if similar previous models from the same
manufacturer have at least three years service experience.
B. Apply and install materials, equipment and specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions. Provide copies of installation instructions two weeks prior to commencing installation
of any item.
C. All equipment shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance,
maintainability and appearance of individual components or overall assembly.
D. Tanks, Secondary Containment Systems for Piping, Containment Systems, Tank Level
Monitoring Systems, Leak Detection Systems: Authorized manufacturers representatives shall
provide on-site training of installers and supervision of the installation and testing of the
equipment and systems to assure conformance to written instructions of manufacturers.
FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS January 2019 16233-1

E. Tank and piping installation contractor shall be certified as acceptable by local and state pollution
control authorities.
F. Entire installation shall conform to requirements of local and state pollution control authorities.
G. Pipe Welding: Conform to requirements of ASME B31.1. Welders shall show evidence of
qualification. Welders shall utilize a stamp to identify their work. Unqualified personnel will be
rejected.
H. Label of Conformance (definition): Labels of accredited testing laboratories showing conformance
to the standards specified.
I. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being
furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a safe, complete and fully operational
system which conforms to contract requirements and in which no item is subject to conditions
beyond its design capabilities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit in accordance with related section of SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Aboveground Steel Tanks, Including Vault-type Tanks:
1. Drawings of tanks, supports, ladders, platforms, tank manholes, emergency relief vents and
all accessories. Include overall dimensions and dimensional locations and sizes of pipe
connections, and access openings.
2. Recommended tank support locations.
3. Weight of entire tank assembly, empty and flooded.
4. Design and construction of primary tanks, insulation, secondary containment, supports, pipe
connections, platforms.
5. Application and performance data on coatings from manufacturer of coatings.
6. Data certifying tanks are designed for surcharge loads of platforms shown.
7. Certification of compliance with specified standards.
8. Certification that steel tank manufacturer have a certified Quality Assurance Program.
9. Design, construction, performance, dimensions of emergency relief vents.
C. Fuel Piping:
1. ASTM and UL compliance.
2. Grade, class or type, schedule number.
3. Manufacturer.
D. Pipe Fittings, Unions, Flanges:
1. ASTM and UL compliance.
2. ASTM standards number.
3. Catalog cuts.
4. Pressure and temperature rating.

E. Foot Valves, Check Valves, Overfill Prevention Valves:

1. Catalog cuts showing design and construction.
2. Pressure and temperature ratings.
3. Pressure loss and flow rate data.
4. Materials of construction.
5. Accessories.
F. Secondary Containment System for Fuel Piping:
1. Sizes, materials, construction of containment system including end seals, sumps, coatings
and pipe supports.
2. Layout of system.
3. Installation instructions.
4. Design of cathodic protection system (steel casing).
G. Leak Detection System:
1. Drawings, description and performance data on sensors, control units.
2. Description of operation.
3. Layout of system.
4. Installation and operating instructions.
5. Data on interconnecting wiring systems to be furnished.
H. Tank Fluid Level Monitoring Instrumentation System:
1. Drawings showing instruments and in-tank sensing units, with dimensions.
2. Design and construction of all elements of system.
3. Installation instructions.
I. Tank and Piping Accessories: Design, construction, and dimensions of vent caps, fill boxes, fill
caps, spill containers and other accessories.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protection of Equipment:
1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor
until phased acceptance, whether or not the Owner has reimbursed the Contractor for the
equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such
equipment and material against any damage.
2. Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as
determined and directed by the Engineer. Such repair or replacement shall be at no
additional cost to the Government.
3. Protect new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter on the inside.
Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.
4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody
and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.

5. Protect plastic piping and tanks from ultraviolet light (sunlight).

B. Cleanliness of Equipment and Piping:
1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in
the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping.
2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to provide clean systems.
3. Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Owner.
4. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damages and delay arising from failure to
provide clean systems and equipment.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
A36/A36M-08 ............................. Carbon Structural Steel
A53/A53M-10 ............................. Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless
A106/A106M-10 ......................... Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service
A126-04(R2009)......................... Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings
A234/A234M-10 ......................... Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service
B62-09 ........................................ Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
B16.5-09 ..................................... Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (NPS ½-24).
B16.11-09 ................................... Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
B31.1-10 ..................................... Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping with Current
Amendments
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
250-08 ........................................ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
30-12 .......................................... Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
31-11 .......................................... Installation of Oil Burning Equipment
70-11 .......................................... National Electrical Code
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
58-98 .......................................... Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
142-10 ........................................ Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids

1746-07 ...................................... External Corrosion Protection System for Steel Underground

Storage Tanks
2085-10 ...................................... Protected Above-ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
G. Steel Tank Institute (STI):
F001 ........................................... Standard for Fire Resistant Tanks
F841 ........................................... Dual Wall Underground Steel Storage Tanks
F894 ........................................... ACT-100 Specification for External Corrosion Protection of FRP
Composite Steel Underground Storage Tanks
F911 ........................................... Standard for Diked Aboveground Storage Tank System
F941 ........................................... Standard for Fireguard Thermally Insulated Aboveground
Storage Tanks
F961 ........................................... ACT-100-U Specification for External Corrosion Protection of
Composite Steel Underground Storage Tanks
P3 ............................................... STI-P3 Specification and Manual for External Corrosion
Protection of Underground Steel Storage Tanks
R891 ........................................... Recommended Practice for Hold Down Strap Isolation
H. NACE International (Corrosion Engineers) (NACE):
SP0169-07 ................................. Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged
Metallic Piping Systems
NACE 3/SSPC–SP6-07 ............. Commercial Blast Cleaning
NACE 4/SSPC-SP7-07 .............. Brush-off Blast Cleaning
I. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1631-01 ...................................... Interior Lining and Periodic Inspection of Underground Storage
Tanks
1.7 PERMITS:
Contractor shall obtain and complete all tank permit and registration forms required by
government authorities with jurisdiction.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS:
2.1 ABOVEGROUND STEEL TANKS:
A. Type: Factory fabricated all welded steel, horizontal cylindrical configuration, atmospheric
pressure, internal and external corrosion protection as specified. In addition to specified
requirements, tanks shall be fabricated in accordance with Steel Tank Institute (STI) design
standards by manufacturer that having Quality Assurance Program.
B. Construction:
1. ASTM A36 steel, conform to UL 142. Inner and outer tanks of double wall tanks shall both
conform. Provide label of conformance.

2. Conform to NFPA 30 or 31 as applicable.

3. Single-wall.
4. Steel dike walls and floors conforming to STI F911. Provide minimum containment of 110
percent of primary tank contents. Provide steel rain shields which cover the open areas
between the tank and the dike wall.
5. Design for surcharge load produced by tank-mounted platforms and platform loadings shown.
Design tanks for saddle supports furnished by tank manufacturer.
6. Leaks and abrasions are not permitted. Maximum permissible out-of-roundness of cylindrical
shells is one percent of the diameter.
7. Provide lifting lugs for rigging tanks.
C. Platforms, Stairs, Ladders and Handrails: Provide welded steel assemblies as shown, conforming
to OSHA requirements. Provide welded steel tank attachments designed to support platform
framing, stairs, ladders and live and dead loadings. Clean and coat all surfaces as specified for
tank and steel dike exterior. Galvanizing is an acceptable alternative.
D. Factory Cleaning: Clean interior and exterior of tanks and steel dikes. Remove mill scale, dirt,
rust, oil, welding debris, loose coatings and coatings incompatible with fuel stored or protective
coating. Sandblast exterior in accordance with NACE 3.
E. Factory Coating: Provide tanks and steel dikes with exterior coat of rust resistant metal primer.
Coat interior from bottom of tank to 1 m above bottom in compliance with API RP1631.
F. Field Painting: Clean and coat all surfaces.
G. Pipe Connections to Tanks:
1. Conform to UL 142.
2. Pipe sizes 50 mm and smaller, threaded. Pipe sizes 65 mm and larger, flanged, 1025 kPa
ASME rating.
3. Welded joints required on steel piping located inside tanks.
4. Provide and coordinate tank connection quantities, sizes and types with requirements of tank
level gage unit; sounding rod; vent, fill, supply and return pipes; and other pipes as shown.
5. On double-wall tanks, provide valved drain of interstitial space.
H. Tank Manholes: Provide quantity shown. Bolted cover type, gasketed.
I. Internal Ladder: Provide with 50 mm x 6 mm sides and 20 mm diameter rungs at 300 mm on
center. Provide slide supports to allow for tank movement.
J. Wear (Striker) Plates: Provide 300 mm square, 6 mm thick steel plates welded to tank bottom
directly under the sounding opening, the fuel return discharge, and the fill discharge.
K. Lifting Lugs: Provide for rigging tanks.
L. Emergency Relief Vents for Fire Exposure: Venting capacity shall conform to NFPA 30 or 31 as
applicable. Standard product of a manufacturer, designed to automatically open at tank pressure

of 17 kPa gage. Aluminum or cast iron construction with Teflon seating surface. Provide separate
vents for primary and secondary tanks.
M. Provide fittings for grounding per NFPA 70.
2.2 TANK AND PIPING ACCESSORIES:
A. Vent Caps: Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum with brass or bronze screens, arranged to
permit full venting and to prevent entry of foreign material into the vent line. Same pipe size as
vent pipe.
B. Fill Boxes:
1. Spill-container type enclosing a fill cap assembly with camlock hose connector with closure
coordinated with fittings used by fuel supplier.
2. Watertight assembly, cylindrical body, quick-opening corrosion-resistant watertight sealable
cover, polyethylene spill containment compartment with minimum 5 gallons capacity. Integral
drain valve with discharge to fill pipe. The container shall be discharged into 25 gallons barrel
located within fuel tank room, monitored for fuel level for pumping over into mobile vehicle
and carrying off-site.
3. Fill cap shall be lockable, tight-fill design with provision for padlock on the top of the cap. Fill
cap shall screw onto threaded adapter that can be removed without removing fill box. Entire
assembly shall seal tight with no leakage during filling and when cap is in place.
4. Provide special tools necessary for opening fill boxes and fill caps.
5. Fill cabinet shall be provided with content gauge, interfaced with tank fuel monitoring system.
C. Fill caps located above grade without fill boxes shall be lockable, tight-fill design, operated by
special wrench that shall be furnished. Entire assembly shall seal tight with no leakage during fill
and when cap is in place.
D. Support horizontal portion of pipes located inside tank every 2100 mm maximum.
E. Furnish gauging chart, liters versus mm and gallons versus inches depth.
F. Furnish sounding rod for each tank size. Mark rods in increments representing five percent of
tank capacity. Rods shall be graduated in liters.
G. Fill Point Identification:
1. Fill Boxes at Grade Level: Aluminum, brass or bronze plate, anchored to concrete fill box pad
with stamped or engraved letters 18 mm high.
2. Fill Caps above Grade: Aluminum, brass or bronze plate, clamped to fill pipe, with stamped or
engraved letters 18 mm high.
3. Legend: "DIESEL FUEL FILL” as appropriate.
2.3 PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS:
A. Fuel supply and return, tank fill, vents, sounding, pump out, steam and condensate.

B. Steel Pipe and Fittings:

1. Piping: Steel, seamless or electric resistance welded (ERW), ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM
A106 Grade B, Schedule 40. Aboveground piping shall be painted.
2. Joints: Socket or butt-welded. Threaded joints not permitted except at valves, unions and
tank connections.
3. Fittings:
a. Butt-welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME B16.9, same schedule as
adjoining pipe.
b. Socket-welded joints: Forged steel, ASME B16.11, 13 700 kPa class.
4. Unions: Malleable iron, 2050 kPa class.
5. Companion flanges: Flanges and bolting, ASME B16.5.
6. Welding flanges: Weld neck, ASME B16.5, forged steel ASTM A105, 1025 kPa.
C. Check Valves - Fuel Pump Suction.

1. Pipe Sizes 50 mm and under: Rated for 1375 kPa water-oil-gas, swing-type, threaded ends,
ASTM B62 bronze body. Provide union adjacent to valve.
2. Pipe Sizes 65 mm and above: Rated for 1375 kPa water-oil-gas, swing-type, 850 kPa ASME
flanged ends, ASTM A126 class B cast iron body.
D. Foot Valves - Fuel Pump Suction: Double poppet, lapped-in metal-to-metal seats, double-guided
stems, 20 mesh inlet screen, same size as fuel suction piping. Foot valve shall be removable to
above grade through the tank manhole enclosure or through extractor fitting.
E. Extractor Fittings: Arranged to permit removal of foot valves, overfill prevention valves, and other
devices that are located below grade. Access point shall be through a cast iron fill box-type
manhole located at grade. Provide extractor wrench.
F. Overfill Prevention Valve: Aluminum automatic valve designed for aboveground tanks. Locate
valve near the top of the tank in the fill pipe. Provide single stage valve, rated for fill flow and
pressure, which stops flow completely at 95 percent of tank capacity. Valve shall include method
for draining oil trapped above the valve into the tank.
2.4 TANK FLUID LEVEL MONITOR AND ALARM SYSTEMS:
A. Digital systems for central monitoring of fuel and water levels in all fuel oil storage tanks in the
project. High and low level visual and audible alarms. Complete with all transducing, transmitting,
and receiving devices. On board printer to provide complete report of all system functions upon
command. System combined with leak detection.
B. Fluid Level Monitor:
1. Digital continuous readout, showing tank oil and water levels in liters , smallest reading one
liter. Provide identification of product measured, measuring units, and the tank number.
2. Protected power supply.

C. High and Low Fluid Level Alarm System:

1. Automatic continuous on-line monitoring of all tanks.
2. Visual and audible indicators combined with fluid level monitor. Identify the tank that is in
alarm condition.
3. Manual alarm test and silencing controls.
4. Low level alarm actuation adjustable 0-25 percent of tank capacity. High level alarm actuation
adjustable 75-100 percent of tank capacity.
D. Locate all indicators, selector switches, alarms on face of wall-mounted NEMA 250, Type 4 panel.
E. Remote Alarm Annunciator:
1. Visual and audible high level alarms adjacent to tank fill box locations. Locate in NEMA 250
Type 4X weatherproof exterior wall or pole-mounted panels or combined with fill point
cabinet.
2. Alarm shall include flashing red light with 180 degree visibility for each tank and 95 dB horn
or 100 mm diameter bell. Provide alarm silence control.
3. Provide identification sign: "WHEN ALARM SOUNDS - FUEL TANK FILLED TO CAPACITY -
DO NOT OVERFILL".
F. Modbus communication to Building Management System to indicate tank fluid level and alarm
conditions.
G. System Performance: Accuracy plus or minus 2.5 mm of fluid height.
H. Sensors:
1. Provide sensor types such as magnetostrictive, capacitance, float, hydrostatic and other
types as necessary for the applications.
2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions with provisions for easy future
replacement without need for removal of tank and or emptying of contents.
3. Provide for each hydrostatic sensor a constant flow differential pressure regulator and
pneumatic transmitter protected from fuel contamination. Air supply shall include filter and
over-pressure protection. Provide desiccant-type dryer on air supply designed for removal of
water vapor. Dryer rating, minimum 280 cubic liters per minute. Provide moisture indicator.
4. Float-type units shall be designed for installation and removal through a 100 mm diameter
vertical pipe mounted in the top of the tank.
I. Code Conformance: NFPA-70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND TESTING, ABOVE GROUND TANKS:
A. Conform to NFPA 30 or 31 as applicable.
B. Support tanks on steel saddles welded to the tanks. Anchor to concrete foundations. Provide
molded neoprene isolation pads between the steel supports and concrete foundation..

C. After tanks are installed, test steel tanks with air pressure of 20 kPa to 35 kPa, using soapsuds to
locate leaks. Repair leaks by chipping to bare metal and rewelding. Retest until all leaks are
repaired. Repair all damaged areas of prime coat on tanks and steel dikes. Test interstitial area
between steel tank walls with air at pressure recommended by tank manufacturer. Tests shall be
witnessed by the Engineer.
D. Provide electrical grounding in accordance with NFPA 70.
3.2 INSTALLATION, FILL BOXES AND ACCESS MANHOLES AT GRADE:
Provide for tank fill, tank sounding, leak detector sensors, and extractor fittings. Set at grade in
concrete pads. Refer to fill box detail. Provide identification plate set into the concrete pad that
identifies the purpose of the device and type of fuel in the tank.
3.3 INSTALLATION AND TESTING, LEAK DETECTOR SYSTEMS FOR TANKS AND PIPING:
A. Wiring shall conform to NFPA-70.
B. Locate control monitor panels 1500 mm above the floor on inside wall of boiler room, generator
room or garage, depending on type of fuel tank served, unless shown otherwise.
C. Test operation of each probe, and monitoring system with fuel and water. If type of probe utilized
is damaged by exposure to fuel, provide temporary probe for testing monitoring system.
3.4 INSTALLATION, TANK FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR AND ALARM SYSTEM:
A. Wiring shall conform to NFPA-70.
B. Locate level indicator and alarm panel 1500 mm above the floor on inside wall of boiler room,
generator room or garage, depending on type of fuel tank served, unless shown otherwise.
C. Locate remote high level alarm on exterior wall or pole in view of tank fill point, 2400 mm above
grade.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

SECTION 16264
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The UPS size and full details shall be coordinated with the final requirement of the IT
Data Center Specialist and CCTV Specialist
B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
C. Should comply with NFPA 110, 2013 Edition, Type U and local QCDD requirements if
serving emergency or life safety related loads.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16, Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16, Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16, Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes three-phase, on-line, static-type, uninterruptible power supply

(UPS) system installation, comprising the following:
1. Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with automatic static switch and

maintenance by-pass circuit
2. Output panelboard (included under a different section),
3. Necessary interface for data on faults/monitoring to the Building Management
System.
4. Input isolation transformer for UPS units rated at 80 kVA and above
5. Interplant power and control cabling
6. Connection of normal a.c. power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit breaker, as
shown on the Drawings
7. Earthing system.
8. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays,
transducers, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules
and /or shown on the Drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY January 2019 16264-1

1. Manufacturers’ catalogues, detailed description, compliance with the Standards,

dimensions and weights, system operation, operating characteristics, methods of
operation, protective and control provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions and
limitations on electronic components etc. beyond which such components may
suffer partial or permanent damage.
to, the following:
1. Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and indicating
devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc.
2. One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling, grounding etc.
3. Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
4. Installation and mounting details.
5. Batteries arrangement and mounting details.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with

requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System is to undergo a
functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and is to undergo a minimum
72 hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance
requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not
agree.
G. Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at

Project site for ready access.
2. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of UPS

manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a

locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional
advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare
parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy
Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
C. Standards: Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS, EIA, NEMA and IEEE or equal
Standards. Materials and components are to be manufacturer's latest design, and
Standards used are to be approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency interference
(RFI) suppression is to be in accordance with CISPR recommendations.
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions

have been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.

B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
A. Temperature limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are zero to +40
deg. C at 100% rated output. Equipment is to be capable of operating under up to 55
deg. C ambient conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg. C over 40 deg. C.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing

to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
1. Warranty Period: 400 Days from date of substantial completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation
of UPS system. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation
together with current prices.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer. Include
monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated
speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation
of original equipment.
1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working

hours.
a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. System is to be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and memory
capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting
parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified by the Engineer. UPS
is to be of the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct
system operation. The self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case
of a fault. The system shall be provided with multi-password levels to limit access to
software and data.

B. General: System is to be interposed between normal a.c. power supply and critical load,
to secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for 10 minutes in
case of failure of normal a.c. supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase
deviation within specified tolerances.
C. System is dual redundant with maintained (continuously supplying load through the
inverter), with automatic no-break transfer to or retransfer from alternate source (bypass)
in case of failure or overload on rectifier- battery-inverter system.
D. Normal a.c. power supply will be available from one protected source fed from either
normal a.c. network or from a.c. Characteristics of output of generator set (when
provided) and UPS system are to be coordinated for best results. Study and advise on
special requirements of generator characteristic output and stability.
E. System overall efficiency is not to be less than 92 % at full load .
F. Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 60 dB(A) at 1.0 m distance anywhere
within UPS room.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Under normal conditions inverter(s) are to be synchronized and phase locked to normal
a.c. supply. Upon loss of normal a.c. supply, battery is to continue supply of no-break
power to inverters, which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency reference.
Upon restoration of normal a.c. supply, inverters are to re-synchronize to a.c. line,
gradually (at slew rate), if frequency and voltage deviation of normal a.c. supply is within
preset limits specified.
B. Automatic Transfer To Bypass: Static transfer switch is to automatically transfer critical

(100%) load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal a.c. supply) if:
1. Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits.

2. Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS.
3. Over-temperature is sensed.
4. Manual (push button) command is given.
5. Transfer to by-pass mode is to be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage,
frequency and/or phase shift of bypass power is outside acceptable tolerances.
C. Re-Transfer To Inverter: Re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to inverter
(UPS mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
1. Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified tolerances.

2. Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of UPS.
3. Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.
D. Lock-out feature is to inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside preset
tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase locked or if
UPS output is not restored to normal conditions.
E. Normal Power Restored: When normal power is restored following an outage,

rectifier/charger is to initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush current. After
approximately 15 seconds (walk-in time), input power requirements are to rise to power
level to drive critical load and recharge battery.
F. Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input current of
the UPS.

2.4 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. Rectifier/Charger Input:
1. Nominal Input Voltage: 415V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz.

2. Voltage input variation: +-6%, 3 phase 50Hz.
3. Frequency: +/-5% from nominal.
4. Transformer Exciting Current In Rush: Less than 600 % nominal
current.
5. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging at full load and nominal input voltage.
6. Total Harmonic Feedback: Maximum 10 % (total).
7. Current Limiting: 115% max. Of that required to operate inverters and
charge battery at full rated load, adjustment possible between 100% and 125%.
8. Walk-in Current in Rush: 25% to 100% FLC in 15 seconds.
B. Rectifier/Charger Output:
1. Float and Equalize Operation: Adjustable, automatic, compatible

with battery.
2. Regulation: +/-1% max. from 0-100% load.
3. Ripple: +/-2% rms. (0 to 100% resistive load).
C. Static Inverters:
1. Nominal net system power output rating with load power factor 0.7-lag to 0.9- lead:
as shown on drawings.
2. Nominal output voltage: 380 V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, adjustable +/-5% of
nominal.
3. Output voltage regulation:
a. Balanced load: +/-2 % (0 - 100% load)
b. Unbalanced load (3-phase output only):+/-10 % (at 100% unbalance)
4. Phase Displacement: 120 deg. (+/-5 deg.) at 100% load
unbalance.
5. Output Voltage Waveform: 5% max. Total harmonic, 3% max. Single harmonic.
6. Frequency Stability: Normally synchronized to input line frequency over +/-1%
adjustable range; free running at +/-0.1% over full battery voltage variation, load and
p.f. range; slew rate not to exceed 0.1 Hz/sec.
7. Dynamic Output Voltage Tolerance Sudden Full Load Removal: +/-10 % max.
recovering application or to within 1% in less than 100 milliseconds.
8. Over-load Rating: 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, 1000% for 5 cycles,
105% continuous.
D. Automatic Static Transfer Switch:
1. Transfer Time: 150 microsecond (overlapping) maximum.

2. Total Sensing and Transfer/Retransfer Time: 2 milliseconds,
maximum.
3. Retransfer Mode: automatic/inhibit (selectable).
4. Retransfer Delay: 2 - 32 secs. in auto mode (selectable).
5. Transfer Point: +/-10% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
6. Retransfer Point: +/-5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
7. Transfer Inhibit Point: +/-20% of nominal output voltage
(adjustable).
2.5 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Materials and Parts: Electronic devices are to be solid state, hermetically sealed.
Indicator lights are to be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions are to be
seen by operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power connections
and remote alarm and control wiring are to be accessible at terminal boards. Power
semi- conductors are to be fused. Metal surfaces including copper and aluminium heat
sinks and busbars are to be treated with permanent protective coating. Electro-
mechanical power devices and relays are to be vacuum impregnated, insulated for
maximum operating voltage conditions, and enclosed in dust-tight enclosures. Cables
are to be fire resistant high temperature grade.
B. UPS is to be provided with a socket connection for a serial interface to be linked to a

portable PC, to a modem or to the BMS system for communication with the UPS. It shall
enable interrogation of the UPS about status, faults, data stored, reprogramming, etc.
C. Housing: Equipment is to be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally enclosed

modular assembly with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy access for
maintenance, inspection and adjustments, and with provisions for handling and lifting
during and after installation. Enclosures are to be suitable for industrial, tropical
environments, protection IP20 to IEC 144, of galvanized sheet steel construction treated
against corrosion and with light grey RAL7032 baked paint or epoxy finish to approved
standard.
D. Sub-assemblies and components are to be mounted on pull- out and/or swing-out trays,
of the plug-in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount components in pull-
out or swing-out trays, they are to be easily accessible inside the enclosure. Assemblies
shall be replaceable without requiring any adjustments or settings in the UPS.
E. Ventilation: For units rated over 5 kVA, an integral, forced-air, cooling system is to be
provided in each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure
components operate within environmental ratings. Air is to enter bottom of cabinet
through replaceable filters, and exhaust through the top. At least two fans are to be
provided for ventilating each enclosure. No degradation of performance is to occur in the
event of a single fan failure. Temperature sensors, mounted on semi-conductor heat
sinks, are to initiate alarm if maximum working temperature is exceeded.
F. Rectifier/charger unit is to have mainline circuit breaker and two-winding dry-type, Class
H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high efficiency
(98%), regulating transformer and is to be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature,
using silicon controlled rectifiers (thyristors) with control logic circuitry to control firing
angles to thyristors to suit power output requirements and protect against primary power
surges, lightning transients, under-voltage and over-voltage conditions. Output is to be
passed through LC filters to d.c. bus.
G. Rectifier/charger unit is to be capable of supplying full load power to inverter, and to

charge the battery from a discharge condition to 95% charge within ten times discharge
period, and maintain full charge at floating voltage until next operation. Charger current
is to be voltage regulated and current limited. Where three-phase supply is involved,
rectifier is to be at least six-pulse type for UPS ratings up to 80 kVA, and 12-pulse type
for 80 kVA ratings and above.
H. Inverter is to employ Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) technology in three leg,
pulse width modulation (PWM) design with high frequency switching technique, and
complete with output transformer and filters. Inverter start-up is to be automatic, to reach
full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter is
to start at any load including short-circuit. Output transformer is to be two-winding dry-
type, Class H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding,
high efficiency (98%),

I. Inverter oscillator is to operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within specified
tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to normal power supply
frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and latter fails,
oscillator is to automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator) and maintain
specified limits.
J. Automatic static transfer switch is to be continuously rated at full load (100% FL), hybrid
type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor assembly
isolatable or completely removable for maintenance. When signal to close switch is
initiated, thyristors are to instantaneously conduct power to prevent deviations and
breaks in load voltage outside specified tolerances.
K. Maintenance By-Pass Switching: Manual (make-before- break) by-pass switch is to allow

load to be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of output, and provide
isolation of UPS and static switch during maintenance. Test position is to permit testing
of static switch while load is being fed from bypass power circuit. Transfer inhibited
warning circuit is to be provided to give an alarm indication in case by-pass supply is
beyond acceptable tolerances.
L. Protection: UPS modules are to have built-in or inherent electronic current-limiting

protection against permanent self damage effective down to short-circuits. Fast acting,
current limiting devices are to protect against failure of any solid state component.
Internal failure in any UPS module is to cause immediate isolation from input and output
by operation of static interrupters or causing shut down of faulty module. Protection is to
be provided against, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Input over and under voltage and power line surges

2. Output over voltage and voltage surges
3. Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions
4. Short-circuits at output terminals
5. Inverter and rectifier overcurrent
6. Auxiliary Control Circuit Overcurrent.
M. UPS Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry twice the full load phase current.
N. Input Filter Disconnection: UPS control system is to disconnect the input filters in case of
interruption of utility power supply failure while the UPS is operating at light loads (less
than 25%).
O. Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic
encased, sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically re-closing
explosion proof safety vents rated for 500C ambient Temperature. Electrolyte specific
gravity is not to exceed 1.25 when fully charged at 500C Ampere-hour rating is to be
sufficient for emergency period specified with all inverters operating at full rated output, to
a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V per cell. Cells are to be normally maintained at
2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life is not to be less than 10 years, with a capacity drop
down to not less than 80% under normal expected service.
P. Battery Cabinets: Steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at points of contact with
battery cases. Cabinets are to be painted with electrolyte resistant paint, are to be of
appropriate design for space in which installed, and directly accessible for maintenance.
Cables are to be rubber insulated electrolyte resistant type.
Q. Mimic Panel: UPS assembly is to include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays,
indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
R. Local panel instruments shall have serial communication interface for BMS integration
and are to include at least the following (digital readings):

1. Inverter input voltmeter, measuring d.c. bus volts.

2. Battery ammeter, measuring charge/ discharge current.
3. A.C. voltmeter to measure inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage or system
output.
4. UPS output ammeter and frequency meter.
S. Local Panel Indicators are to include at least the following:
1. System on battery supply

2. Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and normal
a.c. supply input.
3. Static switch on normal a.c. supply (bypass mode).
4. Static switch inhibited.
5. Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for transformers,
rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load to by-pass circuit).
6. Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating failure of
any stage, D.C. bus earth fault, and inverter output earth fault.
T. Local built-in controls are to include at least the following:
1. Inverter on/off.
2. Battery input circuit breaker.
3. Auto/manual reset-test switch.
4. Manual reset switch.
5. Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.
6. Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to
inverter after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to
inverter until hybrid switch is in auto-mode.
7. Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0-30 hours adjustable, with
automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and to
be used only with manufacturer's recommendation for type of battery specified).
8. Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to
maintenance personnel only).
9. Indicator test/reset switch.
10. Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only).
11. Alarm test-accept-reset.
U. Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, are to
include at least the following:
1. Fan failure: Alarm only.

2. Over Temperature: Alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe
preset period.
3. D.C. Volts out of Limits: Alarm with indication.
4. Fuse Failure: Alarm.
5. Battery on Load/Disconnected: Alarm only.
6. Overloads: Alarm only with a trip command if prolonged, for each rectifier/inverter
unit.
7. Normal a.c. Supply Failure: Alarm only.
8. Hybrid Switch Operation to by-pass Mode: Alarm only.
9. Low and High Output Voltage: Alarm only.
2.6 UPS LOAD OUTPUT PANELBOARD
A. Type: Separately mounted or built-in, sheet steel enclosed, generally in accordance with
Division 16 Section "Panelboards" of the Specification, MCCB panelboard construction.

B. Ratings: Main and branch circuit breaker selection and ratings are to be time-current
coordinated with inverter protection and overload requirements of critical loads to avoid
interruption of power to healthy circuits in case of faults. Provide circuits as shown on
panelboard schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation
of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and
provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or
building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
C. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,

particularly in making connections and adjustments.
D. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Provide direct interference free grounding circuit in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and wiring according to Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
3.4 BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Record individual-cell voltages.
A. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to

manufacturer's written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and
performance of each component of the UPS:
1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.
b. Component type and labeling verification.
c. Ratings of installed components.
2. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm
functions.
3. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.

B. Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument, and

monitor and record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency.
Instrument details are to be submitted for approval.
C. Test Periods are to be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer, to verify
and obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and switching
conditions within the criteria specified.
D. Data logging is to include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and
spike bursts, drop-outs; high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on
cassette tape for subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for display or print-out.
E. Tests are to include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload condition,
and measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, and
harmonic content and frequency stability.
F. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
G. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and
inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and
inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
installation.

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER

SECTION 16265
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Should comply with NFPA 110, 2013 Edition, NFPA 101, 2012 Edition, and NFPA 72 2013
Edition and Local QCDD regulations and approval.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions:
1. Illuminate the escape routes and immediate external areas at discharge points.
2. Indicate the escape route direction clearly as per the requirements of the NFPA.
3. Provide the exit signs on all the exits.
4. Illuminate lighting fixtures in offices and technical areas for ambient lighting level, to
ensure an average lighting level of 10.8 lux with a minimum uniformity of 0.4.
5. Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment's and other life saving equipments
on the premises are illuminated as required.
6. Permit operations concerned with safety measures and to shut down any hazardous
processes as required.
7. Provide emergency illumination in Electrical rooms and control rooms – 100 lux.
8. Provide a separate central battery control panel for substation areas of HV, transformer
and generator room having 12 hours autonomy.
9. Only AC/AC systems are acceptable.
1. Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each product
specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing control and
indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of operating modes
and any load limitations that may apply.
B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/

manufacture’s authorized representative and the contractor, including all necessary
documentation as called for.
C. Record of field tests covering tests and commissioning efforts required by Part 3 of this
Section.
D. Carry out specified tests and submit test sheets as per attached Annex.
E. Maintenance Data: For central battery inverters to be included in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1.
F. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

central battery, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER January 2019 16265-1

A. The emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed and installed to
meet the local civil defense and the respective DIN VDE 0108 and NFPA 101 standards
applicable to this Project.
B. The system shall have the approval of the Local Civil Defense Authority.
C. All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001
certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards and shall bear
the CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility.
D. All products shall be sourced either directly from the manufacturer or from authorized
dealer/agent.
1.5 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have
been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
1.6 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and may
be used interchangeably: "Emergency Central Battery System" and "Central Battery
Inverter".
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Annexure-1 below that match product installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents. Deliver extra products to the Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 1 Section 01600, paragraph 2.1
A. Emergency lighting system shall provide an average of 10.8 lux illumination level with 0.4
minimum uniformity, throughout the facility.
B. Emergency lighting of average 100 lux shall be provided in control rooms and electrical
rooms.
C. Emergency lighting system shall operate on maintained, non-maintained or switched

maintained mode for 3-hour duration as per the requirement of the particular facility
operation.
D. The system shall be certified to provide a light output of at least 75 % of the connected
fixtures, for the 3-hour period of emergency operation envisaged.

E. In general emergency lighting shall be provided by using lamps from the luminaires used
for the main normal illumination, unless agreed otherwise.
F. Equipment shall be certified EMC compliant to IEC.
G. BMS interface: ECBS (Emergency Central Battery System) shall interface to the
Management Level Network through a BACnet/IP to third party gateway. The gateway
shall be provided by the ECBS supplier and shall be connected into the Management Level
Network by the BMS contractor. The BMS contractor shall obtain a list of the BACnet
object IDs/names from the ECBS supplier.
H. ONLY AC/AC CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEMS ARE APPROVED. AC/DC CENTRAL

BATTERY SYSTEMS ARE INHERITELY REJECTED.
2.3 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP 21 with removable
screwed front, rear and top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The
electronics section shall have IP 54 sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate
window for all central systems and IP 54 sheet steel enclosure with full metal.
B. The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries from
top via multiple undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables and looping
circuits shall be connected on protected and fused terminals as per DIN VDE 0100. All
outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-in
type terminals 2.5 sq.meter.
2.4 ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The system shall be built-up in a modular with all modules being encapsulated plug-in-type
design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. 1 module shall be
used for circuits with maximum load of 6 Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108. 1 module shall not
be used for more than two circuits. It shall be possible to mix and connect maintained lights
and non-maintained lights to each circuit. Each circuit shall be protected within the system
on mains and battery side via screw-in type cartridge fuses on each module. The fuses
shall be accessible via front plate of the module. The mains supply and battery mains
cable shall be protected by knife-edge fuses. The fuse holders shall have handles for
simple removal of the fuses. 25 percent spare capacity shall be available in terms of circuits
and modules.
B. Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with at least 3 fuses for each size used in
respective panel.
C. Each “Change-over” module shall have its own short-circuit protection.
2.5 CONTROL MODULE
A. The control module shall be composed of a microprocessor control module with plain text 4
line LCD displays with a minimum of 20 characters per line, to provide operative status and
luminaire failures.
B. Displays to indicate Circuit earth leakage failure, battery current drawn in emergency mode,
battery current drawn in test mode, battery voltage, battery test, battery charge failure,
luminaire failure with text address location, sub-circuit board supply failure with text address
location.
C. Functions to include Earth leakage test on each circuit, display and programming the status
of each circuit, Monitor and control of all weekly/daily cycle tests and functions, monitoring
of battery at five minute intervals, communication and programming with each addressable

ballast at the luminaires, automatic logging of all test results and incidents. Manual test
feature in addition to automatic.
D. Touch-pad keys shall be provided for programming and monitoring of the panels.
E. Memory facility to be provided for two-year logbook.
F. Central monitoring through LON network, with each ECBS panel equipped with a LON
terminal. Plug-in LON module for complete integration on the BMS with full data transfer to
BMS. Central monitoring shall be IBM compatible PC with latest Pentium processor.
Function testing to be accomplished from BMS.
G. LEDs shall indicate:
1. Main operation.
2. Mains failure.
3. Battery operation.
4. Summation fault.
H. Potential free indicator contacts shall be provided for:
1. Operation.
2. Battery operation.
3. Summary fault.
I. Centronic interface for the connection of standard printers shall be provided on the front of
the control module. An electronically controlled 24 V output for the voltage monitoring of
lighting sub distribution panels shall be provided.
J. Electronically isolated mains monitoring shall be provided for maintained and non
maintained light circuits, with forced changeover in case of mains failure from mains to
emergency light operation. As a standard following programming modes shall be available.
1. Manual reset.
2. Time delay of mains return.
3. Acoustic alarm in case of mains failure, manual reset or summation.
K. Individual changeover shall be provided per emergency circuit with free programming for
maintained or non-maintained light and 2 pole fusing conforming to VDE.
L. Failure recognition for each individual safety/exit luminaire in conjunction with proprietary
electronic ballasts including 2 wire monitoring module without additional data line.
2.6 CHANGEOVER MODULE
A. Each changeover module shall be freely programmable to suit type of luminaires connected
on outgoing circuits i.e. maintained, non-maintained or switch maintained. The individual
lamp monitoring circuits shall be included in the changeover module. Each changeover
module shall have LED indications for Circuit On and Lamp failure and shall be fit to
monitor up to 12 luminaires maximum as required by DIN VDE 0108/prEN 50171. All
outgoing circuit terminals shall be provided to monitor the sub distribution boards.
2.7 FINAL CIRCUIT MONITORING MODULE
A. Final lighting circuits shall be monitored for operation and when failure is detected in supply
voltage the circuit shall be automatically be transferred from normal supply to battery mode.
The feature shall be incorporated in ECBS.
2.8 CHARGER

A. Charger module shall be microprocessor controlled Switch Mode Rectifier (SMR) module
with temperature compensated constant voltage charging. Automatic boost charging
facility shall be built in to the system depending on the required total battery capacity. It
shall have charging and supervising method for failure indication of battery circuits as well
as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90 percent recharge of a fully
discharged battery set within 20 hours. It shall come complete with earth leakage monitor
for battery circuit monitoring. It shall be provided with LED indications for:
1. Battery Operation.
2. Charger on.
3. Boost Charging
4. Mains operation.
5. Battery capacity >10 percent, >50 percent, 100 percent.
6. Charger failure.
7. Insulation fault.
8. Earth Fault
B. It shall have potential free indicator contacts for:
1. Charger failure alarm.

2. High charging Voltage Alarm
3. Low Voltage Charging Alarm
4. Charger fault alarm.
C. It shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. It shall include plug-in-type
terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and battery accessible via the front plate
of the charger.
2.9 BATTERIES
A. Batteries shall be maintenance free, rated 500C sealed leak-proof lead acid gas
recombination (GRC) type battery with following system features.
1. Extremely low gas generation, requiring no special ventilation.

2. Acid density between 1.24 kg/l and 1/26 kg/l.
3. Low self discharge rate.
4. Maintenance free special connector with pole covers meeting the rules of prevention of
the accidents.
5. Pole ducts tight to electrolyte and atmospheric oxygen.
6. Absolutely maintenance free over the whole service life.
7. Immobilized electrolyte design, with Absorbed Glass Matt (AGM) separators.
8. Permanently sealed pressure release safety vent.
9. Operates at extremely low internal pressure.
B. Date of manufacture to be stamped on each battery cell/monoblock.
C. Guaranteed life is not to be less than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less than
80 percent under normal expected service
2.10 CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE
A. The central monitoring shall be via central group monitoring hardware and software,
monitoring and programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of latest technology PC with
monitor, keyboard and printer. The unit shall operate with latest visualization software to
give detailed text, address and information of all luminaires connected to system. It shall
have programming/automatic testing facility for time duration test, function test, location of
luminaire, manual rest and acoustic alarm. It shall have facility for software interface to the
BMS to provide transmission of all data records as desired.
2.11 EXIT AND SAFETY LUMINAIRE

A. Exit luminaires shall have metal body and shall be installed along the defined escape
routes and shall be visible from all points of the escape route. The luminaires shall be
placed above each exit door, at each intersection with other escape routes and corridors
and near each change of direction. All exit luminaires shall be operated via an emergency
central battery system (ECBS).
B. All exit luminaires shall have pictogram legends as per DIN 4844/CEN TC. 169 or markings
as per local civil defence requirements with viewing distance of 36 m or 16 m based on the
length of the corridor. The luminaire shall be built according to NFPA 101/NFPA 170and
shall have a contrast factor of 0.2.
C. Special focus shall be given to the location of the safety luminaires to cover specific
hazards and to highlight safety equipment installed. Intersections with other corridors,
changes in floor level, staircases (each flight has to receive direct light), fire alarm operation
equipment, fire fighting equipment and other life safety equipment as identified.
D. Safety luminaires shall be as well installed in toilets with areas more than 8 sq.m, lifts cars,
generator room, electrical control or plant rooms, and in other areas where hazards are
encountered by the occupants of the facility. All areas shall be illuminated with a uniformity
factor of Emin/Emax = 0.4 to provide a minimum lighting level to 10 lux and 100 lux in
electrical and control rooms.
E. Unless otherwise stated, this lighting level shall be achieved by integrated safety luminaires
operated by an emergency central battery system. This shall be best achieved by using
high frequency electronic ballasts operating at full load. Alternatively subject to the approval
of the engineer and architect, purpose designed and optimised safety luminaires including
high frequency electronic control gear for lower power consumption fittings may be used.
F. All exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy accessible
addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts shall have a built-in or
separate monitoring facility. Outside of every installed exit and safety luminaire a label
(red/white) with the circuit and luminaire reference number shall be installed.
2.12 HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC CONTROL GEAR
A. All safety and exit luminaires shall have an electronic ballast with monitoring facility and
easy accessible address module shall have an automatic cut-out fuse for failures within the
lamp circuit. All electronic ballasts for the EIT and safety luminaires shall be manufactured
by the emergency lighting system manufacturer.
B. Whenever the main lighting fixtures are used as emergency lighting, the Contractor shall
ensure coordination between both manufacturers.
2.13 LOCATION OF MAIN CENTRAL BATTERY PANEL
A. The central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximum room
temperature of 30 deg C (86 deg. F). The room shall be air conditioned using a
recirculation air-conditioning system without any special battery room ventilation
requirements. The panel shall be installed in areas with a maximum room temperature of
30 deg C (86 deg. F). All panels shall be connected to the central station for central group
monitoring.
2.14 LON MODULE
A. All Central Battery panels shall have the facility to transfer complete data to the building
management system in LON works standard or approved equal. LON module should
facilitate complete integration at automation level with BMS system to indicate the Voltage,
Charge, Current, battery capacity, failure information including individual light faults with
location details from the Central battery system. It should be possible to conduct function
and duration tests from the BMS computer.

2.15 SUB CIRCUIT MONITORING
A. For circuits in non-maintained mode a single or 3 phase voltage monitor, as the case may
be, shall be installed in the lighting sub-distribution boards or a single phase control relay
shall be installed in final circuit when required. The 24 V monitoring loop shall be
interrupted if the supply line in the sub-distribution board fails or the monitored circuits fails
and shall trigger the emergency lighting supply system over to maintained (ECBS) mode.
B. Each panel shall have the facility of additional monitoring loop(s) when required.
2.16 AUTOMATIC AND CYCLIC FUNCTION MONITORING AND LOGGING FACILITY
A. An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic charger
and battery monitor at intervals of 5 minutes or less with daily/weekly, function test of the
complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring, luminaires, registration and
logging of tests and results. A manually operated test feature shall also be provided in
addition to the automatically operated testing feature. The monitoring system and data
transfer shall be carried out based on a current multiplexer system in DC mode.
2.17 WIRING
A. Wiring, both power and control wiring between the central battery, panels and luminaires
shall be carried out in fire retardant silicone rubber insulated cable, with overall PVC sheath
bonding to coated aluminum foil, MICC to BS EN 60702: Part 1, BS 6387 Cat B, with at
least 2 hours fire rating or equivalent cable of suitable size as per the local civil defence
requirements.
B. All wiring shall conform to the requirements of Division 16, relevant specification sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 900 mm in
front of unit.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment and components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical

Materials and Methods."
B. All emergency luminaries shall be labeled with 100mm width yellow color labels containing
black lettering clearly identifying the circuit number and the ECBS unit.
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Supervision of unit installation, connections, and

adjustments by a factory-authorized service representative. Report results in writing.
B. Tests: Perform tests listed below according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test
unit functions, operations, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies
with Specifications. Perform tests on completion of unit installation and after building
circuits have been energized. Provide instruments to permit accurate observation of tests.
Include the following tests:
1. Simulate Malfunctions: Verify protective device operation.

2. Demonstrate low-battery-voltage shutdowns, and transfers due to normal source failure
and restoration.

3. Verify emergency-supply duration.

4. Test for Successful Supply: Operate each type of load served by the unit for this
Project without symptoms of abnormal supply such as noise, vibration, or pulsation of
the load or its output. All light fixtures (E), ceiling roses, modules, wires, etc are to be
identified.
C. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and abrasions in finish to match original finish.
Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1. Conduct a minimum of 2 hours training as specified in Division 1 Section "Contract

Closeout."
2. Schedule training with the Employer with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Battery Equalization: Manually equalize charging of battery cells according to the battery
manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 16289
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and
communication equipment.

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral transient voltage surge
suppressors.
3. Division 16 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed transient voltage surge
suppressors.
4. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed transient voltage surge
suppressors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transient voltage suppression devices,

certifying that products furnished comply with the following testing and labeling requirements:
1. UL 1283 certification.
2. UL 1449 listing and classification.
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1. Test procedures used.

3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in maintenance

manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 WARRANTY

repair, restore or replace any defective components of surge suppressers that fail in materials or
workmanship during the specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION January 2019 16289-1

A. IEEE Compliance: Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage
AC Power Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide for Surge
Suppressor Testing."
B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices."
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449,

"Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors."
A. Service Conditions: Rate surge protective devices for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system
operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 deg C.
3. Humidity: up to 85 percent, non-condensing.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for

maintenance.
B. Coordinate surge protective devices with Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and
Control."
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type, provided where indicated with the
following features and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection status.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240 kA per phase.
C. Connection means: permanently wired.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits.
2.3 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type provided where indicated with the
following features and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection status.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per phase.
C. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits.
2.4 CONTROL AND DATA TERMINALS
A. Protectors for copper control, data, antenna, telephone conductors entering the building from
the outside shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of line being protected.
2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance
ground.
B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors between suppressor and
points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide multipole, 15-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for the suppressor,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A.
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing surge protective devices, but before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.19. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest after repairs or replacements are made.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's installation

requirements.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
installation.

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SECTION 16350
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Kahramaa Specification ED-04-035 (11/0.433 kV) latest version during the Construction
Stage.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes distribution and power transformers with medium-voltage primaries.

2. Division 16 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for transformers integral to
substations.
3. Division 16 Section "Busways" and/or “Busducts” for busway connections between
transformers and secondary distribution equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections,
and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features.
Submit Manufacturers' catalogues.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field-
installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products

furnished comply with requirements.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards.
E. Routine Tests: Each transformer unit is to undergo routine tests at the manufacturer's
works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports, prior to
shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of equipment
under site conditions.
F. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Plans and elevations, with dimensions and weights.
2. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
3. One-line diagram of power system.
4. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
G. Sound-Level Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's sound-level tests applicable

to equipment for this Project.
requirements.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS January 2019 16350-1

I. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing transformers

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards: IEC 694.
2. Power transformers: IEC 76, 354, 726.
3. Kahramaa Specification ED-04-035 latest version during the Construction Stage.
1.5 WARRANTY

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
A. Temporary Heating: For indoor, dry-type transformers, apply temporary heat according to
manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit
throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is
continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of transformers with other construction.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1 MANUFACTURERS
1.2 DRY TYPE CAST RESIN POWER TRANSFORMER
A. Type: 3-phase, indoor type, two winding, solventless cast epoxy resin, vacuum pressure
impregrated windings, with minimum class F insulation on inner LV cores and class F on
outer MV cores, rated for continuous operation under worst site ambient conditions at full
load, and complying with IEC 726.
B. Insulation and Encapsulation: Humidity resistant, explosion and fire-resistant, self-

extinguishing, tropicalized, giving non-toxic gases in the event of fire.
C. Tapping is to be provided on MV and LV side by means of re-connectable links (off-circuit)

for +/-2.5, +/-5% of rated voltages, giving +/-5% tapping on transformers with 5%
impedance voltage, and +/-4% tapping on transformers with 4% impedance voltage.

D. Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil assemblies, and
between base and housing.
E. Cooling fans, where specified, are to permit 30% increase in rated power.
F. Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting hooks or lugs,
towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
G. Temperature monitoring is to be provided by externally mounted tripping units giving alarm

and trip at two stages with about 20°C temperature difference, actuated by three embedded
thermistor sensors in LV windings (hot-spot). Additional thermal monitoring/control is to be
provided for cooling fan operation.
H. Terminals: Arranged as described in paragraph 1.2K hereof and/or as shown on the

Drawings, and are to be compatible for copper or aluminum cable termination.
I. Earthing bolts or copper pads are to be provided on main frame of transformer. Earthing
busbars are to be provided on LV and MV sides of housing.
J. Housing: Sheet steel construction, IP 21 with roof fans for indoor installation.
K. Characteristics:
1. Rated Power (net without fans): As shown on the drawings at 45° ambient.
2. Frequency: 50 Hz.
3. Rated Voltage:
a. MV Side (primary):
Nominal Voltage:11kV
Maximum Voltage: 12kV
b. LV Side (secondary): 380 – 415 V /240Vas per the local Authorities.
4. Winding Connections: Dyn11 with neutral insulated and brought out.
5. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current: 6% for 1600 kVA.
6. Rated Power Frequency Withstand-Voltage: 75 kV.
7. Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 28 kV.
8. Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 500 MVA.
9. Duration of Short-Circuit-Withstand: 2 seconds.
10. Terminal Connection System as required.
L. Accessories are to include the following:

1. Earthing switch, fault-making type, on MV side of housing, interlocked with door, visible
from outside the enclosure, with trip contact for tripping MV circuit breaker before
closing earthing switch.
2. Fans and fans control for extra rating of transformer.
3. Four re-orientable roller rim wheels and attachment accessories.
4. Winding temperature sensor with 4 steps alarms to be connected to BMS (preheat,
heat, overheat, shutdown).
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and components
may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, provided the
required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification of the units
indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance procedures.

B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly
installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends
and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power Authorities
requirements.
H. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in Division 16 Section "Grounding

and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to Engineer.
B. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and relays.
C. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's

tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.
E. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
F. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement.
G. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and
installation.

H. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's
1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and
damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed.
Include internal inspection through access panels and covers for dry-type transformers.
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's
published torque values.
3. Insulation Resistance: Perform meg-ohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding
to winding and winding to ground.
4. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
5. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20 deg C
standard.
6. Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios deviating
more than 0.5 percent from calculated or measured ratio for an adjacent coil is not
acceptable.
7. Winding Resistance: Measure for windings at nominal tap setting. Measured
resistance, deviating more than 1 percent, from that of adjacent windings, is not
acceptable.
8. Liquid-Filled Transformer, Insulation Power-Factor Test: Determine overall dielectric
loss and power factor for windings' insulation. Limit test voltage to line-to-ground
voltage of windings being tested.
I. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified
requirements.
2.5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation
requirements.
2.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other

spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean
components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
2.7 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment

throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages and
tap settings and submit with test results.
2.8 DEMONSTRATION
installation.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 16410
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Comply with Kahramaa Regulations & Specifications.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used
for the following:
1. Service disconnecting means.

2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle
switches used for disconnecting means.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.
C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying

with one set of approved Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances

and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS January 2019 16410-1

D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless otherwise
agreed in writing by the Engineer.
E. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
A. Comply with related Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access
doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)
A. Rating: 500 V, 2, 3 or 4 poles, load break, short-circuit make, in accordance with IEC
408, utilization category 22 for heating and lighting loads, category 23 for motor circuits,
and with ampere rating shown on the Drawings.
B. Design: non-fused, air-break switch disconnector, single throw, safety type, housed in
separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each pole.
C. Operating Mechanism: quick-make, quick-break, independent of operator, with external

operating handle mechanically interlocked to prevent opening the door unless switch is
in open position. Switch disconnector is to have provision for bypassing interlock.
Position of handle is to be positive and clearly indicated on cover.
D. Enclosure: general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 42, and weather-proof type
cast-metal or sheet steel for outdoor installations IP 65, unless otherwise required or
shown on the Drawings. Locking of operating handle is to be possible in open and
closed positions.
2.2 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breaker: Refer to respective type specifications in Division 16 Section

"Switchboards".
B. Enclosures: Meet environmental conditions of installed location in accordance with IEC

529.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

enclosures before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of equipment. Exact

locations are to be determined from detail drawings. Any condition that would place
equipment in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer.
B. Waterproof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and connection to

conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment. Protect equipment against damage

after installation and until handed over.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control
and indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

A. Visual Inspection: Equipment is to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full
load without any signs of heating.
C. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist
in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

TRANSFER SWITCHES
SECTION 16415
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switch.

2. Bypass/isolation switch.
1. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer

switches for fire pumps.
2. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer
switches for fire pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.
C. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch,

power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer
switch and bypass/isolation switch.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with
requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit closing
and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance with
performance requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List
all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions, including
software, where applicable.
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a

locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional
advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare
parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy
the Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
TRANSFER SWITCHES January 2019 16415-1

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and related
control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with IEC 947-6.
D. Comply with UL 1008, NFPA 70 and 110.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Locally assembled transfer switches meeting the Specifications are NOT acceptable.
C. Only Type Tested Products are acceptable.
2.2 MAINS FAILURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)
A. Type: Conforming to IEC 947-6 or UL 1008 and to applicable standards. Wall or floor
mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal construction to control cubicle, comprising
two main contractors and controls necessary for automatic transfer of power supply from
normal source to stand-by source, voltage sensing control relay and time delay relays to
signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches and indicating lights etc. as necessary for
the required operation of the system.
B. Operation: When voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting
(85- 100%) of normal supply, for an adjustable period of 1 - 300 seconds, power failure
relay is to actuate engine starting control, whilst normal mains contactor is to open. After
an adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from sensing stabilized rated voltage and frequency
of generator at the ATS, (Voltage pick-up adjustable from 85% to 100% nominal);
frequency pick-up adjustable from 90% to 100% nominal, the emergency contactor is to
close. Upon restoration of normal mains supply to above the preset limits, adjustable
between 90% and 100% of rated voltage and/or frequency, for an adjustable preset period
of 2 - 30 minutes, emergency contactor is to open and after a presettable pause 0.5 to 30
seconds minimum, normal mains contactor is to close; time delay is to be effective in both
directions.
C. Engine Shutdown: Initiate after retransfer of the load to normal source. (Refer to generator
set controls upon shut-down).
D. ATS for Large Motor Loads: Include factory-installed and factory-wired internal motor
control under-voltage and timing relays. Relays control designated starters to de-energize
motors prior to transfer and re-energize them selectively at adjustable time intervals after
transfer. Control connection to motor starters is to be through wiring external to the ATS.
Time delay for motor starting is to be individually adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds.
Relay contacts are to be rated for actual motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents, or
for pilot duty as indicated.
E. ATS for Large Motor Loads: Where indicated, include factory-installed and factory-wired
internal in-phase monitor relay. The relay controls transfer so it occurs when the 2 sources
or source and load are synchronized in phase. The relay compares phase relationship and
frequency difference between the normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer
when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if the transfer can be
completed within 60 electrical degrees. In-phase transfer is initiated only if both sources
are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage. Where an
in-phase monitor is to be provided, this is to defeat the 'pause' in the transfer contactors
and assume control of the switching operation.

F. Mechanical and Electrical Interlocks: Required to prevent contactors from being closed
simultaneously at any time. Transfer mechanism is to be powered from the source to
which the load is being transferred.
G. Selector Switches are to be provided as follows:
1. Operating selector switch is to include the following:

a. Normal: Generator set is set for automatic operation and the generator set starts if
a power outage occurs, as described above.
b. Test: Stimulates a power outage, starts and runs the generating set as Normal
position.
c. Stop: Shuts down the generating set and prevents it from starting. This is used
when servicing the generator.
2. Another selector switch is to be provided for two positions, "With load" and "Without
load" for testing or exercising:
a. "With Load": the generating set is to carry the load during testing or exercising
periods.
b. "Without Load": generating set is to start but not assume the load.
H. Pilot Lights are to indicate which contactor is on.
I. Instruments are to include voltmeter and ammeter with selector switches.
J. Contactors are to comply with IEC 947, and UL Standard 1008, and be 3-phase, 4-pole,
magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current
inductive or non-inductive loads under normal service conditions and are to have
replaceable main arcing contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to withstand,
without welding or burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating for 4
seconds upon closing and are to be capable of closing on the heaviest short-circuit of the
system and withstand the short circuit for period required by upstream short circuit
protective device to operate. Three N.O. and three N.C. spare contacts are to be provided
on each contactor.
K. Wiring: Moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper conductors,
modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable numbering strips
and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring is to be used on all
hinged/draw-out components.
L. Connections are to be made at a front terminal block with no live metal exposed. Power
cables are to terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to receive
specified cables. Cable glands and gland plates are to be provided.
M. Metal Cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected by flexible
protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar or terminal.
N. Earthing: Earthing bar is to be provided for connection of protective earthing conductors,

using set-screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.
O. Ferrules: Wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
2.3 ATS WITH MANUAL BYPASS SWITCHES
A. Provide Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer operation with
a drawout isolation system. Bypass switch is to consist of non-automatic Kirk-key
interlocked switches, fully rated, manually operated and rated for same loads as automatic
transfer switch.

B. Bypass switch is to provide bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a

selector switch and a permanently mounted external lever, mechanically interlocked to
prevent paralleling of sources.
C. An engine start switch is to be provided to allow generator set to be started when bypass is
on emergency sources.
D. Bypass switch is to be of the make-before-break type. A dead source lockout is to prevent

any possibility of bypassing the load to an unenergized source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Level and anchor unit to floor.
B. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications
requirements of transfer switches as recommended by the manufacturer. Increase
raceway sizes at no additional cost to Employer if necessary to accommodate required
wiring.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by the Standards.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing in addition to tests recommended
by the manufacturer:
1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:

a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-
resistance tester. Include control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure
recommended by manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified minimum
resistance.
b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
c. Inspect For:
I. Physical damage.
II. Proper installation and connection
III. Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
d. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
e. Perform manual transfer operation.
2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function

for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.

d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations.
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-
down and shutdown sequence.
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
installation.

SWITCHBOARDS
SECTION 16441
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Kahramaa Regulations and Specifications
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Board(s) work for low voltage (LV) distribution,
ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and supports.
B. Connection to BACS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc.
as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BACS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.
C. Requirements of the following Sections apply to this Section:

2. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDB: Main distribution board.
B. CT: Current Transformer.
C. VT: Voltage Transformer.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. RMS: Root mean square.
F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main Distribution Board".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards including
all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating compliance with the
Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article, equipment characteristics, details of
construction, operating data, dimensions and weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous
items including incoming and outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at
busbars, isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering instruments
etc. Boards are to be factory assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).
to, the following:
1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact dimensions, and
weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and clearances.
SWITCHBOARDS January 2019 16441-1

3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.

4. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and busbars
and types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs, VTs etc.)
5. Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
6. Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
7. Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments, busbar
connections etc.
8. Utility Company’s metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
9. Mimic-bus diagram.
C. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for equipment
manufacture:
1. Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and

characteristics, short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault
currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based on specific
coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective
short-circuit currents at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for microprocessor
controlled trip units.
D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color selection.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and routine test
records, in accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
H. Manufacturer’s field service report.
I. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main distribution board load
connections have been made, for record.
J. Maintenance Data: For main distribution boards and components to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in
Division 1 include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced locally based installer with minimum five
years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution boards
units similar to those required for this project.

B. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm, based in the State of Qatar , regularly engaged in the
manufacture of main distribution boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:
1. IEC 439-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies: Type-Tested and
Partially Type-Tested Assemblies.
2. IEC 947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Circuit Breakers.
3. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.
4. IEC 831-1 & 2 for power factor correction capacitors.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable local regulations/code

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These will have precedence over other
codes/standards nominated for the project, unless otherwise approved in writing.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for main
distribution boards, including clearances between main distribution boards, and adjacent
surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. Deliver
MDBs and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate
handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for MDBs
and components to protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to ensure that no
damage has occurred during shipment.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
C. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components.

Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of
excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained
therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged
equipment with new.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 m.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components with other
construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent surfaces,
raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency

replacement and/or one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable (consumable)
contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and similar
devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection
and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as appropriate for
type of switchgear supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Important: The form and type of Main Switch boards shall be Form 3B Type 2.
A. Generally: Main distribution boards are to be dead-front type, metal enclosed, multi-cubicle,
floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage, and 600 V rated
operational voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear, manually or manually and electrically
operated, as shown on the Drawings, with matching vertical sections to form a continuous
integral and rigid structure. Outgoing sections are to be of equal width.
B. Generally: Coordinate with Building Management System (BMS) supplier and provide all
necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc, necessary for the functions specified in the
BACS schedules and/or shown on the Drawings.
C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel
enclosures, minimum thickness 1.5 mm, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer
and finished with thermal polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, gray color (RAL
7703 or ANSI 61) to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin, dust and rodent proof, IP42
protection to IEC 144 for indoor installations, with adequate lifting means and base-frames
and capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to floor without additional sills.
D. Ventilation: Compartments are to be ventilated, by approved methods complying with the

Standards.
E. Main Distribution Boards are to have a short circuit withstand current of 44kA for 3 sec.
F. Fastenings between structural members are to be bolted.
G. Arrangement is to permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter enclosure as
indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without inconvenience to
installation or maintenance.
H. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment are to be provided for
extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as appropriate for type of
switchgear.
I. Spare and space positions are defined as follows:

1. Spare position: Fully equipped enclosure with switchgear

2. Space position: Fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.
J. Busbars: Site rated for normal current as shown on the Drawings or at least site rated to
same rating of main circuit breaker frame size, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-
circuit duty as specified. Busbars are to be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature
rise to allowable insulation or equipment temperature ratings, and to maximum 90 deg C.
Connections and buswork are to be bolted with copper alloy hardware and are to be
accessible for inspection and maintenance unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer. Contact surfaces are to be Electro-silver plated.
K. Connections from busbar to switchgear are to be rated to carry full continuous current
rating of switchgear frame and are to be insulated.
L. Full size neutral is to be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus is to be insulated and
separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at every bus section.
Links are to be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.
M. Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance with
the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at each end),
and required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
N. Earth bus is to be half size of phase buses
O. Switchboard Type: Switchboard(s) are to be of the following type(s) unless otherwise stated
specifically in drawings.
1. Form 3B Type 2.
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type.
3. Tie: Withdrawable type.
4. Outgoing: Fixed type.
P. Withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section is to consist of compartmented unit(s),

stationary part with rear busbar and cable connection compartments and front draw-out
circuit breaker assembly. Partitions between sections are to be bolted steel plate and
partitions between compartments are to be tough solid insulating removable bolted barriers.
Each unit is to have hinged lockable front door with grip-handle and door mounted
instrumentation.
Q. Drawout circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts, wheels and interlocks
to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open position, and to
prevent closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three positions (connect, test,
disconnect). Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to be approved worm and lever
mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door with breaker in any of the three
positions and when removed. External position indicator is to be provided. Fixed
disconnecting primary contacts are to be accessible and replaceable from front and are to
be silver plated copper. Moving primary disconnect contacts are to consist of self-aligning,
silver plated, spring pressure, finger-cluster, copper contact fitted on line and load studs of
circuit breaker.
R. Front and rear accessible, front and rear aligned, individually mounted fixed MCCB
distribution sections as basic construction for form 3 and form 4 switchboards, are to be
compartmentalized construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker compartments,
busbar system compartments and rear cable termination compartments (as per the form
type selected), with insulating barriers between front compartments and busbar
compartments and between rear compartments and busbar compartment (removable for
maintenance). MCCBs are to be closely coupled to busbars (to minimize chances of bus-
side faults), and to rear cable terminals, through compatibly frame-sized insulated
connectors. MCCB modules are to be covered on the front, by recessed frame-type bolted

covers, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear
are to be covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
S. All Enclosures for DB, SMDB, MCC Panels shall be from the same manufacturer of the
switchgear, and shall be made from Europe/USA. Third Party Enclosures will not be
accepted.
2.3 POWER AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (PACBs)
A. Type: Encased in high strength, high temperature resistant, molded plastic insulating
materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosure at point of
application, tested to approve standards, manually operated for normal functions, and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip power is to be derived from main
power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to reliably trip circuit breaker. Fixed mounted
circuit breaker is to be rear connected.
B. Construction: Manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings,

with two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism, quick-make, quick-break type,
electrically and mechanically trip-free, to prevent maintaining circuit breaker closed against
over-current condition whether under manual or automatic operation. Electrically operated
circuit breakers are to have integrally mounted, spring charging motor mechanism
automatically recharged upon closing. Both manually or manually and electrically operated
circuit breakers are to have mechanical built-in charging lever and are to include open and
close direct acting push buttons. Stored energy provision is to allow open/close/open
sequence of operation without use of external energy. Circuit breaker is to have arc-
quenching device on each pole and replaceable arcing contacts.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device, where
required, control power is to be 120V ac obtained from in-built MDB control power
transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker. Where shunt trip and/or
under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor trip device is to be provided.
D. Rating: 4-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 600 V class, with continuous
current rating (frame size) as shown on the Drawings, ranging between 400 A and 4000 A
(400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, and 4000 A), fully rated (100%) for service under
worst site conditions. Breakers are to be rated for a symmetrical rms service short-circuit
breaking capacity as shown on the Drawings, to IEC 947-2 sequence II (rated service
short-circuit breaking capacity) at specified voltage and frequency, meeting IEC 947-2,
sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of utilization category B), tested in an
enclosure substantially the same as the enclosure in which they are to be installed.
E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for
compatible frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and with
transparent, sealable cover. Trip unit is to measure sinusoidal and non–sinusoidal current
wave forms (fundamental to thirteenth harmonic) by continuously sampling each phase
through out every cycle. Trip unit is to be direct acting trip device, current transformer
operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires no external power. It is to have
adjustable current setting (0.5 - 1.0 times trip unit rating) with adjustable long-time delay,
short-time pick-up and short-time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay instantaneous
over current pickup. Current setting range is to be by means of replaceable trip-units within
the maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker is to remain in the trip-free
position. Earth-fault trip is to be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of normal current rating of
the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A, with adjustable time delay between 0.1 and
0.5 seconds. Short time delay is to be adjustable in steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with
pre-settable or adjustable time band having maximum delay of 0.3 to 0.5 seconds.
Instantaneous trip is to be adjustable in steps at least 2 – 13 times the trip unit rating.
Over-ride protection is to allow full sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of Circuit Breaker.
F. Trip Unit shall have the metering functions for each phase comprising:

1. Voltage.
2. Frequency.
3. Energy.
4. Total power.
5. Peak power demand.
G. Trip Unit shall have protective relays including:
1. Over-voltage
2. Voltage unbalance.
3. Current unbalance
4. Reverse power.
H. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker operation,
long time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short time over current
trip, ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to count long time, short
time, instantaneous and ground fault trips.
I. Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator is to be mechanical
and is to give indication even when control power has been lost.
J. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every phase.
Current sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be encased in epoxy
filled plastic housing to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally
mounted in breakers.
K. Neutral Current Transformer: Provide on the neutral conductor of each main, tie or outgoing
circuit having earth fault protection. Rating and characteristics of the neutral current
transformer are to be suitable for proper operation of the earth fault protection system.
L. Circuit breaker accessories are to include the following:
1. Padlocking or key-locking provisions for all positions (disconnected, test, connected,

closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, short-circuit, and ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and reset button
4. Operations counter.
5. On/off pilot lights.
6. Shunt-trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.
7. Bell alarm for remote over-current trip indication.
M. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for remote
monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
N. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit breakers (as
shown on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the circuit breaker is to be
disabled in the connect position and an additional electrical push button is to be provided
for the closing of the circuit breaker through the breaker’s shunt close coil. The electrical
interlock is to be provided on both shunt trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to
perform simultaneous tripping and inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker.
2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. MCCBs generally are to be thermal-magnetic type for ratings below 400 A frame size,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. MCCBs 400 A and larger are to be electronic
solid-state trip type. All circuit breakers are to be 3-pole unless otherwise shown on
drawings.

B. Construction: Totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high quality, high
temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation at 70
deg. C within enclosures, to approved standards, provided with quick-make, quick-break,
trip-free switching mechanism manually operated by front toggle type handle and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have
common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts are to be non-
welding silver alloy with arc quenching metallic devices of approved construction. Cable
terminals are to be solder-less anti-turn box lug or clamp type with set screws suitable for
copper or aluminum cables.
C. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers are to include, on each pole, a bi-metallic inverse time-
delay over current trip element for small overloads and instant magnetic over current trip
elements for operation under short-circuit conditions. Circuit breakers 250 A frame size
and larger are to have adjustable instantaneous trips.
D. Thermal over-current trips are to be compensated to allow for ambient temperature higher
at breaker than at protected circuit or device. Compensation is to be applicable between
25 and 50 deg. C. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment is not to
exceed maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.
E. Electronic trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay setting
range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time delay range 3 to
10 times maximum trip rating with maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and
instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip
units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg. C.
Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to be adjustable
between 0.2 and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up with maximum time delay of 0.2
seconds, and is to be suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button
is to be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
F. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
G. Interchangeable Trips: Circuit breakers 250 A to 400 A frame size is to have

interchangeable thermal and electronic trip units.
H. Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers are to have sealed covers. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trips are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
I. Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with continuous
duty at site conditions, and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC 947-2,
sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity), and maximum trip rating as
shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to
meet IEC 947-2 test sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B
(with intended short time withstand capability).
J. Accessories: Circuit breaker design is to allow addition of electrical operator, control and
interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary switches,
padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.
2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS
A. Generally: Instruments are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation. Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments
is to be within 2% unless otherwise specified or dictated by Kahramaa. CT’s shall be rated
and of class stated on drawing and dictated by Kahramaa.

B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system
voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with nominal current of
plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and secondary
fuses and disconnecting device.
I. Frequency Meter
2.6 POWER FACTOR (PF) CORRECTION
Provide an automatic power factor correction system for each switchboard as shown in the
drawings.
The automatic power factor correction system shall be housed in a separate section of the
switchboard. The enclosure shall be top entry access, forced air cooled, ventilated and
furnished with earthing lugs. An external door operator shall be provided to de-energize the unit
when the door is open. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with key lock provisions.
Controller shall be a solid state programmable multi-step reactive current sensing unit with
digital display capabilities of power factor, active current, reactive current and number of
energized steps. The controller shall provide the following features:
- Front panel control buttons for manual capacitor switching.

- Programmable capacitor switching delay from 10 seconds to 120 seconds.
- Loss of voltage dropout when a 15 ms Power interruption occurs.
- Front panel LED indicators for leading or lagging current.
- Non-sequential capacitor switching.
The controller of capacitor shall be stepped in 50 KVAR maximum steps.
Fuses shall be provided in each phase of each capacitor. Fuse shall be current limiting type,
installed on the line side of the contractor and have a 80,000 ampere symmetrical rating. Fuses
shall be located to facilitate safe replacement. All capacitor fuses shall be rated to protect the
contractor, capacitor and interconnecting wiring and mounted in 3 pole fuse blocks and must be
replaceable without removal of power wiring.
Torroidal choke coils shall be included in all three phases of each capacitor bank to minimize
the effects of voltage spikes on sensitive electronic equipment. The choke coil shall be
designed to limit the capacitor inrush current to a value equal to or less than the capacitor
switching rating of the contactor. The toroidal choke coils shall be braced to withstand a 80,000
symmetrical ampere short circuit.
A blown fuse indicating light shall be provided for each capacitor branch fuse. The neon light
will illuminate when a capacitor branch fuse operates. The neon light shall be door mounted
with an engraved black plastic with 6mm white lettering identifying the branch capacitor fuse
circuit affected.

Capacitors shall be total dry-type self-healing metalized propylene dielectric type with double
insulation and resin casing vacuum. The capacitor shall be completed with built-in internal
protection electric fuse with each coil and overpressure disconnection device. The operating
temperature from – 40deg.C to 50degC> the discharging resistor shall be self-contained for
each capacitor. It shall be withstand for voltage overload for 1.18 miminal voltage for 24hr.day.
Contactor’s shall be three pole, 600 VAC rated with 240 operating coils. The contactor shall be
capacitor rated to withstand the inrush currents imposed by dynamic capacitor switching.
Main breaker shall be mounted inside the enclosure and have AL/CU terminal lugs, thermal
magnetic trip and door operator’s handle.
Acceptable Manufacturer’s
- ABB
- Siemens
2.7 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Provide ground fault protection on all circuit breakers whether incoming, outgoing or tie,
which are rated 1000 A or more. Ground fault protection shall be as specified for particular
breaker type used.
2.8 WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
B. Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected, by bare
copper conductors’ not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for
multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables are to
be used in proximity to higher temperature components and as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp are to be provided in
switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.
B. Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify Engineer in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install main distribution boards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable
requirements of applicable standards or codes approved.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
and equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units and components.
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly
installed.
F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends
and termination fittings required for power and control cables.
H. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with an

approved scheme.
I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat and two
finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as required by
Engineer.
J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for main
distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear
acrylic plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board compartment with
engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for main distribution boards with ground continuity
to main electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to Engineer.

B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types,
sizes, and wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.
C. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer’s torque

tightening specification.
D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical
inspection and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests the
Engineer may require to check compliance of installation with the Specification, including,
but not limited to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check insulation
resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and between neutral and
earth.
F. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay characteristics
of circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition. Measure and record all test
results and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturer’s data.
G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-current
primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance with the
Standard specified (IEC 439 or BS 5486: Part 1) for FBAs assembled from standardized
components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine tests are also to be carried out
on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by Engineer.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of main distribution boards.

Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed
air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

PANELBOARDS
SECTION 16442
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Kahramaa Regulations & Specifications.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Panelboards for distribution and subdistribution of electric power and for protection of
circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of feeders,
sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

2. Distribution panelboards.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc.
as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.
D. Busbars and Main Circuit Breakers shall be size in accordance with NFPA 72 and
Kahramaa Regulations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.
B. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
C. LP, PP, SDP: Final branch circuit panelboards, power panelboards and subdistribution
panelboards respectively, for secondary lighting and power distribution with either miniature
circuit breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protection on sub-feeder or
branch circuits, as shown on the Drawings.
D. DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCCB protection on main incoming
and outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type 1 or Type 2.
E. Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied from emergency

source are prefixed with the letter E.
F. ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker.
G. RMS: Root mean square.
H. CDC: Change-Over-Contactors board for distribution of power to Apartment final

branch circuit panelboards from two sources: Utility side (already metered by EDL) and
Generator side (metered within the CDC itself).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PANELBOARDS January 2019 16442-1

A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected

2. Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and ratings
compensation at and above 40 deg C ambient conditions and corresponding
temperatures within the enclosures.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit series combinations of
circuit breakers.
B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test
records in accordance with the Standards.
to, the following:
1. Exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip ratings
of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and materials
used.
D. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation of
the installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting construction.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load
balancing.
G. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective

devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current
protective device.
A. Comply with
1. IEC 439-1 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies".

2. IEC 947-2 "Molded case circuit breakers"
3. IEC 898 "Miniature circuit breakers"
4. Other components where not specified are to comply with the relevant IEC standards
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of
equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

1.7 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard
using the following criteria:
1. Type of construction (MCB or MCCB), referring to type of branch circuit breakers.

2. Voltage, number of phases and wires.
3. Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
4. Main circuit breaker trip rating and frame size (maximum continuous rating) for MCCB
and MCB.
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Rated insulation voltage is to be in accordance with the respective standards.
B. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 42 for indoor
installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 144, and are to be
factory designed and assembled.
C. Earthing bar is to be half size the phase busbars.
D. Neutral bar is to be sized as the phase bus bars.
E. Protection is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
F. Circuit breakers are to be non-fused type.
G. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panelboards are to have one main incoming circuit breaker
and the required number of branch circuit breakers, arranged as shown on the schedules,
including spare circuit breakers and spaces for future expansion. Three-phase
panelboards are to be designed for sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices.
H. Branch Circuit Numbering: On 3-phase panelboard schedules, circuits 1 and 2 are to be

connected to red (R) phase, 3 and 4 to yellow (Y) phase, 5 and 6 to blue (B) phase etc., to
conform to branch circuit numbering shown on the drawings.
2.3 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved
manufacturer's standards and sizes.
B. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, are to be Electro-galvanized sheet steel
of gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded joints are
to be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform to the standards,
adequate for the utilized cables/wires subject to the engineers’ approval and in no case
less than 100 mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have pre-designed angles or threaded end
studs to support and adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
C. Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments,
to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps

engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable).
Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted
panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for surface
mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
D. Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock
and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple point latch
mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and
alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of
Engineer.
F. Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to be

provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are
specified. Directories are to be typed to identify panelboards and clearly indicate circuit
number and description of load.
G. Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5 mm thick, fully
weatherproofed (IP 55), without knockouts, but with removable sealed/gasketed bottom
gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.4 BUSBARS
A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on total maximum operating
temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or
clamped contact surfaces are to have maximum current density not exceeding
requirements of the approved standards. Aluminum is not to be used for busbars or
panelboard parts.
B. Design: Busbars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch circuit
devices can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional
machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full size without reduction. Busing and blank
plates are to allow installation of future circuit devices, where indicated on the drawings.
C. Rating: Busbar rating is to be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size. Where no
main circuit breaker is required, busbars are to have main lugs or disconnect switch, with
nominal rating equal to standard circuit breaker frame sizes, and as shown on the
drawings.
D. Short-circuit Duty: Busbars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit level at
point of application for three seconds without showing any signs of degradation.
E. Terminals and connections are to be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type. Screws

and bolts used for making copper/copper connections are to be hard copper alloy with lock
washers (riveted bus connections are not acceptable).
F. Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less box type
set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each branch circuit and one bolted
clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main incoming neutral wire.
Neutral is to be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
G. Earthing bar is to be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure connector
for main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each outgoing conductor, to
provide secure and reliable contact with all metal parts and enclosure.

2.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal
operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided
with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main
contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole
breakers are to have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles.
Ampere rating is to be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set
screws, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, circuit
breakers up to and including 400 a frame size, are to be thermal-magnetic type, having bi-
metallic inverse time delay over-current element for small overloads and instantaneous
magnetic over-current trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole.
Circuit breakers 250 A and larger are to have adjustable instantaneous trips.
C. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation so

that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or automatic
operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-quenching
devices of metallic grid construction.
D. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is
set to operate.
E. MCCBs for LPs, PPs, SDPs and DPs Type 2: Comply with IEC947-2 test sequences I, II,
utilization category A, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panelboard location, with preferred
ratings in accordance with following tables.
F. MCCBs for DP Type 1: Rated for maximum voltage of 600v A.C., 250 v D.C. and utilization
category b (with an intended short time withstand capability), and are to have rated service
short circuit breaking capacities (sequence ii) with suitably selected frame sizes and trip
ranges to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard location and
schedules shown on the drawings, with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or
50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the
circuit breaker rating plate.
G. Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which
corresponds with its maximum trip range listed below and which is to be related to
minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting
duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as specified.
H. Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at specified
voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the following table:
Trip range Minimum Symm. rms rated Rating

frame size(amperes) breaking capacity (ultimate in kA) volts(A.C.)
N H L
Thermal-magnetic
15-100 (1p) 18 - - 220/240
15-100 (2,3p) 18 - - 380/415
15-160 (2,3,4p) 35 60 100 380/415
70-250 (2,3,4p) 35 60 100 380/415
160-400 (2,3,4p) 35 60 100 380/415
Electronic
400-800 (2,3p) 40 60 100 380/415
800-1250 (2,3p) 50 65 100 380/415

I. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
J. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers 250 A frame size to 400 A
frame size are to have interchangeable trip units.
K. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
L. Compensation: Thermal over-current trips are to be ambient temperature compensated

between 25 and 50 deg C.
M. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers 400 A frame size and larger, are to be
solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating,
short time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time
of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous
rating. Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature
between -20 and +55 deg C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where
specified, and is to be suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip
button is to be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
N. Accessories: Circuit breakers are to be designed to accommodate standard attachments

including shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary and alarm switches, and
electrical operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame size) 100 A and over. Padlocking
devices are to be provided, where shown on the Drawings.
O. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) (GFCI) are provided as add-
on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where required and as shown on the Drawings.
Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-current and short-circuit protection,
is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip current sensitivity on breakers for branch
circuits is to be 10 mA, and for main breakers ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings.
Circuit breakers are to include current transformer with tripping coil assembly, test button
and trip free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth
faults.
P. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements. When
operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is to be less than 1/2
cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with breaker
construction.
Q. Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse time-delay
over-current characteristics for overload protection and instantaneous trip for short-circuit
protection. Operation of main contacts is to be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces
between contacts created by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms
value of prospective short-circuits current.
2.6 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)
A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 898.
B. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities (to IEC 947-2) are to be as follows:
1. 6 - 100 a MCB: 6, 10 or 16 kA at 240/415 v A.C.
C. Construction: MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to 70

degree C within panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and are to be constructed
from high quality, high temperature, molded insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and
characteristics are to be submitted for temperatures above 40 deg C.

D. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable for
mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
E. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close protection of

insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip is to operate at 7 - 10
times normal rated current (type 3 characteristic). Magnetic operation is to be in the current
limiting region and opening time is not to exceed 5 milliseconds.
F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 and 100 a,
calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating above 40
deg C is not to exceed 1% per deg C and loading is not to exceed 70% of circuit breaker
rating.
G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be add-on
devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable
sensitivities of 10mA, 30 mA, 100 mA and 300 mA are to be available for all ratings of 2-
pole and 4-pole circuit breakers. RCD’s used in final branch circuit panelboards shall be
rated for personnel protection and shall have a 10mA sensitivity.
H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch, auxiliary switch,
shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to be modular additions to the
circuit breakers.
2.7 MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS)
A. Molded Case Switch: Non-automatic on/off switching device of equal construction to

equivalent circuit breaker, having no over-current or fault protective elements, but marked
with maximum current withstand and voltage rating.
2.8 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (DP)
A. DP Type 1: Form 1 to IEC439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 1000V and a rated
operational voltage of 600V A.C., 240 V D.C., surface mounted to wall or free standing ,
with doors (unless otherwise shown on the Drawings), suitable for ratings of main breaker
and busbars ranging from 225 A to 1200 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire where specifically
indicated), suitably and orderly arranged for any selected combination of branch MCCBs
ranging from 150 A to 1200 A frame size and short-circuit interrupting ratings as shown on
the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than 225 A frame size, where indicated, may be
grouped on an integral sub-assembly mounted to main chassis.
B. DP Type 2: Form 1 to IEC439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 750V and a rated
operational voltage of 440V A.C., 240 V D.C. Panelboard is to be recessed or surface
mounted type, as shown on the Drawings, complete with trim and door, adjustable trim
fixation for flush panels, and with ratings of main circuit breaker and busbars of 100 A,
225/250 A, 400 A or 600 A, 3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole branch circuit breakers, 100 A
or 150/160 A frame size for voltages up to 600 V A.C., and 100 A to 225 A frame size at
240 V A.C.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and minimum 2 mm thick
for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin covers to shield circuit breakers,
terminals and live ends.
D. Interior of panelboard is to be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet steel chassis

minimum 2 mm thick, folded, flanged and reinforced, with busbars vertically arranged and
mounted on molded insulators.
E. Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation
grade of 3.5 kV for one minute.

F. Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit breakers)
and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.
2.9 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUB-DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS -

GENERALLY
A. Arrangement: Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified profile
and base, and one main circuit breaker. Single and multi-pole circuit breakers or other
devices are to occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of contactors and split-bus
arrangement or other devices is not to change regularity of standard box width.
B. Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and minimum 1.5 mm
thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim are to be adjustable to allow for
mis-alignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces (gutters) are to be at least 100
mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided where tap-off insulated split connectors are
required. Knockouts are to be provided in top or bottom of enclosures and are to provide a
neat and uniform conduit/cable terminal arrangement.
2.10 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUBDISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCCB
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 750V and a rated operational voltage of 600V A.C.
.250 V D.C. single-phase and neutral (SPN) or 3-phase and neutral (TPN), with bolted 1, 2,
or 3-pole MCCBs on branch circuits and 2, 3 or 4-pole MCCB on main incoming, listed by
UL File No. E2269 or equal, and meeting USA Specification W-P-115b Type 1 Class 1.
B. Branch circuit breakers are to be 1, 2 or 3-pole, rated 100 A frame size, with trip ratings
between 15 A and 100 A, and compatible ICs, selected from normal (N), high-break (H) or
current-limiting (L) range.
C. Main circuit breaker is to be 2 or 3-pole 100 A, or 2, 3 or 4-pole 160 A, 225/250 A or 400 A

continuous rating (frame size), with trip ratings and fully rated non-current limiting ICs of
normal (N) or high-break (H) ranges, with or without residual current device (RCD) as
indicated on the Drawings.
D. Assembly: Busbars are to be rigidly fixed on molded insulators to back pan in vertical
arrangement. Branch circuit breakers are to be bolted in twin arrangement to rigid copper
cross and center bus connectors. Back pan assembly is to be removable and fixed to four
threaded studs’ integral with cabinet.
2.11 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 600V and a rated operational voltage of 600V.
B. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one piece
insulated bolt-on/comb-type phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with
spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to
be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second
without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards. Panelboards are
to comply with BS 5486 Part 12.
C. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
busbars in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one-piece
insulated phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors
for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to be high thermal

rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second without
overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards.
D. SPN type panelboards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltages, single-
phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming.
E. SPN type main circuit breaker is to be double-pole MCB, with or without earth leakage
device (RCD), as shown on the Schedules.
F. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings between 6 A
and 50 A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.
G. TPN type panelboards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage, 3-
phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or 4-pole MCB or MCCB main
incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the Drawings.
H. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 100 A, with IC
as required in the Schedules.
I. TPN type panelboard main circuit breakers are to be MCB or MCCB, 100A continuous
current rating, with trip range from 25 A to 100 A, or 225 A MCCB with trip range 70 A to
225 A, normal (N) or high-break (H) duty with/without RCD as shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixing Generally:
1. Align, level and securely fasten panelboards to structure

2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panelboards at least 25mm from wall ensuring supporting
members do not prevent flow of air
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panelboards
4. Close unused openings in panelboard cabinets.
B. Panelboard Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have
been completed.
C. Wiring inside Panelboards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on
circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be split and bolted type, fully
insulated.
D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush with
wall surface finish.
E. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
waterproof compound prior to installation.
F. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 1880 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
H. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing
panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to
create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main

electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.
A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panelboards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards.
Inspect conditions within panelboards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
B. Circuit Breakers: Tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check
automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying
necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as
applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and
report ambient temperature inside enclosure.
C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings,
using 500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment
on systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all
panelboards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the
works of the manufacturer.
E. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
F. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

BUSDUCTS
SECTION 16466
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Busducts and fittings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each component. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting
position, mounting method, vertical supports, materials, fire stops, and weather stops.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of busways, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction elements. Detail
connections to switchgear, switchboards, transformers, and panelboards. Detail supports
and connections to building.
D. Coordination drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to accurate scale. Submit
with shop drawings. Show busway layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with
project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information
specified.
F. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with
specified requirements.
G. Full type test certificates – ampacity, temperature performance, short circuit, high voltage,
etc.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Quality Control Services," an independent testing agency shall be ASTA or
approved equal.
B. Comply with IEC 439 Parts 1 & 2 for materials construction.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
BUSDUCTS January 2019 16466-1

D. Single-Source Responsibility: All busway components shall be the product of a single

manufacturer.
A. Deliver in fully enclosed vehicles and store in spaces with controlled ambient.
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances

and locate obstructions within manufacturing and installation tolerances of busway.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 BUSDUCTS
A. General
1. THE PROPOSED BUSDUCT SHALL HAVE A FULL TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE

ACCORDING TO IEC 61439 LATEST AMENDMENTS AND EDITIONS.
2. THE BUSDUCT SHALL HAVE A FULL TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE FOR IP65 FOR
ALL RATINGS USED IN THE PROJECT. MANUFACUTERES WHO FAIL TO
DEMONSTRATE SUCH A CERTIFICATE ARE INHERITELY DISQUALIFIED.
3. THE BUSDUCT SHALL HAVE A FULL TYPE TEST TESTED CERTIFICATE AT 50°C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE FOR ALL RATINGS USED IN THE PROJECT.
MANUFACUTERES WHO FAIL TO DEMONSTRATE SUCH A CERTIFICATE ARE
INHERITELY DISQUALIFIED.
4. ALL TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES SHALL BE RECENT. CERTIFICATES OLDER

THAN 10 YEARS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.
5. TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES ARE ACCEPTABLE FROM THE FOLLOWING 3RD

PARTY LABORATORIES: ASTA, DEKRA, KEMA, & UL.
6. ALL TAP-OFF MCCB SHALL BE RATED 50KA FOR 1 SECOND.
7. ONLY STEEL ENCLOSURE IS ACCEPTABLE. ALUMINUM ENCLOSURE IS

INHERITELY REJECTED.
8. COPPER CROSS SECTION AREA SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 2 AMPS PER MM2;

FOR EXAMPLE, 2500A BUSBAR SHALL HAVE A COPPER CROSS SECTION AREA
OF 1250, ETC...
9. The busducts system shall be of low impedance and sandwiched typed technology. It
shall be totally enclosed prelacquered galvanised steel sheet with copper conductors;
suitable for a 3 phase 4 conductor 415 volts system with full neutral and continuous
internal copper earth bar of half size.
10. The system shall be complete with all necessary fittings, tap-off unit brackets, etc. All
busducts fittings (elbow, tees, end Cable Tap Box, etc.) shall be IP54 (IP65 for wet
areas and areas exposed to outdoor ambient condition) in accordance to IEC 529 and
from the same manufacturer as the busbar trunking system.

11. The busducts system shall be capable of being mounted in any position without
derating. Plug-in and feeder sections shall be interchangeable without the use of
special adapter joint covers. The complete installation shall be coordinated throughout
and where possible, shall consist of standard 3m or 4m sections with special sections
and fittings provided to suit the installation.
12. Horizontal runs of busbar trunking system shall be supported by hangers at every 2
meters. Vertical runs of busbar trunking system shall be supported by hangers not
more than 4m apart.
13. Busducts shall have Class F insulation with polyester film or equivalent.
14. Provide expansion means of seismic effects with stand.
15. Busducts system shall be terminated by ‘end closure’.
16. The adequacy of busducts to meet the thermal and building movement stresses shall
be verified and proven by the manufacturer.
B. Conformity To Standard
1. It shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the latest IEC
439 Part 1 and Part 2.
2. Conservation of the integrity of electrical circuits under fire conditions and verification of
fire barrier in accordance of the latest ISO 1182.and ISO 834
3. Resistance to flame propagation conforming IEC 60332 Part 3.
4. Resistance of the materials to abnormal heat conforming IEC 60695 Part 2.
C. Environment
1. The busducts system selection and size shall be suitable for continuous operation
without derating at an average ambient temperature of 50o C for 24h (55°C maximum).
Ratings stated on drawings refer to ratings at 48°C ambient.
D. Conductors
1. Conductors shall be of hard drawn 99.9% purity electrolitic copper Cu-ETP. Copper live
conductors shall be insulated by multiple layers of class “F” 155°C insulation.
2. Full size neutral of the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductor shall be
provided for all ratings of the busducts.
3. The busducts system shall have the following characteristics:
Paint Finish : RAL 7032
Rated Insulation Voltage (A/C) : 1000 Volts
Rated Operating Voltage (A/C) : 600 Volts
Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2/50s) : 8 kV at 2000m
Frequency : 50Hz
E. Protective Conductor

1. Integral continuous internal copper conductor of cross-section area equal to 50% that
of the corresponding phase conductor shall be provided.
F. Short Circuit Capacity
1. The whole busducts system shall be capable of withstanding at least 100 kA as well as
the short circuit capacity of the electrical installation without damaging the electrical,
mechanical and thermal stress under fault condition at a service voltage of 415V 50Hz.
Co-ordination of the distribution should be guaranteed such that the Circuit breaker /
trunking combination will limit the peak current to a value less than the rated peak
current of the busducts.
The busbar trunking shall be designed and constructed for use on a 415V, 3-phase 4-
wire, 50 Hz system. The minimum rated insulation voltage shall be 1000V. Each rating
of busbar trunking shall be ASTA type tested and certified for short circuit ratings for
one second covering phase, neutral, earth conductor and the housing as an additional
protective conductor.
Copies of ASTA test certificates shall be provided to the Engineer for each rating.
The minimum certified short circuit ratings of the busducts trunking shall be as follows:
Rating kA/1 Sec. kA Peak KA, N & PE

800A 35 74 21
1000A 50 105 30
1250A 60 132 36
1600A 70 154 42
2000A 88 194 53
2500A 88 194 53
G. Temperature Rise
1. The maximum hot-spot temperature rise at any point of the busducts enclosure at
continuous rated load shall not exceed 55o C above the maximum ambient temperature
of 50o C in any position.
H. Expansion Joint
1. Busbar expansion units shall be use in cases when it crosses a building expansion
joint or as recommended by the vendor to reduce the stress on the system by
differential expansion between the bursbars and the casing; particularly for long run of
the busbar.
2. It shall be consist of a flexible joint in the middle on the conductors and a sliding casing
in 2 sections which can absorb the relative movements of each section of the length.
I. Joints
1. All busbar contacts (connection joints or tap off unit jaws) shall be of silver plated
copper.

2. The electrical joints shall be of one or two bolt type designed for even distribution of
contact pressure and with inspection covers provided on each side of the joint and can
be dismantled to facilitate removal or extension.
3. It shall be possible to make up a joint from one side in the event that the busbar
trunking system is installed against a wall or ceiling. The joints shall be so designed as
to allow removal of any length without disturbing adjacent lengths.
4. Belleville spring or similar device shall be provided to give positive pressure over
complete contact wear. The tightening torque shall be dictated by the manufacturer,
and the bolt shall include an external breakable head which breaks when the correct
torque is reach.
J. Enclosure
1. The metal enclosure of the busbar trunking system shall be of 1.5mm thick hot dip
galvanised sheet steel to provide high protection and mechanical resistance for the
phase conductors along the entire length. ALUMINUM ENCLOSURES ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE.
2. Resistance to corrosion shall meet the following test:
Tropical test : 1000 hours

Salted Marine Fog : 360 hours
3. Both vertical and horizontal runs of busbar trunking system shall be of degree of
protection to IP 44. The enclosure shall be made of four steel sections assembled by
clinching.
4. ALUMINUM ENCLOSURES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.
K. Tap-Off Outlets
1. Tap-off outlets for horizontal distribution busway shall be able to open and close
automatically when plug-in units are plugged in or removed. When the cover is opened,
no live part can be accessed and the degree of protection provided shall be at least
IP52, with no additional accessories.
L. Tap-off unit
1. Tap-off units shall be from the same manufacturer as the busbar trunking system and
shall be provided with off-load isolator suitable for fuses or circuit breakers according to
ratings as indicated in the drawings.
2. All circuit breakers used shall be able to operate normally when mounted upside down
or at any angles. The tap-off units shall also have the provision to mount the earth fault
relay together with the breaker. Tap-off units shall be of dust and damp proof version,
degree of protection IP 54 with silver plated contacts suitable for all ratings of busbar
and shall be suitably earthed.
3. The earthing contact of the tap-off unit shall always be made before that of the live
conductors and the last to break during removal.
4. The tap-off unit and the busbar trunking system shall be interlocked to ensure that the
device is in the ‘OFF’ position prior to installation or removal of the unit.
5. The tap-off unit shall have an interlock which prevents the cover from being opened
while the device is in the ‘ON’ position and to prevent accidental closing of the device
when the cover is opened.

M. Voltage drop along the busduct system
1. The line-to-line voltage drop of the 3 phase 415V 50HZ, under evenly distributed load
at power factor of 0.8 lagging, shall not be over the following values:
The maximum voltage drop, maximum resistance, maximum fire load and heat losses should
be as follows:
Nominal Max voltage drop Max phase Fire Load Maximum heat
Current A with distributed resistance at KWH/m losses at nominal
load at 0.9 20oC mΏ /m current W/m
PF(µV/m/A)
800 43 0.033 4.8 85
1000 42 0.032 5.8 125
1250 38 0.029 6.2 175
1600 29 0.022 8.5 225
2000 24 0.018 10.0 270
2500 18 0.014 11.0 360
N. Test Reports/Certificates
1. Test Reports/Certificates by recognised independent test laboratories (such as ASTA

Certificate Services, ASEFA, KEMA) on the proposed equivalent type of busbar
trunking system must be submitted to prove compliance with the specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install busway level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, shop
drawings, and referenced standards.
B. Support busway independently from supports for other elements such as pipe, conduit,
ceilings, and ducts.
1. Design each fastener and support to carry 200 pounds (90 kg) or 4 times the supported
weight of the busway, whichever is greater.
2. Support busway with not less than 3/8-inch (10-mm) steel rods. Install side bracing to
prevent swaying or movement of busway. Modify supports after completion to
eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.
3. Support busway independently from equipment enclosure at connections to

panelboards and switchboards.
C. Coordinate busway terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,

connection, and closure.

D. Tighten busway joints with torque wrench or similar tool recommended by busway
manufacturer. Retighten joints after busways have been energized for 30 days.
E. Connect busway and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,
according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will employ and pay an independent testing agency to perform
specified field quality-control testing.
B. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform
specified field quality-control testing.
C. Testing: After installing busway and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Standard ATS, Section 7.4. Investigate any insulation resistance reading less
than 100 megohms divided by busway length in feet (30 megohms divided by busway
length in meters). Certify compliance with test parameters.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Align busway runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists. Provide
additional stiffeners if required to restrict excessive movement.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
busway including joints and plug-in units.
1. Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detects

significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of busduct 4 months and 11 months after

3. Prepare a certified report identifying busduct checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
rescanning observations after remedial action.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer

and Installer to ensure that moisture does not enter busway prior to Substantial
Completion.

INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 16511
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building
surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, mounting provisions and connection to
circuit wiring and to corresponding lighting control equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Physical Description of the Lighting Fixture including dimensions and mounting
arrangements
2. Manufacturer’s quality certification complying to applicable ISO standards for quality.
3. Luminaire Independent Photometric Reports complying to IESNA LM-79-08 showing
Laboratory name, Contact details, date of testing, model number and report number.
4. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – American National Standard for Chromaticity of
SSL Products Test report indicating the CCT & CRI of the LED fixture proposed.
5. Simplified L70 Threshold tests for lumen depreciation of < 4% of initial lumen output at >
than 6000 Hrs in the appropriate UL UL1598/153 environment.
6. LM-80-08, IESNA Approved method of measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources report for the LED used in the LED fixture.
7. TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method report for the LEDs used in the LED
fixture.
8. The estimated L70 for the LED troffer fixture @ 350C ≥ 50,000 hrs & the estimated L70 for
the LED Down Light fixture @ 350C ≥ 50,000 hrs. This has to be clearly validated and
mentioned in the technical datasheet of the product proposed.
9. UL / Other Internationally recognized safety laboratories certification including file
number.
10. Energy Star Qualification for the LED Down lights proposed.
11. Luminaire manufacturer must submit reliability testing reports from chip manufacturer
for test conducted in accordance to JEDEC JESD22-A108C standards as follows:
- High Temperature Operating Life (HTOL)
- Room Temperature Operating Life (RTOL)
- Wet High Temperature Operating Life (WHTOL)
- Thermal Shock
- Mechanical Shock
12. LED Chip data sheets and manufacturers information.
B. Contractor shall provide a written undertaking to warranty the performance of the

materials as follows:
LED Down Light & Troffere: - A written limited warranty for 5 years against defects in materials
or workmanship as follows: for a period of five (5) years from the date of original purchase,
defective parts or a defective Product returned with the sales receipt as proof of purchase to
INTERIOR LIGHTING January 2019 16511-1

Seller, or its authorized service providers, as applicable, and proven to be defective upon
inspection, will be repaired, or exchanged for a new Product, as determined by Seller, or the
authorized service provider
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit Drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling features,
structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and pertinent to the
installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
4. Wiring details, circuit and panelboard references, special lighting control arrangements
etc.
5. Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, method of
field assembly, components, features, and accessories. Detail wiring for fixtures and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Samples: Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required, together
with color and texture samples of each fixture.
E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and
coordinating fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and other
components in the vicinity. Include work of all trades that is to be installed near lighting
equipment.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that products

comply with requirements.
G. Dimming Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that drivers are

compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are used.
A. Fixture Design and Standards: The Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturer's standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with the
Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC 598 and CISPR 15.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified
fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans are
to be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural members,
ducts, pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required. Certain fixtures
are shown in provisional positions, pending preparation of final equipment layout drawings.
Such fixtures are to be located in coordination with final equipment layout so that
illumination is as intended by the design.
B. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting
fixtures with ceiling system and other construction.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish
at least one of each type.
3. Drivers/transformers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated
for each designation in the Lighting Description shown on Drawings.
B. Contractor shall provide light fittings as specified. Deviating from the factory or country of
origin is not acceptable, unless in exceptional cases where the written approval of the
Electrical Design Engineer is required.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
A. Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturer's name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label is to be fixed to
each fixture supplied.
B. Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires): Manufacturer's standard, as given in Lighting Fixture

Schedules shown on the Drawings, or equal.
C. Sheet Steel Housings: Not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker when required by the
Specification or the Standards.
D. Sheet Steel Reflectors: Not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. Aluminum Reflectors: Not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless otherwise approved.
F. Fabrication: Metalwork is to be mitred, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or
burrs. Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication.
Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G. Rust-proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated with corrosion
resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before
application of final finish.
H. Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint. Paint color on
fixture frames and trims are to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I. Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having reflection factor not
less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished, anodized
aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J. Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel surfaces and cured,
it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or
loosening from base metal.

K. Resistance of Finish to Ultra-Violet: Finish is to withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-

violet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or warping, and
is to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
L. Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and components inside fixtures are to be certified
materials to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M. Wiring Inside Fixtures: Not less than 1.5 mm2, and insulated for 240 V application.
Insulation is to have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside
fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, terminal blocks.
N. Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed hinges and
catches, and stain-less steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable products
may be submitted for approval.
O. Suspension Aligners: Provide for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal
alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.
P. Recessed Fixtures: Construct to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting fixture or
ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q. Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.
R. Removal of parts for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture housing.
2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
Not specified for this Project.
2.4 INCANDESCENT LAMP FIXTURES
2.5 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMP FIXTURES
2.6 LED FIXTURES
A. Applicable standards
The following International or Approved Standards shall be followed:
1. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

2. LM-79-08, IESNA Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric measurement of Solid
State Lighting (SSL) Products
3. LM-80-08, IESNA Approved method of measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources
4. TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method
5. Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) JESD22-A108C
6. RP-20-98, Recommended practice for Lighting Facilities
7. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – American National Standard for Chromaticity of SSL
Products
8. Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) JESD22-A108C
9. ENERGY STAR® qualified
10. FCC part 15 guidelines for radiated and conducted emissions
11. UL /CE certified or equivalent

B. Product Specifications
1. LED Light Source
- The light source shall be Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) arranged to provide the required lighting
output. The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs with proven past performance
like CREE, Osram, Philips, Nichia.
- The CRI shall be greater than 90. Required color temperature shall be produced by utilizing a
mixture of blue shifted yellow LED and red LEDs. Active color management system shall maintain
color consistency over time and temperature.
- The drive current for the LEDs shall not exceed 330mA.
- LED Troffer Delivered Efficacy shall be greater than 90 LPW @ 4000K CCT & LED Downlight
Delivered Efficacy shall be greater than 65LPW @ 4000K CCT. CCT tolerance of LED should be
within the parameters: - 3000K ± 50K, 4000K ± 90K.
- Factory pre-release test reports shall be provided from the LED manufacturer duly complying to
JEDEC JESD22-A108C for Operating Life Tests.
2. Construction & Materials
LED Troffer Construction
- Fixture should be constructed from durable 20-gauge steel housing with standard troffer access
plate for electrical installation.
- Field replaceable light engine which integrates LEDs, driver, power supply, thermal management,
and optical mixing components.
- One-piece lower reflector finished with a textured high reflectance white polyester powder coating
to create a comfortable visual transition from the lens to the ceiling plane.
- Thermal management system should be designed to maximize cooling effectiveness by

integrating a unique room-side heat sink into the diffusing lens.
- T-bar clips and holes for mounting support wires to enable recessed or suspended installation to
be provided.

LED Downlight Construction
- Fixture should be made from durable engineered polycarbonate / die-cast aluminum housing and
support cup to protect LEDs and optical lens. Integral spring clips that resist heat while providing
retention for flush ceiling fit should be provided.
- Either Integral driver or engineered polycarbonate remote gear box to protect driver, power
supply and terminal block to be provided.
- Thermal management system to use extruded aluminum heat sink to conduct heat away from
LEDs and transfer it to the plenum space for optimal performance. LED junction temperatures to
stay below specified maximum when installed in non-insulated ceiling applications. Not for direct
burial in insulation.
- One-piece engineered polycarbonate / aluminum lower reflector to conduct heat away from LEDs.
It should create a comfortable visual transition from the lens to the ceiling plane.
3. Optical System
- Fixture to have a unique combination of reflective and refractive optical components to achieve
a uniform, comfortable appearance while eliminating pixelation and color fringing. This ensures
that smooth light patterns are projected with no hot spots and minimal striations.
- Components work together to optimize distribution, balancing the delivery of high illuminance
levels on horizontal surfaces with an ideal amount of light on walls and vertical surfaces to
increase the perception of spaciousness.
- Diffusing lens shields direct view of LEDs while lower reflector balances brightness of lens with
the ceiling to create a low-glare high angle appearance.
4. Electrical System
- Driver should have a Nominal Power Factor > 0.9
- Input Voltage for LED Down light: - 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz
- Input Voltage for LED Troffer:- 120V-277V, 50/60Hz
- Drivers should be dimmable using DALI or Analog 1-10V
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Generally: Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final height
adjustment after installation.
B. Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and
flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers
etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet boxes
to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for proper installation.
Provide one point of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually
mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
C. Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures. Stems
are to have suspension aligners and are to be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at
required height.
D. Suspended Ceilings: If ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures without

strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.
E. Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture dimensions
and structural elements.
F. Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
G. Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or structure
when left unused.
H. Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and
between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
I. Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the design
of the fixture.
J. Earth metal frames of as described in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
K. Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when installed,
and completely weatherproof for installations subject to weather conditions.
L. Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to hand-
over and when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not to be
used for final lamping of fixtures.
M. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each
fixture.
N. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 150 mm from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
A. Visual Inspection: Check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and nameplates

etc.
B. Illumination Measurements: Taken at selected locations, to determine level and uniformity.

C. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
D. Electrical Data: Measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations with
discharge lamps.
E. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
F. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
G. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
H. Tests: As follows:
1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Report results in writing.
I. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat

procedure until units operate properly.
J. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 16521
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, poles/support structures, and
accessories and related power distribution and control, protective earthing and related
builder's work including column foundations, cable pits, cable trenches and ductwork.

2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency
lighting units, and accessories; and for exterior luminaires normally mounted on
buildings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support,

including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.
B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of LED and Driver, when
applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect lamps,
and to connect lamps to power supply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for approval
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Physical Description of the Lighting Fixture including dimensions and mounting arrangements
2. Data sheet to include data on initial delivered lumen outputs, wattages for standard numbers of
scalable modules at 240V 50 Hz operation Data sheet to include the Backlight, Uplight and Glare
(BUG) classification as per IESNA.
3. Manufacturer’s quality certification complying to applicable ISO standards for quality.
4. Luminaire Independent Photometric Reports complying to IESNA LM-79-08 showing Laboratory
name, Contact details, date of testing, model number and report number
Products Test report indicating the CCT & CRI of the LED fixture proposed.
6. The luminaire manufacturer shall be listed as approved by the International Dark Sky Association
(IDA) for compliance to light pollution reduction norms.
7. Simplified L70 Threshold tests for lumen depreciation of < 4% of initial lumen output at > than 6000
Hrs in the appropriate UL UL1598/153 environment.
8. Lumen Depreciation chart showing standard exponential decay curves for various operating
ambient temperatures derived through testing procedures as specified by LM-80-08 test
procedures. Test reports and procedures to be submitted along with the chart.
9. TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method report
10. The estimated L70 @ 250C ≥ 120,000 hrs for the proposed LED luminaire. This has to be clearly
validated and mentioned in the technical datasheet of the product proposed.
11. UL / Other Internationally recognized safety laboratories certification including file number.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING January 2019 16521-1

12. Reliability testing reports from chip manufacturer for test conducted in accordance to JEDEC
JESD22-A108C standards.
13. Independent Laboratory test report for IP66 certification of LED modules.
14. LED Chip data sheets and manufacturers information.
15. Independent ASTM B117-97 – Standard practice for operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus Test
report
16. Driver data sheets
17. Manufacturer/ Supplier shall consider adequate Light Loss Factors (LLF) factors in their
calculations depending on the percentage of total luminous surface area exposed to dirt
accumulation. A LLF factor of 0.7 shall be applied by the manufacturer in his lighting calculations
for optical arrangements with glass diffusers where 100% luminous surface area is exposed to dirt
accumulation, except where recommended otherwise by the luminaire manufacturer.
18. Computer generated photometric analysis for proposed day 1 illumination with LDD and LLF
factors as 1
19. Computer generated photometric calculation for maintained illumination for future date (defined as
assuming numerous thousands of operation hours) of the lighting installation. LLF values shall be
used in conjunction with the manufacturers decay curves. LDD values shall be assumed in
conjunction with clause 2.3.2 optical control.
to, the following:
1. Layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details, concrete
foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing and sections of duct-banks and
trenches, backfill and packing material, earthing rods etc.
2. Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution, protection
and control, earthing and the like.
3. Calculations of illumination and glare levels, based on CIE methods.
C. Samples: submit fully equipped sample of luminaire or other materials or components if

required by Engineer.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that products

comply with requirements.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
G. Contractor shall provide a written undertaking to warranty the performance of the materials
as follows:
- A written warranty for 5 years on-site replacement material, workmanship and finish. On
site replacement includes removal, transportation to site of new materials and
installation.
- A written warranty for 10 years for deterioration of the housing finish such as blistering,
chalking, cracking peeling or fading.
- A written warranty for 5 year replacement material warranty for defective or non-starting
LED source assemblies.
- A written warranty for 5 year replacement warranty on all supplied Drivers, Power Supply
units.
- A written warranty for 5 year replacement warranty for non-maintained luminance levels
on all light sources.

A. Standards: Luminaires generally are to comply with IEC 598 and the applicable CISPR
recommendations. Manufacturer is to verify compliance with these standards and the
applicable local regulations and design standards.
B. Technical Requirements: Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for
improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written
C. Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and derated

for continuous and trouble-free service at 50 deg. C ambient temperature and 100%
relative humidity, with temperature reaching 70 deg. C in direct sunlight and with high
content of ultra-violet rays. Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst exposed to
sun.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES
A. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation. Handle
poles with web fabric straps.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole
unit) of installed quantities of each type of lamp, control gear, fuses, luminaire covers,
special bolts or nuts, lamp-holders and the like which are subject to burning, breakage or
failure.
B. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 100 of each
type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Drivers/Transformers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated
for each designation in the Lighting Description shown on plans.
B. Contractor shall provide light fittings as specified. Deviating from the factory or country of
origin is not acceptable, unless in exceptional cases where the written approval of the
Electrical Design Engineer is required.
2.2 LIGHTING COLUMNS
A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel, electrically
welded, and of height specified. Columns up to 12-m height are to be one piece section.
Columns above 12 m and up to 20-m height may be supplied in two piece sections, of the
slip joint type with sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical alignment of column after

assembly. Columns are to have minimum wall thickness of 3 mm at base. Sheet steel is to
have minimum rupturing resistance of 37 kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24
kg/mm2.
B. Top of column is to be designed to receive single or double arm brackets or other

arrangement required, supporting number of luminaires shown on the Drawings. Bracket
arrangement is to be designed to ensure that failure, due to wind induced oscillations, does
not occur and that rotation from desired alignment is not possible.
C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to be
designed to withstand gust wind velocity of 160 km/hr blowing in the most unfavorable
direction at a height 10 m above ground level, with column fully equipped. Fatigue of steel
is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic stresses due to
vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly welded onto lower
edge of column as shown on the Drawings, and is to have specified number of holes for
holding down bolts together with central cable access hole not less than 150 mm diameter.
D. Access door of weatherproof construction is to be positioned at column base and is to be

suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable terminations and protective device.
Door is to be flush fitting with retaining mechanism and positive locking arrangement with
removable hexagonal key. Column is to be reinforced at door opening. Opposite each
door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of suitable size to accept appropriate equipment is to
be fixed to inside of column by purpose-made brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud with
washers and nuts is to be welded inside the column near the access door.
E. Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed, inside and outside surfaces of
column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel
components of columns to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of
zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column. Galvanizing
is to be to NFA 91 121 or BS 729. Any damage to galvanizing is to be rectified during
erection by wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust converter to the
satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of column base are to be
coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.
F. Protection and Wiring: Columns with one or two luminaires are to be connected over one
phase and neutral. Columns with three or more luminaires are to be connected over 3
phases and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted terminals and cable
lugs are to be provided with 3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and outgoing 3
phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes shown on Drawings. One circuit breaker, single pole 6
A is to be provided for each phase leading to a luminaire. Circuit breakers are to be
compensated and rated for 50 deg. C ambient with interrupting capacity of at least 9 kA,
and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at baseboard. Wiring is to be PVC
insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor temperature. Cable is to be at least 4 mm2
copper conductor.
G. Lighting poles shall be provided with a loop-in and loop-out junction box, complete with
circuit for each phase leading to a luminaire.
2.3 LED FIXTURES
A. GENERAL
The LED Luminaire shall be designed to operate continuously at the specified ambient
temperatures and humidity. The manufacturers shall guarantee the performance of the
LED luminaire under this design conditions. The best suitable standards to suit the
specified ambient temperature and climatic conditions shall be adhered to by the
manufacturer. Special consideration shall be given to the occasional sand storms and
dusty weather in designing the luminaire body.

The LED luminaire shall be with suitable optics for mounting on light poles as indicated
in the drawings providing efficient even illumination. It shall be slim and low profile thus
minimizing the wind load requirements. The housing shall be of low copper content die
cast aluminium and extruded aluminium heat sinks. It shall be finish coated with top
quality painting procedure providing excellent resistance to fading, peeling cracking or
corrosion. The minimum guarantee to be provided by the manufacturer must be at least
10 years against fading peeling cracking or corrosion of the paint finish. The drivers
shall be integral and shall be protected in a separate compartment of IP65 rating
enabling access to the driver in case of future maintenance requirements. The fixtures
shall be UL certified or comply with equivalent international standards and such
certification is to be submitted for review.
B. APPLICABALE STANDARDS
The following International or Approved Standards shall be followed:
1. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

2. LM-69-95 (R2002); Interpretation of Roadway Luminaire Photometric Reports
3. LM-79-08, IESNA Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric measurement of Solid
State Lighting (SSL) Products
4. LM-80-08, IESNA Approved method of measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources
5. TM-21, IESNA Approved life estimation test method
6. TM-15-07 (Revised), Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires
7. RP-20-98, Recommended practice for Lighting Facilities
8. IEC 60529; Degree of Protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Products
10. JEDEC JESD22-A108C Joint Electron Device Engineering Council
11. ASTM B117-97 – Standard practice for operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
C. CONSTRUCTION
1. LED Arrangement within the Luminaire:
The light source shall be 1W rated super bright white Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) with
individual minimum efficacy of at least 100lm/W arranged modularly to provide the required
lighting output.
The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs with proven past performance like
CREE, Philips, Osram & Nichia. Factory pre-release test reports shall be provided from the LED
manufacturer duly complying to JEDEC JESD22-A108C for Operating Life Tests at 850C
Ambient temperature and also for humidity and salt atmosphere corrosion tests.
CRI ≥ 70
Each module shall not exceed 20 LEDs and the LED lanterns shall contain enough modularly
arranged LEDs to meet the Lighting requirement. The drive current for the LEDs shall not
exceed 525mA.
The LED modules shall be removable / replaceable on site without any possible risk to
maintaining luminaire photometry and without the need to demount the fixtures for sake of future
up-gradation / maintenance after warranty period. The modules shall be IP66 certified from an
independent testing laboratory and test reports shall be submitted for verification and approval.

2. Optical Control
Each individual LED shall be fitted with its own refractor optic, thus providing a controlled efficient
and even light output as required for the application. Independent Laboratory Certified and
published photometric test reports shall be submitted for the photometric files used in the lighting
calculations for verification and approval. The testing should confirm to IESNA LM-79 standards.
3. Thermal Management
The LED modules shall be mounted on heavy duty heat sinks to ensure excellent heat
dissipation. The design of the primary heat sinks shall be such that there is a direct thermal path
from the led junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal chimney effect through the life
of the luminaire. The heat sinks shall be propriety and designed by the lighting manufacturer to
enable the luminaires to work efficiently in UAE climatic conditions. The primary heat sinks shall
be provided with a ventilation arrangement allowing heat to be dissipated to the atmosphere but
preventing collection of debris on the heat sinks.
4. LED Drivers
- Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of >85%

- Operating temperature shall be upto 80 Deg C
- Drivers shall accept an input voltage of 120-277V 50 Hz AC and shall be autosensing.
- Power supplies to be UL class I output
- PF shall be > .90
- Drivers to have a Total Harmonic Distortion of ≤ 20%
- Drivers to have Overload and Short Circuit protection
- Drivers to have Overheat thermal protection for temperatures in excess of 80 Deg C. In
such cases the driver shall reduce the drive current to ensure against failure
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment: Install equipment to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and

repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this but no
changes are to be made without the approval of Engineer.
B. Column Bases: Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before
commencement of construction, ensure that bases are suitable for column installation.
C. Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless steel
or cadmium plated.
D. Columns: Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to theoretical
profile of road. Alignment of columns, both horizontally and vertically, is to be secured to
the satisfaction of Engineer. Brackets are to be set at 90 degrees to longitudinal axis of
road.
E. Install poles as follows:

1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or expanding
concrete grout firmly packed in entire void space.
5. Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.
F. Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and supports
to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.
G. Mounting Adjustments: After demonstrating to Engineer that specified lighting requirements

have been met, carry out final setting and locking in position of the floodlights.
H. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.
I. Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Replace malfunctioning lamps.
J. Cabling Conduits and Ductwork: Carry out in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cabling". Cable ducts are to be directly buried except at crossings with
other service work or roads.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
A. Visual inspection is to include inspection of condition of each piece of equipment, quality of

workmanship, alignment, perpendicularity, labeling and the like, all in conformance with the
Specification.
B. Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece of
equipment before energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps not
installed.
C. Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with lamps
installed, including recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of each circuit
and at distribution panel or the like.
D. Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to
include measurement of lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated surfaces.
E. Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with the
Specification.
F. Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance at final
points of circuits and continuity of protective conductors.
G. Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.
H. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
I. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:
1. Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is indicated. Use

calibrated photometers.
2. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
3. Check excessively noisy ballasts.

J. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating and
interpreting results.
K. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat

procedure until units operate properly.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Equipment:

B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and

Bonding."
1. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations.

Connect luminaires to grounding system with conductor as shown on plans or in
accordance with Regulations.
A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust amiable luminaires and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide required
light distributions and intensities.

PUBLIC ADDRESS/VOICE ALARM & BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEMS

SECTION 16736
RELATED DOCUMENTS

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PUBLIC ADDRESS/VOICE ALARM SYSTEM
1.1.- General
The entire building shall be provided with a complete sound management system
consisting of voice alarm & public address.
The Contractor shall appoint specialist system supplier and installer to carry out
installation, testing and commissioning of the system.
The location of speakers and equipment are indicated on drawings.
The specialist system supplier shall lay the cables/wires in trunking or conduit as detailed
in the drawings to complete the system.
The contractor shall supply, install all equipment, accessories and materials complete in
strict compliance with the specification and drawings.
The system shall be listed and approved by QCDD for Voice Alarm System and shall be
listed for voice alarm/evacuation and public address, and as per NFPA 72, 2013 Edition.
1.1.1.- The system shall be integrated with the fire detection system and be capable of
providing public address of a high quality. The primary function of this system shall be to
provide voice evacuation, voice alert and security warning. The system shall be
centralized based on a concept of modular construction, each system function shall be
carried out by a series of ‘pluggable’ modules.
1.1.2.-The system offered shall be compatible to be integrated with Building Management

System to monitor the status continuously.
1.1.3.- In the event of a fire alarm, the automatic Cause and Effects function shall be initiated
providing multi-channel staged alarms via true speech reproduction messages and tones.
Once the automatic Cause and Effects has been initiated, the user/fire officer shall have
the total flexibility to control the incident as necessary. This shall be achieved via the fire
alarm control panel.
1.1.4.-The fire alarm control panel shall provide a complete overview of the System’s Cause
and Effects by illuminating active push buttons, which shall have priority to ensure that a
minimum level of alarm is maintained whilst a fire alarm signal is still present.
1.1.5.- The system operation shall be achieved from the multi-zoned paging system
accepting microphone, or automatically initiated from the fire alarm control panel with
option of selection.
PUBLIC ADDRESS/VOICE ALARM & BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEMS January 2019 16736-1
1.1.6.- A series of monitored voice alarm (VA) loops shall be installed throughout the building.
The VA shall be installed into segregated zones. Each VA zone shall comprise of a twin
circuit intermittently wired. This is to provide a high level of protection so that if one circuit
fails evacuation procedures can be maintained.
1.1.7.- The specialist equipment supplier will be responsible for ascertaining final surface
acoustic properties, the reverberation times associated with each space and providing a
PA system to provide clear intelligible speech and alarm in all areas.
1.1.8.- The PAVA system will comply fully with the requirements of NFPA 72 and BS 5839
part 8 with no detriment to the quality of audio output.
1.1.9- The Public Address / Voice Alarm (PAVA SYSTEM) shall provide clear
announcements during public addressing and one-way voice communication during an
emergency; the secondary function shall be to provide background music where required.
The Public Address and Voice Alarm System shall:
 Be designed to make manual and automatic public broadcasts of routine,

situational, important and emergency announcements.
 Deliver clear, un-distorted announcements to selected areas during public
addressing.
 Deliver clear, un-distorted paging to all zones, either individually or collectively.
Selection of groups of zones shall be programmable.
 Be designed to provide control and priority setting for all announcements.
 Be a networked sound management, digital system providing digital audio signal
processing capability and transmission of audio signals via a simple network.
 Be capable of using web-based technology for the access, diagnostic and
configuration of the system components and system functions. However, It shall
also be possible to use the system as a standalone, with or without a PC.
 Be modular in design to enable system expansion.
 Be designed to be fail-safe such that a break in the system does not affect the
system performance or induce a failure in another. It shall be configured in a
closed loop for redundancy to ensure that the audio path is always available.
 Be able to broadcast emergency announcement to all areas in the event where
Network and/or PA Controller fail.
 Provide a high level Interface to a Security Management System (SMS) for
interfacing with other subsystems for announcement broadcast or alarm
broadcast.
 Be designed to work continuously, 24hours a day and 7 days a week, throughout
its life.
1.1.10.- The contractor shall appoint a QCDD approved System Specialist for the design,
supply, install, test, and commission of the PAVA System comprising but not limited to
Equipment Racks, Sound Equipment, pipes, cables, speakers, alarms, in accordance
with the basic requirements shown in the tender drawings for a complete functional
acceptable system.
1.2.- VA Control
1.2.1.- All modules within the VA system shall be duplicated and interactive, they shall be
continually monitored for any trouble conditions. The System shall have diagnostic
display to assist the user/engineer in fault finding in the event of a failure.
1.2.2.- The following functions shall be available to the user/engineer:
- Display Status of Amplifiers

- Display Status of Data Loop
- Display Control Interface Software
- Display Isolated Devices
- Display Loop Settings
- Set Alarm Test and Reset
- Set Alarm Test to a particular Zone or group
- Force Check Handset Operation
- Select and Control Sub-Masters
- Reset Individual or Global Units
1.3.- System Control and Supervision
1.3.1.- The system shall have a Common Audio Module to regulate the input power via dual
current limited regulators, to provide isolation of power on all channels. A fault causing
excessive current draw from a single channel power source shall not disable the other
channel power sources.
1.3.2.- An open or short circuit in the microphone audio circuit or an open on the keying (push
to talk) circuit shall light the associated LED and shall sound the common fault signal.
1.3.3.- All channels shall constantly monitored. Each tone generators, pre-amplifiers, and
tone control amplifiers shall be supervised for output degradation to approximately 75%
of normal. If this level is achieved an LED shall illuminate and the common audible fault
signal shall sound.
1.4.- Digital Voice
1.4.1.- The Digital Voice Module shall automatically sound a pre-encoded message and
tones upon alarm activation. It shall store a digitized recording of an actual human voice.
When an alarm or message test condition arises, the digital information shall be
reconverted to analogue mode and pre-amplified to sound completely natural. The digital
messages shall be stored on plug-in EPROM chips, which shall be recorded at the
manufacturers works.
1.4.2.- The Module shall be programmed to start after an adjustable delay of 0-8 seconds,
during which time the alert tone shall be transmitted to the speakers. The message shall
be capable of 32 seconds duration and shall be repeated at the end of the delay or after
the tones.
1.4.3.- The message shall be stored and replayed in Arabic, as well as in English.
1.4.4.- When live voice communication is used, the system microphone shall be automatically
overridden and take priority over the pre-recorded message or tones. At the conclusion of
the live voice transmission, the system shall revert to an alert tone, eliminating the
possibility of conflicting instructions.
1.4.5.- The audio output level shall be monitored constantly for proper signal strength. If the
signal is missing or falls below a pre-set level for a specific length of time, the system
shall revert to the alert tone or transfer to a stand-by DV Module.
1.4.6.- The batteries and charger shall maintain the entire system, plus 20% for a minimum
period of 24 hours stand-by, in the event of mains failure. After 24 hours has elapsed the
system shall be capable of initiating a full global alert and evacuate for a minimum period
of 30 minutes.
1.5.- Public Address
The system shall provide public address capabilities. The PA shall be zoned in the
same configuration as the VA system. A fully selectable paging microphone shall
be provided within the security room. Additional paging microphones shall be provided as
required.
1.5.1. The PAVA SYSTEM proposed shall be a fully digital system and it shall be inter-
connected using the Structured Cabling system within the Building. System should be IP
based using standard protocols as Cobranet and Dante.
The audio transport from the microphone position to the power amplifier shall be in digital
audio and up to the amplifier circuit before it is converted to analog audio. All audio
processing shall be done in the digital domain.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be a networked configuration with the following system elements:
 Network Controller (NC) which controls and monitors all activities in the system.
 Power Amplifier, for the amplification of audio signals for the loud speaker, in four
different types of 1 x 500W, 2 x 250W, 4 x 125W and 8 x 60W. The amplifier channels
shall provide 100V, 70V or 50V audio outputs.
 Call stations with keypad control, which can initiate any actions in the system such as
making manual or pre-recorded announcements to any pre-assigned zone or executing
any pre-defined action. Automatic messages stored in the NC shall be able to be
activated by the call station. The system shall have the possibility to provide custom-
made call stations using the standard available hardware.
 Audio Expander, to expand audio channels inputs and for inserting/extracting audio
inputs/outputs from the system and control inputs/outputs for external interfacing.
 Network Splitter, for tapping off two runs from the main cable run and as a power feed for
external DC power supply.
 Fiber Interface, to convert from copper to fibre optics and vice versa, for different cable
distant run.
1.5.2. The interconnection between the DAU and Central Source equipment rack units shall
be achieved by using either copper or fiber optic cable. The system shall support both
audio and data communications via the fiber cable.
1.5.3. The cable connections between the system units shall be arranged in a closed loop for
redundancy to ensure the audio path is always available and that a single failure on the
system cable shall not affect the proper functioning of the system. Each system unit shall
have individual addresses, which are automatically checked and verified by the NC
configuration.
1.5.4. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be configured from PC running Windows-based software
connected to the NC. The system shall be configurable using the configuration software
supplied by the manufacturer. The file transfer between the PC and the NC shall use the
standard Windows applications with a user-friendly user interface. It shall be possible to
assign an IP address to the NC. The NC shall be able to be connected to LAN and shall
be accessible by any of the workstations connected to the network with PAVA Systems
word protection.
1.5.5. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be easily expandable by adding new hardware and
reprogramming the configuration data. The construction of the PAVA SYSTEM shall be
modular in design to enable system expansion. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be possible to
be combined with similar PAVA SYSTEMs in different locations to support multiple
satellite systems and to provide a reliable distributed audio communication system.
1.5.6. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be freely programmable to route any inputs to any outputs.
All inputs and outputs shall be provided with digital parametric equalizers.
1.5.7. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to make selective and preset group
announcements, live paging, and emergency broadcast to all zones from any of the call
station position.
1.5.8. The PAVA SYSTEM shall allow programming of time-scheduled activities for chimes,
automatic digital announcements, background music, routing of audio input to any zone
output or audio output, and activation of any control outputs. It shall be possible to
enable and disable any of the system's inputs/outputs and any equipment in the system
even though it is still physically present in the system.
1.5.9. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be designed to route up to 28 simultaneous audio channels
using dynamic channel allocation to minimize any call conflicts in the system.
1.5.10. The NC shall have automatic message storage, with an audio storage capacity
depending only on the memory size of the compact flash (CF) card. Up to 4 audio
messages shall be allowed to be played simultaneously.
1.5.11. The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide recording facilities to produce professional quality
messages. It shall be possible for the user to give names to pre-recorded messages.
The pre-recorded messages shall be stored as wav files. It shall be possible to allocate
multiple pre-recorded messages to a selection key.
1.5.12. The PAVA SYSTEM shall have built-in and configurable facilities for manual and
automatic volume control. The individual zones shall have different volume settings for
background music and announcement call.
1.5.13. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be designed in such a way that the individual
PA/emergency/functional zone be addressed. Each functional zone shall consist of single
or multiple PA/Emergency zone.
1.5.14. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be capable of routing multiple background music to different
zones or audio outputs. Background music shall be selectable from local music sources
or common music channel. The background music volume shall be able to be controlled
from a call station, for zones that are pre-assigned to the call station.
1.5.15. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be capable of controlling and executing calls and other
activities based on different level of priority settings in the system. The central NC shall
have a configurable system of priorities such that, should a conflict situation arise, the
station or user key with the top priority will override the others. The Fire Command Center
shall have the highest priority over the use of the PAVA SYSTEM.
1.5.16. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to monitor all its equipment and cabling in the system
and report to the NC for any faults detected. Once a fault is detected, the SMS shall also
be notified to allow the maintenance team to carry out the investigation.
1.5.17. The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide fail-safe function whereby in the case of a power
amplifier failure, the system will be able to monitor, detect and change over to a standby
amplifier immediately and automatically. When the fault is rectified, the standby amplifier
shall be restored to the original state.
1.5.18. The PAVA SYSTEM shall monitor the loudspeaker lines for short circuit, open circuit and
short to ground and the fault shall be displayed on the front panel of the power amplifier
and the NC. The NC shall be able to operate in stand-alone mode. The system shall be
able to make emergency calls (i.e. all calls) even if the NC has failed.
1.5.19. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to auto restart upon restoration of power after a power
failure. It shall be possible to inject power to the system at any part of the system cabling
using the network splitter or fibre interface.
1.5.20. The PAVA SYSTEM shall have an internal real time clock, which shall be synchronized
with the SMS server.
1.5.21. The power amplifiers shall be provided with control outputs that can be locked to the
amplifier channels (zones) so that these can be used for amplifier channel- related
functions such as volume control override.
1.5.22. The power amplifiers shall have the provision to connect a 48V DC supply, and the
availability of the 48V DC supply shall be monitored. It shall be possible to monitor the
audio output of the power amplifier using the headphone socket of the power amplifier.
The display shall show the VU meter reading of all the amplifier channels in the default
mode.
1.5.23. All loudspeakers shall be wired up in zones and shall be designed with individual
amplifier channels. The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide a high level Interface to a Security
Management System (SMS) such that any alarms or inputs generated by other
subsystems managed by the SMS can be use to trigger a broadcast or announcement by
the PAVA SYSTEM.
1.6.- System Requirement
1.6.1. For general office and public areas, the PAVA SYSTEM shall be capable of delivering a
sound pressure level of 77 dB at the listening level at 1Khz at at a level variation of 2dB &
sound pressure level of 73 dB at the listening level at 4Khz at at a level variation of 6dB
For areas such as plant rooms, basement area etc where the noise level is higher, the
PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to deliver 90 dB at the listening level.
The listening level shall be taken to be 1.5 m above floor level.
The reinforced sound shall be distributed evenly throughout the listening area; the total
variation in each area shall not exceed ±4 dB.
An articulation loss of consonants of less than 15% shall be maintained. (Generally, the
reverberation time of the various locations shall be assumed to be not more than 1.9
seconds).
Paging announcements shall be possible from any of the microphone call stations, or
from the microphone paging station to any zones within the network systems.
Each call station shall have three colour LEDs, one to monitor the status of the system
that signal an announcement being made or the selected zone is engaged (that is, with
another announcement) and the second one to indicate the status of the call station and
the third one to monitor the power to the call station.
The microphone paging station shall have the flexibility of selecting any number of user
keys (selection buttons) at any one time. It shall be able to program each user key for any
function.
1.6.2. The central NC shall be an Ethernet-based controller. It shall be using web technology for
the user interfaces and system interaction. It shall have a means of monitoring, to
continuously monitor the system from the microphone of the call station onwards; any
faults shall be displayed on the screen of the Alpha-Numeric Display as well as the
Central Monitoring, Configuration and Diagnostic PC. It shall come with dual cabling
connectivity for redundant cable connection.
It shall be able to deliver high quality signals to the loudspeakers; all individual audio
equipment shall have its own Digital Signal Processing modules.
High quality signals shall be maintained at the output of the power amplifiers to
compensate for losses in the audio distribution lines.
Each power amplifier with 30% spare capacity shall be provided to drive all loudspeakers
during an emergency without overloading.
Each power amplifier shall have a built-in self-restoring protection circuit to guard against
hazards of operation such as mis-loading at its input, short-circuiting of its output and
connection mistakes. It shall come with dual cabling connectivity for redundant cable
connection.
The power amplifiers shall also have built-in line transformers for 100V loudspeaker
matching, DC input of emergency operation, headphone monitor output, adjustable input
sensitivity, and shall conform to the safety standard of IEC 65489 or equivalent. It shall
have amplifier monitoring and auto-changeover circuits & automatic volume control
features built-in.
The power amplifiers shall have control inputs and audio inputs for interfacing for fire
alarm signals. This control inputs shall be supervised, freely programmable for any
system actions and with priorities setting. Each power amplifier shall have digital audio
processing to ensure good audio quality being delivered to the loudspeakers.
A built-in amplifier monitoring circuits shall continuously monitor the functioning of the
power amplifiers and shall automatically switch in a spare power amplifier in case of
failure of any of the amplifiers. Upon detection, the status of the fault shall be indicated by
the LCD display on the amplifier itself as well as in the Central Monitoring, Configuration
and Diagnostic PC. The number of spare power amplifiers to be provided shall be 10% of
the total quantity of each range of power amplifiers.
All speaker lines shall be supervised for open circuit fault, short circuit fault, and short to
ground fault. Upon detection, the status of the fault shall be indicated by the LCD display
on the NC and amplifier itself as well as the PC monitor in the Central Monitoring,
Configuration and Diagnostic PC.
The loudspeakers shall be located such that they meet the necessary requirements. In
general, one ceiling speaker shall be provided for every 25 square meters in each room
such as offices and corridors, while a minimum of one ceiling speaker shall be provided
for areas less than 25 square meters such as booths, pantry and toilets. Horn speakers
shall be provided for all plant rooms, generator rooms and outdoor areas with high
ambient noise.
1.6.3. The PAVA SYSTEM shall also have the means to cut-off the music sources during
emergency paging and shall enable the emergency announcement to be heard in that
area.
There shall be background music to selected areas. It shall be possible to pre-program

any of the input music sources to any of these zones. Sources provided shall be a
continuous cassette player, an integrated compact disc player with digital tuner.
All equipment such as the central NC and power amplifiers shall be housed in 19-inch
equipment racks.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide a High Level Interface (HLI) to a Security Management
System (SMS) via a server connected to an Ethernet LAN/WAN network.
The PAVA SYSTEM interface to the SMS shall provide a bi-directional HLI which include
time synchronization and all alarm interfaces from other subsystems. (E.g. Fire Panel)
1.6.4. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be network based and in digital domain and shall be flexible
and easy to operate. Specific functions shall be easily programmed and changed by
non-technical personnel through Internet Explorer to access the system configuration

software.
A. Network Controller (NC)
B. The basic system shall be based on a 19" rack frame and shall comprise at least the
following features:
1. Central Digital Signal Processor module
2. 2 x 16-character LCD Display
3. 8 Supervised Control and 4 Audio Inputs
4. Ethernet interface for Configuration and Diagnostic & Logging functions
5. Digital message storage
6. Automatic Messaging
7. Stores up to last 200 faults messages and last 200 system status changes
8. Ethernet Interface for logging
9. Power Amplifiers
The power amplifier shall be of Class-D type designed for the amplification of audio
signals for the loudspeakers. It shall be possible to select the output voltage between
100V, 70V or 50V by changing jumpers.
The power amplifier shall be designed for redundant network wiring.
The amplifier monitoring and changeover facility shall be incorporated in the power
amplifier. The changeover relays shall be included in the unit. The unit shall be
incorporated with digital audio processing and audio delay.
The power amplifier shall meet the following minimum requirements:

 Interfaces : 2 x system network connection
 Indication & Controls : 2 x 16-character LCD display for status display
: Rotary/push control for selection of system enquiry
mode & headphone volume
: Power supply for ON/OFF switch
 Inputs :Control Inputs & Audio Inputs selectable between
microphone & line
 Outputs :Selectable 100V, 70V or 50V
:Control ouputs
:Headphone outputs
 Audio inputs :Mono, balanced
 Frequency Response :Line- -3dB at 20 Hz and 20KHz
(Audio inputs)
 Frequency Response :60KHz to 20KHz
(Audio outputs)
 Mains supply :220 or 240V + 10% at 50-60Hz
 Emergency battery supply :+48V (-earth)
 Output power : 1 x 500W, 2x250W, 4x125W, 8x60W
 Type of Amplifiers : Class D
10. Conversion Interface Unit

The main function of the Conversion Interface Units shall be to convert digital audio
signals for transmission over the Ethernet network. The unit shall be certified to be
compliant to IEC60849 and compliant to other relevant local standards.
The Conversion Interface Units can route audio channels between itself and other
Conversion Interfaces, in the same or in other networks, or to third party Conversion
Interface units.
Only audio channels are routed via the Conversion Interface Unit, no control data. If
Conversion Interface Units are used as a link between multiple systems, the open
interface of the network controllers should be used for control by a PC master.
The Conversion Interface Units provides sample rate conversion between 44.1 kHz
sample rate and 48 kHz sample rate. Volume levels are preserved.
The 8 control inputs are freely programmable for system actions, and priorities can be
assigned to these inputs.
The 5 control outputs are freely programmable for faults and calls.
The 2 x 16-character display and the rotary control enable status enquiries relating to that
particular unit. The display shows the VU meter reading when the audio monitoring mode
is selected. The audio can be monitored by headphone. The fault status of the unit is
monitored and continuously reported to the network controller.
The control inputs can be programmed for momentary or toggle operation. This selection
can be made using the configuration software.
Each control input has the ability to monitor the cable between the control inputs and the
external switch for open-circuits and short-circuits.
The Conversion Interface Units is designed for redundant network cabling.
The unit is powered from the network controller via the network cable.
11. Call station basic

The call station is used for making a manual or pre-recorded call to any pre-assigned zones
or executing a predefined action. The call station shall have one key. The call station
shall have a fixed microphone to transmit speech over the network and a press-to-talk
key. The call station shall also have a headset socket. Once the headset is connected the
microphone will be muted. The unit shall be certified to be compliant to IEC60849 and
compliant to other relevant local standards.
The call station unit can be connected with a maximum of 16 call station keypad units via
serial data communication links.
The call station shall be programmable for momentary actions on make contact and toggle
actions without repeat on make contact.
The call station shall be a fully functional system.
12. Numeric Keypad

The call station numeric keypad shall have a serial digital interface to connect it to a call
station or call station kit with loop through facilities for additional keypads.
The call station keypad shall provide 12 keys (0 … 9, *, #) and an alphanumeric LCD with
backlight, that can be configured via the network to provide various functions for the call
station, it is connected to.
The configuration shall allow for configuration of the following functions:

 user access to the call station with user number and PIN, configurable for multiple users
with time-out and manual lock facilities;
 zone and zone group selection as destinations for calls with up to eight zones or zone
groups that can be entered into a string.
 The LCD shall give feedback to the user about the selections and the accessibility of the
selected zone and zone groups.
 The numeric keypad shall get its power from the call station it is connected to.
13. Line supervision set

The system shall use the same loudspeaker line for communicating with the end-of-
loudspeaker-line unit. The monitoring principle shall not be based on DC current or
impedance measurement.
 The line monitoring unit shall be incorporated in the power amplifier unit itself to avoid
any non-monitored parts of the cable.
 Loudspeaker line monitoring shall be provided without any additional wiring.
 The tone generator for loudspeaker monitoring shall be incorporated in the amplifier so
that a single failure of the tone generator will not affect the monitoring of other amplifier
channels.
 Loudspeaker line monitoring can be switched on/off from the configuration software.
 The power for the end-of-line monitoring units shall be supplied from the power amplifier.
14. Integrated Compact Disc Player with Digital Tuner
The CD-player shall be designed to play normal audio CDs and CD-Rs with MP3-encoded
files. The CD-player shall allow for high quality uninterrupted music to be played from a
single MP3-disc.
Music shall be organized on a disc in multiple folders with music selection for different
occasions, with programming facilities for up to 999 tracks. Repeat and random play
modes shall be provided.
The digitally controlled FM/AM tuner shall use frequency synthesizer for the accurate
capturing of radio stations. 10 presets channels for FM and 10 presets channels for AM
shall be provided to store favorite radio stations.
Both the CD-player and the tuner shall be able to operate simultaneously on different outputs
to facilitate two-channel BGM distribution.
The CD-player shall meet the following minimum requirements:
 Frequency response : 30 Hz to 15 KHz

(Tuner)
 Distortion : <1%
 S/N ratio : >63dB
 Output level : 200mV
 Frequency response (CD) : 20 Hz to 20 KHz
 Distortion : <0.1%
 S/N ratio : >85dB
 Output level : 200mV
 Combined outputs : 200mV
15. Digital Audio Server

Provide 2 number 4 channel audio servers with the following specifications:
Storage Size: 500GB per channel

Channels: Four, discrete
Supported Formats: Uncompressed (44.1 kHz/16 bit) MP3 (128, 160, 192CBR, 192 VBR,
and 320 kbps) WMA
S/N ratio: 100dB @ 1 kHz (A-Weighted)
Frequency response: 20Hz - 20 kHz +/- 0.5dB

Channel Separation: 110dB @ 1 kHz
16. Speakers
All loudspeakers should be designed to withstand operating at their rated power for 100
hours in accordance with IEC 268-5 Power Handling Capacity (PHC) standards, and
BS5839 part 8 for safety standard.
A1. Ceiling Mounted (6W)

 Maximum Power : 9W
 Rated Power : 6W
 Sound pressure level at : 96/88 dB (SPL) 6W/1W (1 kHz, 1m)
 Opening angle : 180° / 128° at 1 kHz/4 kHz (-6 dB)
 Effective frequency : 85 to 20,000 Hz range (-10dB)
 Rated voltage : 100 volts
A2. Rated impedance : 1667 ohms Ceiling Mounted (24W)
A3. Rated impedance : 417 ohms Ceiling Mounted (12W)
 Rated impedance : 833 ohms
A4. Ceiling Mounted (1.5W)
 Rated Power : 12/6/3/1.5W
 Sound pressure level at : 100/89 dB (SPL)
6W/1W (1 kHz, 1m)
A5. Ceiling Mounted (15W)
 Opening angle : 165° at 1 kHz/4 kHz (-6 dB)
B1. Wall Mounted (30W)

 Opening angle : Horizontal 105°/ 90°, Vertical110°/125°
at 1 kHz/4 kHz (-6 dB)


 Rated Power : 6/3/1.5/0.75W
B3. Wall Mounted (0.75W)

 Rated Power : 6/3/1.5/0.75W

 Rated Power : 30/15/7.5/3.75W
 Opening angle : Horizontal 105°/ 90°, Vertical110°/125°
at 1 kHz/4 kHz (-6 dB)
 Operating Temperature : -25 ºC to +55 ºC (-13 ºF to +131 ºF)
1.8. System Software’s
1.8.1. Configuration software

The configuration software is used for configuring the system. The configuration software
shall be located in the network controller except for the file transfer facilities. Any PC with
Internet Explorer version 5.0 or above will be able to connect to the network controller to
access the configuration and logging functions. No special software shall need to be
installed in the PC for configuration or logging. The system shall be able to operate
without the configuration PC. The configuration software shall be required only during the
installation and when changes are to be made in the existing system.
1.8.2. Diagnostic & logging software

The diagnostic & logging software has the main function of monitoring and recording the
status of all the units in the PA system. It shall log all events such as calls and status
changes of system units, and provide a current view of the system status. This software
section can be used for real-time logging by connecting a PC with web browser.
1.9. - Electrical Installation
The installation shall use fire rated audio cables. The fire rated audio cables shall be a
minimum of 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated PVC over sheath. However specialist system
supplier shall be totally responsible to determine the exact size of fire rated cable as per
requirement, without cost variation entitlement.
The cables shall be run in suitable GI trunking and where cables have to be run on
vertical surface galvanized conduits shall be used. Embedded or concealed installation
shall be in PVC conduit.
The cable clips shall be fixed firmly and distance between clips shall not be greater than
300 mm.
Correct corresponding termination devices and boxes shall be used. All devices shall be
terminated using a compression lock gland. Where devices are surface fixed a suitable
shroud shall be used.
Before any devices are connected the Contractor must fully demonstrate and prove
the quality of the installation for loop integrity, continuity, resistance and capacitance.
The system specialist shall install all devices, this shall include second and third fixes.
Prior to completion of the project the system specialist must demonstrate the entire
system to the approval of the Engineer. The entire system shall be 100% tested
independently prior to the demonstration to the Engineer. Should any items fail during the
test a new and complete 100% re-test shall be carried out. The specialist will be
responsible for any costs involved with re-testing of the system.
The system specialist will be responsible for providing complete and detailed manuals for
the entire system. The manuals shall be fully detailed and shall describe the operation
and function of each part of the system.
1.10.- Communication To The BMS
The entire voice alarm system must directly communicate with the BMS system.
The system shall communicate via pre-proven intelligent digital gateway supplied by the
system specialist.
The system shall have also the ability to work independently of BMS. The system shall pass
to BMS all the device information including, current status, history, ambient levels,
routines, alarm events, faults events etc.
1.11. Specialist Supplier
The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer prior to appointing a system
specialist.
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of main

background music system of types, and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years. Provide main background
music system produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable manufacturer in this
section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE,

IEC and BS EN.
C. Any item of equipment of material not specifically addressed on the drawings or in this
document and required to provide a complete and functional installation shall be provided
in a level of quality consistent with other specified items.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data and installation instructions for the public
address system.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
C. Riser diagram: Submit riser and block diagrams for the main background music system
indicating type of different components in the system, interface with other systems and
also the arrangements of the central equipment inside the rack cabinets.
D. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this
specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated
function or specification in a manner different from that described and specified a full
description of the deviation shall be provided.
1.14 WARRANTY
A. Provide the services of a system engineer to assist the personnel provided by the
Employer during the installation and commissioning period.
B. Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All manuals
shall be in the English language.
C. Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment supplied will
be free of defects in labor, materials and workmanship and will perform satisfactorily in
compliance with all pertinent specification for a period of one year after commissioning.
D. During the warranty period, the services of a factory representative qualified to advice on
the operation and maintenance of the equipment specified shall be provided by the
manufacturer.
1.15 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. After compiling with the procedures set out in the preliminaries, the contractor shall carry
out full tests on the contract works to demonstrate that the works meet the requirements
of the contract documents.
B. The contractor shall allow a minimum of 2 days (7hours per day) for demonstration of
equipment and attendance, plus:
i. 2 days for instruction of operation staff.

ii. 2 days for system tuning and adjustment if found to be necessary.
C. The contractor shall have available at commissioning the following electro-acoustic test
equipment:
1. Calibrated sound level meter, compiling with BS 5060 (IE 651) Type 1 or 2
2. 1/3 octave band spectrum analyses (minimum range 40HZ – 16 KHz at ISO center
frequencies, display resolution increment not more than 2dB
D. The contractor shall have available at commissioning the following electro-acoustic test
equipment:
1. Calibrated sound level meter, compiling with BS 5969 (IEC 651) Type 1 or 2
2. 1/3 octave band spectrum analyses (minimum range 40HZ – 16 KHz at ISO center
freq2uencie, display resolution increment not more than 2dB).
3. Pink noise source (minimum bandwidth 20Hz – 20 KHz, 0.5 dB)
4. Oscilloscope for wave form analysis.
5. Loudspeaker’s phase checker.
6. Impedance meter for checking the impedance of the loudspeakers’ lines.
7. Portable wireless intercom approved for use on sale.
8. Amplifier for use with (3), and sufficient loudspeakers to produce overall sound pressure
level that is more than the noise level by 10dB of the mean, measured 1.5m above the
floor,
E. If required by a consultant ( in the event of apparent non-compliance of the installed

system with the specification ), the contractor shall provide precision test equipment for
verification of voltage, power, frequency response, single noise ratio, total harmonic
distortion and RASTI.
1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Provide three (3) operation and maintenance manuals, book binded for consultant
review/approval.
IP NETWORK SYSTEM
SECTION 16737
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specifications Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK (AS APPLICABLE)

1. All materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make
ready for operation, an IP Based Multi-Services Network.

1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of IP Multi-
Services Network of types, ratings, and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. With direct partnership with
manufacture.
2. The manufacturer should guarantee technology support for 5 years for all delivered hardware.
3. Standards Compliance: Comply with the latest editions of the requirements of applicable local
codes, and the following standards:
A. EIA: Electronic Industries Association.
B. TIA: Telecommunication Industries Association
C. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
D. IEEE: The Institute of Electrical and Engineers, Inc.
E. ITU: International Telecommunication union.
F. ETSI: European Telecommunication Standardization.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for all network components.
2. Submit a single line diagram indicating all system components, interconnection between
these components and types of cables used, with detailed description for this
interconnection links type, capacities and speeds.
3. Submit the arrangement of the main equipment (access switch, core switch, etc.) inside
the distributions racks and main racks also, submit a layout showing the area needed to
accommodate these equipments, as applicable to building.
4. Submit power consumption and heat dissipation calculations for each rack in the project.
5. Submit full details and description for the system including the functions of each unit and
the software needed for proper operation of all system components. With software road
map for new updated and releases.
6. Submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this document. Where the
proposed system does not comply, or accomplish the stated function or specification in a
manner different from that described; a full description of the deviation shall be provided. The
compliance state shall be either COMPLY or NOT Comply; other states won’t be accepted. I a
full description is not provided it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not comply
with the requirement in the specification. Alternatives may be proposed but shall be fully
explained in the proposal.
IP NETWORK SYSTEM January 2019 16737-1

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The communications infrastructure is based on Optical Fiber cables interconnecting the
distribution racks and the main racks in proper topology, as applicable to building.
Main racks are deemed the core of the network infrastructure and the voice gateway to the
outside world via System Provider, as applicable.
The contractor should consider in his solution that the main racks share the traffic load among
the building’s distribution racks “Active Load Sharing operation.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS

1. Over a common backbone infrastructure. This common infrastructure is based on IP
technology. The contractor should not assume or propose any alternative to the Ethernet
technology in the backbone.
2. All voice services inside the project should be running over IP.
3. The contractor should guarantee full integration and operation with Internet service Provider
system (Gateway router of the ISP).
4. The contractor should guarantee full integration of his proposed solution with System
Provider transmission and switching infrastructure.
5. The contractor should take into consideration that all the equipment that will be installed with
240 VAC -50 Hz power supplies.
6. All supplied hardware and software should come with latest version of software installed.
The contractor shall submit the version number and date for all offered hardware and
software showing the road map for next releases.
7. All offered equipment should be SNMP manageable.
8. The network shall be based on switched design, with provisioning of Quality of Service
(QoS) and Class of Service (CoS) features, The following areas shall be addresses by the
proposed network design:
A. Security.
B. QoS/CoS.
C. Multicast control.
D. Total reliability of the network.
The contractor shall highlighted how the proposed design addressed these above areas and how
each of these areas will be optimized in the design by explaining the technologies used to
achieve these goals.
9. The contractor will propose a complete detailed solution with complete BoQ's.
10. The contractor and his vendor(s) should present a commitment that a complete support
should be provided to the contractor during and after the project implementation.
2.3 NETWORK SWITCHES

This section specifies the requirements of the layer 2, layer 3 , layer 4 and multi-layers switches
as applicable, and the supported protocols that needed for inter / intra building connectivity.,
as applicable to building.
2.3.1 ACCESS SWITCH (AS)
1. The contractor should provide intelligent Fast-Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T POE, wire
speed Ethernet Edge Switch, with RJ45 ports to accommodate all users within each
distribution racks of the building. Switch to support all triple play service presently
required for this project. Contractor should provide solution for CCTV points that exceed
90 meter and other DATA/Voice points if any.
2. The Access switch should be scalable, modular or stackable. The contractor should
explain in detail the scalability of the offered AS, indicating how it could be expanded to

accommodate future needs and the maximum number of ports the switch can support,
Also indicating the switching fabric capacity.
3. The AS should support full-duplex, non-blocking operation at maximum port speed. The
contractor should explain in detail the hardware architecture of his proposed switch
including but not limited to main and/or distributed processors, memory, buffers, port /
switch capacity, throughput in Mbps, etc.
4. Each AS should be equipped with two single or multimode mode fiber Gigabit uplink
ports (1000 Base-LX / SX) for connection with the backbone switch.
5. The contractor should describe in details the QoS features / parameters implemented on
L2, L3 and L4 and supported by his proposed edge switch. The contractor should clarify
how QoS could be used to classify, prioritize, and direct traffic toward the best route. Also
should state without any ambiguity if his QoS implementation is based on standard
technologies or other proprietary mechanisms.
6. The proposed switch must support inline power based on 802.3af. with PoE+
7. The contractor should explain in details how the proposed switch can provide user
access control to the network using username / password, RADIUS authentication, MAC
address, IP address, port number, etc.
8. The proposed switch should support access control lists (ACL).
9. The proposed switch should support multi-layer security in order to secure switch
management sessions. The contractor should describe how the AS could secure (i.e. encrypt)
network administration traffic.
10. The proposed switch should have redundant hot swappable power supplies 240VAC -
50Hz.
11. Each switch should be supplied with original user and installation manuals as soft-copies
(CD’s), console cable, power cables, and any other needed accessories for mounting the
switch into a 19" data cabinet. Any cables, accessories, and software needed to operate
the network with full features and not listed above will be contractor’s responsibility.
12. The AS switches should support the following IEEE standards:
A. IEEE 802.3z 1000Base-SX/LX/TX.
B. IEEE 802.1p CoS Prioritization (the contactor has to specify number of supported levels).
C. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging.
D. IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol.
E. IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation. (Distribution of aggregated links on separate hardware
modules is a mandatory feature)
F. IEEE 802.1x Port-based network access control.
G. IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree or equivalents.
H. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Instances.
In addition, the following protocols/features should be supported by the AS switch:
1. All uplinks within the switch/Stack must be active and redundant
2. Traffic must be load balanced on all uplinks
3. Solution should allow all uplinks to be acting as one logical aggregate bandwidth while all
uplinks are distributed on different units within the stack.
4. In case of using stacking technology, Stacking bandwidths prefer to be at least equal to the
back plane bandwidth.
5. In case of stackable AS each unit switch must have at least 2* 1Gig ports uplinks and its
stacking connectors.
6. Protocol based VLANs

7. IGMP snooping/ IGMP proxy

8. VLAN Frame Support for IEEE 802.IQ
9. Traffic Prioritization m802. 1p.
10. Broadcast Suppression.
11. Support l000BaseSX, l000BaseLX/LH~ l000BaseZX.
12. 10/100 Auto-sensing.
13. Half/Full-Duplex Auto-negotiation.
14. Port Security.
15. Guaranteed Interoperability.
16. Embedded Web management with extensive built –in HTTP server support is an advantage.
17. Single IP address management-Unique IP address for a stack of switches
18. Auto configuration.
19. Simple Network Time Protocol.
20. Embedded RMON.
21. Multilevel Console Security.
22. Failsafe recovery support.
2.3.2 CORE SWITCH (CS)

The core switch will represent the overall network backbone and it will be based on the IP
technology. It should support the following feature/protocols and to support any triple play
services required:
1. The core switch should be modular, flexible, scalable and able to handle all estimated traffic
loads. The contractor should provide detailed calculations for the estimated traffic that could
be carried by one CS.
2. The contractor should detail the configuration of each CS in terms of the number / capacity of
ports. The contractor should calculate the number of ports and add 30% extra ports. The
contractor should provide the following details:
A. Max number of slots.
B. Max number of ports supported, for each interface type stating all possible combinations
that shall not affect the performance.
C. Actual number and type of ports offered in each CS as per number of building
Switch and the active ports.
D. Number of free slots that could be used for future upgrade.
3. The core switch should allow a different type of traffic transfer such as data , voice,
video, and multimedia with comprehensive control over QoS and CoS of each type of
traffic.
4. The core switch should allow the main application servers to be directly connected for faster
access.
5. The core switch should allow connecting the main application servers/traffic to the building
switch, these applications will be as video servers, IPPBX, etc.
6. The core switch should support minimum three levels of priority on the switching back plane,
provide burst traffic configuration, and ensures server traffic priority.
7. The core switch should have a dedicated network management processor.
8. The core switch should be a multi layer switch.

9. The core switch should be equipped with10/100/1000 Base-T ports auto negotiation,
Gigabit Base-LX and 10Gigabit Ethernet modules.
10. The core switch should provide wire-speed switching without any degradation in
performance.
11. The core switch should support full-duplex, non-blocking operation at maximum port
speed. The contractor should present in detail the hardware architecture of the core
switch including but not limited to main and/or distributed processors, memory, buffers,
port / switch capacity, throughput in Mbps, etc.
12. The core switch should have redundant hot-swappable management modules.
13. The core switch should support multicast and multi protocol routing with broadcast
suppression.
14. The contractor should confirm that the failure of any component within the switch
including one management module, should not affect (degrade) the performance of the
whole switch.
15. In addition, the contractor may clarify if the failure of any management module (or both)
will not affect the network traffic forwarding.
16. The core switch should support different layer 3 IP routing protocols including
RIP1/RIP2/OSPF, and static IP routing.
17. The core switch should support fail-over routing protocols for layer 2 redundancy such
as VRRP (RFC 2338), or similar.
18. The contractor should present in details the QoS features / parameters implemented on
L2, L3 and L4 and supported by his proposed backbone switch. The contractor should
clarify how QoS could be used to classify, prioritize, and direct traffic toward the best
route.
19. The contractor should state if his QoS implementation is based on standard
technologies or other proprietary mechanisms.
20. The core switch should support DiffServ as per RFC 2475, and should explain in detail
how DiffServ is used in his design in order to provide QoS guarantees at the core of the
network.
21. Standard multicast routing protocol must be supported.
22. IGMP fast leave for single and multi-users.
23. Multicast flow balancing over parallel links
24. VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
25. The core switch should have redundant hot swappable power supplies 240 VAC, 50Hz.
26. The core switch should be supplied with its single mode fiber patch cords with SC/SC
jacks to connect with the fiber patch panels.
27. Each switch should be supplied with original user and installation manuals as soft-
copies (CD’s), console cable, power cables, and any other needed accessories for
mounting the switch into a 19" data cabinet. The cabinets shall be equipped with alarm
contacts for Temperature monitoring and access control.
2.3.3 Additional CS FEATURES

The CS switches have to support the following:
1. IP/IPX.
2. RIPvI,RIPv2,OSPF, BGP4, IS-IS.
3. Protocol Filtering.
4. Super netting / CIDR.

5. Load Balancing
6. Dynamic VLAN Membership.
7. Standard 802.IQ VLAN tagging support.
8. 80l.2p prioritization.
9. Multiple Spanning Tree instances
10. Trucking support.
11. QOS/Policy Based Networking.
12. 8O2.lp support.
13. TOS support -prioritization.
14. CoS-Class of service support.
15. Radius support.
16. Access Control.
17. Route Authentication.
18. Port Security By MAC Address.
19. Traps sent on Security violations
20. Data Export.
21. Syslog Support.
22. Trace Route.
23. DNS service.
24. Conversation steering
25. Link Load Balancing
26. Out of Band Management (the out of band management network design should be
submitted by the contactor).
27. Multicast support.
28. Broadcast Suppression.
29. IGMP proxy/IGMP Snooping.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Install all equipment in locations as shown on the drawings in accordance with standard
industry practice.
2. Install and adequately support fixed wiring throughout the installation. For cabling routes not
specified in detail, submit a proposed route layout.
3. Handling cabling cords: Handle cables to avoid damage to insulation and sheathing. Report
any damage and replace or repair damaged cable as directed.
4. Labeling: Handling a detailed standard labeling scheme for all network equipment and patch
cords.

3.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

1. Site testing and commissioning
A. Attendance the testing of all network equipment and confirmation of the operation and
integration with other systems.
B. Testing and commissioning of all Switches.
C. Testing the entire network operation including all the network elements and verification of the
proper operation of all equipment.
2. Final acceptance Test:
After the testing report and as built drawings have been approved by the customer's
representative, the completed system shall be tested in the presence of the customer's
representative. Acceptance of the system shall require a demonstration of the stability of the
system. Should major equipment failure occur, the contractor shall replace or repair
component (s). This test shall not start until the customer has obtained 30 days beneficial
use of the system. One year guarantee period shall start upon satisfactorily completion of
the project.

VOICE AND DATA NETWORK PASSIVE CABLING

SECTION 16740
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Related documents
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 – General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.2 Supported systems
A. The applications that shall be supported include, but are not limited to:
1. Ethernet Applications
A. 10BASE-T LAN (10 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3
B. 100BASE-TX LAN (100 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3
C. 1000BASE-T LAN (1 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3
D. 100BASE-FX LAN (100 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3
E. 1000BASE-SX LAN (1000 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3z
F. 1000BASE-LX LAN (1000 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3z
G. 10GBASE-S LAN (10 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3ae
H. 10GBASE-LX4 LAN (10 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3ae
I. 10GBASE-L LAN (10 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3ae
J. 10GBASE-E LAN/WAN (10 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3ae
K. 10Gb/s 850 nm 4-Lane Parallel
(HP 10GBASE-CX4 Optical Converter Model J8439A)
2. IEEE 802.3af Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) Power via Media Dependent Interface (MDI)
3. Fiber Channel Applications
VOICE AND DATA NETWORK January 2019 16740-1

A. 1 Gb/s Fiber Channel – FC-PI
B. 2 Gb/s Fiber Channel – FC-PI
C. 4 Gb/s Fiber Channel – FC-PI
D. 10 Gb/s Fiber Channel – 10GFC
4. IBM FICON Application
5. OIF (Optical Internetworking Forum) Applications
A. 40 Gb/s SONET OC-768 / SDH STM-256
B. 10 Gb/s SONET OC-192 / SDH STM-64
6. InfiniBand Applications
A. 30 Gb/s InfiniBand  IB-12X-SX
B. 10 Gb/s InfiniBand  IB-4X-SX and IB-4X-LX
C. 2.5 Gb/s InfiniBand  IB-1X-SX and IB-1X-LX
7. IEEE 1394b High Performance Serial Bus Applications
8. IEEE 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN Applications
9. Video Applications
A. Baseband Video
1) Composite Analog Baseband Video (including S-Video/S-VHS)
2) Red-Green-Blue (RGB) Component Video
B. Broadband Video
C. Digital Video/Audio (including High Definition Television, HDTV)

10. Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) Applications
11. Voice and ISDN Applications
A. Voice Applications
B. ISDN Applications
12. Building Automation Systems (BAS) Applications
A. Generic BAS Guidelines
B. Andover Controls System
C. Carrier Systems
D. Echelon Corporation FTT-10A Free Topology Transceiver
E. Honeywell Systems
F. Johnson Controls Metasys System
G. Legrand SwitchPlan SP500 Lighting Control System
H. Matsushita Electric Works NAIS FP3 Wire (W)-type Link System
I. Siemens Cerberus Division Pyrotronics
J. Siemens Building Technologies Landis Division Staefa Control System
K. VingCard Hotel Security System
L. Trend Controls
1.3 Summary of work
A. Furnish and install complete with all accessories a Structured Cabling System (SCS). The SCS
shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data, voice, video and any other low voltage IP signal
throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desks,
workstation and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein. High
speed networking is required for future proof technology and Triple Play services.

B. 3No Data including Internet, IPtelephony, 3No Analogue Telephone Points, 2No SMATV / QAM
Points and 2No IPTV Points are required in every Standard Unit King Room.
3No Data including Internet, IPtelephony, 3No Analogue Telephone Points, 2No SMATV / QAM
Points and 2No IPTV Points are required in every Double Bed Unit Room.
Points and 2No IPTV Points are required in every Executive King Room.
points and 3No IPTV Points are required in every Suite Unit Room.
points and 3No IPTV Points are required in every V.P. Suite Room.
points and 3No IPTV Points are required in every Presidential Suite Room.
points and 3No IPTV Points are required in every 1 Bedroom Unit Apartment.
points and 4No IPTV Points are required in every 2 Bedroom Unit Apartment.
12No Data including Internet, IPtelephony, 10No Analogue Telephone Points, 4No SMATV /
QAM points and 5No IPTV Points are required in every 3 Bedroom Unit Apartment.
15No Data including Internet, IPtelephony, 12No Analogue Telephone Points, 6No SMATV /
QAM points and 6No IPTV Points are required in every 4 Bedroom Unit Apartment.
Additional, 1No Analogue Telephone Point is required in every Housekeeping Room and 1No
Data & 1No Analogue Telephone Point are required for Electrical Rooms & IDF Rooms.
Inside each IDF Floor it is required a 42U cabinet populated with 24 port 10/100/1000 POE
switches for requested services and an 18U cabinet populated with 24 port 10/100/1000 POE
switches for CCTV and Access Control System as a separate network.

WIFI to cover all areas and Heat maps are to be provided with the contract document showing
the coverage.
C. This Section includes passive equipment such as wire, cable, connecting devices, installation,
and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways for voice and high-speed data
transmission suitable for local area networks (LANs).
D. Scope of work consists of the installation of a generic structured wiring system based upon a star
topology to connect all manner of applications covering voice, data and video transmission,
including, but not limited to the following:
 Voice and data outlets,
 Horizontal cabling, Backbone cabling.
 Horizontal cross connect (HC – cable termination and cross connect cabling hardware) located in
telecommunications closets (IDF).
 Main distribution frame (MDF) in equipment room (IT Room).
 Main data cross connect (MDC) in equipment room (IT Room).
 Necessary patch cables, jumpers and ancillary equipment.
E. Wiring utilized for data and voice communications shall originate at owner provided hubs and
concentrators either wall mounted, in vertical free standing equipment racks, and/or enclosed
wall mounted vertical equipment racks located at the Telecommunications Equipment Room (IT
Room), the Main Cross-connect (MC) , the Intermediate cross-connect (IC), and/or the IDF
Room location(s). Wiring, terminations and patch bays between these designated demarcation
points and outlet locations designated on the plans shall be considered part of the contract.
Telecommunication Outlets (TO) shall be furnished, wired and installed by the SCS system
contractor.
F. The system shall utilize a network of fiber optic, and unshielded twisted pair, riser, tie and station
cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as shown and in the quantities
indicated on the drawings.
G. Fiber cables shall terminate on fiber patch panels and/or modular patch panels located in all
demarcation and termination points shown on the drawings.
H. All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations.
I. All cables shall terminate in an alphanumeric sequence at all termination locations.

J. All balanced twisted pair cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to TIA/EIA568-B
standards for Category 6A installations.
K. Available and unused pairs between the IT Room and IDF shall be terminated and shall be
identified as spare at each location.
L. Station cables shall terminate on one, two or three gang wall plates equipped as shown on the
drawings.
M. The contractor shall include coordination works and necessary required structured cabling work
adjustment in compliance with the Data Center Specialist requirement.
1.4 References
1.4.1 European Committee for Electro technical Standardization (CENELEC)
a. CENELEC EN 50173, Information Technology—Generic Cabling Systems, 1996. (Refer to

Comparison between ANSI/TIA/EIA, ISO/IEC, and CENELEC Standards in this chapter.)
b. CENELEC EN 50173, Information Technology—Generic Cabling Systems—Amendment to

Clauses 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 and Annexes A, B, H of EN, 2000. (Refer to Comparison between
ANSI/TIA/EIA, ISO/IEC, and CENELEC Standards in this chapter.)
c. CENELEC EN 50173-1, Information Technology—Generic Cabling Systems—Part 1:

General Requirements and Office Areas (work in progress).
d. CENELEC EN 50173-2, Information Technology—Generic Cabling Systems—Part 2:

Industrial Premises (work in progress).
e. CENELEC EN 50173-3, Information Technology—Generic Cabling Systems—Part 3: Small

Office Home Office (SOHO) (work in progress).
f. CENELEC EN 50174-1, Information Technology—Cabling Installation— Part 1: Specification

and Quality Assurance, 2000.
g. CENELEC EN 50174-2, Information Technology—Cabling Installation— Part 2: Installation

Planning and Practices Inside Buildings, 2000.
h. CENELEC EN 50174-3, Information Technology—Cabling Installation— Part 3: Installation

Planning and Practices Outside Buildings (work in progress).
i. CENELEC EN 50310, Application of Equipotential Bonding and Earthing in Buildings with

Information Technology Equipment, 2000.
j. CENELEC EN 50346, Information Technology—Cabling Installation— Testing of Installed
Cabling, draft.

1.4.2 Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
a. ANSI/ICEA S-80-576-2000, Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair Indoor

Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems, 2002.
b. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2002, Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated Copper

Conductor, 2002.
c. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2002, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair

Indoor Cable for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems, 2002.
d. ICEA S-102-700-2001, ICEA Standard for Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair

Indoor Cables for Use in LAN Communication Wiring Systems Technical Requirements,
2001.
1.4.3 International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
a. ISO/IEC 11801 Ed.2:2002, Information Technology—Generic Cabling for Customer

Premises.
b. ISO/IEC 14763-1:1999, Information Technology—Implementation and Operation of

Customer Premises Cabling—Part 1: Administration.
c. ISO/IEC TR 14763-2:2000, Information Technology—Implementation and Operation of

Customer Premises Cabling—Part 2: Planning and Installation of Copper Cabling.
d. ISO/IEC TR 14763-3:2000, Information Technology—Implementation and Operation of

Customer Premises Cabling—Part 3: Acceptance Testing for Optical Cabling.
e. ISO/IEC 18010:2002, Information Technology—Pathways and Spaces for Customer

Premises Cabling.
1.4.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code® (NEC®), 2005.
b. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, 2002.
c. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code®, 2002.
d. NFPA 75, Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment,
1999.
e. NFPA 76, Recommended Practice for the Fire Protection of Telecommunications Facilities,
2002.
f. NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2002.

g. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code®, 2003.
h. NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials, 2000.
i. NFPA 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for
Use in Air-Handling Spaces, 2002.
j. NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, 2000.
k. NFPA 5000™, Building Construction and Safety Code, 2003.
1.4.5 Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
a. ANSI X3T9.5, Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps.
b. TIA/EIA TSB-125, Guidelines for Maintaining Optical Fiber Polarity Through Reverse-Pair
Positioning, 2001.
c. TIA/EIA TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical
Fiber Cabling Systems (pending).
d. TIA/EIA568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 1:

General Requirements, 2001.
e. TIA/EIA568-B.1-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 1:

General Requirements—Addendum 1—Minimum 4-Pair UTP and 4-Pair ScTP Patch Cable
Bend Radius, 2001.
f. TIA/EIA568-B.1-2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 1:

General Requirements—Addendum 2—Grounding and Bonding Specifications for Screened
Balanced Twisted Pair Horizontal Cabling, 2003.
g. TIA/EIA568-B.1-3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 1:

General Requirements—Addendum 3—Supportable Distances and Channel Attenuation for
Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type, 2003.
h. TIA/EIA568-B.1-4, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 1:

General Requirements—Addendum 4—Recognition of Category 6 and 850 nm Laser-
Optimized 50/125 µm Multimode Optical Fiber Cabling, 2003.
i. TIA/EIA568-B.1-5, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 1:

General Requirements—Addendum 5—Telecommunications Cabling for
Telecommunications Enclosures, 2004.
j. TIA/EIA568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 2:

Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, 2001.

k. TIA/EIA568-B.2-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 2:

Balanced Twisted Pair Components—Addendum 1— Transmission Performance
Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling, 2002.
l. TIA/EIA568-B.2-2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 2:

Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components—Addendum 2, 2001.
m. TIA/EIA568-B.2-3. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 2:

Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling—Addendum 3—Additional Considerations for Insertion Loss
and Return Loss Pass/Fail Determination, 2001.
n. TIA/EIA568-B.2-5, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 2:

Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling—Addendum 5—Corrections to TIA-568-B.2, 2003.
o. TIA/EIA568-B.2-3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard—Part 2:

Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling—Addendum 6—Category 6 Related Component Test
Procedures, 2003.
p. TIA/EIA568-B.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, 2000.
q. TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard— Addendum 1—Additional

Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125µm Optical Fiber Cables, 2002.
r. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces, 2003.
s. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, 2001.
t. ANSI/TIA/EIA-604.2, FOCIS 2—Fiber Optic Connector Intermateablility Standard, 1997.
u. TIA/EIA606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructures,

2002.
v. ANSI J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements

for Telecommunications, 2002.
w. TIA/EIA758-A, Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard,

2005.
x. ANSI/TIA/EIA-854, A Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000 Mb/s (1000BASE-TX)

Operating over Category 6 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling, 2001.
y. TIA/EIA-862, Building Automation Systems Cabling for Commercial Buildings, 2002.
1.4.6 Other Reference Materials
a. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (COOSP), 3rd edition.

b. BICSI Electronic Safety and Security Reference Manual (ESSDRM), 1st edition.
c. BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Manual (ITSIM), 4th edition.
d. BICSI Network Design Reference Manual (NDRM), 6th edition.
e. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 10th edition.
f. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM), 1st edition.
g. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
i. Underwriters Laboratories (UL ) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program.
1.5 Definitions
A. Structured Cabling System (SCS): A SCS is defined as all required cabling including hardware,
termination blocks, cross connect wire or cordage, patch panels, patch cords, telecommunication
outlets, work area cords, UTP and fiber optic cable installed and configured to provide computer
data and voice connectivity from each data or voice device to the network file server or voice
network/switch designated as the service point of the local area network.
B. Work Area Subsystem: The connection between the telecommunications outlet and the station
equipment in the work area is provided by the Work Area. It consists of cords, adapters, and
other transmission electronics.
C. Horizontal Subsystem: The Horizontal subsystem Provides connections from the horizontal
cross connect to the Telecommunication Outlets (TOs) in the work areas. It consists of the
horizontal transmission media, the associated connecting hardware terminating this media and
TOs in the work area. Each floor of a building is served by its own Horizontal Subsystem.
D. Riser Backbone: The Riser Backbone subsystem links the main cross connect (MC) in the
equipment room to intermediate cross connects (IC) and horizontal cross connects in the
telecommunications rooms (TR). It consists of the backbone transmission media between these
locations and the associated connecting hardware terminating this media. It is normally installed
in a star topology; with first-level backbone cables beginning at the main cross connect. If
needed, second-level backbone cables begin at intermediate cross connects.
E. Equipment Subsystem: The Equipment Subsystem consists of shared (common) electronic

communications equipment in the equipment room, main cross connect or telecommunications
room and the transmission media required to terminate this equipment on the distribution
hardware.

F. The Administration Subsystem: The Administration Subsystem links all of the subsystems
together. It consists of labeling hardware for providing circuit identification and patch cords or
jumper wire used for creating circuit connections at the cross connects.
1.6 Submittals
A. Product Data
1. Provide manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
2. Submittals shall include all items called for in PART 2 – PRODUCTS of this document and the
manufacturers cut sheets for the following:
A. All fiber optic and balanced twisted pair cable: to include patch cords, cross connect wire and
cross connect cordage.
B. All connectors and required tooling.
C. All termination system components for each cable type.
D. All IT Room and IDF equipment frame types, hardware (and LAN equipment if applicable).
E. All grounding and surge suppression system components.
F. All test equipment to be used for fiber and balanced twisted pair channels
3. A technical data sheet showing manufacturer’s Guaranteed Channel Performance over the full
swept frequency range.
4. Technical data sheets shall include the physical specifications as well as the following electrical
and transmission characteristics for balanced twisted pair channels:
A. Mutual Capacitance
B. Characteristic Impedance
C. DC Resistance
D. Insertion Loss (IL)
E. Pair-to-Pair Near End Crosstalk (NEXT)
F. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk (PSNEXT)
G. ELFEXT (ELFEXT)
H. Power Sum ELFEXT (PSELFEXT)
I. Return Loss (RL)
J. Propogation delay

K. Delay Skew
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions
1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency
specified under regulatory requirements.
2. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, operation and
installation of product.
C. Pre-Qualification Certificate
1. Contractor shall submit the following documents with project proposal:
A. A letter of approval from the manufacturer indicating completion of pre-qualification requirements.
B. Training certificates for design, engineering and installation of the proposed products, for the
relevant staff involved in the design and installation of this project.
D. Bid
1. Vendor shall submit complete detailed bids. Lump sum bids will not be accepted.
E. Material Guarantee
1. The wiring vendor (installer) shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all Category 6A and fiber
optic cabling and components meet or exceed specifications (including installation) of TIA/EIA-
568-B.1, 568-B.2, 568-B.3 and 569.
F. Material Provided
1. The successful wiring vendor (installer) shall be certain that all correct parts are ordered per
Products Section of this document and installed in accordance with manufacturers design and
installation guidelines. Vendor shall submit complete parts and part numbers prior to installation
of equipment.
G. Warranty Documentation
1. Warranty shall be for 20 years.
2. Complete documentation regarding the manufacturer’s warranty shall be submitted as part of the
proposal. This shall include, but is not limited to: a sample of the warranty that would be
provided to the customer when the installation is complete and documentation of the support
procedure for warranty issues.

3. A systems application assurance manual documenting the vendor supported applications and
application guidelines shall be provided as part of the submittals
1.7 Coordination
1. Coordinate with the Local Telephone Authority to confirm location of service entrance
arrangement of public telephone exchange lines into the premises.
2. Coordinate work of this section with Employer:
 Telephone switch (PABX).
 Telephone instrument.
 Workstations.
 LAN equipment suppliers.
3. Meet jointly with representatives of above Local Telephone Authority and Employer to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
4. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
5. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in
equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
1.8 Qualifications
B. Contractor
1. The contractor selected to provide the installation of this system shall be certified by the
manufacturing company in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the products described
herein.
2. The contractor shall utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in
provisioning this Project.
3. Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years of recent experience on structured cabling
systems of similar type and size.
4. Contractor and design firm shall be in compliance with all federal, state and local statutes
regarding qualifications of firms.
5. The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to

demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size.
6. The contractor shall own and maintain the tools and equipment approved by the cabling system
manufacturer for successful installation and testing of optical and and Category 6A balanced
twisted pair distribution systems.
7. The contractor shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the usage of such tools and
equipment.
8. Contractor shall submit a resume of qualification with the Contractor's proposal indicating the
following:
A. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names and telephone
numbers for each.
B. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of metallic and fiber
optic cable systems on this project.
C. A technical resume of experience for the contractor's Project Manager and on-site installation
supervisor who will be assigned to this project.
D. A list of technical product training attended by the contractor’s personnel that will install the SCS
system.
E. Any sub-Contractor, who will assist the SCS contractor in performance of this work, shall have the
same training and certification as the SCS contractor.
1.9 Cabling basic requirements
A. Cable Pathway
1. Extension of all data and voice cables shall be within raceway, conduit, cable tray or other
designated cable delivery system provided and installed by the main contractor where concealed
in walls and exposed above ceilings in plenum spaces.
B. Hardware
1. Required hardware includes, but is not limited to, termination blocks, fastening devices, data
outlets, voice outlets, connectors and all required accessories to comply with this specification.
1.10 Grounding and bonding
A. All grounding and bonding shall meet the National Electrical Code (NEC) as well as local
codes, which specify additional grounding and/or bonding requirements.

B. Bonding and Grounding
1. Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA.
Horizontal cables shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 and local requirements
and practices. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch panels and racks,
active telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and equipment. When required by local
code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone utilizing a #6-AWG or larger bonding
conductor that provides direct bonding between equipment rooms and telecommunications
rooms (See J-STD-607-A). This is part of the grounding and bonding infrastructure (part of the
telecommunications pathways and spaces in the building structure), and is independent of
equipment or cabling.
1.1 Product warranty and application assurance
A. The Structured Connectivity Solutions Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance
1. Extended Product Warranty
A. The Extended Product Warranty covers all passive components (i.e., cable and connectivity
components that make up the passive data and telecommunications signal transmission
infrastructure). “Passive Components” are defined as SCS components that exhibit no gain or
contribute no energy. Manufacturer’s Solutions warrants, from the original installation completion
date, provided a registration certificate is issued by the Manufacturer to the customer, the
following:
1) that the Passive Components of Registered SCS components will be free from manufacturing
defects in material and workmanship under normal and proper use;
2) that all Passive Components in the Registered SCS components meet or exceed the relevant
component specification of the TIA 568-B series and ISO/IEC 11801: 2002 standards;
3) that the Registered SCS components links/channels will meet or exceed the applicable
requirements of the TIA 568-B series, and ISO/IEC 11801: 2002 standards for cabling
links/channel configurations specified in these standards;
4) that the Registered SCS solution channels will additionally meet or exceed the Guaranteed
Channel Performance in the SCS Performance Specifications Addendum in effect at the time of
installation.
B. Under the Extended Product Warranty, the Manufacturer will (or will authorize a BusinessPartner
to) either repair or replace the defective Registered SCS product at Manfacturer’s cost. The
Manaufacturer will pay the BusinessPartner for the cost of labor to repair or replace any such
defective product on behalf, provided, that such repair or replacement and associated labor costs
receive the prior written approval of the manufacturer. If the manufacturer chooses to repair
products, may use new or reconditioned replacement parts. If the manufacturer chooses to
replace products, may replace such products with new or reconditioned products of the same or
similar design. Any such repair or replacement will be warranted for either

1) 90 days or the remainder of the original twenty-year warranty period, whichever is longer.
2. Application Assurance
A. The Application Assurance covers the Registered SCS components to support operations of the
application(s) that the system was designed to support, as well as additional application(s)
defined below. The manufacturer should warrants that the Registered SCS components will be
free from defects that prevent operation of the specific application(s) for which the Registered
SCS components was initially designed as long as the design is in compliance with the SCS
Performance Specifications for said applications and is in compliance with all other terms and
conditions of this warranty.
B. The Application Assurance also covers the following additional applications:
1) those as specified in the current (at the time of installation) SCS Performance Specifications and
Addendums; and
2) in accordance with application standards specifications, any application introduced in the future
by recognized standards or user forums that use the relevant TIA/EIA 568-B series or ISO/IEC
11801 2nd edition (September 2002) components and link/channel specifications for cabling, to
the extent that such applications are defined to operate over the guaranteed channel
performance and/or the installed channel topologies.
B. Term of Warranty
1. Twenty years from the date of issuance of the registration certificate or installation, whichever is
earlier.
2. Moves, additions, or changes are covered by the original registration certificate if performed by
an authorized BusinessPartner in compliance with the SCS design, installation and registration
requirements.
3. Administration of SCS cords by the end user is covered by the original registration certificate if
performed in compliance with manfacturer’s SCS guidelines.
C. Person / Entity Covered
1. This warranty is for the sole benefit of the person or entity to whom the registration certificate is
issued and any successor in interest to the site in which such Registered SCS system was
originally installed.
1.2 Special requirements for cable routing and installation
A. Cabling
1. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as

outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the
appropriate local codes.
2. All balanced twisted pair cabling shall bear CMP (Plenum Rated), CM/CMR (Riser Rated) and/or
appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed.
3. All fiber optic cabling shall bear OFNP (Plenum Rated), OFNR (Riser Rated) and/or appropriate
markings for the environment in which they are installed.
B. Cable Pathway
1. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are not available,
the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, horizontal cabling with cable ties snug, but
not deforming the cable geometry.
2. Cable bundles shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building structure and
framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals.
3. Plenum rated cable ties shall be used in all appropriate areas.
4. The contractor shall adhere to the manufacturers’ requirements for bending radius and pulling
tension of all data and voice cables.
5. Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling grid.
6. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or any
environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.
C. Fire Stopping
1. Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by
the contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
2. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner, which
is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work.
3. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations as shown on
the drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor's work.
4. Any openings created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this
work.
D. Contractor Responsibility
1. The contractor shall be responsible for damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of
his work. Repair of surfaces, including painting , shall be included as necessary.
1.3 Work external to the building

A. Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall be governed by
the provisions of this specification and the applicable drawings.
B. Only cabling products approved by the manufacturer for outside use shall be installed in locations
external to the confines of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Equivalent products
A. Equivalent product(s) may be considered for substitution for those products specified, however,
any equivalent cabling product(s) must be approved by the cabling system manufacturer and
show demonstrated and documented equivalence to the product(s) specified.
B. Documentation shall include,but not limited to: product samples, data sheets, and actual test
data.
C. The request for product substitution, and supporting documentation, must be submitted, in
writing, prior to submitting the bid.
D. Written approval for product substitution must be submitted with the bid.
2.2 Guaranteed channel performance
A. Category 6A Guaranteed Channel Performance
1. All balanced twisted pair cable and apparatus shall conform to the Category 6A component
specifications an the installed channels shall comply with the Category 6/classE A Channel
Performance Specification.
2. The balanced twisted pair cable and apparatus channel performance shall be guaranteed up to
the maximum 100 meters (328 feet) length, including up to 4 connection points.
3. The Category 6A, 4 pair UTP channel shall support emerging high-bandwidth applications,
including 10 Gbps Ethernet, potentially 1.2 Gbps ATM and 2.4 Gbps ATM, IEEE 1394B S400,
Multi-Tasked Split Screen Computing, Virtual Holographic Video Conferencing, Instant Access
Telemedicine, 3D CAD/CAM Engineering, Internet-Intranet Communications/Commerce, as well
as all 77 channels (550 MHz) of analog broad band video.
4. The Category 6A cable and Category 6A channel components shall be manufactured by a single
manufacturer. The manufacturer shall warrant the Category 6A channel cable, components, and
applications for a period of 20 years.

5. The 20 year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and include all labor to replace any
defective components as well as the component replacement.
6. The Delay Skew on the 100 meter channel shall not exceed 40 ns.
7. The Category 6A cable and components shall be electrically backward compatible with existing
Category 3, 5, 5e and 6.
8. The Category 6A components shall be engineered and manufactured to compensate for any
compliant Category 3, 5, 5e or 6 component crosstalk and shall provide at least Category 3, 5,
5e or 6 performance in all of the customer’s existing installed base of voice/data/video, based on
the lowest category of component in the channel.
9. The Category 6A cable and components shall be physically compatible with existing installed
base of equipment.
10. The Category 6A cable and components shall not require special cords, specialty tools or special
installation requirements.
11. The guaranteed channel performance specifications of the Category 6A Channel described
above with cable, cords, outlets manufactured by the same manufacturer and four (4)
connections for 100 meters shall be as shown in the following tables:
A. Category 6A channel, 4-connection, (High Performance)
Guaranteed Performance Specifications for GigaSPEED X10D Solution
Frequency 1.0 4.0 8.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 31.3 62.5 100 200 250 300 400 500
(MHz)
Insertion
Loss
(dB) 3.8 4.0 5.6 6.3 7.9 8.9 0.0 11.2 15.9 20.4 29.4 33.1 36.5 42.7 48.3
PSA NEXT
(dB) 75.0 74.0 71.0 70.0 68.0 67.0 66.0 65.1 62.0 60.0 55.5 54.0 55.8 51.0 49.5
PSAACR-F
(dB) 75.0 65.0 58.9 57.0 52.9 51.0 49.0 47.1 41.1 37.0 31.0 29.0 27.5 25.0 23.0
NEXT (dB) 71.0 69.0 64.2 62.6 59.2 57.6 6.0 54.4 49.4 45.9 40.8 39.1 32.7 30.6 28.9
ACR-N (dB) 68.9 65.0 58.5 56.3 51.3 48.7 46.1 43.3 33.4 25.6 11.4 6.0 -3.8 -12.2 19.4
PSNEXT
(dB) 69.5 68.0 63.1 61.5 58.1 56.5 54.8 53.2 48.1 44.6 39.4 37.7 31.3 29.1 27.3
PSACR-N
(dB) 67.4 64.0 57.5 55.2 50.2 47.6 44.9 42.1 32.2 24.2 10.0 4.5 -5.3 -13.7 -21.0
ACR-F (dB) 69.3 57.2 51.2 49.3 45.2 43.2 41.3 39.4 33.3 29.3 23.2 21.3 19.7 17.2 3

PSACR-F 68.3 56.2 50.2 48.3 44.2 42.2 40.3 38.3 32.3 28.3 22.2 20.3 19.0 16.5 14.5
(dB)
Return Loss 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 21.0 20.5 20.0 19.5 17.0 15.0 12.0 11.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
(dB)
(dB)
Delay (ns) 580 562 557 555 553 552 551 550 549 548 547 546 546 546 546
Delay Skew 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
(ns)
Note: The table provides reference values only. All parameters comply with the governing equations
given below over the entire frequency range. All values and equations apply to worst-case
channels utilizing four-pair High Performance EA series cables with full cross-connects,
consolidation points and work area outlets
(4 connectors in a channel) for any channel lengths up to 100 meters.
Electrical Parameter Guaranteed Channel Margins to ISO/IEC

11801 Edition 2.1 “Class EA”
(1 - 500MHz)
Insertion Loss 2.0 %
NEXT 1.0 dB
PSNEXT 2.5 dB
ACR-F 4.0 dB
PSACR-F 6.0 dB
Return Loss 0.0 dB
PSANEXT 0.0 dB
PSAACR-F 0.0 dB
B. 300 m Laser Optimized 50/125 m Multimode Guaranteed Channel Performance
1. The 50/125 m fiber channel shall support single-channel serial transmission, in the
building riser backbones, to 10 gigabits per second (Gb/s) for a distance of 300 meters withup to
5 LC connections, current and next generation LAN, SAN and WAN applications.

2. The 50/125 m fiber channel shall be backward compatible with legacy applications such
as: 10Gbp/s Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI, Fast Ethernet and ATM for in-building network
distances) ensuring a smooth migration path from 10Mb/s to 10 Gb/s using achievable
technology.
3. The channel shall support 10 Gb/s short wavelength (850 nm) emerging technology
applications using vertical cavity surface emitting lasers (VCSELs)and low bit rate LED
applications for legacy systems.
4. The 50 m fiber shall be optimized to control differential mode delay (DMD) so that “pulse
splitting” at 10 Gb/s is eliminated.
5. The high performance fiber shall use the same termination and test procedures that are
currently used for the existing industry’s lower performance 50 m fiber. Fibers shall be
manufactured with dual acrylate coating for maximum color retention and protection.
6. A single manufacturer shall manufacture the 50 m fiber cable, 50 m fiber connectors, 50

m patch cords and apparatus, which comprise the channel.
7. The 50 m fiber shall meet or exceed the following standards, as applicable, for OSP or
Plenum cables: ICEA S-83-596, ISO/IEC-794, GR-409, TIA/EIA455, TIA/EIA492, TIA/EIA568-B,
ANSI-FDDI, IEEE 802, UL 910, OFNP classification as described in the National Electric Code
(NEC2), OFN-LS Low Smoke Cables, CSA Certified (OFN FT4/FT6) and approved component
industry standards.
8. The manufacturer shall warrant the 10 Gb/s channel’s cable, components, and applications
for a period of 20 years.
9. The 20-year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and include all labor to replace any
defective components as well as the component replacement.
C. Zero Watre Peak Singlemode Guaranteed Channel Performance (As Applicable)
1. The ZWP-SM Solution overcame the limitations of conventional singlemode fibre. Adding
extra capacity to a traditional G.652C singlemode fibre gives the capability to use existing
Singlemode applications and future applications to maximize the campus networking capacity.
2. Zero Water Peak Singlemode (ZWP-SM) Fiber, designed to maximise investment in

enterprise campus and metro backbones for next generation equipment.
3. ZWP-SM fiber is designed to operate over the entire wavelength range from 1280nm to
1625 nm - removing the water peaks (high attenuation) in the 1400 nm window -increasing the
useable wavelength range over conventional singlemode fiber by more than 50%.
4. Delivers a cost-effective upgrade path allowing up to 16 channels of CWDM (Coarse Wave

Division Multiplexing), the lowest-cost option to pack more channels on a single fiber, and up to
400 channels of DWDM (Dense Wave Division Multiplexing).
5. With bandwidth requirements continuing to grow at exponential rates, the ZWP-SM

Solution is ready to support enterprise campus and metro backbone migrations to higher speeds

and multiple wavelengths.
6. In addition, this full spectrum fiber provides customers with investment protection: if optical
electronics move to higher serial speeds or shift to an increased number of wavelengths, ZWP-
SM provides complete support for both. ZWP-SM fibre cables are ITU-T G.652.C compliant and
support legacy transport equipment and applications.

Test Method
Fiber Attribute TIA/EIA* IEC** Requirement
Core Diameter TIA/EIA-455-176 IEC 60793-1-20 50 (± 2.5) m
Cladding Diameter TIA/EIA-455-176 IEC 60793-1-20 125.0 (± 0.7) m
Cladding Non-Circularity TIA/EIA-455-176 IEC 60793-1-20 <1.0%
Core-Cladding Offset TIA/EIA-455-176 IEC 60793-1-20 0.5m
Coated Fibre Diameter TIA/EIA-455-173 IEC 60793-1-20 245 (± 10) m
Colored Fiber Diameter TIA/EIA-455-173 IEC 60793-1-20 254 (± 7) m
Clad-Coating Offset TIA/EIA-455-176 IEC 60793-1-20 12m
Mode Field Diameter TIA/EIA-455-164 IEC 60793-1-45
Minimum Proof Strength TIA/EIA-455-31 IEC 60793-1-30 0.7 GPa (100 kpsi)
Fiber Curl TIA/EIA-455-111 IEC 60793-1-34 4m
Attenuation TIA/EIA-455-61 IEC 60793-1-40
or
TIA/EIA-455-78
Attenuation at 1385 nm TIA/EIA-455-78 IEC 60793-1-40
Point Discontinuities TIA/EIA-455-59 IEC 60793-1-40 < 0.10 dB
Zero-Dispersion TIA/EIA-455-175 IEC 60793-1-42 1310 +12 / -10 nm

Wavelength
Zero-Dispersion Slope TIA/EIA-455-175 IEC 60793-1-42 0.092 ps/((nm)2km)
Maximum Dispersion 1285 TIA/EIA-455-175 IEC 60793-1-42 3.5 ps/nm-km

to 1330 nm
Maximum Dispersion 1550 TIA/EIA-455-175 IEC 60793-1-42 18 ps/nm-km

nm
Maximum Cabled TIA/EIA-455-113 IEC 60793-1-48 < 0.08 ps/(km)1/2

Polarization Mode
Dispersion Link TIA/EIA-455-122
Design Value
or

TIA/EIA-455-124
Cable Cutoff Wavelength TIA/EIA-455-170 IEC 60793-1-44 < 1260 nm
Fiber Macrobend (100 TIA/EIA-455-62 IEC 60793-1-47 0.05 dB @ 1310

turns, 75 nm diameter) nm
0.10 dB @ 1550
nm
Fiber Macrobend (1 turn TIA/EIA-455-62 IEC 60793-1-47 0.5 dB @ 1310 nm

@ 32 mm diameter)
0.5 dB @ 1550 nm
Coating Strip Force TIA/EIA-455-178 IEC 60793-1-32 1.3 N (0.3lbf) < F

< 8.9 N (2.0 lbf)
TIA/EIA-455-161
TIA/EIA-455-75
Dynamic Tensile Strength TIA/EIA-455-28 IEC 60793-1-31 Unaged: >550 kpsi

(3.8 GPa)
Aged: > 440 kpsi (3.0

GPa)
Dynamic Fatigue TIA/EIA-455-76 IEC 60793-1-33 > 18
2.3 Outlets
A. Outlet Locations
1. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document, all voice and data wall outlets
for 23/24 AWG balanced twisted pair cable shall be:
A. 8-position/ 8-conductor modular outlets
B. Insulation displacement
C. Support Universal applications in a multivendor environment, accepting modular RJ-45 plugs. .
D. Provided with blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Jack module arrangement is
shown on the drawings. Provide color coded inserts at each outlet, termination block and at
patch panels as shown on the drawings.
E. Mounted in one, two or three gang utility outlet boxes.
F. Equipped with EIA/TIA-T568A and EIA/TIA-T568B universal wiring labels.

B. Category 6A Gigabit outlets
1. All Category 6A outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6A transmission requirements for
connecting hardware, as specified in TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Second Edition.
2. The Category 6A outlets shall be backward compatible with Category 6, 5E, 5 and 3 cords and
cables.
3. The Category 6A outlets shall be of a universal design supporting T568 A & B wiring.
4. The Category 6A outlets shall be capable of being in a modular patching situation or as a

modular telecommunication outlet (TO) supporting current 10BASE-T, Token Ring, 1 Gbps TP-
PMD, Gbps ATM, 2.4 Gbps ATM using parallel transmission schemes and evolving high-speed,
high-bandwidth applications, including Ethernet, 10G BASE-T and 1.2 Gbps ATM.
5. The Category 6A outlets shall be capable of being installed at either a 45 or a 90 angle in any
M-series modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box avoiding the need for special
faceplates.
6. The Category 6A outlets shall have improved pair splitters and wider channel for enhanced
conductor placement. The outlet shall also have a low-profile wire cap, which protects against
contamination and secures the connection. Multicolored identification labels shall be available to
assure accurate installation.
7. General specifications:
A. Meets or exceeds the mechanical, electrical, and clearance specifications in FCC Rules and
Regulations, Part 68, Subpart F
B. Meet or exceed the Category 6A requirements in ISO/IEC 11801, CENELEC EN 50173, and
TIA/EIA568B
C. Certifications: UL Listed, CSA Certified and AUSTEL approved.
8. The Category 6A outlets shall meet the following Guaranteed Margin Performance and Physical
Specifications:
Guaranteed Margin:
Category 6A High Premium

Performa
Outlet nce Performance
Channel
Channel
(4 Connections)

Typical Guaranteed Guaranteed

Worst
Margin** Margin**
Pair Margin*
Insertion Loss 26.9% 5.0% 7.5%
NEXT 5.4 dB 6.0 dB 7.0 dB
PSNEXT 4.7 dB 7.5 dB 8.5 dB
ELFEXT 10.5 dB 6.0 dB 8.0 dB
PSELFEXT 10.8 dB 8.0 dB 10.0 dB
Return Loss 8.0 dB 4.0 dB 4.0 dB
Frequency 1-250 MHz 1-250 MHz 1-250 MHz

Range
* Typical worst pair swept margin when measured with same manufacture’s Category Category 6A
modular patch cord.
**Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz for the single manufacturer’s certified
channel comprising the single manufacturer’s Category Category 6A apparatus and the single
manufacturer’s High Performance series cable or Premium Performance series. Values represent
margin over the draft Category 6A/Class EA channel specifications.
Physical Specifications:
Dimension 0.8 in (20 mm) W x 0.8 in (20 mm) H x 1.2 in (31 mm) D
s
Plastic High-impact, flame-retardant, UL rated 94V-0

thermoplastic
Connector Copper alloy, 100 micro-inch bright solder over 100 micro-
inch nickel underplate
Outlet Copper alloy, 50 micro-inch lubricated gold plating over

Wires 100 micro-inch nickel underplate
Operating Temperature 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°)
Storage Temperature Range -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)
Humidity 95% (noncondensing)
Nominal Solid Conductor 0.025 to 0.020 in (22 to 24 AWG)

Diameter:
Nominal Stranded Conductor 0.64 to 0.51mm (22 to 24 AWG)

Diameter
Plug Retention Force 30lb (133 N) minimum
Plug / Jack Contact Force 100 grams minimum per contact

using FCC-8 position
telecommunication plug
Insertion Life 750 cycles minimum using FCC-8

position telecommunication
plug
2.4 Duplex Fiber Outlets
A. In case of outlets have a cable length more than 90 meters from the nearest IT room, Duplex ST /
SC / LC Multimode Fiber outlets with 2 core 62.5 um multimode fiber optic cables shall be
provided. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to determine those cases and to provide fiber
optic outlets instead of CAT 6A Outlets.
B. Faceplate shall be from the same approved wiring devices manufacturer, complete sample for
the faceplate, Duplex ST / SC / LC module and any needed adaptor to be submitted subject to
the engineer review / approval.
C. The presentation of the outlets shall be provided for labeling and identification.
2.5 Faceplates
A. Flush-mounted modular faceplate
1. Faceplates shall be available in single, duplex, triplex, quadplex, or sixplex arrangement in a

single gang configuration.
2. Faceplate outlet openings shall be numbered on both sides for installation and maintenance
identification.
3. Faceplates shall be High-impact, flame retardant, UL-rated 94V-0 thermoplastic.
2.6 UTP cable
A. Category 6A UTP, 4 Pair (High Performance)
1. The high performance Category 6A UTP cable shall be of the traditional round design with mylar

bisector tape.
2. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Baseband Video/Audio, Fax, Modem,Switched-56, T-1,
ISDN,RS-232, RS422, RS-485, 10BASE – T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD,
100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622
Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet,
gigabit ATM, IEEE 1394B S100 and S400, as well as all 77 channels (550 Mhz) of analog
broadband video.
3. The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a plenum or non-plenum cable.
The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (plenum) or CM (non-plenum).
4. Performance shall be characterized to 550 MHz to support high-bandwidth video applications
5. All Category 6A high performance cables shall the following specification:
Specifications:
Non Plenum Plenum
Weight 25.3 lb (1000 ft) 29 lb (1000 ft)
Jacket Thickness .022 in .020 in
Outside Diameter 0.232 in 0.22 in
Conductor Diameter .022 in .022 in
Insulation Type High density Fluorinated-Ethylene-

Polyethylene Propylene
Jacket Material PVC Low Smoke PVC
Maximum Pulling Tension 25 lbs 25 lbs
Nom. Velocity of 0.69 0.72

Propagation
Max DC Resistance 9.83 Ohms/100m 9.83 Ohms/100m
Mutual Capacitance @ 4.95 nF/100m 4.78 nF/100m

1kHz
Operating Temperature -20 to 60° C -20 to 60° C
UL Type CMR & CMG CMP
6. The high performance Category 6A cable shall be specified to 550 MHz and shall meet the
guaranteed swept margin as follows:

Guaranteed Margin:
High High Premium

Perform
Performance ance Performance
Cable Channel Channel
(4 Connections)

Worst
Margin** Margin**
Pair Margin*
Insertion Loss 3.0 % 5.0% 7.5%
Frequency Range 1-550 MHz 1-250 MHz 1-250 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept margin.
channel comprising the single manufacturer’s Category 6A apparatus and the single
margin over the TIA/EIA Category 6A/Class EA channel specifications.
2.7 Balanced twisted pair cable - Building Riser
A. Unshielded 24 AWG multi-pair copper cables shall be used as the vertical riser cables. The
cable shall support voice and data applications.
1. Non-shielded Plenum 25, 50 and 100 pair
A. The non-shielded plenum cable shall consist of 24-AWG solid-copper conductors insulated with

color coded PVC, 25 pair cable shall be UL Verified to TIA/EIA568-B for Category 3.
B. UL and c (UL) Listed for Fire Safety
C. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer
D. The non-shielded cable shall be available in 25, 50 and 100 pair. The balanced twisted pair
cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical specifications listed below:
Electrical Specifications:
Maximum DC Resistance 28.6 /1,000 ft (9.4 /100m)
Maximum DC Resistance 5%
Unbalanced
Maximum Capacitance 1,000 pF/1000 ft. (328 pF/m)

Unbalanced (pair to
ground)
Mutual Capacitance @ 1kHz 18 nF/1000 ft (5.9 nF/100 m),

maximum
Attenuation (dB/100 m [328 ft.]):
Frequency Attenuation (Max.)
1.00 MHz 2.3 dB
4.00 MHz 4.9 dB
10.00 MHz 8.5 dB
16.00 MHz 12 dB
Worst Pair Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT) dB/100 m [328 ft]:
Frequency Pair-To-Pair NEXT

(Max.)
1.0 MHz 13.8 dB
4.0 MHz 11.2 dB
10.0 MHz 10.2 dB

16.0 MHz 9.2 dB
2. Non-shielded 200 and 300 pair
A. 24 AWG twisted pair copper conductors individually insulated with various PVC compounds and
sheathed with a PVDF outer jacket. For use in building backbone applications between the
equipment room and the telecommunications rooms. Can be connectorized in the field or
terminated on 110 Wiring Blocks.
B. The cables are compliant to TIA/EIA568-A Category 3 backbone cable specification. The cables
support the following applications: Analog and digital voice, ISDN, IEEE 802.5 4 Mbps, IEEE
802.3 10BASE-T, 10 Mbps ETHERNET, 100 VG-ANYLAN.
C. The cables are plenum rated for use in air handling ducts and spaces in accordance with Article
800 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The cable is UL (USA) & c(ul) (Canada) listed type
CMP/MPP for this application by passing UL 910 (Steiner Tunnel) test.
2.8 High density Category 6A patch panel system
A. The high density Category 6A patch panel system shall support emerging high-bandwidth
applications, including 10 Gbps Ethernet, potentially 1.2 Gbps ATM and 2.4 Gbps ATM, Multi-
Tasked Split Screen Computing, Virtual Holographic Video Conferencing, Instant Access
Telemedicine, 3D CAD/CAM Engineering, Internet-Intranet Communications/Commerce, as well
as all 77 channels (550 MHz) of analog broad band video.
B. The high density Category 6A patch panel system shall incorporate a light-weight structural
foam back panel. The footprint of the back panel shall be same as traditional 110 system wall
mounting hardware but shall be capable of 336 conductor pair terminations instead of the
traditional 300 conductor pairs. The high density Category 6A patch panel system shall facilitate
the stacking of 3 panels to create a vertical field capable of 1008 terminations of conductors
verses the 900 terminations of traditional systems. The three (3) panel high vertical field shall
allow installation of 252 4-pair patch cords.
C. All high density category 6A patch panel system components shall snap together without the use
of tools. In addition to a light-weight structural foam back panel, the system shall consists of the
following:
1. High-Density Wiring Block
2. A back panel that shall hold twelve (12) snap-in 110 wiring blocks. The snap-in wiring blocks
shall terminate up to 28 pairs per row verses 25 pairs per row in the traditional 110 wiring block.
The high-density wiring blocks shall utilize traditional IDC conductor spacing to maintain the
highest density per square foot of wall space in the telecommunications room.

3. The high-density wiring block shall allow the connection of seven (7) 4-pair patch cords per row
verses six (6) for traditional 110 wiring blocks. One back panel with 12 high-density wiring blocks
shall allow the connection of eighty-four (84) 4-pair patch cords verses seventy-two (72) for
traditional 300 pair 110 patch panels.
4. Each high-density wiring block shall utilize a snap-on cover plate for cable termination protection
and for labeling of the conductor pairs/cables
5. Distribution rings for vertical cable management shall snap into the sides of the structural foam
back panel. .
6. The manufacturer shall have a website available to the end-user for printing custom labels for the
high-density wiring blocks.
Performance Specifications
VisiPatch GS3 XL7 XL8
Patch Cord Solution Solution
(4 Pair)
GigaSPEED Channel
(4 Connectors)
Typical Worst Guaranteed Guaranteed
Pair Margin* Margin** Margin**
Insertion Loss 75.0% 5.0% 7.5%
Frequency Range 1-500 MHz 1-500 MHz 1-500 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept margin when measured with a VisiPatch 110 IDC

termination block.
** Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz.
channel comprising GigaSPEED XL apparatus and 71E series cable (GigaSPEED

XL7
Solution) or 81A series cable (GigaSPEED XL8 Solution). Values represent margin
over the
draft Category 6A/Class EA channel

specifications.
Specifications:
112-pair VisiPatch Kit 336-pair VisiPatch Kit
Height 7.25 in.(18.40 cm) 21.6 in.(54.90 cm)
Width 8.50 in.(21.59 cm) 8.50 in.(21.59 cm)
Depth 7.50 in.(19.05 cm) 7.50 in.(19.05 cm)
Pairs per row 28 28
Pairs per back 112 336

panel
Patch cords per 7 (4-pair cords) 7 (4-pair cords)

row
2.9 Balanced twisted pair patch cords
A. Category 6A Patch Cords
1. All patch cords shall exceed TIA/EIAand ISO/IEC Category 6A/Classs EA

specifications.
2. All patch cords shall be backward compatible with Category 6, 5 and Category 5e
systems.

3. The patch cords shall incorporate an anti-snag feature that provides maximum
protection from snagging during moves and re-arrangements.
4. Patch cords shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and AUSTEL approved.
5. Patch cords shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second.
6. Patch cords shall be available in stranded and solid conductor in lengths to 100 feet.
7. The Category 6A modular patch cord shall have guaranteed margin as follows:
Guaranteed Margin:
Category High Premium

6A Perform
ance Performance
Modular
Channel Channel
Patch Cord
(4 Pair)
(4 Connections)

Worst
Margin** Margin**
Pair
Margin*
Insertion NA 5.0% 7.5%

Loss
PSNEXT NA 7.5 dB 8.5 dB
ELFEXT NA 6.0 dB 8.0 dB
PSELFEXT NA 8.0 dB 10.0 dB

Range
* Typical worst pair swept margin to TIA Patch cord specification when measured with same
manufacturer’s Category 6A telecommunications outlet.

8. Reverse-Directional Category 6A Patch Cords for High Density System
A. The high-density wiring blocks shall use reverse-directional Category 6 patch cords. The
reverse-directional Category 6A patch cords shall allow the cordage to feed back toward the wall
and to be stored neatly in the panel instead of protruding along the front of the block subjecting it
to accidental impact.
B. The cord shall produce an audible click during attachment to the wiring block insuring a stable
IDC connection.
C. The reverse-directional patch cords shall employ an anti-snag devise to prevent the cord from
being snagged as it is removed from the panel during reconfigurations.
D. The patch cord shall have a front facing flat surface to allow for 1” x 3/8” labels to be affixed to
each cord for easy identification.
E. The Category 6 patch cord shall have guaranteed margin as follows:
Guaranteed Margin:
Category 6A High Premium

Performa
Rev. Dir nce Performance
Patch Cord Channel Channel
(4 Pair)
(4 Connections)

Worst
Margin** Margin**
Pair Margin*
Insertion 75.0% 5.0% 7.5%

Loss

Return Loss 3.8 dB 4.0 dB 4.0 Db

Range
* Typical worst pair swept margin when measured with same manufacture’s High Density 110 IDC
termination block.
2.10 Ducts
A. Low Fire Hazard (LFH) Ducts are to be used in doors.
B. In between buildings through existing containment Direct Install (DI) ducts to be used.
C. Vertical Ducts from IT Room to be 24 core type 5/3.2mm inner diameter tubes.
D. Horizontal Ducts from IDF’s to Apartment/Guest/Office to be LFH double sheeted

5/3.2mm.
E. Single LFH duct at end point to be inserted in a splice termination tray to host the blown fiber .
F. From DC side 24 port rack mounted fiber splice trays are to be used as identified in fiber tray
section below in this document.
G. Vertical Riser ducts to be installed in Basket Trays
H. Horizontal ducts to be installed either in basket trays or in metal trunking
I. A minimum of three spare

Low Fire Hazard (LFH) Ducts Direct

Install (DI) Ducts
2.11 Duct Accessories
Tools
Manufacturer tools are to be used at all times according to the duct type being utilised.

Connector Locking tools Inner core duct

reamer
90deg Duct Cutter
Connectors
A. Horizontal to Vertical ducts are to be joined utilizing the proper tools and connectors from the
manufacturer.
B. Horizontal to Vertical ducts are to be joined using proper connectors as indicated below in the
diagram.
Straight Connector and Reducer Single Duct End Caps
Branch Closure
C. No unused ducts are to be left open. Duct Stop End are to be used as indicated above.
D. These ducts joints are not to be left exposed and in every location a suitable duct enclosure has
to be used.

E. Enclosures are to be installed next to riser cable trays and once connected and fiber is blown
duct enclosures are to be completely closed and labelled.
24 Duct Branch Closure 8 Duct Branch Closure
2.12 Blow Fiber
A. Single Mode (SM) and Multi Mode (MM) blown fibre optic cables will be used accordingly and
depending on the hardware requirements as designed.
B. Blown Fiber Drums comes in 2km, 4km, 8km and 12km bundles in pans not exceeding the
540mm x 400mm in size
C. Fibre cables must not contain gel fill or combustible compounds. The sheath material for all duct
cables should be of a low fire hazard type meeting the requirements of BS4066-1/IEC332 PART
1/UL VW-1 (Fire Propagation) and BS7622-2/IEC1034, BS6425-1/IEC754-1, BS6425-2/IEC754-
2IEC 61034 (Smoke Emissions and Acid Gas).
D. Blown fiber optic to be easy to handle and compatible with industry standard blowing equipment.
E. Blown Fiber Counts and Specifications to follow traditional fiber standards as per table below.
Other counts are also available from industry leading manufacturers.

Project Overview
F. Each single mode fibre cable should be of OS2 construction in accordance with IEC (BS EN)
60793-250, ITU-T G.65x:
G. Multi Mode fibre cables should be of 50/125, OM4 construction in accordance with IEC 60793-2
Type A1b:
H. The fibre system within the Data Centre and other rooms -should be based on field installable
connectors or pre-terminated, plug and play products.
2.13 Fibre Trays/Patch Panels
A. Each individual fibre tray should have patch cord routing guides that allow a transition and jumper
management point. The jumpers should be able to exit through the right and left side of the
housing. This jumper management scheme should provide access to individual trays to ease
administration in high density applications.
B. The trays should slide to the front in order to provide appropriate finger access to the connectors
and modules. The tray should have a close and open position with their respective mechanical
stops.

C. The fibre hardware should provide access to each adapter port with no interference of adjacent
ports. In addition the accessibility to the connectors should be tool less.
D. The trays should have a cut out in front of each module location in order to provide accessibility
from top and bottom of adapters and modules.
E. The trays should incorporate rails to facilitate front and rear module installation while providing a
locking mechanism that secures the module in place.
F. The trays should have protruding finger tabs on the sides to allow easy access to modules and
connectors. The tabs should have silkscreened numbers for tray identification.
G. Panel shelf shall be used for a combination of splicing and termination of fiber-optic building
cable or outside plant (OSP) cables.
H. The shelf shall be designed for use as a termination shelf only (direct connector termination) or
as a splice and termination shelf for up to 48 individual fibers.
I. The panel shelf shall be available in a 1U height fully enclosed shelf, with integrated front cable
management trough included.
J. It shall have either a fixed tray, or slide-out tray for easy access. A front faceplate of different
configuration is required and can be ordered separately.
K. The front faceplates shall accept standard simplex or duplex fiber-optic adapters to provide
flexibility.
L. The “RoloSplice kit” shall be available to provide easy access and administration of two
individual splice trays for either fusion or mechanical splices, for the 1U shelf.
M. The shelf shall be equipped with Hinged front doors for easy access, Front cable management
trough, Top cover panel, Standard water-tight cable entry conduit connectors for OSP cable, and
Blank labels for identifying fiber splices and terminations
N. Additional shelf accessories shall include Water-tight connector kit for smaller diameter cables
and a Universal mounting bracket kit to adapt shelf for ETSI frames or 23” frames.

O. Physical Specifications
1U
Tray Depth 10 in (25.4 cm)
Overall Height 1.75 in (4.45 cm)
OSP Cable Capacity 2
Overall Width (including mounting 19 in (48.26 cm)

brackets)
Overall Shelf Depth (includes trough) 14 in (35.56 cm) – fixed
18 in (45.72 cm) – sliding
Weight 7.2 lb.(3.3 kg) – fixed
9.0 1b.(4.1 kg) – sliding
Panel Shelf Capacity
Application Connection Type Capacity
LC 48
Termination Only SC 48
ST 24
LC 48
Termination + Fusion Splicing SC 48
ST 24
LC 48
Termination + Mechanical SC 48
Splicing
ST 24

2.14 Fiber Optic Patch Cords
1. Fibre patch cords will interconnect the various fibre optic patch panels and link from patch panels
to network and server equipment.
2. Rack design will ensure that:
3. Adequate cable management is afforded in each patching field
4. The length and routing of the patch cords do not result in large amounts of slack or bundles of
leads preventing further installation or tracing
5. All patch cords are labelled with the same unique numerical identifier at each end; the labelling
scheme is to be identified and agreed with the Client at a later date
6. All patch cords are to be included within the manufacturer’s warranty
7. There will be a mixture of fibre optic patch cord required, depending upon the requirements at
any given location. Typical assembly requirements are as follows:
 LC to LC
 LC to SC
 SC to SC
All patch cables should be of tight jacket construction. The secondary coated optical fibres should be
surrounded by a Kevlar impact-resistant layer.

2.15 Fiber Optic Connectors
A. LC Fiber Optic Connectors
1. The fiber optic connector shall be one half the size (double density) of conventional ST and SC
connectors.
2. The connector shall have an insertion release mechanism similar to the RJ-45 intuitive push/pull-
style housing.
3. The connector shall be pull-proof to prevent momentary disconnect from axial loads
4. The connector possess an anti-snag latch which facilitates routing of patch cords
5. The connector shall be field-mountable with minimal polish
6. The connector shall be polarized
7. The connector shall be Bellcore, TIA/EIAand IEC compliant
8. The connector shall meet the following specifications:
Fiber Type Multimode Singlemode
Nominal Fiber OD 125m 125m
Cable OD 0.9 mm 0.9 mm
Insertion Loss ,  0.10, 0.10 dB 0.10, 0.15 dB
Return Loss Maximum -20.0 dB -40 dB
Cable Retention 2 lbs. 2 lbs.
Mating Durability for 500

Reconnects Insertion
Loss Change 0.2 dB 0.2 dB
Temperature Stability (-40C

to +75C) Insertion Loss
Change 0.3 dB 0.3 dB
Tip Material Ceramic Ceramic
2.16 Performance Warranty

The fibre optic system including the ducts should be from a single manufacturer, including all cables
and terminations and covered by a single performance warranty.
We recommend Emtelle as a manufacturer
2.17 Samples
The following samples should be provided/made available for client review and approval prior to the
commencement of works on site.
1. Cooper Link, including all components and labels.
2. Fibre link, including all components and labels.
3. Cabinets and frames, assembled and configured
4. Labels, a complete set of all label types.
All works should be conducted in accordance with all relevant regulatory or industry standards as well
as any standards or installation instructions as are relevant to or supplied by the manufacturer of
the products being installed.
Work should be subject to regular inspections by the Main Contractor, client or a nominated
representative in order to review such matters as:
5. Health and Safety
6. Quality and neatness of installation works
2.18 Equipment / Patching Racks
A. The contractor shall provide all needed equipment racks within the IDF Room and the IT rooms.
B. Cabinets shall be 19” type, 42 HU or as shown in the drawing with front plexiglass door and rear
metal door for LAN services requirement, complete with all required mounting hardware, Vertical
Organizers, label kits, erathing kit and all needed ancillary devices.
C. The rack shall be able to support cable entrance from both top and base.
D. Each rack shall have a 9 way power distribution strip unit mounted at one side.
E. Each rack shall be provided complete with Fan Tray of 4 silent type fans. Adequate air flow
within rack is required to maintain the expected levels of equipment to be located within each
rack.

F. The rack shall be equipped for electrical grounding to meet EIA/TIA 606 stables with fans and
power strip unit.
G. IT Room’s Racks shall be 800 x 800 mm, however, dimension shall be as per the active
equipment / server’s manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.19 Unspecified equipment and material
A. Any item of equipment or material not specifically addressed on the drawings or in this document
and required to provide a complete and functional SCS installation shall be provided in a level of
quality consistent with other specified items.
2.20 Grounding system and conductors
A. Grounding Conductor
1. The SCS Contractor shall provide a #6 AWG stranded copper wire cable between ground bars
located at each IDF Room and the building main service ground point. This ground conductor
shall be utilized for equipment, termination, equipment rack and computer equipment grounding.
1. Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA.
2. Horizontal cables and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 and local
requirements and practices.
A. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch panels and racks, active
telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and equipment.
C. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone
1. When required by local code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone utilizing a #6-
AWG or larger bonding conductor that provides direct bonding between equipment rooms and
telecommunications rooms. This is part of the grounding and bonding infrastructure (part of the
telecommunications pathways and spaces in the building structure), and is independent of
equipment or cable.
Always provide Telecommunications Bonding Backbone when using non-shielded backbone

balanced twisted pair cable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Workmanship
A. Components of the SCS system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner.
B. Wiring color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughout the
system.
C. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform.
D. TIA/EIA568-B wiring codes shall standardize all SCS wiring.
3.2 General description
A. The wiring system components shall comply with all product specifications contained in Section
two.
B. The structured cabling system shall consist of the Work Area, Horizontal, Backbone – Riser,
Backbone IDF Room, IT Room, Entrance Facility (Q-Tel) and Administration elements.
3.3 Work area
A. Wiring and cords
1. Contractor shall supply the wiring or cords that connect terminal devices to telecommunications
outlets. This includes mounting cords and connectors, as well as extension cords.
B. Transmission electronics
1. Contractor shall supply the necessary transmission electronics equipment listed under
"Requirements by Floor" in order to complete the system successfully.
3.4 Horizontal
A. Horizontal Cabling
1. Contractor shall supply horizontal cables to connect each telecommunications outlet to the
backbone subsystem on the same floor.
2. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document, the type of horizontal cables

used for each work location shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
3. The 4-pair UTP cables shall be run using a star topology format from the administration
subsystem (IDF Room) on each floor to every individual Telecommunication Outlet.
4. All cable routes to be approved prior to installation of the cabling.
5. The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the administration subsystem
(Telecommunications Room) on each floor to the Telecommunication Outlet shall not exceed 295
ft (90 m).
6. Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of the 4-pair UTP
cable during handling and installation.
7. Each run of cable between the termination block and the telecommunications outlet shall be
continuous without any joints or splices.
8. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where walker duct, cable trays or conduit are not
available, the Contractor shall bundle station wiring with plastic cable ties at appropriate
distances.
A. The cable bundling shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building structure
and framework.
9. Plenum cable will be used in all appropriate areas.
10. If the interior of walls is not obstructed, the Contractor shall conceal horizontal distribution wiring
internally within the walls. If such obstructions exist, Contractor shall secure approval prior to the
use of an alternate method.
11. Every effort will be made to schedule the requirements under this Contract in such a manner so
as to complete all above ceiling work prior to ceiling tile installation. In the event Contractor is
required to remove ceiling tiles, such Work shall not break or disturb grid and must be
coordinated with the General Contractor.
12. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed type MPR, MPP, CMR, or
CMP as stated later in this section.
13. Contractor shall provide detailed cable run diagrams for cable runs within raised floors detailing
exact locations of cable for review and approval after coordination with other contractors,
architect and general contractor.
14. Conduit runs installed by the contractor should not exceed 100 feet or contain more than two 90
degree bends without utilizing appropriately sized pull boxes.
15. Station cables and tie cables installed within ceiling spaces shall be routed through these spaces
at right angles to electrical power circuits.
B. Work location telecommunications outlets
1. Supply and install outlets as shown on drawings and as directed.

3.5 IT room (Data Center)
A. Terminations
1. Contractor shall connect the trunk cross-connect and the distribution cross-connect to the
common equipment such as PABX or host computer in the IT room (Data Center).
B. Electrical Protection
1. Contractor shall supply lightning protectors and wires used to ground the equipment.
2. The electrical protection devices supplied by the contractor shall be in multi-pair form.
3. For small pair count applications, contractor shall supply electrical protection devices, which
consist of a mounting panel for a series of solid-state, or gas-tube protector units and a wiring
block. The wiring block shall be used for input and output cable terminations. Insertion of the
protector units into the mounting block will complete the circuit.
4. The protection devices shall be available in 4, 6, 25, 50 and 100 pair sizes.
5. If the electrical protection circuit is separated from the cross-connect field, contractor shall supply
protector units consisting of a metal housing containing mountings for a series of solid-state or
gas-tube protector units. The protector shall include a 25 foot, 26 AWG stub cable that serves as
a fusible link, a 24 AWG terminating cable, and two connectors for external ground connections.
3.6 Administration
A. The administration subsystem shall consist of wiring blocks and patch panels for termination of
balanced twisted pair cables or lightguide interconnection units (LIU) and shelves for the
termination of optical fibers.
1. All wallfield layouts to be approved prior to installation.
B. Fields
1. Separate termination fields shall be created for voice and data applications.
C. Termination blocks
1. Termination blocks that require rotation after connection of horizontal/vertical wiring shall not be
allowed.
D. Cross-connect wire, patch cords

1. Contractor shall supply cross-connect wire, balanced twisted pair and fiber patch for
cross-connection and inter-connection of termination blocks, patch panels, fiber shelves and
lightguide interconnection units.
E. Jumper type
1. The type of jumper cables shall depend on TIA/EIACategory 3, Category 5E, Category 6
applications, or fiber application and the termination block used, i.e. a punch panel, a patch panel
termination block, an LIU or shelf.
3.7 Installation
A. All installation shall be done in conformance with TIA/EIA568-B standards, federal and local
standards and Manufacturer’s Design and Installation guidelines.
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables
are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the
facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines will require the Contractor to provide in a
timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. This
shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the
implementation.
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing an approved ground at all newly installed
distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities.
2. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all
appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework.
3. All grounds shall consist of #6 AWG copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building
ground and bonded to the main electrical ground.
4. Grounding must be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA and all local codes and practices.
C. Power Separation
1. The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or share the same
conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus.
D. Miscellaneous Equipment
1. The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps, distribution
rings, wire molding (IT Room, Q-Tel Room & IDF locations), miscellaneous grounding and

support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the installation of the System.
E. Special Equipment and Tools
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation equipment or tools
necessary to properly complete the System.
A. Tools shall include, but are not limited to:
1) tools for terminating cables,
2) testing and splicing equipment for balanced twisted pair/fiber cables,
3) communication devices,
4) jack stands for cable reels,
5) cable wenches.
F. Labeling
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and cords, distribution frames,
and outlet locations, according to specifications i.e., 2N-001-V, 2N-001-D1, 2N-001-D2 at the
time of delivery.
2. Labels shall not be written by hand.
G. Cable Storage
1. The Contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay and the prior
approval.
H. Cable Records
1. The Contractor shall maintain conductor polarity (tip and ring) identification at the main
equipment room (switch room), risers, and station connecting blocks in accordance with industry
practices, but only in locations authorized by Company's General Contractor, Consultant
Company, and Architect.
3.8 Engineering
A. Planning meetings and schedule
1. An initial planning meeting will be held with the successful bidder to:

A. Clarify all requirements (systems, services, distribution methods, etc.),
B. Identify responsibilities,
C. Schedule the events that will transpire during the implementation of the project.
2. Within two (2) weeks of the initial meeting, the contractor shall provide a written report and
project schedule to clearly document the events and responsibilities associated with the project.
B. Drawings and review
1. In order to start the initial engineering phase, the client shall provide the Contractor with one (1)
clearly readable, up-to-date scale copy of all architectural, electrical, and mechanical drawings,
two (2) weeks prior to the commencement of any engineering design activities. This will allow for
a one (1) week review of the diagrams by the Contractor, and allow one (1) week for the client to
answer any queries pertaining to the Contractor's review. In reviewing such drawings Contractor
shall be obligated to make an on-site inspection with the client and its General Contractor for on-
site verification of access routes for cabling and other matters.
C. Proposed wiring solution
1. Upon completion of the initial engineering stage, the Contractor shall provide two (2) draft copies
of engineering documentation for approval. The client will review the engineering documentation
within a two (2) week period.
2. This documentation will include, but is not limited to the following:
A. a detailed drawing of the Main Cross Connect (MC).
B. a drawing of each IT (Data Center).
C. and a drawing of each IDF Room.
3. If no revisions are required, the documentation shall be formally accepted in writing.
4. Any revisions shall be completed by the contractor within a two (2) week time period and
resubmitted for review.
D. Drawings and diagrams
1. Upon completion of final engineering and incorporation of client’s review comments, Contractor
shall provide to client for its records the following:
A. MC, IDF, Data Racks (MDF) and Q-Tel (MDF) Diagrams which shall include:
1) cable routing

2) position of all components and
3) detailed layout of the wallfield
4) labeling plan.
B. Work Area Floor Plans which shall Include:
1) detailed cable routes
2) approved labeling plan for all work areas.
C. Cross Connect Documentation which shall include:
1) cross connect records for all voice, and data devices.
D. Riser Distribution Plan
E. Cable Tray, Conduit, and Raceway Plans
F. Campus Distribution Plan (if applicable)
2. Documentation shall be in the following format:
A. four (4) copies and one reproducible sepia of all diagrams and drawings in "D" size (24" x 36") or
"E" size (30" x 42") as appropriate,
B. two (2) copies of all cross connect documentation in printed form
E. As Built Documentation
1. Upon completion of the project, Contractor is to prepare "As Built" documentation showing actual
site conditions and installation as constructed.
2. Provide copies of such documentation as mentioned above.
F. Additional Records
1. In addition to the engineering diagrams, the following items shall be provided by the contractor:
A. Cable Records and Assignments
3.9 Damages
A. The Contractor shall be liable for any and all damages to portions of the building caused by it, its
employees or subcontractors; including but not limited to:

1. Damage to any portion of the building caused by the movement of tools, materials or equipment.
2. Damage to any component of the construction of spaces "turned over" to the Contractor.
3. Damage to the electrical distribution system and/or other space "turned over" to the Contractor.
4. Damage to the electrical, mechanical and/or life safety or other systems caused by inappropriate
operation or connections made by the Contractor or other actions of Contractor.
5. Other damage to the materials, tools and/or equipment of the client, its consultants, General
Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, other contractors, agents and lessees.
3.10 Penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings
A. Prior consent
1. The Contractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without the prior consent of
the Architect and General Contractor.
B. Sealing penetrations
1. Where penetrations through acoustical walls or other walls for cableways have been provided for
the Contractor or made by the Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor in
compliance with applicable code requirements and as directed by cleint's Architect or General
Contractor.
2. Where penetrations through fire-rated walls for cableways have been provided for the Contractor
or made by the Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor as required by
code and as directed by Architect or General Contractor.
3. Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of on-site activities, submit for review by its
Architect, details of any special systems to be used.
3.11 Project direction
A. Single Point of Contact
1. Contractor will provide a single point of contact, i.e., Project Manager, to speak for the Contractor
and to provide the following functions:
2. Initiate and coordinate tasks with clinet, its General Contractor, Architect, and others as specified
by client.
3. Provide day-to-day direction and on-site supervision of Contractor personnel:
4. Ensure conformance with all Contract provisions.

3.12 Testing / Warranty
A. Balanced twisted pair Cable testing
1. Testing of all balanced twisted pair wiring shall be performed prior to system cutover.
2. 100 percent of the horizontal and riser wiring pairs shall be tested for opens, shorts, polarity
reversals, transposition and presence of AC voltage.
3. Voice and data horizontal wiring pairs shall be tested from the telecommunications outlet to the
TR.
4. The Category 3 cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of TIA/EIA568-B
Category 3.
5. The Category 5E cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of TIA/EIA568-
B Category 5E.
6. The Category 6 cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of TIA/EIA568-B
Category 6 and 6A.
7. Category 5E, Category 6 and 6A horizontal cables shall be tested according to testset
manufacturers instructions utilizing the latest firmware and software.
A. Testing shall include all of the electrical parameters as specified in the Products Section of this
document.
B. Any pairs not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the
contractor, at no charge.
8. Complete, end to end, test results must be submitted.
B. Optical Fiber Cable Testing
1. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system.
2. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per TIA/EIA455-61 or a
bi-directional end to end power meter test performed per TIA/EIA455-53A.
3. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1310 nanometers for multimode fibers
and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers.
4. Pre-installation cable testing
A. The Contractor shall test all lightguide cable prior to the installation of the cable.
B. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found
defective at a later date.

5. Loss Budget
A. Fiber links shall have a maximum loss of:
1) Allowable cable loss per km)(km of fiber in link) + (.4dB)(number of connectors) = maximum
allowable loss
B. A mated connector to connector interface is defined as a single connector for the purpose of this
RFP
C. Loss numbers for the installed link shall be calculated by taking the sum of the bi-directional
measurements and dividing that sum by two.
D. Any link not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the
contractor, at no charge.
E. Documentation shall be provided in both hard copy and 3 1/2 inch diskette to the point of contact.
C. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Contractor shall provide a Twenty (20) year Structured Connectivity Solution Extended Product
Warranty and Application Assurance.
D. Additional Warranty
1. Contractor shall state any additional Contractor supplied warranty.
3.13 Completion of work
A. At the completion of the System, the Contractor shall restore to its former condition, all aspects of
the project site and on a daily basis, shall remove all waste and excess materials, rubbish debris,
tools and equipment resulting from or used in the services provided under this Contract.
B. All clean up, restoration, and removal noted above will be by the Contractor and at no cost.
C. If the Contractor fails in its duties under this paragraph, the client may upon notice to the
Contractor perform the necessary clean up and deduct the costs thereof from any amounts due
or to become due to the Contractor.
D. Client, through the General Contractor will provide a dumpster for the use of the Contractor.
E. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove trash from the areas it is working in and bring
trash and debris to the dumpster.
F. The Contractor shall not use the General Contractor's dumpsters or trash disposal without prior
approval of the General Contractor.

3.14 Documentation Standards
Documentation supporting the installation should form part of the Operational & Maintenance
manuals (O&Ms). O&M manuals should be provided in Paper and Electronic formats:
The following formats should be used:
1. Microsoft Word
2. Microsoft Excel
3. PDF files for Manuals only
4. AutoCAD drawings
5. Test Equipment software if non standard
Documentation should include, but not be limited to:
6. Installation drawings detailing cable routing and tie down points for all cables (high and low level
cables) for each floor.
7. Installation drawings for any amendments to the requirements that are raised through change
control or as a result of a variance to the original specification.
8. ‘As built’ drawings to be presented upon project completion.
9. Patching frame and cabinet layouts / numbering for the CER
10. Test results and certification
11. Warranty certificates, to include details of the lifespan of the warranties as well as details of
maximum attainable distances for all data ranges and protocols covered by the warranty
12. Manufacturers parts list
A framework of all O&M manuals that will be produced should be issued prior to contract award
together with a timetable of dates when draft documents will be released.
3.15 Training
A. The SCS Contractor shall provide one (1) technician for one (1) week beginning with the first
scheduled move-in date.
B. This technician will also assist the owner in cross connecting the voice and data services
throughout the building during the move-in period. It is at this time that all Owner provided
connectivity schedules for voice and data services will be provided to the Contractor.

C. Patching (cross connection) of the station assignments between the Owners service demarc shall
also be considered part of this Contractors work.
Inspection
D. On-going inspections shall be performed during construction by the Project Manager and/or the
SCS System Manager. All work shall be performed in a high quality manner and the overall
appearance shall be clean, neat and orderly.
E. The following shall be examined and shall comply satisfactorily in all instances.
1. Is the design documentation complete?
2. Are all cables properly labeled, from end-to-end?
3. Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications for the
specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and
presence of AC and/or DC voltage?
4. Is the cable type suitable for its pathway?
5. Are the cables bundled in parallel?
6. Have the pathway manufacturer's guidelines been followed?
7. Are all cable penetrations installed properly and fire stopped according to code?
8. Have the Contractors avoided excessive cable bending?
9. Have potential EMI and RFI sources been considered?
10. Is Cable Fill Correct?
11. Are hanging supports within 1.5 meters (5 feet)?
12. Does hanging cable exhibit some sag?
13. Are telecommunications room terminations compatible with applications equipment?
14. Have Patch Panel instructions been followed?
A. jacket removal point
B. termination positions
C. all pair terminations tight with minimal pair distortions
D. twists maintained up to Index Strip
15. Are the connectors properly turned right side up in the Jack Panels without cables wrapped or

twisted around the Mounting Collars?
16. Have the correct outlet connectors been used?
17. Have outlets been wired correctly? (T568A or T568B)?
18. Is the cable jacket maintained up to the jack?
19. Are identification markings uniform, permanent and readable?
3.16 Manufacturer Accreditation
Any selected Cabling Contractor must demonstrate that they are appropriately accredited and have
the relevant experience for the manufacturers products proposed. Guarantees must also be given
that the installation will be warranted by the appropriate manufacturer.

FIRE ALARM
SECTION 16741
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, NFPA 101, 2012 Edition and Local QCDD requirements and
approval.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.

3. Division 16 Section "LV Conductors and Cables" for fire alarm system power wiring.
4. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for fire alarm system wiring method and
enclosure requirements.
C. The Fire Alarm System shall be subject to the approval of Kahramaa HSE Department.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FACP: Main fire alarm control panel.
B. FARP: Fire Alarm Repeater Panel.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. GUI: Graphic User Interface
E. Alarm Verification Feature: A feature of automatic fire detection and alarm systems to
reduce unwanted alarms wherein smoke detectors report alarm conditions for a minimum
period of time, or confirm alarm conditions within a given time period after being reset, in
order to be accepted as a valid alarm initiation signal.
F. A “ / “ used throughout the text between two consecutive words is equivalent to and shall
be used interchangeably with “ and “.
G. Alarm: A warning of fire danger.
H. Signal: A status indication communicated by electrical or other means.
1. Alarm Signal: A signal indicating an emergency that requires immediate action, such as
a signal indicative of fire.
2. Evacuation Signal: A distinctive signal intended to be recognized by the occupants as
requiring evacuation of the building.
3. Fire Alarm Signal: A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device such as a manual
fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, waterflow switch, or other device in which
activation is indicative of the presence of a fire.
FIRE ALARM January 2019 16741-1

4. Supervisory Signal: A signal indicating the need for action in connection with the
supervision of the fire suppression systems or equipment, or the maintenance features
of related systems.
5. Trouble Signal: A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device indicative of a fault
in a monitored circuit or component.
A. General: Non-coded, zoned system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; and hard-
wired for signal transmission, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm
initiation and notification appliances. Connect to nearest analogue addressable loop or to
directly to MFS, as shown on the drawings.
B. General: Non-coded, addressable-analog system with manual and automatic alarm

initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal
transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
C. Scope of Work: Provide the following:
1. FACP, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, interface with other systems, wiring,
wire-ways and all accessories to form a complete system.
2. Remote annunciator(s).
3. Graphic annunciator(s).
4. Fire-fighters telephone sub-system.
5. Interface with Public Address System.
6. Voice evacuation sub-system.
7. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as software protocol,
relays, transducers, etc., BMS schedules, and shown on the Drawings.
8. Interface with HVAC, elevators, doors, etc.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data submittal shall include the following as minimum:
1. Schedule of equipment proposed, with catalog reference number.

2. Name and address of the manufacturer and country of origin of the product.
3. Compliance statement to specification, with necessary supporting documents.
4. Complete catalog pages of proposed equipment.
5. Detectors characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling height and air
movement speed.
6. Name and address of the authorized local representative/dealer.
7. Basic system architecture indicating tie-in points with existing services.
8. Battery: Sizing calculations.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans and elevation views of components. Show
access and workspace requirements. Include at least the following:
1. Detailed floor layouts showing all peripherals with label reference and exact routing of
cabling, wireways, and detection and evacuation zoning.
2. Detailed system schematic diagram. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals
and interconnections identified.
3. Detailed equipment layout in rooms and closets including elevations and typical
installation details.
4. Show details of graphic station.
5. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming and labeling.
6. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method
of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for

manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's

standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
7. Cause and Effect Matrix: Show in a matrix format, the effect of every initiating device
on the MFAC, notification devices, system peripherals, and auxiliary systems interfaced
with it.
C. Coordination Drawings:
1. Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of smoke
detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each duct smoke
detector installation:
a. Size and location of supply and return ducts, including lining.

b. Size and location of piping.
c. Size and arrangement of structural elements.
d. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air-sampling elements.
2. Location of detectors and notification devices in ceilings and reflected ceilings.

3. Coordination drawings with other systems listed under 1.4C.8.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
project names and addresses, names and addresses of the Engineer and Employer, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
E. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.
G. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

requirements.
requirements.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. As-Built layouts and schematics.

2. System operation.
3. Maintenance schedule.
4. System software documentation
5. Power supply schedule.
6. Integration and interfaces with other systems documentations.
J. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures," make an identical
submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if
required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments
from Authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to the Engineer for review.
K. Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15 decibels (dB)
above ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum sound level that occurs at the
location for 60 seconds or more, but not greater than 120 dB, are achieved.
L. Test Results and Certificate of Completion: Comply with specified Standard.

M. Record (As-Built) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record (As-Built) Drawings of all
system components and peripherals in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification, Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized and certified

representative of the fire alarm system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance
of units required for this Project.
1. Experience: Minimum 5 years.

2. Demonstrate that installer has satisfactorily completed at least 2 system installations
similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through 1 source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, Kahramaa HSE Dept. and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following:
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

2. NFPA 72, "National Fire Alarm Code".
3. NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures".
F. All components of the fire alarm system including system hardware and software shall be
UL/EN listed and FM approved for life safety applications.
G. Quality of Service: Contractor shall ensure sufficient spare parts availability for emergency
replacement of any faulty component any time from project implementation till the end of
the defects liability period.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount
installed, but not less than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but not less
than 1 unit.
3. Smoke Detectors and heat detectors: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each
type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than 1 unit of each type.
5. Manual stations: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
6. Loudspeakers: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
7. Printer Ribbons: 6 spares.
8. Printer paper: 10 packets.

9. Keys and Tools: 1 extra set for access to locked and tamper-proofed components.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination with users for interface with the
existing systems.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with various systems under this
Contract and the Contractors involved in the Airport site.
C. Fire alarm zoning shall be coordinated with Public Address system, HVAC, smoke
management, and fire fighting systems.
1.9 AVAILABILITY OF SPARE PARTS AND FORWARD COMPATIBILITY.
A. The Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that
the spare parts of the system to be installed shall be made available upon request for at
least 10 years from the date of substantial completion.
A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the project

environmental conditions specified under Division 16 Section 16050 without mechanical or
electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.
1.11 MANUFACTURER’S
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Control of System: By FACP.
B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuit, short circuit, and ground
fault of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits. System
shall detect ground fault by panel, loop circuit, and group of devices.
C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from
1 zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An
alarm signal has the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and
third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority,
even when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received.
D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other
zones.
E. System Reset: All zones are manually re-settable from the FACP after initiating devices
are restored to normal.
F. System shall continually monitor any changes in the sensitivity of individual smoke or heat
sensors due to environmental effects.
G. Third Party integrator shall provide all necessary hardware, software, and auxiliaries to
ensure the following functions are fulfilled:

1. One main Graphic User Interface (GUI) located in the Main Fire Station shall control
and monitor all fire alarm system points of the existing system and the new system
specified herein. It shall have full control and monitoring of the combined systems
(existing + new) through 2-way communication. It shall be possible to connect multiple
GUI in the network if desired by the Client to have backup.
2. The entire fire alarm system including integration arrangement detailed in (1) above
shall be UL listed for life safety and fire alarm applications.
3. System software and hardware integration with the existing “Alarmon” system operating
in the MFS, as required to have a fully operational combined systems (existing +new)
and have the same functionality and operability of the existing system.
H. Modify existing hardware and software of existing GUI and fire alarm system to cater for the
new fire alarm points provided within the current scope.
I. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when a single ground occurs in an initiating
device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) System Wiring: Class B, Style C.

2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) System Wiring: Class B, Style 4.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style Y.
J. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-to-
wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating
device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) System Wiring: Class A, Style D or E.

2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) System Wiring: Class A, Style 7.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class A, Style Z.
K. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and the
annunciator. The FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the
secondary power supply.
L. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, automatic alarm

operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector initiates the following:
1. Activation of Positive Alarm Sequencel at FACP.
a. Local alarm in the control panel for the period of a programmable time T1.
b. During this delay time (T1), a local (staff) alarm (stage 1) only is to be given. If the
alarm is not acknowledged before timer T1 runs out, this is to result in notification-
appliance operation (stage 2) as detailed in subparagraph 2.1L.2 below.
c. If the alarm is acknowledged while T1 is still running, T1 is to be reset and a
programmable timer T2 is to be started. T2 is to delay the notification-appliance
operation (stage 2) further, and so provide time for human investigation of the alarm
cause.
d. If no reset action takes place before T2 runs out, notification-appliance operation (stage
2) is to be given.
2. Notification-appliance operation (stage 2).
a. Evacuation signal in zone of incident and adjacent zones; alert signal in remaining
parts of building.
b. Evacuation signal throughout the building.
c. Activation of visual strobes.
3. Identification at the FAPC and the remote annunciator(s) of the zone originating the
alarm.

4. Identification at the FAPC and the remote annunciator(s) of the location and the type of
device originating the alarm.
5. Unlocking of electric door locks (such as doors controlled by SACS) in designated
egress paths.
6. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
7. Recall of elevators.
8. CCTV camera(s) shall start recording the event.
9. Shutdown LPG system serving area under alarm.
10. Shutdown selected BHS equipment as pre-scheduled, and as per the Cause & Effect
matrix.
11. Shut off public address and music equipment.
12. Shut off public address (PA) and music equipment and use PA system to broadcast the
fire alarm evacuation/alert signals.
13. Shut off public address (PA) and music equipment and broadcast fire alarm
evacuation/alert signals through voice/alarm communication system.
14. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was
initiated.
15. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
16. Recording of the event in the system memory.
17. Initiate operation of smoke management system.
18. Operation of smoke curtains.
19. Recording of the event by the system printer.
M. All operations shall be according to the approved cause & effect matrix.
N. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP and the
remote annunciator(s).
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activate

an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals, from other devices or zones, shall reactivate notification
appliances, until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating do not return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
4. When fire alarm system is reset, all auxiliary systems shall be released from fire mode.
O. Operation of water-flow alarm switch and manual station initiates the following:
1. Notification-appliance operation as in paragraph 2.1L.2 to 2.1L.19.

2. Flashing of the remote indicating light for the device that has operated.
P. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating a
shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
Q. Water-flow alarm for connection to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room
shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the FACP closes the shunt trip circuit and operates
building notification appliances and annunciator.
R. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following:
1. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.

2. Activation of "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector.
5. Alarm as per the sequence detailed under paragraph 2.1 L if the alarm is verified.
6. Cancellation of the FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

S. Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at the FACP and the
annunciator.
2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated.
T. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition, initiates the

following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "fire-pump power failure" signal indication at the
FACP and the annunciator.
U. Fire-pump operation should be reported on the Fire Alarm Panel.
V. Operation of the kitchen fire suppression system or the clean agent fire suppression system
(FM200/Argonite) shall report the following on the fire alarm system:
1. First stage alarm

2. Second stage alarm
3. ECP (Extinguishing Control Panel) fault
4. Low cylinder pressure
5. Gas release signal.
W. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system initiates the

following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler low-air-pressure" signal indication at the

FACP and the annunciator.
2. Flashing of the device location indicating light for the device that has operated.
X. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the
selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current
status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can
be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific
detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes are
recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer.
Y. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following:
1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator for the device or zone
involved.
Z. Printout of Events: On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble),
and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed
indications. Also print system-reset event, including the same information for device,
location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
AA. MFAC Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory,

and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices

originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system
commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory.
BB. System shall be able to report a map of all initiating devices connected to the system for
confirmation of As-Built drawings, and it shall show physical wiring of T-type by device type
and number. Other proposed alternatives shall be considered.
CC. Expansion Capability: Increase number of devices in the future by 25 percent above those
indicated without adding any internal or external components or cable conductors.
DD. System software shall be using standard and open protocols. Carry out Software
integration with other specified systems including Fire Alarm itself through a standard
protocol such as Lonworks and Bacnet. Coordinate with the other specified and existing
systems to ensure common protocol communication.
EE. BMS Monitoring:
1. Alarm corresponding to building or zone

2. Trouble corresponding to FACP / Annunciators
3. Any fire alarm action as listed in 2.1L that is part of smoke management and
mechanical controls shall be communicated and displayed on the BMS.
2.2 MANUAL STATIONS
A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter
operating instructions of contrasting color.
1. Double-action mechanism requires 2 actions to initiate an alarm, non break-glass, and

lift-cover and pull lever type.
2. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double-pole, double-throw; switch rated for the
voltage and current at which it operates.
3. Indoors Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top
to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral
battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation.
4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at
the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
5. Manual station shall be addressable type to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
6. Manual station shall have integral LED.
7. Manual station shall have integral test switch.
2.3 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General: Include the following features:
1. Operating Voltage: 24 V dc, nominal.

2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in
a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist-
locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.
4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated. LED
brightness shall be high enough such that it could be clearly distinguished with naked
eye at 6 meters distance with ambient lighting conditions.
5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation.
6. Mounting: Surface or semi-recessed ceiling mounted type, located as shown on
Drawings, with head removable from fixed twist-lock base. Removal of detector head
is to interrupt supervisory circuit and cause trouble signal at control panel. Normal flat
surface coverage is to be over 100 m² at mounting height of 6 m.

7. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
8. Circuitry for 2-way communication with the FACP: Each time the detector is polled, it is
to communicate its type (ionization, optical, etc.) and an analog/digitally-encoded value
corresponding to its sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the control
unit. Detector shall be addressed either using dip switches or through soft-addressing
mechanism.
9. Remote Controllability: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition,
and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

2. Detector Sensitivity: as per UL 268.
3. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 57 deg. C (135 deg. F) setting.
C. Beam-Type Smoke Detector: Each detector consists of a separate transmitter and receiver
with the following features:
1. Adjustable Sensitivity: More than a 6-level range, minimum.

2. Linear Range of Coverage: 100 m minimum.
3. Tamper Switch: Initiates trouble signal at the MFAC when either transmitter or receiver
is disturbed.
4. Separate Color-Coded LEDs: Indicate normal, alarm, and trouble status. Any detector
trouble, including power loss, is reported to the MFAC as a composite "trouble" signal.
D. Duct Smoke Detector: Ionization type.
1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.4 OTHER DETECTORS (APPLY AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS)
A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg. C

(135 deg. F) or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 8.3 deg. C (47 deg. F) per minute,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.

2. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases.
surface coverage is to be over 50 m².
to communicate its type and an analog/digitally-encoded value corresponding to its
sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the control unit. Detector shall
be addressed either using dip switches or through soft-addressing mechanism.
B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 57 deg. C.


surface coverage is to be over 50 m².
to communicate its type and an analog/digitally-encoded value corresponding to its
sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the control unit. Detector shall
be addressed either using dip switches or through soft-addressing mechanism.
C. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: Of the analog type, consisting of detector cable
and control unit.
1. Detector Cable: Shall be flexible in installation and recoverable after operation. It shall
have high sensitivity to small temperature variations and shall monitor the precise point
of risk. The analog sensor shall consist of a 4-core cable. Two of the four color-coded
conductors shall be insulated with a negative temperature coefficient material. The
other two conductors shall have normal PVC insulation. The cores shall be twisted
together and protected by an outer sheath of high temperature, flame-retardant PVC
insulation. The analogue sensor senses temperature variations by continuously
monitoring the resistance such that a change in temperature produces a relative
change in resistance between the two loops within the sensor cable.
2. Control Panel: Microprocessor controlled that can automatically detect the length and
the ambient temperature of the attached sensor cable. The control unit shall
continuously monitor the sensor cable and shall have the following minimum features:
a. Several programmable levels

b. Short and open circuit monitoring of sensor cable
c. History and event log storage that can be downloaded using a PC.
d. Relay outputs for alarms and faults
e. Detecting hot spots.
f. Providing advanced notification of temperature increase.
3. Signals to the FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the MFAC as a
composite "trouble" signal.
4. Provide Addressable Monitoring modules for monitoring the Linear Heat Detection
system Zone and provide two-way communication with MFAC. One module shall be
used for each zone to report Alarm info to MFAC.
D. Flame Detector: triple band infra red type microprocessor based with detection range of 60
m and minimum field of view of 90° in the horizontal and vertical directions. The detector
should operate at 100% relative humidity and shall have processing power to avoid false
alarms.

is to interrupt supervisory circuit and cause trouble signal at control panel.
4. Provide Addressable Monitoring modules for monitoring the Flame Detectors and
provide two-way communication with FACP. One module shall be used for each
Detector to report Alarm and trouble info to FACP.
2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system
connections.
B. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting

assembly. Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances shall be listed to UL
1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated

lens/reflector system with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 75cd and 110cd.
Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific
strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24VDC. The
audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4”
square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings.
C. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24 V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound-pressure level of 94
dBA, measured 3 m from the bell. They shall be 150mm diameter size indoors and 250
mm size outdoors, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where indicated.
D. Low Level Output Chimes Type C1: Vibrating type, 75 dBA minimum rated output.
E. High Level Output Chimes Type C2: Vibrating type, 81 dBA minimum rated output.
F. Horns/sounders: 24 V dc with voltage variations between 18 V and 32 V and provision for

housing the operating mechanism behind a grille.
1. Horn/sounder Type H1: For indoor and outdoor applications, electric vibrating type,
with die-cast zinc frames, aircraft aluminum alloy diaphragms, heavy duty tungsten
contacts, stress-relieved stainless-steel armature springs and Teflon-impregnated
plastic molded strikers and breakers. Double projectors fitted to basic horn are to be
die-cast aluminum finished red. Minimum sound level of 96 dB(A) at 1 m.
G. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens.
Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 25 mm
high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 75 candela.

2. Rated Light Output: 110 candela.
3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
H. Voice/Tone Speakers:
1. Type: Fire rated dedicated for fire service.

2. Type 1 - High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W for noisy environments.
3. Type 2 - Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W for quiet locations.
4. Mounting: Flush, semi-recessed, surface, or surface-mounted; bi-directional as
dictated by location.
5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the
speaker location.
2.6 FIREFIGHTERS' TELEPHONES/ON-FIRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. Introduction
On-Fire Communication System (OFC) shall be supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned as specified and shown on drawings. It shall be a direct wire two-way voice
communication system designed to provide secure audio links between a central operator
position and strategically placed OFC telephone stations.
The OFC System shall comprise of an exchange / operator control panel with a two core
conductor radial circuit from the system exchange termination field to each telephone
station.
The OFC system shall operate on a parallel processing philosophy thereby ensuring that
the central equipment is totally non-blocking, i.e., simultaneous access attempt by all out
stations is latched and displayed at the operator position.

An integral monitoring sub system shall ensure OFC System availability and critical path
surveillance that shall confirm security of each individual telephone circuit, battery, battery
charger and A.C. mains supply.
The exchange/ operator control panel shall comprise of handset, station selectors and
system status L.E.D. displays. Continued operation in event of A.C. main disconnection
shall be ensured in compliance to BS5839.
OFC telephone stations shall be specially designed to achieve:
a) High visibility.
b) Instrument survival in hostile environments.
c) Effective full duplex voice communications.
B. System Description
The system shall be totally non-blocking, i.e., exchange/ operator control panel shall display
status of all telephone stations at all times. Simultaneous call in from all telephone stations
shall result in simultaneous display by an L.E.D. matrix sited on the exchange/ operator
control panel and shall be latched into memory. In the case of multiple telephone handsets
per channel, the channel call in shall be displayed by an L.E.D. matrix sited on the
exchange/ operator control panel and shall be latched in to memory. Response time shall be
better than 0.25 seconds.
The exchange /operator control panel shall be modular in design based upon plug in/out
assemblies. All PCB interconnections shall be made via plug in / out five channel line
interface cards which shall be assigned according to the telephone handset station quantity
requirements. A Central Control Card shall be always fitted which shall provide the following
facilities:
a) Generation of assurance, ringing and engage tones.

b) Generation of telephone handset stations ringing voltage.
c) Battery charger and battery circuit supervision.
d) A.C. mains monitoring and conversion to a low tension A.C. supply.
C. Exchange/Operator Control Panel
1. An exchange / operator panel shall comprise of a telephone handset and a momentary

push button corresponding to each telephone station on the system. A pair of L.E.D. s
corresponding to each telephone station shall display “outside call in” and “outside
circuit trouble”.
L.E.D. colors shall comply with BS 5839 and shall denote as follows:
a) Red - station selectors- fire situation – outstation call in /selected.
b) Amber – system trouble and control status.
c) Green - System availability/healthy status.
L.E.D.s fitted indicate: “System Healthy”

“System Trouble”
“A.C. Supply Healthy”
“D.C. Charger Healthy”
2. The exchange /operator control panel shall be fitted with momentary push

buttons to facilitate:
a) Initiation of audible alert to a selected telephone handset station.

b) Test of L.E.D.s and call in sounder.
c) Acknowledgement of fault sounder.
d) Reset.
3. The exchange /operator control panel shall be fitted with momentary push
buttons to facilitate: (Cont’d)
The exchange/ operator control panel shall bear instructions for the use clearly visible on the
fascia of the unit. The panel color shall be red BS480004E53 or RAL 3020 with white silk
screen legends.
The voice channel shall be full duplex.
The system incorporate at least the following communication features:

 Exchange/Operator Control Panel to Telephone Station
 Telephone Station to Exchange/Operator Control Panel
 Multiple Party Communication
The above operations shall be achieved as standard features. It shall be possible to

establish communication with up to four stations at the same time. In this instances that
audio levels at all handsets shall not be reduced by not more than 3dB with connection of
each subsequent handset.
4. Battery unit: The OFC shall be energized during primary A.C. mains
disconnection by a local sealed lead acid battery supply. The capacity of the
battery (AH) shall be sized according to the number of channels on the
exchange, a range of battery sizes shall be fitted to suit the requirement:
 Up to 10 channels minimum 5A/H – 24V D.C.

Batteries shall be housed in a free standing wall/ surface/cubicle mount enclosure and
should be cabled directly to the exchange control card(s).
C. Technical Specification
Supply 110-240V A.C. 50/60 Hz.
Consumption Maximum 200VA.
Tolerance ± 10% Input Voltage.
± 5% Frequency.
Transmission Inband Audio Frequency 400Hz – 3KHz.

Audio Level Typically – 9dBM.
Signalling Principle Loop Disconnect.
Switching Principle Key and Lamp.
Fault Report Volt Free Change Over Contact.
Secondary Supply See Section 5.
D. Mechanical Specification
Enclosure 19 Inch Console/Rack/Wall Mount.
Size 6 Units High.
483mm Width.
Weight 30Kg.
Material Extruded Aluminium.
Finish Epoxy Paint Red to RAL3020 (Semi-Gloss).
Legends Silk Screen White Ink.
Heat Emission 10 Watts.
Hazardous Substances None.
Termination Klippon GSE5.
E. CENTRAL EQUIPMENT
The central equipment shall be configured on plug in/out modular build basis to facilitate rapid
service. The OFC shall carry integral automatic monitoring package which shall provide fault
alarm in event of field cable corruption and power supply trouble. In addition to the in-built
surveillance package, routine testing should be effected at weekly intervals. This should
compromise of a check of all operational parameters.
F. OUTSTATION
Each telephone outstation shall be checked at weekly intervals in conjunction with the central
equipment routine operation.
At three monthly intervals the battery pile shall be checked by disconnecting the primary A.C.
mains supply input and monitoring battery terminal voltage. This shall be maintained at 24V
C.C. ± 1V. The A.C. supply shall then be re-applied (and the fault reporting sub-system reset
– disconnection of A.C. mains trips the fault report) and the battery terminal voltage re-
checked. This should now have risen to 26.5 V D.C. indicating battery charger float voltage.
2.7 REMOTE INDICATING LAMP (IF USED)
A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible,
and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash
when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a

single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating
light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the
smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also
designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.
2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS (IF USED)
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete
with matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 111 N holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24 V ac or dc.
4. Rating: 220 V ac.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.9 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required

for testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the
enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate
with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample
gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. FACP shall be of modular design
and shall not have single point of failure.
1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate

with lettering not less than 25 mm high. Identify individual components and modules
within cabinets with permanent labels.
2. Mounting: Flush.
3. Mounting: Surface.
B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP /MFS. Alarm-
initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field
wiring for module replacement is unacceptable.
C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire
alarm systems.
D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.
E. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting
signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type
of device originating the signal. Manual switches and push-to-test buttons do not require a
key to operate. Controls include the following:
1. Alarm acknowledge switch.

2. Alarm silence switch.
3. System reset switch.
4. LED test switch.
5. Evacuation switch.
F. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while
the alarm or trouble condition still exists.
G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP /Main Fire Station and addressable system components, including
annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status
messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters minimum, of which 40 characters are

available to the user for device location identification.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands.
H. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP /Main Fire Station and addressable system components, including
annunciation, supervision, and control.
1. Display: A minimum of 80 characters, of which 40 characters are available to the

user for device location identification; alarm, supervisory, and component status
messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control
of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands.
I. Voice Alarm: An emergency communication system includes central voice alarm system
components complete with microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators.
This shall include speaker zone indication, digital voice units and microphone.
Construction is to be modular and capable of being field programmed. Features include
the following:
1. 2 alarm channels permit simultaneous transmission of different announcements to

different zones or floors automatically or by using the central control microphone. All
announcements are made over dedicated, supervised communication lines.
2. Status annunciator indicates the status of various voice alarm speaker zones and the
status of firefighters' 2-way telephone communication zones.
3. Provide automatic, digitally recorded voice messages and tones, which may be field-
programmed through the microphone.
4. Provide network Audio Capability to select any speaker zone of Voice Alarm Panels
in the network from FACP or through the GUI.
5. Provide sufficient capacity amplifier for each speaker zone to achieve true multi-
channel capability in the system.
6. Where Voice evacuation is through PA system, FACP shall be provided with Multi-
Channel Audio Controller and with pre-recorded messages and tones to provide
voice evacuation messages to PA system. It shall be possible to select PA system
zone or group of zones from the FACP.
J. Firefighters' Telephone Control Module: Controls firefighters' 2-way telephone

communication system. Arrange system to use dedicated, 2-way, supervised voice
communication links between the FACP /MFS and remote firefighters' telephone stations
throughout the building. Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by
controls in this module. Controls provide the ability to disconnect phones from talk circuits
if too many phones are in use simultaneously. The module includes the following:
1. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote
telephone is activated, it causes the audible signal to sound and the high-intensity
lamp to flash.
2. Selector panel controls simultaneous operation of telephones in selected zones and
permits up to 6 phones to be operated simultaneously. Ground faults and open or
shorted telephone lines are indicated on the panel front by individual LEDs. Zone-
selector switches with associated LED indicators permit the firefighter to activate
selected telephone zones. LED indicators display elevator recall status.
K. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass

cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of
the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

L. Interface with the BMS: Provide standard software protocol and required hardware to
communicate and interface all information to the BMS system. All controls in case of fire
are to remain with the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 and 101. The
software compatibility with the specified BMS shall be effected with all manufacturers
complying with BMS specification.
2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and
trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the MFAC, including
acknowledging, silencing, reset, and test.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet.

2. Mounting: Surface cabinet.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Individual LED for each type of alarm and
supervisory device, and LEDs to indicate "normal power" and "trouble."
1. An alarm or supervisory signal causes the illumination of a zone light and device
light.
2. System trouble causes the illumination of all lights above and also the trouble light.
3. Additional LEDs indicate normal and emergency power modes for the system.
4. A test switch to test LEDs mounted on the panel. Switch does not require key
operation.
5. Graphics: Integrate LED displays with graphic display panel to form a graphic
annunciator (mimic panel).
6. Serial interface.
C. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP.
Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing
functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
D. Graphic Display Panel for Remote Annunciator: Wall-mounted engraved panel indicating
the building floor plan with a "You Are Here" designation. Engrave zone, area, and floor
designations on the face of the panel.
1. Materials: Satin-finished stainless-steel or brushed aluminum.

2. Floor Plan and Zone Boundary Lines: Engraved in the surface and filled with colored
paint. Floor plan lines are black and 6 mm wide; zone boundaries are red and 3 mm
wide.
3. Engraved Legends: 6 mm high minimum, in letters filled with red paint.
4. Mounting: Integral with lamp-type annunciator. Locate zone lamps in the floor plan
zones they represent.
5. Mounting: Adjacent to remote annunciator.
2.11 GRAPHIC STATION FOR GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI).
A. The Graphic User Interface (GUI) is to utilize user-friendly software running on an industry
standard operating system (such as Microsoft Windows or NT). Each GUI is to be capable
of graphically annunciating and controlling all network activity. It shall also communicate
with the existing GUI station at the Main Fire Station.
B. Graphic Station: Provide a state of the art and branded personal computer with 20 inch
color monitor, keyboard, mouse, CD drive, printer, and all necessary interface/network
cards and auxiliaries. The Graphics Station Computer shall be UL listed along with
software for life safety/fire alarm application. It shall include the peer-to-peer network
cards to be connected in the Fire Alarm network. The Contractor shall supply the latest

specification at time of installation with the following as minimum: 2.4 GHz, 20” screen, CD
recorder, 512 MB RAM, 606 B hard disk.
C. Graphic Station: The central control unit is to be equipped with dual microprocessor in "hot
-standby" mode in such a way that failure of either one, the other one will automatically
take over all functions of the central control unit. The failure of any CPU is to be
associated with an audible alert signal and distinctive visual signal "PROCESSOR
FAILURE" presented at the system main console terminal. Central processor architecture
is to have the following serial input-output interfaces:
1. Front interfaces for either point-to-point or loop communication network.

2. Eight osynchronous end interfaces for control and supervision of system consoles
logging printer and color graphic display station.
3. At least 1 additional end interface to drive a digital output device.
4. At least 1 additional end interface to drive a function keyboard device for dedicated
partial system operation.
D. Software Configuration: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the provision of all
system software packages, which make up the complete operational system. At least the
following standard software modules are to be incorporated:
1. Operating program.
2. System database (process image).
3. Network monitoring and control.
4. Display priority control.
5. Command priority control.
6. Output message generator.
7. Peripheral drivers.
8. Text/graphic editors.
9. Help facility.
10. Service assistance.
11. Diagnosis.
12. Auxiliary programs.
E. Software license: the software shall be open for any number of graphic stations and for
integration with other systems within Dubai International Airport (DIA).
F. Password Protection: Access to system operating functions is to be protected by a

password. For each operator intervention, the identification number of the initiating
password number is to be recorded in the system history file for subsequent reports.
G. Alarms: The system console is to automatically display and log alarm and change-of-
status messages received from FACP /Main Fire Station or FARP. The system console is
to provide optimal conditions for successful intervention by means of rapid and simple
processing and displaying all necessary data in plain text and graphics. The alarm
message information is to contain the following information:
1. Time and date.

2. Type and origin.
3. Description of affected alarm location.
4. Counter-action to be taken.
H. Programming: The GUI is to use dialog box technology to address, interrogate, control,
and/or modify intelligent points on each fire alarm node. This is to include, and not be
limited to:
1. Activating outputs.
2. Enabling or disabling points.
3. Adding or removing intelligent points.

4. Viewing intelligent detector sensitivity levels and modifying point information (custom
messages, detector type, verification, day/night selection, etc.).
I. Operating Mode: The extended system operating procedure is to be based on a user

adaptive, screen-oriented dialog in the manner of menus. No knowledge of technical
codes shall be necessary for system operation. All messages and instructions needed
for system operation are to be indicated in plain text and/or graphics. A keyboard is to be
used for data entry communication.
J. History File: The GUI is to be capable of storing network events in a history file. Events
are to be stored on hard disk and be capable of back-up storage on a floppy disk or tape.
The history buffer is to have 3 modes of display. The first mode is to allow the operator
to view events in a chronological order. A filter is to be available for displaying
chronological events by year, month, date, time, alarms only, troubles only, both alarms
and troubles, security breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The second is
to allow the operator to view events in a number of easy-to-read graph styles, such as,
bar graph, point graph, line graph, or spline graph, or similar. Graphing is to include the
ability to select alarms, troubles or alarms and troubles, then the ability to display on a by
year, month, or day basis. The third mode is to allow the operator to display stored (hard
or floppy disk) events in a variety of useful formats. Selections are to be available for
displaying events by year, month, date, time, and alarms only, troubles only, and alarms
and troubles, security breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The ability to
print GUI history files is also to be available. Software shall have the capability to store
Alarm events and Trouble events separately in two separate history logs. It shall be
possible to use search criteria to find particular event from the history log. History log size
shall be depend on the storage capacity of the hard disk and shall not be limited by the
number of events.
K. Graphical Information: The GUI is to include the ability to display system information in a
graphical (floor plan and elevations) form. A pull-down menu is to be included allowing
selection of graphical views of the facility, or subset thereof. Each view, created in a
CAD environment, is to include icons created for intelligent devices. These devices are
to change in color when an event occurs. The device is to annunciate in RED when in
alarm, BLUE for security activation, and YELLOW for trouble or to confirm
acknowledgement. Each device in the graphic display is to support a text memo file
where pertinent information about the location of the device may be stored. By selecting
a device in the graphic presentation, the operator of the GUI is to have the ability to log
onto the corresponding node and interrogate the associated intelligent point. Graphics
are to be stored in a resident RAM memory and backed-up by a floppy disk memory with
the possibility to compose, modify or edit the graphic schematics, text, symbols, and zone
allocations on-site without jeopardizing the fire alarm system operation. Provide license
and tools to software to revise / add equipment, floors, or areas. Selection and
activation of a certain graphic display is to be either automatic (event driven) or by
manual request via the terminal. Graphics presentation shall have a minimum of 4
hierarchical levels:
1. Area overview.
2. Building overview.
3. Floor overview.
4. Room overview.
L. Annunciation: The GUI is to include an easy-to-read system interface window, which

displays alarms and troubles in an 80-character text message format. Alarms are to
display in RED, troubles in YELLOW and security alarms in BLUE. The system interface
window is to also include reset, silence, and acknowledge keys for local panels and for
the complete network.
M. Help: The GUI is to include help screens, available to aid the user without leaving the
selected application screen.

N. Passwords: The GUI is to have a flexible way of assigning operator passwords. There is
to be an unlimited number of possible operators, each with specific levels of control.
Each operator is to have his/her own password. Operator password and control selection
is to be available to a high level "administrator" who is to have complete control over
levels of control. If no action has taken place on the GUI after 30 minutes, the current
operator is to be logged out and require a new log-in.
O. Printer Port: The GUI shall include an industry-standard EIA-232 port for a printer.
2.12 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. General: Components include lead acid batteries, charger, and an automatic transfer
switch.
1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 20 years, minimum.

2. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders
are released when normal power fails.
B. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide

capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full
charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within 4
hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
C. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of
signals or status indications when normal power fails.
D. Capacity: 24 hours under standby and 1/2 hour under full alarm load conditions at the
end of the 24 hours.
E. Remote power supply for devices is not recommended. However, if provided in inevitable
circumstances, the remote power supply shall be fully supervised by the control panel
and backed-up by battery as per paragraph 2.12D.
2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
A. Analog Addressable Circuit Interface Modules (Relay Control Module), generally: Shall
monitor one or more system components that are not otherwise equipped for
addressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve
tamper, non-addressable devices, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and
AHU systems.
B. Monitor Module: This module has both its power and its communications supplied by the
system. It provides location specific addressability to an initiating device by monitoring
normally open dry contacts. This module shall be listed for the application is required for
monitoring waterflow and tamper switches.
C. Control Module: This module is an individually addressable module that has both its
power and its communications supplied by the system. The system shall be capable of
energizing 100% of the relays connected to the signaling line circuit in order to initiate the
required function. Control Relay Module shall provide a Form “C” dry relay contact to
control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers, elevator recall or a
circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown, etc.
2.14 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
B. The system is to have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main FACP
enclosure. Alarms are to be printed in easy-to-read RED, other messages, such as a

trouble, are to be printed in BLACK. This printer is to receive power from the system
power supply and shall operate via battery back up if ac mains are lost.
C. The printer is to provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system and
shall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer is to be
standard carriage with 80-characters per line and is to use standard pin-feed paper. The
printer is to be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop or
table. The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complying
with Electrical Industries Association (EIA) standard EIA-232D.
D. The event and status printer shall be a 9 pin, impact, dot-matrix printer with a minimum
print speed of 200 characters per second at 10 characters per inch. Printer parameters
shall be set up with a menu drive program in the printer. The serial cable connecting the
Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Printer shall be supervised. The serial printer shall
support short haul modems or Fiber-Optics modules. The printers shall list the time,
date, type, and user defined message for each event printed. It shall be possible to
support multiple printers per CPU. It shall be possible to define which event types are
sent to the printer(s) including alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor, and service groups.
E. The printer shall be powered from 240 VAC, and shall use standard 91/2" x 11" fan fold
paper. Battery backup if required shall use an emergency power unit or uninterrupted
power supply.
2.15 WIRE
A. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600 V rated, 75 deg. C (167

deg. F), color-coded insulation.
1. Initiating devices circuits: 1.5 mm² (No. 16 AWG), minimum, and subject to circuit
load.
2. Notification appliance circuits: 2.5 mm² (No. 12 AWG), minimum, and subject to
circuit load.
3. Loudspeaker circuits: 1.5 mm² (No. 16 AWG), minimum, and subject to circuit load.
B. Wires and Cables: Comply with NFPA 72 and 101, and certified to have passed IEC 331
and 332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests.
C. Cables are to be silicone rubber insulated, with overall PVC sheath bonding to coated
aluminum foil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
B. Manual Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes.
C. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve
station required to be supervised.

D. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 100 mm from a sidewall to the near
edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On
smooth ceilings, install not more than 9 m apart in any direction.
E. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 100 mm, but not more than 300 mm, below the
ceiling.
F. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 1520 mm.
G. The selection and placement of smoke detectors shall take into account both the
performance characteristics of the detector and the areas into which the detectors are to
be installed to prevent nuisance alarms or improper operation after installation. Smoke
detectors shall not be installed in areas where air velocity is greater than 1.5m/sec, and
shall not be located in a direct airflow. If siting of detectors in such areas is unavoidable,
use detectors specifically designed for use in such conditions.
H. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
2. Install sampling tubes so that they extend the full width of the duct.
I. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
J. Audible Alarm Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install bells and
horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed
behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit.
K. Visible Alarm Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 150
mm below the ceiling.
L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
M. MFAC: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
N. Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with
no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal
according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on
terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-codes for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-

initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.
E. Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so that the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Install framed instructions and zone layout in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written

instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible,
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the
greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk,
and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure,
record, and report ground resistance.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory trained and authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and connections and to supervise
installation, pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing.
B. Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete
pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system with
requirements of the Drawings and Specification. Correct deficiencies observed in pre-
testing. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until
satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic
recording of acceptance test results.
C. Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the

installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to
preliminary tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is
ready for final acceptance testing.
E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72.
Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.

3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on Record
(As-Built) Drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of
initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to
class of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at
the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at
each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using
all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all
devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe
indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice
audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume
level.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
F. Re-testing: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets specified
requirements and complies with applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and
detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of
tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
I. Experimental period for all systems shall be 3 months, before provisional taking over.
J. Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged

equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while connecting to existing
system.
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches
and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized and trained service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for operating, adjusting,
troubleshooting, and servicing system.
1. Provide a minimum of eight hours' training in operation and maintenance.
B. Demonstrate full functionality of the system as specified to the acceptance of the

Engineer, DCA, and Authorities having jurisdiction.

3.8 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 1 year of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities
to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 3 requested visits to Project site for this
purpose.

FIRE STOPPING
SECTION 16742
PART 1 GENERAL
B. NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, NFPA 101, 2012 Edition and Local QCDD requirements and
approval.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a U.L. approved firestopping system in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
A. Firestop Caulk
B. Fire Rated Board
C. Fire in tumescent sealant.
D. Fire resistant coating.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer’s installation instructions for all
materials and prefabricated devices, providing description sufficient for identification at
the job site.
B. Submit shop drawings showing proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings
and method of installation. Construction details shall accurately reflect actual job
conditions.
C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with product delivered to job site.
D. Submit certification by F.S>D. and U.L. for the complete system of firestopping for each
type penetration.
E. Submit complete details of each type of penetration to be used indicating the proper U.L.
approved firestop system and U.L. system number.
A. Fire system installation shall conform to requirements of qualified designs or

manufacturer approved modifications, as supported by engineering reports.
B. Install firestop materials and systems as required by these Tender Documents and meet
and be accepted for use by applicable design building and construction codes.
C. Submit manufacturer’s product data, letter of certified laboratory test report that the
material or combination of materials (firestop system) meets the requirements specified in
accordance with the applicable referenced standards.
D. The firestop compound shall not contain any solvents of inorganic fibers. The penetration
seal material must be unaffected by moisture and must maintain the integrity of the floor
or wall assembly for its rated time period when tested in accordance with ASTM E814
(UL1479). The system shall be U.L. classified for up to and including 3 hours.
E. Fire Stopping System shall be in accordance with Kahramaa HSE Department
requirement.
FIRE STOPPING January 2019 16742-1

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide firestop compound of in tumescent expandable nature for collar or strip

application. Material must:
B. Provide firestop compounds for caulk application. Material must be capable of sealing
openings around single or multiple ducts, pipes cables, wire or conduits against fire,
smoke and toxic gases, and maintaining rating with a thickness no greater than the
structure.
C. Provide a board material, where required as per manufacturer’s recommendations and/or
shown on the drawings.
D. Provide a firestop system consisting of a material or combination of materials, to retain
the integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the
spread of flame, smoke and toxic gases through pentrations in fire-rated barriers. It shall
be used in specific locations as follows:
a. Penetrations for the passage of duct piping cable, tray conduit, and electrical
busways and reaceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions),
horizontal barriers (floor slabs and floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service
shafts.
b. Provide FS Boards at the typical floor plantrooms.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Firestopping materials/system shall be flexible to allow for normal movement of building

structure and penetrating item(s) without effecting the adhesion or integrity of the system.
B. Firestopping materials shall not require hazardous waste disposal of used
containers/packages.
C. Provide firestopping materials free of solvents which will not experience shrinkage while
curing.
D. Provide Fire Rated boards to provide 2 or 4 hour fire resistance as specified compliance
with FSD and Building Requirements.
E. The fire resistant board cladding material shall be non-combustible to BS476 Part 4,
Class 1 surface spread of flame to BS476 Class 7, and class 0 to UK Building
Regulations. The fire resistant board shall be of monolithic asbestor-free calcium silicate
material. The performance shall not be affected by moisture absorption Mechanical
strength shall be maintained and the board shall not delaminate or the fire resisting
properties shall not deteriorate even under 100% water saturation. The fire resistant
board shall be not attracts pests and shall not rot or support the growth of mould.
F. Fire resistant coating over life emergency and security system cables crossing different
fire compartments than intended for cable use. This coating shall provide minimum 3 hour
protection. Such space include Basement carpark, kitchen and similar are
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
C. Refer to Section 16999 Lists of Approved and Recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Deliver material to site in original unopened containers or packages bearing the
manufacture’s name, brand designation, product description and U.L. Classification Mark.
3.2 Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage
time at job site.
3.3 Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
manufacture’s requirements.

3.4 Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in Material Safety
Data Sheets a applicable.
3.5 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Verify that openings are properly sized and in suitable condition to receive the work of this
section.
3.6 PREPARATION
A. Clean sustrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose materials, rust or other matter that may effect
the proper fitting or adhesion of the firestopping.
B. Clean metal and glass surfaces with a non-alcohol solvent.
3.7 INSTALLATION
A. Install firestop materials as indicated in accordance with design requirements and

manufacturer’s instruction.
B. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air, smoke and water-tight seal.
C. Firestopping may be required by other Contractors under related sections of the

project specifications. Identify all locations requiring firestopping and coordinate the work
of this section with work performed under other sections of the project to provide a uniform
system of firestopping.
D. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item

installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
E. Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperature’s exceed

the manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation
F. HORIZONTAL CABLES
1. Install a cable sleeve with an inside diameter large enough to pass the cable through.
2. Install firestop in tumescent sealant material between the sleeve and the cable as per
manufacturers
G. FIRE RATED BOARD
1. Provide the Fire Rated Boards (2) between the top of the Hardy Wall and
the underside of the floor slab between the core walls forming the typical floor plant
room. Provide the openings in the board for ducts, trunking, conduits and cables. Seal
the space around all penetrations with Fire Rated Caulking.
H. FIRE RESISTANT COATING
a. Provide 4-hour fire protection coating for cables of life safety, security and
emergency system crossing hazardous zones of Car Parking, generator room,
kitchen and alike.
END OF THE SECTION 16742

CONSOLE FOR FIRE COMMAND CENTER ROOM

SECTION 16743
The Contractor shall provide a high quality console for the Fire Command Center Room at Ground
Floor level.
The console shall consist of desk tops, wall units, supporting brackets, chairs, mobile drawers units,
19” racks, cabinets.
The console shall be designed by a professional system integrator engineer and detailed by an
architect/decorator hired by the Contractor. All drawings shall be submitted to Engineers for approval.
The furniture layout shall be console on the room perimeter, placed against the wall with a desk in the
center of the room. The furniture shall be provided with 5 nos. swivel chairs, adjustable with armrests
and backs support, heavy duty 5 rollers, high quality synthetic fabric designed for workstation use.
The provision of desk and mobile drawers shall be at least for 7 nos. operators the rest of the console
shall be designed to accommodate twice the equipment and computers going into this room.
The desk area and mobile drawers units shall be provided for 7 Nos. operations at least. The rest of
the units shall be provided for double (100% increase of) the basic requirement to accommodate all
extra low voltage system control panels.
The console shall be provided with following features and specification:
- Modular construction
- Anti-electrostatic finishes
- Sturdy and robust, oversized frame and panel sections to prevent vibration deflection, sagging
and cracks.
- Ergonomical design, functional and visual appeal.
- Integrated wireways for concealed cabling
- Supply and installation of multi-gang power and signal sockets
- Fire retardancy compliance
- Supporting structure and frame of formed steel or aluminium concealed with PVC or wood
cladding.
- Paneling in mdf; finish smooth and easy to clean and maintain; scratch- proof; base coat,
precision coats, print/pattern and colour coats, machine top coat
- Alternative durable and precision finishes will be reviewed by the Engineer.
END OF THE SECTION 16743
CONSOLE FOR FIRE COMMAND CENTER ROOM January 2019 16743-1

LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SECTION 16744
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lightning protection for buildings and associated structures and
includes requirements for lightning protection systems components including, but not
1. Air Termination Network.

2. Down Conductors.
3. Ground Termination Network.
4. Bonding.
5. Accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for air terminals, fasteners, test links ground point and rods,
connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any accessories forming part of the lightning
protective system.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail the lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations,
conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding locations and provisions.
Include indications for use of raceway and sleeves, and data on how concealment
requirements will be met.
C. As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed lightning

protection, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
D. Records: Submit the following:
1. Actual layout and components of the system.

2. Nature of soil and characteristics and any special grounding arrangement.
3. Test conditions and results.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners,
and other information specified or required by the Engineer.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION January 2019 16744-1

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing

lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Standards: Comply with BS 6651 "Code of Practice for Protection of Structures Against
Lightning"
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and
components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal
bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.
1.6 TERMS USED
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably:
1. "Earth" and "Ground".

2. "Earthing" and "Grounding".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Provide lightning protection system materials and components that comply with approved
manufacturer's standard design, in accordance with published product information and the
Standards specified in this Section.
B. Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, and conductor straps,
fasteners, grounding plates, grounding rods, rod clamps, splicers and other components
required for a complete system that meets the Standards specified in this Section.
C. Roof Conductors: Bare, high conductivity, annealed copper strip, 25 x 2.5 mm.
D. Ground Rod: Solid copper conductor of minimum 20mm diameter having following
features and accessories.
1. Driving Head: High strength steel.

2. Couplings: Long length silicon bronze, internally threaded.
3. Threads: Rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of steel and strength.
4. Minimum Length of Rod: 1.2 m.
5. Clamping device for connection to down conductors.
E. Inspection (Ground) Pit: Precast concrete construction of dimensions shown on Drawings,

with heavy duty cover and brass plate engraved 'Ground Pit Below' inset in cover. The
inspections pit installed in building Basement shall be provided with double seal water stop
at two locations.
1. Provide one pit for each ground rod.
F. Bonding Conductors: High conductivity, PVC insulated copper tape, 20 x 2.5 mm minimum
dimensions, or 70 mm² soft drawn stranded copper cables.

G. Accessories: Supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links, etc., are to be copper or
copper alloy and specially manufactured for the purpose. Clamps and connectors are to be
specifically designed and sized for clamping and connecting to the various shapes and
surfaces of bonded metalwork. Provide bimetallic connectors between different materials.
Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws and bolts will not be accepted on copper
installations.
H. Flexible Bonding Straps: Flexible annealed copper braid, 25 x 3.5 mm, suitable for bonding
flat surfaces, cut to length required and with drilled flat terminals for bolted connections.
Provide special bimetallic alloy terminals for joining to aluminum conductive parts.
I. Down Conductors: Round solid copper, 8 mm diameter, covered with PVC of approved
color.
J. Test Links: Two-bolt split-coupling, copper alloy, made to join 2 ends of down conductor
specified. Plate indicating position and number of electrodes is to be fitted above each test
link.
2.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Flat Concrete Roofed Buildings Air Termination Network: Provide horizontal conductors
around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that are higher than adjacent
parts, unless they fall in zone of protection of a higher conductor. Install horizontal
conductors in a mesh of 10 m x 20 m maximum spacing. Join all elements of lightning
protective system together.
B. Down Conductors: Space at 10 m for buildings over 20 m height, and at 20 m for buildings
less than 20 m height. Every down conductor is to:
1. Have test link above ground for testing ground termination network.
2. Be protected against corrosion for 0.3 m above and below ground level.
3. Terminate in a ground electrode.
4. Be insulated with PVC or polyethylene (5 mm thick) from test link to electrode
connection point (to reduce potential gradient at ground level which otherwise would be
lethal to humans or animals).
5. Be protected against mechanical damage for 1.2m above ground level.
C. Ground Termination Network: Interconnect and bury ground electrodes at least 1 m into
the ground water table during summer and minimum 0.6 m from foundations. Each
electrode is to have resistance to ground not exceeding ten times the number of
interconnected down conductor earth electrodes provided. For example for 5 down
conductors, resistance of each electrode is not to exceed 5 x 10 = 50 ohms, tested with test
link removed and before bonding to other services or other ground electrodes. Combined
resistance to ground of whole network is not to exceed 1 ohms.
D. Common Grounding: Interconnect ground termination electrodes in a ring around the

structure and bonded to ground electrode of protective grounding system. The two
systems are to form a common ground ring having a total resistance value to ground below
the lower value of any of the 2 systems.
E. Joints and interconnections in ground termination network are to be exothermic welds

except that down conductor is to be connected by a single or multi-conductor bolted U-
connector clamp at ground pits.
F. Ground Electrode: Provide one of the following arrangements:
1. Deep driven grounding rod (9 m minimum total length), or where necessary, drilling of
ground, insertion of rod and backfilling with soil conditioning agents such as Bentonite or
Marconite.

2. Matrix arrangement of rods (where deep driving is impracticable) coupled together by

buried conductors, spaced at least equal to and not more than twice their driven depth,
with total length not less than 9 m and minimum rod length 3.6 m.
G. Isolation of ground electrode for testing is to be possible.
H. Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning protective system
at points above the test joint (test link) to avoid side flashing. Metalwork includes but is not
necessarily limited to: water pipes, tanks, sign structures, communication supports, metal
sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, vents, exterior metal staircases, metal
window frames, vent pipes, steel doors or door frames, main grounding terminal or bar of
electrical installation and reinforcing bars of concrete structures if these are in continuous
electrical contact.
I. Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such as water piping,
etc.), as follows:
1. As directly as possible to the ground termination.

2. Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.
3. At nearest ground point or at nearest main grounding terminal or bar of protective
grounding system.
2.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Flat Concrete Roofed Buildings Air Termination Network: Provide horizontal conductors
around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that are higher than adjacent
parts, unless they fall in zone of protection of a higher conductor. Install horizontal
conductors in a mesh of 10 m x 20 m maximum spacing. Join all elements of lightning
protective system together and to steel reinforcing bars of outer columns, as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Down Conductors: Connect air termination network to ground via steel reinforcement of
concrete structure, at the positions shown on the Drawings and in conformity with specified
Standards for down conductors. Ensure good contact between reinforcing bars during
construction, by fixing the bars with tying wire, for both vertical to vertical bars, and
horizontal to vertical bars.
C. Ground Termination: Provide exposed ground bonding points, inset into concrete base of
every column above ground level, bonded internally to reinforcing bars and externally to
ground ring at a ground pit (refer to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding").
Securely bond ground bonding points to reinforcing bars using bar clamps, and provide
high quality copper terminal plate with at least 4 threaded studs for bonding and for
isolating foundation system for testing.
D. Provide reference ground electrode for testing purposes. It is to be possible to completely

isolate this electrode from the ground termination network for testing footing/ground ring
resistance at various positions. This electrode is to be provided in a ground pit with special
marking.
E. Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning protective system
roof conductors or to exposed grounding points bonded to reinforcing bars in the structure.
Metalwork includes but is not necessarily limited to: water pipes, tanks, sign structure,
communication supports, metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, vents,
exterior metal staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, doors or door frames and main
grounding terminal or bar of electrical installations.
F. Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such as water piping,
etc.), as follows:
1. As directly as possible to the ground termination.

2. Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.

3. At nearest ground point or at nearest main grounding terminal or bar of protective
grounding system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to BS 6651.
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp
bends and narrow loops.
C. Conceal the following conductors:
1. System conductors.
2. Down conductors.
3. Interior conductors.
4. Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60 m of building.
5. Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing
lightning protection components.
D. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor

splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those above
membrane roofing.
E. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop

conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 18 m intervals.
F. Bends in conductors are not to be less than 200 mm radius and are not to exceed 90
degree turn.
G. Down conductors are to follow most direct path between air terminals and ground pit,
avoiding sharp bends and narrow loops. Re-entrant loops are not permissible. Tight angle
bends may be allowed where absolutely necessary at edge of roof, whereby length of loop
in relation to distance between its start and end is kept below eight times. Where required,
direct path is to be through an air space in a non-combustible, non-metallic duct with net
cross-section 15 times area of conductor.
H. Mechanical Protection of Down Conductors: Provide asbestos cement or stainless steel

pipes underground, starting 0.3 m below ground and to a height of 1.2 m above ground.
Test link is to be positioned 1.3 m above ground.
I. Prevent corrosion on down conductors due to atmospheric, chemical, electrolytic or other

causes. Where acid condition of soil is likely to corrode conductor, provide lead pipe
sleeve or equivalent encasement from at least 900 mm below ground to at least 900 mm
above ground with top sealed against moisture. Provide lead coating for copper subject to
severe corrosion from sulfur compounds.
J. Joints and Bonds: Clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound. Protect
joints between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious material, and with
overlapping joints not less than 20 mm long. Provide as few joints and bonds as possible
and make mechanically and electrically effective by clamping, bolting or exothermic
welding. Cross-sectional areas of joints and bonds are not to be less than that of main
conductor.

K. Bond exposed metal parts of structure to lightning protective system if clearance between
any element of lightning system and metal part is less than 1800 mm or the distance
allowed by the specified Standard, whichever is smaller.
L. Inspection (Ground) Pit: Extend 150 mm below top of ground rod. Cover ground rod
connector with suitable protective compound, which can be easily removed for inspection.
Connector is not to be covered with backfill material and is to remain clean.
3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion
in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such
materials.
B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors.
A. Periodic Inspections: Perform periodic inspections during installation of lightning protection

systems and at Substantial Completion.
3.4 TESTING
A. The resistance at any point in the lightning protection earth continuity system to the main
electrode shall not exceed 10 ohms, unless otherwise allowed by QGEWC, without taking
into account of any bonding to other services. Install additional electrodes in parallel if the
figure is not met.

IP CCTV SYSTEM
SECTION 16745

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. MOI-SSD Latest Regulations & Specifications
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes complete IP Based CCTV System. Specifications and drawings are
generally detailed to the extent necessary to show design intents, signal flow, equipment
layouts; and to list requirements, materials, and labor. Ensure that the work herein
described shall be complete in every detail necessary to provide a complete programmed
and properly functioning system in compliance with all requirements of these
specifications. Everything with no exception shall be as per the latest MOI regulation.
B. The contractor shall be an approved MOI-SSD to supply and install the CCTV System, is
responsible to prepare a full submission document to MOI "State Of Qatar" and attain all
required approvals for the IP CCTV system.
C. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 16 section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” and “ Basic Electrical
Requirements”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component

specified. Include data on features, ratings, performance, catalogues and literature,
sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes, and with full description of component and
operating parameters. Submittals are to include also:
1. Reception distribution technique.

2. System expandability.
3. Operating parameters and limitations, ambient conditions, heat dissipation, power
requirements, etc.
4. Recommended data/network cables specifications and characteristics.
5. Equipment layout in the tower "union tower" including monitors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
Work.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures, and
details of control panels. Show access and workspace requirements.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Wiring diagrams are to bear
manufacturer’s signature indicating that they have reviewed the drawings and that
they are correct in respect to sizes, wiring and configuration and will operate in
accordance with function, scope and intent of the specifications.
3. Detailed system schematic diagram.
4. Exact camera locations and mounting details.
5. Configuration and construction details for operating console and layouts.
6. Complete and detailed cable routing and layouts with calculation losses and signal
levels.
7. Camera locations showing the calculated lens, angles and horizontal field of review.
8. Table showing the calculated storage capacity for 120 days retention.
IP CCTV SYSTEM January 2019 16745-1
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of equipment.

Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Location of items requiring installation coordination including lighting fixtures,
diffusers, grills, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural features.
D. Samples: Full size, for each cameras and accessories, as required.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of equipment and components certifying

that products furnished comply with requirements.
requirements of installed systems.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of

the equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units required for
this Project, to supervise installation of the system. An experienced installer certified By
MOI. The installer shall demonstrate at least 5 MOI-SSD completion certificates for
previously completed hotel projects.
B. Standards: System is to be in accordance to CCIR and/or EIA standards or other equal

and MOI approved standards.
C. The IP CCTV System's equipment shall be installed by a factory owned office that is also
ISO 9001/ISO 9002 certified or an authorized distributor or installer of the manufacturer.
The installer shall have an existing certification from MOI-SSD. Any other installers will
not be acceptable bidders for this project.
D. The CCTV subcontractor shall be a direct Partner of the Manufacturer with at least 5
years of experience with the same product.
E. The CCTV Subcontractor shall have engineers which are certified by the manufacturer.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of CCTV equipment and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and
partition assemblies.
2.0 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, hardware, software,

licenses, services and test necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the
owner a complete expanded IP Based CCTV System in accordance with Drawings,
Specifications and MOI regulations.
B. The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
1. Interface & Integration with the Integrated Security Management System.
2. Workstation Complete with all needed Software & Licenses.
3. Fixed Indoor Cameras.
4. Fixed Outdoor Cameras.
5. Motorized Indoor Dome Cameras.

6. Operator Workstations.
7. Storage Devices.
8. Power Supplies.
9. Application Software.
10. Watchman's Guard Tour System
11. Data Racks (Server and IDFs) with Switches and UPS.
12. Fiber, Copper Cabling and Containment from MDFs to IDFs and cameras.
13. Uninterrupted Power Supply.
All materials and equipments shall be standard, regularly manufactured equipment.

All Systems and components shall be thoroughly tested and proven in actual field use.
All camera should be from the same manufacturer i.e. Camera Indoor, outdoor, PTZ, VMS and
storage.
3.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SECURITY SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

(Reproduced from MOI Regulations)
- The proposed security surveillance system must be an open standard based on IP.
- System must contain a program capable of simultaneous recording, playback, storage,

copying and remote access without any adverse effect on any of the functions.
Management software should provide camera number, location, Date & time of recording
generated by system server, forced masking (password protected) in recorded video and
alarm management Images recording and storage system’s performance must be
checked daily.
- Cameras used in the system must be Vandal proof, Tamperproof Weatherproof and
Day/Night according to the environment.
- All cameras shall be with in-built IR.
- Cameras must be suitable for operation under extreme temperature, relative humidity and
non-condensing.
- Cameras used in the system must cover the required field of view and its details day and
night. Panoramic coverage through PTZ or multi-lens megapixel cameras is a MUST
wherever required.
- System must have sufficient storage system for all camera recordings for a period of 120
days, in MPEG-4 or H.264 format or better quality compression techniques. The recording
frame rate and resolution must be programmable from the user level. It should give the
ability to customize also quality of the video output based on the viewing needs and
storing capacity.
- The minimum acceptable camera resolution is MEGAPIXEL. i.e. 1280x960 (1.3 MP)
- Cameras used in the system for outdoor and indoor specific areas must have Auto-iris,
Auto-ICR, Auto-exposure, Backlight compensation, Wide Dynamic Range, Contrast
Enhancement, Digital Noise Reduction, Digital Image Stabilization, Privacy masking,
Motion detection, Digital/Optical zoom, Multiple Gain Control, White Balance, Intelligent
Video Analytics, and Audio.
- Sufficient lighting arrangement must be provided for the cameras according to the location
and requirement. Cameras shall have Infrared capabilities as per MOI specifications.

- Sufficient lighting should be provided in the sites of long-range vision to cover the area of
surveillance.
- High quality infrared camera must be used in full dark areas.
- The camera representation of the object for monitoring should be as follows: a. For
identification purposes – the figure should cover at least 120% of the screen height b. For
recognition purposes – the figure should cover at least 50% of the screen height c. For
detection purposes – the figure should cover at least 10% of the screen height d. For
monitoring purposes – the figure should cover at least 5% of the screen height.
- For number plate recognition, the recommended screen image representation must be at
least 50% of the screen height.
- A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at any one
time in a standard 32” wall screen. At any given circumstances, the number of cameras
per display screen will depend primarily as the size of the screen. A separate viewing
displays or area may also be required for reviewing recorded video.
- A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at any one
time in a standard 23” Desktop screen.
- Local Area Network (LAN) infrastructure must be highly available, reliable, secured and
able to support a growing number of CCTV devices in the network. Infrastructure cabling
must be of the latest specifications and quality.
- Infrastructure must be concealed and protected by industrial standard weatherproofing,

anti-tamper and anti-RFI material.
- CCTV system must be an integral part of the whole IP based network Infrastructure
system. The network infrastructure should be able to carry a high quality, high resolution,
real time video in a converged voice/video and data network.
- Remote Wide Area Network (WAN) connectivity must be secured with the latest
encryption/decryption techniques to preserve the authenticity without compromising the
good quality video transmission over the network.
- The system must also support NTP (network time protocol) to synchronize the system
time of the video to a reference time for time stamping.
- Camera numbering and location details in display and recording must be according to site
and location to easily distinguish captured scenes.
- System must have full function control unit (joystick control unit and touch screen feature
if its available) including keyboard and mouse facility to use with.
- The system should ensure that the image and video being produced is tamperproof and
cannot be altered. The recording shall have an audit trail feature.
- System administration must contain different levels of user privileges and roles in
accordance with the users’ responsibilities.
- The system must contain search feature of the material recorded by the number/name of
camera, location, and time and date.
- The system must have the ability of long term storing on external storage devices as well
as copying on different external media.
- The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like CD/DVD/Blu
ray Recorders or any other device in a format which can be replayed through a standard
PC based software. Log of any such activity should be maintained by the system which
can be audited at a later date.
- The recorded video should be exported in its native file format (i.e. without converting
between formats) to maintain image quality and no additional compression should be
applied during the export process.
- The system must have a UPS backup power to run the whole system for NOT less than
one (1) hour in case of power failure.
- The system must have a hot standby system with automatic changeover in case of any
fatal failure in the active system.
- The system must have a corrective and preventive maintenance contract or periodical
Service Level Agreement (SLA) for its operational life which includes but not limited to the
following:
 Cleaning the equipment
 Repairing or replacing faulty equipment
 Fitness for purpose checks
 Maintaining camera positions and focus
 Upgrading the system software
 Equipment warranties
 Maintenance logs and audit report
4.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SECURITY CONTROL ROOM

(Reproduced from MOI Regulations)
- Main Control room must have the proper size and space for monitors and operators,
ventilation and lightings, access security and alarm system, sufficient power system and
the required communication system for local and police authority emergency
communications.
- The Control room should be operational around the clock throughout the year.
- Should have the required number of personnel to operate, manage and maintain the
system as well as the required training.
- Three (3) work shifts of eight (8) hours for operators must be performed to maintain the
24x7 round the clock operation.
- If there is need, the control room must have a direct hotline connectivity to the National
Command Center.
- If required, the control room must have a secured connectivity for remote monitoring to
the National Command Center.
- The Control room must have a security access and a power back up system in case of
power failure.
- The Control room must have physical protection and safety devices.
- For any emergency, the room must have an evacuation plan for the safety of the
personnel.

 The contractor shall offer complete solution for high-definition video encoding,
recording, and display, designed as an end-to-end system for the demands of
professional IP video security.
 System shall be Scalable to accept an unlimited number of HD and megapixel
cameras, the system shall be intelligent, easy-to-use approach to video security that
provides greater control, enhanced operational flexibility, improved management, and
expanded recording, archiving, and integration capabilities.
 Multiple users shall be able to simultaneously view the same camera view or
sequence. The system shall use multi-cast streaming video to allow multiple users to
view the same video stream, without affecting the bandwidth of the network.
 All user interfaces in the system shall support Arabic language. Language
preferences shall be associated with user settings and shall follow the user and
automatically load upon user log-in, regardless of the console or workstation.
 The system provides for virtual matrix functionality, leveraging the IP network to
switch any camera to any monitor as well as transmit alarms and other system
messages to any console on the network.
 The system shall provide multi-level diagnostics of each component in all critical
areas. These diagnostics shall be reported to a diagnostic console for processing.
The diagnostic data shall be capable of being scripted into actionable events within
the system. In addition, standard SNMP messages shall be capable of being mined
by network diagnostic systems such as OpenView and others for diagnostic traps and
operational data.
6.0 SYSTEM CAPABILITIES

 The following functional capabilities shall be considered essential for the CCTV
System described in this specification:
Camera Monitoring
Camera Controlling
High degree of reliability.
Flexibility for future development.
Reliable recording.
High Quality Image Storage
6.1 Video Management System

 The video management system (VMS) server shall be an integrated hardware and
software open platform that serves as the system management component. It shall
provide distributed administration of multiple devices and administer rights and
privileges for all attached devices.
 The VMS server shall manage system security, functioning as a key server for user
and device authentication, and it route communication between all devices on large,
subnetted security networks. It shall store and administer secure keysand shall have
multi-level and user permission management.
 The VMS server shall function as the default system time server, using the industry
standard protocol, to ensure integrated devices are synchronized, supporting the
dynamic addition of network devices.
 The VMS store the database of device errors, alarms, and other system events, and
the comprehensive database be accessed and searched through the system log
window in an interface. It shall allow for connection to an intelligent uninterruptible
power supply (UPS), and it allows for a message to be sent to the UPS in the case of
a power failure. It shall provide enough extra battery power for 1 hour autonomy to
allow the manager to shut down gracefully and preserve the integrity of the
system data.
 The system shall support advances alarm reporting. In the event that a failure occurs
or is imminent, (e.g., early warning temperature fluctuations), all diagnostic alarms
shall be reported giving operators an instant view of potential issues.
 Provide server equipment, conforming to the specified requirement with the latest
configuration as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
6.2 Network Storage Recorder (Storage Manager)

 The network storage manager shall record video and audio streams from IP cameras
and video encoders on the network.
 The network storage manager shall incorporate the server functions and storage
elements into a purpose-built chassis.
 The network storage manager shall use RAID parity across the storage drives to
protect recorded data against a hard disk drive failure.
 The network storage manager shall use enterprise-level hard disk drives specifically
rated for operation in RAID systems.
 The network storage manager chassis shall be designed for video surveillance
recording applications and encompass redundancy at all vital points:
Redundant, hot swappable power supply modules
Redundant, hot swappable system fans
Hot swappable O/S drive
Hot swappable CPU fans
 The recorder shall utilize advanced network load balancing in which groups of
cameras shall be automatically recorded onto a storage pool consisting of multiple
recorders. Camera assignments shall be automatically rotated to ensure that all
available storage is symmetrically utilized. In the unlikely event of a recorder failure,
cameras shall be automatically distributed
across the remaining recorders in the storage pool, providing NVR failover.
 The network storage manager shall support a guaranteed recording throughput of
250 Mbps per storage device with a minimum of 64 Mbps of read throughput.
 The network storage manager shall support continuous, scheduled, alarm/event
(including analytics alarms), motion, and manual recording. Pre- and post-alarm
periods shall be configurable up to the total capacity of the system.
 The network storage manager shall have the ability to report all diagnostic events,
including software status diagnostics to a centralized user interface. In addition,
SNMP traps shall be available for monitoring through a third-party SNMP
management console.
 The network storage manager shall be fully managed from a remote workstation,
including the ability to configure settings and update firmware and software.
 The storage shall be sized appropriately to accommodate the following requirements.
- Type : Continuous, 24 hours/day
- Resolution : 1280X720 Resolution
- Frame rate : 15 Frames Per Seconds
- Real Time Recording : 120 days.
- Image Quality : Best
- - N+1 load balancing failure for 3 days.
6.3 Workstation
 Provide workstation equipment , conforming to the specified requirements, with latest
configuration as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
 The workstation shall be server-class personal computer with two dual-link DVI-I
monitor outputs, USB keyboard, and mouse. The workstation shall use a graphical
user interface and keyboard/mouse that runs on 32-bit Microsoft® Windows Vista®
Business for monitoring live and recorded video, and virtual matrix functionality that
allows operators to see and respond to any alarm from any device on the network as
well as direct any camera to any monitor on the network.
 The workstation shall allow administrators to configure devices, set up users, adjust
network settings, and create recording schedules. Permission to access these
functions and all other system services will be configured to a fine level of detail
including the ability to restrict cameras from viewers, restrict PTZ operation, allow or
restrict digital zoom, Zone of Interest operations, or the ability to configure maps. In
addition, user permissions shall allow for designated
users to receive and respond to alarm and system diagnostic messages.
 The system shall support Zone of Interest capability that allows a user to maintain the
panoramic view of the scene and designate zones of interest into which to
independently zoom. These zones can then be located anywhere on one of two
monitors supported by the workstation and provide virtual camera views without
incurring additional network or processing load for supporting multiple cameras.
 The workstation shall have advanced search capabilities, event logging, and alarm
interface displays. The workstation export video and still images in multiple formats,
including QuickTime MPEG-4, H.264, AVI, BMP, and JPG.
 The workstation shall be capable of decoding up to 16 simultaneous 4CIF resolution,

30 images per second (ips) video streams encoded in MPEG-4; or 12 simultaneous
4CIF resolution, 30 ips video streams encoded in H.264 baseline profile; or 2
simultaneous 1080p video streams encoded in H.264 baseline profile.
 The workstation shall be capable of minimizing the CPU processing load and network
bandwidth required by the system, a scheme that shall automatically seek out and
subscribe to a secondary stream from the cameras or encoders at a lower resolution
when the display is changed to a multichannel display.
 The workstation shall support CCTV-style (joystick) keyboard control of pan/tilt/zoom
(PTZ) cameras and camera call-up.
 The installer shall customer ensures that high definition video will not overload the
workstation or other viewing devices that are requesting live video streams, so as to
reduce the impact on the underlying network. When the screen configuration changes
to a multi-camera view, the software shall automatically subscribes to a lower bit-
rate/resolution on a secondary stream, while maintaining full frame rate on the first.
 The workstation application shall provide the ability to control and program any
camera equipped with PTZ. The PC workstation shall be capable of the following
operations:
- Manually control the PTZ
- Set the pan/tilt home positions for manual or alarm activation
- Automatically control the cameras through an alarm trigger
- Ability to set multiple preset positions
- Ability to set multiple tours
- Remotely set and clear the movement limits of the pan/tilt mechanism from the
control room, through a telemetry unit at an outdoor camera site
- Adjust the zoom lens
- Ability to control the camera menu and set up the camera through the IP video
security system
 The video console display decode shall display IP streams from cameras and
encoders across the network, drives two HD (maximum of XVGA resolution, 2560 x
1600) monitors through DVI connections.
 The video console display shall automatically subscribe to a lower resolution, lower
bit-rate secondary stream from the camera to reduce network bandwidth and CPU
processing requirements as screen configurations dictate. The video console display
shall allow for simultaneous live and playback viewing of the same camera on the
same monitor.
 The video console display shall support locking and unlocking archived video as well
as exporting evidence-worthy clips and snapshots to a USB solid state device or
CD/DVD ROM.
The video console display shall be built upon the Linux® operating system.
 The video console display shall support systemized diagnostics with a management
server or user interface as well as transmit.
6.4 High Definition Decoder

 The HD video decoder shall support any digital video stream on the network and
allow for the decoding of up to 32 simultaneous streams from any video encoder or
recorder. It shall also allow for simultaneous and independent viewing of both live and
recorded video and decode MPEG-4 and H.264 baseline, main, and high profile
encoded video streams.
Diagnostics shall be systemized with other system components. Any faults shall be
reported to users that have subscribed to diagnostic alarms regardless of where the
user is located.
6.5 Keyboard
 The keyboard controls shall have three modules in the keyboard. Modules shall be is
capable of rotating to suit user preferences. It keyboard modules shall include a
variable speed, vector-solving joystick for precise pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) control,
jog/shuttle for playback control and pattern control, a keypad for camera and monitor
control, and a built-in speaker. It shall have LED buttons that work in conjunction with
the feature being used.

 The keyboard shall be a part of an integrated system and configured so any number
of keyboards can be added to the system. When combined with user interfaces (UIs),
network video recorders (NVRs), encoders, digital video recorders (DVRs), and video
consoles, the keyboard shall form an integral part of a complete network-based video
control system.
7.0 CCTV Cameras
7.1 Indoor/ Outdoor PTZ High Definition Camera Dome

 High Definition PTZ shall deliver crystal-clear, live streaming images over the Internet
using a standard Web browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox).It shall
offer four times the resolution of standard definition domes, and shall be an ideal
solution to view details such as faces, license plates, tattoos, playing cards (in
casinos), or other specific features.
 HD PTZ shall support High-Profile H.264 compression, a vast improvement in quality
and 20 times more efficient than JPEG.
 The HD PTZ dome system shall be featured with open architecture connectivity for
third-party software recording solutions allowing integration into virtually any IP-based
HD system. HD PTZ shall be ease of installation and ease of maintenance.
 HD PTZ features shall include variable speed capabilities, which range from a
smooth, fast pan motion of 400 degrees per second to a smooth speed of 0.1 degree
per second. The system shall capable of continuous 360 degrees rotation, and it has
an “auto flip” feature that allows the dome to rotate 180 degrees and reposition itself
for uninterrupted viewing of any subject that passes directly beneath the dome.
All models shall be IP66 rated and Vandal Resistant (IK10 rated)
7.2 Outdoor Megapixel IP Day/Night Camera in an Outdoor Enclosure Wall Mounted

 The network camera shall offer dual video streams with up to 1.2 megapixel
resolution (1280 x 960) in progressive scan format. It shall provide extended Wide
Dynamic Range (WDR), low-light performance, and anti-bloom technology.
 The network camera shall provide a removable, local storage medium (Micro SD) for
scheduled and event-based recording of images. It shall provide advanced low-light
capabilities with sensitivity down to 0.0013 lux.
 The network camera (day/night model) shall have a removable IR cut filter
mechanism for increased sensitivity in lowlight installations. IR cut filter removal shall
be configurable through a Web browser.
 The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams.
H.264, compression formats shall be available for primary and secondary streams
with selectable Unicast and Multicast protocols.
 The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE
802.3af to supply power to the camera over the network, 24 VAC power as an option.
 The network camera shall provide the Adaptive Motion analytic to intelligently detect
motion within the field of vision and trigger an alarm. It shall provide Camera
Sabotage analytics to detect changes in the camera’s field of view, including
obstruction of the lens (examples include by cloth, spray paint, or a lens cap cover)
and unauthorized movement of the camera. Such behaviors shall trigger an alarm.
 The camera shall have video analytic built in with the camera and not limited to
abandone object, camera sabotage, directional motion, loitering detection, object
counting, object removal & stopped vehicles.
 Camera shall be rated IP66 and Vandal Resistant.
7.3 Outdoor Weatherproof Enclosure
The outdoor enclosure shall allow the use of cameras with vari-focal length lenses and shall allow for
outdoor applications. The outdoor enclosure shall have a front-hinged lid to provide easy access to
the removable camera sled and shall have two adjustable glands on the bottom of the enclosure
for easy installation of the power and video cables. Enclosure shall include heater- defroster,
blower, and sun shroud. The construction shall be Extruded and die-cast aluminum and finish
powder coat, IP66 and Vandal Resistant
7.4 Indoor Megapixel IP Day/Night Dome Camera Vandal Proof

 The camera shall be vandal proof and tamper resistant with IP65 rating.
 The network camera shall offer dual video streams with up to 1.3 megapixel
resolution (1280 X 1024) in progressive scan format. An alarm input and relay output
shall be built in for integration with hard wired external sensors.
 The network camera shall provide a removable, local storage medium (Micro SD) for
scheduled and event-based recording of images.
 The network camera shall provide advanced low-light capabilities for day/night
models with sensitivity down to 0.12 lux in color and 0.03 lux in black-white.Up to 20
Images per Second (ips) at 1280 x 1024 and 30 images per second at 1280 X720.
 The network camera shall have a removable IR cut filter mechanism for increased
sensitivity in low-light installations. IRcut filter removal shall be configurable through a
Web browser.
 The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams.
H.264 compression formats shall be available for primary and secondary streams
with selectable Unicast and multicast protocols. The streams shall be configurable in
a variety of frame rates and bit rates.
 The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE
802.3af to supply power to the camera over the network, if shall also offer a 24 VAC
power
input for optional use.
 The network camera shall use a standard Web browser interface for remote
administration and configuration of camera parameters.
 The network camera shall provide Camera Sabotage analytics to detect changes in
the camera’s field of view, including obstruction of the lens (examples include by
cloth, spray paint, or a lens cap cover) and unauthorized movement of the camera.
Such behaviors shall trigger an alarm.
 The camera shall have video analytic built in with the camera and not limited to
abandone object, camera sabotage, directional motion, loitering detection, object
counting, object removal & stopped vehicles.
8.0 SYSTEM PASSWORDS
To limit control by the system operators, the CCTV system shall support system passwords at
the workstation level.
 The user passwords shall limit user access and privileges to provide system level
security.
A password shall be required to “log on” to the system. The CCTV System workstation
shall support up to 100 passwords. It shall be possible to enable or disable each and
every individual function to the CCTV System on a password by password basis using
a simple point and click operation. Each password shall allow a 30-character operator
name, a 10-character alpha numeric password.
9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O calibration and

commissioning, programmed system commissioning and integrated system program
commissioning. Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets,
which shall be submitted prior to acceptance testing. Notify the Engineer and the
Commissioning Management Consultant in writing of the testing schedule so that operating
personnel may observe calibration and commissioning. The system shall pass the testing
and commissioning to the satisfaction of the Engineer and MOI.
1. System Program Commissioning
2. Integrated System Commissioning
B. Inspections and Cable Testing
1. After the installation is complete, in addition to any other required testing as described
herein, and at such times as the Engineer and the Commissioning Management

Consultant directs. The installation shall be demonstrated to be in accordance with the

requirements of this specification. Any defects revealed shall be corrected promptly at
the Contractor's expense and the tests performed again.
2. As a minimum, test, as described below, all cables installed under these specifications.
3. If a bad conductor is found, replace the entire cable. Remove any cables that contain a
defective conductor from ceiling and/or floor duct. Do not abandon defective cables in
place.
4. The Employer and the Commissioning Management Consultant reserves the right to
observe of any or all portions of the testing process.
5. The Employer and the Commissioning Management Consultant further reserves the
right to conduct, using contractor equipment and labor, a random re-test of 10% of the
cables to confirm documented test results.
3. All test results and corrective procedures are to be documented and submitted within
five (5) working days of test completion.
C. Acceptance Testing
1. Submit a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with

contract requirements at least 4 weeks before the start of testing. This procedure to be
approved prior to the start of the testing.
2. During acceptance testing provide services of a fully qualified security systems

technician who is knowledgeable of the project.
3. Using the commissioning test data the Employer and the Commissioning Management
Consultant and/or his representative shall select, at random, functions to be
demonstrated. These functions shall be demonstrated in accordance with the
acceptance test procedure. At least 15 percent of the systems functions shall be
demonstrated. At least 95% of the functions demonstrated must perform as specified
and documented on commissioning data sheets or the system must be retested.
4. Provide instruments required for testing. Submit catalog data on all instruments for
approval prior to performance of tests.
5. After the acceptance tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be
functioning as specified, a thirty-day endurance test period shall begin. If the system
functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine
maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance
test period the system fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight
hours, the Employer or his Representative/Consultant may request that the endurance
tests be repeated after problems have been corrected.
6. Coordinate testing period so that free access, work lighting and electrical power is
available on site.
7. Ensure that technical areas are in a clean and orderly condition, ready for acceptance
testing.
10.0 DOCUMENTATION
A. Keep a complete set of drawings on the job. Note any changes or modifications made
during installation and submit to the Consultant for review one corrected set of
reproducible drawings showing the work as installed.
B. Provide two (2) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals including wiring diagrams,
parts lists, shop drawings and manufacturers' information on all equipment and cables.
Provide manuals in a high quality binder and completely indexed. Submit manuals not
more than 1 week after project completion.
C. Upon completion of work and acceptance by Employer or his Representative/Consultant,

provide reproducible As-Built drawings of the complete system including, but not limited
to, floor plans showing the exact location and type of each security device, equipment
room details (elevation of all walls), showing the exact placement of all cabinets, racks,
blocks, etc., and a riser diagram showing all security devices, panels, and cabling.
Include details showing the exact type, quantity and route of all security system cables.
The size and location of all security conduit, conduit sleeves, junction boxes and cabling
splices. The as-built drawings shall show door elevations indicating the exact placement
of all security devices.
D. As-built drawings shall include a point to point wiring diagram including the terminal
connections and cross connections for all security devices, security panels, power
supplies, cameras and console monitoring equipment. The diagram shall indicated the
number of conductors, color code and wiring labels. All wiring splices and equipment
grounding shall be shown on the point to point wiring diagram.
E. Maintenance:
Items recommended for maintenance along with recommended products, procedures and
schedules for maintenance of those items. Normally, manufacturers maintenance
manuals should be used for this purpose. If information from the manufacturer is
inadequate or item is custom provide the information necessary for proper maintenance.
Include parts lists and schematics as available from the manufacturers and for all custom
items.
1. Service: Service Support shall be at one (1) year as minimum.
A clear statement of the Security Contractor's guarantee for the system including,
dates & times of service, time to respond to phone calls, to respond on site, to resolve
an issue. Service phone number and weekday/weekend hours. Include similar
information for on-call service. Include manufacturer's warranty statement for all
equipment including actual expiration dates.
Two options shall be provided: 5 days a week, 8am – 6pm and after hours and
weekends.
11.0 INSTRUCTION FOR THE OPERATION OF THE SYSTEMS
A. Provide the services of competent instructors who will give instruction in the adjustment,
operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment
and system specified. The training shall be oriented toward the system installed rather
than being a general training course. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all
aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. Provide equipment and material required
for classroom training.
B. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases for the time interval specified
for each phase.
1. The first phase shall be given prior to the acceptance test period at a time mutually
agreeable and shall be at least five (5) days (8 hours/day) in length. Operating
personnel to be trained in the functional operations of the security system installed
and the procedures that the operators will employ for system operation. The training
shall include but not be limited to:
a. General Security Systems Configuration
b. Operation of Computer and Peripherals
c. Report Generation

d. Operator Control Functions
e. Graphics Generation
f. General equipment layout
g. Troubleshooting procedures
h. Preventive Maintenance procedures
12.0 OPERATIONAL TRAINING
A. Upon acceptance of the system, the manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3)
eight (8) hour sessions of onsite training for the Employer's selected personnel. Training
must cover the basic operations (interrogating the system, sending commands,
acknowledgment of alarms, smoke detector maintenance).
B. All instruction shall be conducted on the system as installed in the building and include a
tour of the building and adequate instructional manuals.
C. Trainer shall be a Factory certified trainer with a supporting factory certification statement.
13.0 WARRANTY
A. Provide the services of a system engineer to assist the personnel provided by the
Employer during the installation and commissioning period.
B. Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All manuals
shall be in the English language.
C. Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment supplied will
be free of defects in labor, materials and workmanship and will perform satisfactorily in
compliance with all pertinent specification for a period of one year after commissioning.
D. During the warranty period, the services of a factory representative qualified to advise on
the operation and maintenance of the equipment specified shall be provided by the
manufacturer.
14.0 EXECUTION
14.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways.
C. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not

install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
E. Grounding: Provide signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.

F Equipment: install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to the approval of

the Engineer. Mount equipment in alignment with other building fixtures and fix firmly in
place with all supports and fastenings secured.
G. Interference Protection: equipment is to be installed to prevent electromagnetic,

electrostatic or other outside interference impairing system performance.
H. Accessibility: equipment is to be installed to be readily accessible for operation,

maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made, but no
changes are to be made without prior approval.
I. Make good surfaces of equipment damaged during installation, using touch-up paint
provided by equipment manufacturer, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
J. Routing of video signal cables, power and control cables, in general, is to be in separate
raceways.
14.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pre-
testing, testing, and adjusting of television equipment.
B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled
and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
C. Record test results.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
E. Test Equipment: provide diagnostic equipment required to perform system tests and
measurements including function generator, impedance bridge, oscilloscope, frequency
spectrum analyzer, chart recorder, digital voltmeter, dB meter and wave form monitor.
14.4 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

SECTION 16746
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The section include motor control centres complete in all respects, enclosure, components,
instruments, wiring cabling, etc.
B. Relates to section of Division 16 and Division 15.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. British Standard BS 5486, BS 587, BS 5424.
2. All motor control panels shall comply with the appropriate British Standard, Code of
Practice, IEE Regulations and the Local Electric Company regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' data for the following items in accordance with
the conditions of the contract.
1. Elementary control diagrams, unit wiring diagram for each motor controller, assembly
outline drawings, summary sheets, shop interwiring diagrams, field connection
diagrams, shall be submitted.
2. Include full detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include
information on type and size of structural supports, metal thicknesses, surface finishes,
bus cross sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line diagram of switch, fuse,
circuit breakers, bus arrangements, metering arrangements, etc.
3. Supply complete schematic wiring diagrams and a full set of equipment wiring diagrams
for protective equipment relays, pilot lights, alarms, controls, etc. Provide narratives for
all wiring diagrams.
4. Include full load heat rejection in kilowatts for total components by control center.
5. All fuse/circuit breaker sizes and types must be indicated.
6. Where a control centre assembly is shipped in more than one section, show field
interwiring required to maintain circuit continuity upon reassembly. Clearly delineate
shipping sections.
7. Include a statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature controls and
the fire alarm system.
8. Provide the appropriate test certificates.

A. Each complete product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS January 2019 16746-1

manufacturer. The integrated equipment short-circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment
is capable of withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value
specified on the Drawings. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the
manufacturer on similar equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each
motor control center. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of
Acceptance Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide motor control centers, completely factory-assembled and tested, metal-enclosed,

free-standing, dead-front equipment, with the following general ratings and construction
designations.
1. Voltage: 240/415 volts as indicated, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 hertz, except as otherwise

noted.
2. Minimum bus short circuit rating: 100,000 amperes, Root Mean Square Symmetrical.
3. Motor Controllers:
- Combination magnetic type with fused disconnect switches.
- Variable speed (frequency) drives.
- Soft starters
4. Feeder Access: Top or bottom as job conditions permit.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide number of vertical sections and general arrangement of modular control units as
outlined and as required. Provide fused disconnect switches or miscellaneous equipment.
Each vertical section to contain no more than 6 modular units, unless otherwise indicated.
Degree of segregation to be Form 4B Type 7.
B. Provide motor control centers to consist of detachable vertical sections, each a reinforced,
shaped, rigid, free-standing structure, with cover plate of minimum 2.0mm thick steel or
aluminum. Provide each standard section capable of mounting interchangeably with
various motor controller units and designed so that control units may be readily removed or
added as required. Mount entire assembly on two (2) sturdy structural steel channels,
drilled for bolting to floor. Provide each section 2250mm overall height by 500mm wide by
500mm deep.
1. Horizontal sections of entire assembly to contain the main horizontal bus feeding the
busses of the vertical sections. Provide removable plates for access to main bus.
Provide sections above or below control units constituting a continuous wiring trough
with screw-on covers along the entire length of the control center.
2. Provide each vertical section to be dead-front IP 34 gasketed dust-ight construction.

Provide vertical bus full-length and isolated from starter compartments by a full-height
fiber barrier, provided with opening so designed that control units of any standard size
can be removed or added as required. Provide a 100mm, minimum-width, full-length
vertical wiring trough with cable supports on one side of each section. Provide easily
removable isolating metal barriers between control units.

C. Provide a separate, formed, heavy sheet steel (minimum thickness of 2.0mm) door for each
control unit. Doors secured to the vertical section frame by screw-fastened, concealed
hinges and bolted door fasteners, capable of being tightened by hand or screwdriver.
Doors to be gasketed dust-tight all around, including disconnect operating handles and
knockouts and opening for required pushbuttons, selector switches and indicating lights.
Do not attach wiring to door.
D. Provide disconnect handle mounted on door of each control unit to operate switch through
adjustable linkage with clearly marked "On" and "Off" designations. Handle designed for
padlocking either in "On" or "Off" position with 1 to 3 padlocks. Provide mechanical
interlock to prevent opening of door when handle is in the "On" position. Interlock to be
bypass able with special tool.
E. Provide each vertical section with a number of motor controllers, fused switches, or
miscellaneous equipment units. Provide each unit with components and wiring readily
accessible for ease of maintenance, and connected to the vertical bus by means of self-
aligning connectors having free-floating spring construction so as to insure a positive silver-
to-silver contact with both sides of the bus at all times. Provide stationary structure and unit
supports designed to support and align the units during removal or replacement and for
locking in the connect or disconnect positions. Provide units of modular heights and
interchangeable with other units of same size or multiple of this size.
1. Provide each modular unit capable of being secured and padlocked from the power
bus, to facilitate inspection and maintenance.
F. Provide control center with facilities for future field installation of motor controller units
without requiring modification of the bus structures.
G. Thoroughly clean interior and exterior of entire assembly, including pullbox, after fabrication
and give it a rust-inhibiting primer coat followed by 2 finish coats of orange air-drying
lacquer or baked enamel.
H. Provide control center completely assembled and connected at factory and then given
operating and high potential tests in accordance with British Standards. Provide entire
assembly suitably reinforced for shipping and provided with bolted-on lifting irons at the top.
Ship control center as a single assembly unless entry conditions or handling facilities at a
point of installation require division into smaller sections.
I. Provide factory wired terminal strips for all required field connections at top of each vertical
section.
J. Provide a common lamp test facility on each MCC.
2.4 BUSWORK
A. Horizontal bus sized as indicated. Provide bus supports of high-quality insulators with high
dielectric strength, low moisture absorption, and high impact strength, so arranged and
secured to bus as to provide the required short-circuit bracing and integrated equipment
rating.
All conductors between the main busbars/droppers and the outgoing protective devices not
short-circuit type tested to a fault current of 50kA for 1 second at 0.25 lagging power factor
shall be insulated by approved means to comply with the requirements that "an internal
short circuit is only a remote possibility" as stipulated in Clause 7.5.5.1 of B.S. 5486 Part
1:1590.
B. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout R-Y-B left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear.
Where special circuiting precludes this arrangement (as accepted by the Engineer) bus
bars shall be permanently labeled.

C. All busbars shall be made of hard drawn high conductivity copper to B.S. 1433 and shall be
electro-tinned. Construction, marking and arrangement of the busbars, connections and
auxiliary wiring shall be to B.S. 5486: Part 1.
D. Bus shall be sized at 160 amperes per square centimeter, but in no case less than of
sufficient cross section to limit temperature rise to 55 degrees Celcius above an ambient
temperature of 40 degrees Celcius.
E. Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt holes drilled and
tapped for future expansion at the end of horizontal bus bars including neutral and earth
bus. The provisions shall include bus bars installed and extended to the extreme side of
the section and be fabricated in such a fashion that the addition of a future section would
require only the installation of standard bolted splice plates.
F. All auxiliary circuit wiring should be PVC insulated to BS 6231 of not less than 1.5mm2.
G. Provide terminal strip for control cables connection.
2.5 EARTHING
A. Provide an earth of 50 percent of phase bus capacity throughout the length of the control
center with earthing lugs for equipment earthing.
2.6 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Provide motor controller unit of the combination type with fused switches and magnetic
starter, complete with auxiliary equipment, including selector switches, pushbuttons,
indicating lights, auxiliary relays, auxiliary contacts, and all other devices required for
satisfactory operation of the equipment to be controlled.
1. Starter short-circuits current-interrupting rating to be not less than 100,000 amperes

symmetrical at 380 volts.
2. Provide standard magnetic type starter with 3 properly sized overload heaters for 3-
phase motors, manual reset overload pushbutton, and a minimum of 2 auxiliary
contacts arranged in the normally open position, but capable of field adjustment to the
normally closed position. Provide each starter with a long-life green pilot light and a
HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch. Provide necessary interlocks and remote
terminals for both local and remote connections indicated for the electrical or
mechanical work. Coordinate requirements with the ELV Sub-contractor.
3. Provide starter operating coil with voltage of 240 volts. Provide a two-winding control
circuit transformer for each starter unit of sufficient capacity to supply the inrush and
continuous volt-amperes required by the starter coil and other devices in the control
circuit. Capacity of transformers shall be a minimum of 150VA over standard by size of
motor starter. Supply a dual element fuse in each line of the primary circuit of the
control transformer. Required fuse size engraved on fuse block or adjacent thereto.
4. Variable frequency drives (refer to Division 16).

2.7 DUTY STANDBY CONTROLS
A. For motor pairs designed for duty and standby service provide automatic switchover controls
as part of MCC. The duty and standby starters shall be in adjacent bays.
B. A duty standby selector switch shall be located on the starter most accessible to building
operator and shall allow selection of the duty motor with the other motor being the standby.
Install necessary controls so that when the duty fan is required to operate and fails to
operate the standby fan shall automatically start and the standby fan operation contacts shall
open. Provide an adjustable time delay to allow duty motor to reach full speed before testing
for motor failure. A flow switch shall be provided to indicate proof of operation. The standby

switchover controls shall be reset by stopping both fans.
C. Each starter shall be equipped with a Test-Auto control switch. The standby switchover
controls shall only function when the control switch is in the automatic position.
2.8 INTERFACE
A. Provide all necessary interfacing dry contacts, signal terminal blocks and auxiliary
contacts, etc. for monitoring/control signal.
B. BMS Interface
A terminal strip will be provided by the contractor in a separate compartment of the Motor
Control Center for all ELV interfacing with the MCC.
1. Car Park Ventilation Supply Fans and Supply Fan - AHU
a. The Building Management System (BMS) will provide the following inputs to the
Motor Control Center (MCC) at each location for each fan.
- BMS On (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS, the MCC will set the
specified Supply into BMS on.
The MCC will automatically select the lead fan and if after a specified time
the fan fails to start or immediately upon a motor fault, the lag fan will be
automatically be selected by the MCC
b. The BMS panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control Center
(MCC) at each location for each fan.
- Common Motor Fault (O/P)
Whenever either supply fan is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the
MCC and monitored by the BMS
- BMS Status (O/P)
A current transducer will be supplied by the contractor and fitted to monitor
the current drawn by the motor to determine the status of the fan.
- Automatic Switch Position (O/P)
Whenever this Pressurization fan A/O/M switch is in the automatic position
and no fire inputs are received a dry contact will be generated from the MCC
and monitored by the BMS panel
- Manual Switch Position (O/P)
Whenever this Pressurization fan A/O/M switch is in the manual position or
the corresponding Manual fire inputs is received a dry contact will be
generated from the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel
- BMS Fire (O/P)

Whenever this fan receives any fire input a dry contact will be generated from
the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel
c. The BMS panel will monitor the space temperature of the car park area.
- The supply fan AHU (supply fan with cooling coil) located at upper basement
and basement 1 level are use for cooling the air by utilizing only the available
chiller plant load capacity through modulation of cooling coil valves.
Optimum temperature to be achieved is 28oC or will be higher depending on
the remaining chiller load capacity after the building cooling load is satisfied.
2. Car Park Ventilation Extract Fans

a. The Building Management System (BMS) will provide the following inputs to the
Motor Control Center (MCC) at each location for each fan.
- BMS On (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS, the MCC will set the
specified Extract fan into BMS on.
The MCC will automatically select the lead fan and if after a specified time
the fan fails to start or immediately upon a motor fault, the lag fan will be
automatically be selected by the MCC
b. The BMS panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control Center
Whenever either extract fan is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the
MCC and monitored by the BMS
- BMS Status (O/P)
A current transducer will be supplied by the contractor and fitted to the BMS
to monitor the current drawn by the motor and to determine the status of the
fan.
Whenever this fan A/O/M switch is in the automatic position and no fire inputs
are received a dry contact will be generated from the MCC and monitored by
the BMS panel
Whenever this fan A/O/M switch is in the manual position or the
corresponding Manual fire inputs is received a dry contact will be generated
from the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel
- BMS Fire (O/P)
Whenever this fan receives any fire input a dry contact will be generated from
the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel
3. Staircase Pressurization Fans
a. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the Motor Control Center
- The BMS panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control
Center (MCC) at each location for each fan.
Whenever either Pressurization fan is in fault a dry contact will be generated
- BMS Status (O/P)
monitor the current drawn by the motor and to determine the status of the
fan.
Whenever this Pressurization fan A/O/M switch is in the automatic position
and no fire inputs are received a dry contact will be generated from the MCC
Whenever this Pressurization fan A/O/M switch is in the manual position or
the corresponding Manual fire inputs is received a dry contact will be
generated from the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel
- BMS Fire (O/P)
Whenever this Pressurization fan receives any fire input a dry contact will be
generated from the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel.

4. Mechanical Ventilation (FCU’s, AHU’s, Extract Fans, Smoke Exhaust Fans)
- Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the MCC will set the
specified unit to run under BMS control.
Whenever a fan is set to start the MCC will open the damper, when the
damper is full open the MCC will receive the open status from the damper end
switch and start the fan.
b. The BMS control panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control
- Motor Fault (O/P)(Non VFD Units Only)
Whenever this unit is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the MCC
- BMS Status (O/P)
monitor the current drawn by the motor and to determine the status of the
fan.
- BMS Fire (O/P)
Whenever this unit receives any fire input a dry contact will be generated
from the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel.
5. Ground Floor Lobby/Entrance AHU and Supply unit – BMS Interface
- Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever a fan is set to start the MCC will open the damper, when the
damper is full open the MCC will receive the open status from the damper
end switch and start the fan.
- Motor Fault (O/P)(Non VFD Units Only)
- BMS Status (O/P)
fan.
- BMS Fire (O/P)
6. Mechanical Space Air Conditioning – BMS Interface
(MCC) at each location for each Unit.
- Start/Stop (I/P)

- BMS Status (O/P)
A dry contact status will be received from the AC unit and monitored by the
BMS panel.
7. Pump and Tank Room Ventilation – BMS Interface
(MCC) at each location for each Supply and Extract Fan.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
b. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the Motor Control Center
(MCC) at each location for each Supply and Extract Fan.
- Motor Fault (O/P)
- BMS Status (O/P)
fan.
- BMS Fire (O/P)
8. Toilet Extract Fans – BMS Interface
(MCC) at each location for each Fan.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
- Motor Fault (O/P)
- BMS Status (O/P)
to will monitor the current drawn by the motor and to determine the status of
the fan.
- BMS Fire (O/P)
9. Electrical Switch Rooms
(MCC) at each location for each Fan.
- Start/Stop (I/P)

unit to run under BMS control.
- Motor Fault (O/P)
- BMS Status (O/P)
fan.
- BMS Fire (O/P)
10. Tx Room Ventilation
a. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the Motor Control Center (MCC)
at each location for each Fan.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
- Motor Fault (O/P)
- BMS Status (O/P)

fan.
- BMS Fire (O/P)
11. VFD’s
a. The BMS panel will Control the following inputs to each VFD at each VFD
location.
- VFD Speed (I/P)
The VFD speed will be determined by an Analog input to the VFD from the
BMS panel (2-10v = 0-100%)
- VFD Enable/Disable (I/P)
The VFD will be enabled or Disabled via an input to the VFD from the BMS
panel.
b. The BMS panel will Monitor the following outputs from each VFD at each VFD
location.
- VFD Bypass (O/P)
The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD is placed in
Bypass Mode.
- VFD Fault (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD detect a
fault.
- VFD Status (O/P)
The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD speed is
greater than 0 Hz
12. Smoke Dampers
a. The Motor Control Center (MCC) upon the receipt of a fire alarm will drive all the
associated smoke dampers to there correct fire positions at each location for
each Smoke Damper.
The BMS control panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control
Center (MCC) at each location for each Smoke Damper
- Smoke Damper Status (O/P)
Whenever this Smoke Damper is operated a dry contact will be generated
13. Pumps
a. The BMS control panel will monitor the following dry contact outputs from the
Motor Control Center (MCC) at each location for each Pump.
- Motor Fault (O/P)
- BMS Status (O/P)
fan.
14. Chilled Water Pumps
(MCC) at each location for each Chilled water pump.
- VFD Enable/Disable (I/P)
The VFD will be enabled or Disabled via an input to the VFD from the BMS
panel.
- VFD Speed (I/P)
The VFD speed will be determined by an Analog input to the VFD from the
BMS panel (2-10v = 0-100%)
b. The BMS panel will Monitor the following outputs from each Pumps at each VFD
location.
- VFD Bypass (O/P)
The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD is placed in
Bypass Mode.
- VFD Fault (O/P)
The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD detect a
fault.
- VFD Status (O/P)
The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD speed is
greater than 0 Hz
15. MCC

(MCC) at each location for each Device.
- MCC Control (I/P)
specified Device to operate via the, BMS panel where specified in the ELV
points schedule.
b. The BMS control panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor
Control Center (MCC) at each location for each Device.
- MCC Common Alarm (O/P)
Whenever any alarm is present in the MCC a dry contact will be generated
from the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel where specified in the ELV
points schedule
- Circuit Breaker Monitoring (O/P)
Whenever this device is present in the MCC a dry contact will be generated
points schedule
- ATS Status (O/P)
points schedule
- Power Filure (O/P)
points schedule
- Alarm Monitoring (O/P)

points schedule
- Electrical Monitoring (O/P)
points schedule
- Current Sensor (O/P)
This device will be provided by the contractor into the MCC where an analog
output will be generated, to be monitored by the BMS panel where specified
in the ELV points schedule
- Network Analyzer (O/P)
This device will be provided by the contractor into the MCC where an analog
output will be generated, to be monitored by the BMS panel where specified
in the ELV points schedule
16. Chillers
a. The BMS will monitor and control the chiller via a high level interface using the
points specified in the ELV points list, the interface is to be provided in two parts.
- Part1: Provided by the Contractor; provides a Graphic interface into the
chiller system by controlling and monitoring part 2
- Part2: Provided by the Contractor; a high level interface enabling control and
monitoring the chillers as per the ELV interface points schedule. The BMS
will have the capability to monitor the event on the chiller microprocessor.
17. Heat Recovery System

(MCC) at each location for the heat recovery system.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
specified pump to run under BMS control.
Center (MCC) at each location for each device.
- Pump Starter Fault (O/P)
- Pump Status (O/P)
Whenever this unit is in running a dry contact will be generated from the MCC
- Supply Healthy (O/P)
Whenever this unit has a healthy supply a dry contact will be generated from
the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel.
18. Fan Coil Units
a. The Fan Coil Units (FCU) controllers will be provided by the ELV contractor to be
fitted to the FCU. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the FCU at
each location for each FCU.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the FCU will run under
BMS control.
- Valve Control (I/P)
Whenever input is driven on/off via the BMS the 3 way valve supplied,
installed and wired by the contractor will open and close.
b. The FCU will provide the following outputs to the BMS control panel at each
location for each FCU.
- FCU Fault (O/P)
Whenever the FCU is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the FCU
and monitored by the BMS.
19. Variable Air Volume
a. The Variable Air Volume (VAV) box controllers will be provided by the contractor
to be fitted to the VAV box by the box manufacturer. The BMS panel will provide
the following inputs to the VAV box at each location for each VAV.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the VAV will run under
BMS control.
- Damper Position (I/P)
The VAV controller will output to the Damper actuator provided by the Box
manufacturer to control the damper position.
20. I/O General

a. The BMS will monitor all points in the ELV point schedule and the contractor shall
supply all devices and contacts.
b. The contractor shall install all devices as listed on the Contract Documents.
c. Fire Interfaces
A terminal strip will be provided by the Electrical contractor in a separate

compartment of the Motor Control Center for all ELV interfacing with the MCC.
1. Car Park Ventilation Supply Fan /Supply Fan AHU
a. The fire control panel will provide the following fire inputs to the Motor
Control Center (MCC) at each location for each fan.
- Fire (I/P)
Whenever this input dry contact is made by the Fire panel, the MCC will
set the specified Supply fan into Fire mode overriding the BMS control.
- Fire Fan Off (I/P)
Whenever this input dry contact is made by the Fire panel, the MCC will
set the specified Supply fan Off overriding the BMS and Fire input.
b. The fire control panel will monitor the following fire outputs from the Motor
- Fire Fault (O/P)
Whenever this supply fan is in fault a dry contact output will be
generated from the MCC and monitored by the fire panel.
- Fire Low Speed (O/P)
Whenever this supply fan is running in Low Speed a dry contact output
will be generated from the MCC and monitored by the fire panel.
- Fire High Speed (O/P)
Whenever this supply fan is running in High Speed a dry contact output
will be generated from the MCC and monitored by the fire panel.
2. Car Park Ventilation Extraction Fans
a. The fire control will provide the following fire inputs to the Motor Control
- Fire (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the Fire panel, the MCC will set
the specified Supply fan into Fire mode overriding the BMS control.
the specified Extract fan Off overriding the BMS and Fire input.
- Fire Fault (O/P)
Whenever this extract fan is in fault a dry contact output will be
generated from the MCC and monitored by the fire panel
- Fire Low Speed (O/P)
Whenever this extract fan is running in Low Speed a dry contact output
will be generated from the MCC and monitored by the fire panel
- Fire High Speed (O/P)

Whenever this extract fan is running in High Speed a dry contact output
will be generated from the MCC and monitored by the fire panel
3. Staircase Pressurization Fans
- Fire (I/P)
Whenever this input contact is made by the Fire panel, the MCC will set
the specified pressurization fans into Fire mode overriding the BMS
control.
- Fire Fan On (I/P)
the specified Pressurization fan On overriding the BMS and Fire input.
the specified Pressurization fan Off overriding the BMS and Fire input.
- Fire Fault (O/P)
Whenever this Pressurization fan is in fault a dry contact output will be
- Fire Status (O/P)
Whenever this Pressurization fan is running a Status output will be
4. Mechanical Ventilation (FCU’s, AHU’s, Extract Fans, Smoke Exhasut Fans) –

Fire Interface
- Fire (I/P)
the specified unit into Fire mode overriding the BMS control.
- Fire Fan On (I/P)
the specified unit On overriding the BMS and Fire input.
the specified unit Off overriding the BMS and Fire input.
- Fire Fault (O/P)
Whenever this unit is in fault a dry contact output will be generated from
the MCC and monitored by the fire panel
- Fire Status (O/P)
Whenever this unit is running a Status output will be generated from the
MCC and monitored by the fire panel
5. Ground Floor Lobby/Entrance AHU and Supply unit – Fire Interface


- Fire (I/P)
Whenever this input contact is made by the Fire panel, the MCC will set
- When in fire mode the AHU will stop and supply dampers shut, the
associated FCU will stop and the smoke extract dampers will open
100%, the smoke extract fans will start. The system will remain in this
mode until manually disengaged.
6. Pump and Tank Room Ventilation – BMS Interface
- Fire (I/P)
- When in fire mode the fans will shut down.
7. Toilet Extract Fans – Fire Interface
- Fire (I/P)
- When in fire mode the fans will shut down.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Install motor control centers where shown.
3.2 Install control centers when the area is free and clear of dust and debris. Protect control centers
at the time from dust and moisture. Do not utilize control centers for temporary lighting and
power services except as otherwise approved by the Owner.
3.3 Install control centers on 100mm high concrete housekeeping pads which shall follow the
contour of centers with 100mm clear all around. Concrete pads shall be provided by the
Contractor
3.4 Provide channel iron sills below each control center where the control center frame is not
suitable for use as a floor sill.
END OF SECTION16746

MOTOR STARTERS
SECTION 16747
PART 1 GENERAL
B. Division 16 section on Motor Central relates.
1.2 Scope
A. This Part includes the supply and installation of motor starters and associated equipment.
1.3 References
The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS EN 60947-4 Contactors and motor starters

BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
BS EN 60073 Coding of indicating devices and actuators by colour and supplementary
means
1.4 Manufacturer
Part 2 PRODUCTS
A. Starters
1. Motor starters shall comply with BS EN 60947-4.
2. Motor starters shall be rated to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most severe
load conditions. All starters shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour at 100 % full
load torque.
3. In accordance with the current QGEWC regulations, motors up to and including 11 kW
shall be started direct on line. Motors above 11 kW shall incorporate assisted starting.
4. Motor starters shall be housed in a separate cubicle compartment of the relevant motor
control centre and each starter cubicle shall contain the following components, or as
otherwise indicated on the Project Drawings or Project Documentation.
(a) 1 no triple pole MCCB or isolator, as indicated on the Project Drawings, externally
operated and interlocked with the cubicle door. There shall be provision for padlocking
in the OFF position
(b) 1 no starter, comprising one of the following types, as indicated on the Project
Drawings:
(i) direct on line
(ii) star/delta
(iii) close transition star/delta
MOTOR STARTERS January 2019 16747-1

(iv) reduced voltage “soft start”

(c) 1 no. motor protection relay, as specified in Part 3
(d) 1 no. set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary indication
and control sequence
(e) 1 no. set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls and
indications.
(f) 1 no. set of terminals for remote lock-off stop push buttons
(g) 1 no. control circuit transformer, where applicable
(h) 1 no. anti-condensation heater, controlled by humdistat.
(i) Thermistor relays where applicable
5. The components of the starter shall be type tested and ASTA certified to achieve Type 2
coordination in accordance with IEC 947.
6. The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of the starter cubicle, or as
otherwise indicated in the Project Drawings or Project Documentation.
(a) 1 no. ammeter fitted with suppressed scale to read motor running and starting current
with red pointer to indicate full load current
(b) 2 no. pilot lamps to indicate “SUPPLY ON” (Green) and “MOTOR RUNNING” (Red).
(c) 1 no. pilot lamp to indicate “MOTOR FAILED” (Amber)

(d) pilot lamps (a separate lamp for each motor fault conditions)
(e) 1 no. “Hand/OFF/AUTO” Selector switch
(f) 1 set “Start/Stop” push button
(g) 1 no. externally operated overload reset push button
(h) 1 no. motor and cubicle heater “OFF/AUTO” control switch, where applicable
(i) lamp test push button
(j) 1 duty label.
7. All starters shall contain a totally enclosed dust proof timer, or the operation will be
controlled by a timer in the automatic section, which shall prevent pump(s) starting after a
power failure until after a pre-set time has elapsed. The timer(s) or contacts shall be
adjustable in the range 50 to 200 percent of the anticipated maximum delay which shall be
taken as twice the total time required for all pumps to start and run steadily having been
started consecutively. The timer(s) or contacts shall be set to give individual sequential
start after a power failure with no drive starting until its predecessor has reached full
steady running.
B. DOL Contactors
1. DOL starters shall consist of a TP contactor for switching direct on line in accordance with
BS EN 60947-4-1 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.
2. Contactors shall be selected for category AC-3 duty.
C. Star Delta Starters

1. Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL starters, arranged in such
a manner to ensure the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.
2. The period of running in star and the transition time shall be controlled by adjustable solid
state type timers.
3. Cascading of Starter Control
The control circuit for starting of motors shall be cascaded with a minimum time delay of
10 seconds to prevent simultaneous starting of more than one motor grouped in a starter
panel or MCC.
D. Reduced Voltage “Soft Starters”

1. Solid-state, reduced voltage motor starters shall be closed transition, shunt duty type with
shorting contactor, for full speed operation. When the motor and load reach full speed, the
shorting contactor by-passes the SCR power section. The solid-state power section shall
consist of six silicon controlled rectifiers (two per phase connected back-to-back, in
reverse parallel configuration) to provide a soft start for the indicated pump motors. The
starters shall conform to the latest IEC Standards.
2. The starters shall use the current limit method of starting with the current adjustable
between 150 percent and 425 percent of full load current of the motor. At turn-on, the
control ramps up to the current limit in approximately 1 second and maintains that current
until the motor comes up to full speed. If a problem exists and the motor fails to reach
rated speed within a predetermined period of time, the control will shutdown. The starter
shall provide a smooth, stepless acceleration and deceleration of the load from start to full
speed and from full speed to stop. The starter shall be equipped with metal oxide varistor
type surge suppressers across the SCR to protect against voltage transients and
resistor/capacitor scrubber networks to protect against false firing of the SCR. Each SCR
heat sink shall have a temperature sensor that shall shut the starter down in the event of
an over temperature condition. When a starter failure occurs, the actual problem shall be
indicated by an LED on the control panel front.
3. There shall be a overcurrent protective device, which shall provide over current protection
and main disconnect function for the control unit. The position of the operating handle shall
indicate “ON” or “OFF” position of the protective device and include provision for
padlocking in the “OFF” position. This protective device shall be equipped with a shunt trip
and shall trip when there is a SCR or plant power failure. Motor space heaters shall be
energized when the motor is not running.
4. The reduced voltage starters shall be equipped with micro-processor controlled motor
protection relays to control, monitor and protect the motors. The relay shall monitor three
phase current and voltage and make trip and alarm decisions based on pre-programmed
motor current and voltage conditions. Control functions shall include start detection, starter
transition, incomplete sequence and number of starts per hour. The relay shall monitor
and display load current of each phase, percent of full load current of each phase and
running time. The relay shall protect the motor against time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent, under load, phase unbalance, earth fault, phase loss and phase reversal.
5. The manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that the controller has been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable standards. The tests shall verify not
only the performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of the
enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory tested in
accordance with applicable standards.

6. Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise
immunity on both input and output power connections.
Part 2 EXECUTION
1. The Contractor shall submit details of proposed equipment and method of installation to
the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of installation work.
2. Provide all the motor control equipment installations, wiring installations and tests,
including connections and interconnections for the electrical controls as indicated,
specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces
shown on the Drawings.
3. Equipment shall be installed level and securely attached to the cubicle frames. The
sections shall be joined together with bolts, nuts and washers to form a complete unit
assembly.
4. Each panel board shall be individually bonded to main earth bar located in the electrical
rooms.
5. Each panel section shall be cross bonded to adjacent panel section earthing terminal.

VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLS

SECTION 16748
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Division 16 sections on Motor Control Centers
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Variable speed drives shall be of the electronic, low harmonic type and active front end
pulse width modulating (PWM) variable frequency type with an output suitable for
controlling standard industrial squirrel cage motors, with a synchronous speed of 1500
rpm, unless otherwise specified.
B. Unless otherwise specified, the inverters and associated control equipment shall be
housed within a cubicle forming part of the relevant motor control centre. The inverter
cubicle shall be considered as a starter and generally comply with the requirements for
motor starter cubicles.
C. Unless otherwise specified, the load characteristic should be taken to be “pump-type” with
variable torque.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The drive shall conform to the requirements of IEC 146.

B. The drive shall comply with EMC requirements such as EC directive 89/336/EEC.
C. The drive shall conform to the guidelines outlined in the Electricity Association, London,
and Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 regarding harmonic distortion. The level of
harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5 %.
1.4 SUBMITTLAS
A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' data for the following items in accordance with
the conditions of the contract.
1. Elementary control diagrams, unit wiring diagram for each motor controller, assembly
outline drawings, summary sheets, shop interwiring diagrams, field connection
diagrams, shall be submitted.
2. Include full detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include
information on type and size of structural supports, metal thicknesses, surface finishes,
bus cross sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line diagram of switch, fuse,
circuit breakers, bus arrangements, metering arrangements, etc.
3. Supply complete schematic wiring diagrams and a full set of equipment wiring diagrams
for protective equipment relays, pilot lights, alarms, controls, etc. Provide narratives for
all wiring diagrams.
4. Include full load heat rejection in kilowatts for total components by control center.
VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLS January 2019 16748-1

5. All fuse/circuit breaker sizes and types must be indicated.
6. Where a control centre assembly is shipped in more than one section, show field
interwiring required to maintain circuit continuity upon reassembly. Clearly delineate
shipping sections.
7. Include a statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature controls and
the fire alarm system.
8. Provide the appropriate test certificates.
A. Each complete product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the
manufacturer. The integrated equipment short-circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment
is capable of withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value
specified on the Drawings. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the
manufacturer on similar equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each
motor control center. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of
Acceptance Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The drive shall be warranted for a minimum of three years by the manufacturer.
1.7 MANUFACTURERS
Part 2 PRODUCTS
A. RATINGS
1. Rated input voltage is 415 volts + 10 %, 50 Hz +5 %, 3 phase, 4 wire.

2. The incoming line power factor shall range between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over the
entire operating speed range.
3. The drive shall be capable of being stored at a temperature between -0 °C and 70 °C.
4. The drive shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature between 0 °C and 50
°C with a relative humidity of up to 95 % (non-condensing).
5. The drive shall be capable of operating at altitudes up to 200 metres above sea level.
6. The drive shall be capable of operating at a minimum efficiency of 95% at full load and
full speed.
7. The rating of the drive unit must be sufficient for the continuous maximum rating of the
motor and not its running load.
B. DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
1. The VSD shall have a fixed and alternatively variable V/f curve characteristic suitable
for the required application.
2. The VSD shall be capable of varying the motor speed from a maximum speed at full
load and at any intermediate speed down to 10% full load speed.

3. The drive shall be designed to be selectable for variable or constant torque. When
selected for constant torque, the drive shall supply 150% of rated current for up to one
minute. When selected for variable torque the drive shall supply 115% of rated current
for up to one minute.
4. The VSD shall employ a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter system with insulated
gate bi-polar transistors (IGBT) to minimise audible motor noise and increase overall
performance.
5. The drive shall be designed to have an adjustable PWM carrier frequency with a
minimum range from 2k Hz to 8k Hz to minimise audible motor noise.
6. The drive shall be optimised for 4k Hz switching frequency at 44 kW (60 HP) or less
and 2 K Hz at 55 kW (75 HP) and larger.
7. The drive must be capable of switching on to a motor already rotating in either
direction.
8. The starting arrangement must include a ramp speed control, to achieve starting
currents not exceeding normal full load current.
C. CONTROL SYSTEM
1. The drive shall be arranged for either manual or automatic speed control.
2. Manual speed control shall be by means of a hand adjusted potentiometer.
3. In the automatic mode, the drive shall have an integrated PID control system as
standard to accept the following external signals coming from sensors and transducers
in pumping applications.
(a) 4 to 20 mA
(b) 20 to 4 mA
(c) 0 to 20 mA
d) 0 to 10 V
D. CONTROLLER KEYPAD
1. The drive controller shall incorporate a user friendly programmer keypad having LCD
“Plan Language Text Display” with “Help” feature to enable easy drive diagnostics and
setting up of various parameters without reference to an instruction manual. Complete
configuration of the drive shall be possible through the key pad.
2. All parameters shall be password protected to prevent tampering and unauthorised
changes.
E. COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
1. The drive shall incorporate an RS 485 serial communications interface to allow full
drive control, programming, monitoring and diagnostics, including access to history
record.
F. FAULT DETECTION

1. The drive shall keep a record of the last ten trips, plus a 100 sample history record of
up to ten pre-defined parameters to enable fast diagnosis and minimum down time.
Automatic printout of history record to a serial printer shall be an available feature.
G. PROTECTION FEATURES
1. The drive shall incorporate the following protective functions:

a) active limiting of fundamental current by frequency fold back on acceleration
loads and frequency hold on decelerating loads
b) over current protection
c) short circuit protection
d) fast acting supply fuses
e) DC intermediate bus under voltage
f) DC intermediate bus over voltage
g) power section over temperature

h) earth fault protection without damage
i) power section faults.
2. The drive shall be protected against supply-phase loss and mains discontinuity.
3. The drive shall have a selectable auto-restart after trip.
4. The drive shall be designed to shut down with no component failure in the event of
any of the above fault conditions arising.
H. EMERGENCY STOP CONTROL
1. The drive shall incorporate facilities to allow the connection of an Emergency Stop
Pushbutton to ensure effective direct stopping of the drive if dangerous situations
arise. The means provided should include direct connection to an air-break device e.g.
a contractor, arranged such that its opening on-load:
(a) does not inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the variable speed controller
(b) does not produce additional safety hazards
(c) does not cause damage to the controller.
2. Such contactors shall be to BS EN 60947-1 with utilisation category AC-3.
I. DRIVE ENCLOSURES
1. Drive enclosures shall generally be fabricated in accordance with the requirements for
motor control centres specified in Part 2.
2. The drive enclosure shall have a protection rating of IP 31 minimum to BS EN 60947-
1.
3. Where necessary, forced cooling shall be provided incorporating a visual indication on
the front of the cubicle door in the event of a cooling system failure.
4. Ventilation grills shall be fitted with sand trap filters.

5. Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a thermostat and have OFF/AUTO

control on the cubicle front door. The heater shall not be in operation when the inverter
is functioning.
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Install VSD as indicated in accordance with manufacturer’s written instruction
3.2 DOCUMENTATION
1. The following documentation shall be provided:

a) load de-rating
b) harmonic distortion
c) circuit diagrams
d) maintenance instructions
e) fault diagnosis
f) parts list with part numbers
g) commissioning instructions
h) general arrangements drawings
2. A recommended spares list for two years continuous operation shall be submitted at the
time of tender. Where multiple, identical units are being supplied a rationalised list, i.e. not
a summation of individual drives, requirements, should be produced.
3.3 COMMISIONNING
1. The manufacturer of the drive system shall have a factory trained service representative
residing in the Qatar for commissioning, programming and to provide training and after
sales service.
2. The representative shall be trained in the installation, maintenance and trouble-shooting of
the equipment specified and shall assist the Contractor to set-up and commission the
variable speed motor drives and controls.
3.4 TRAINING
1. The AC drive manufacturer shall provide an on site training program for the operating
personnel. This program shall provide operating and instruction manuals, training in
equipment operation, and troubleshooting of the AC drive. The training program shall
include, but not be limited to:
a) Instruction on the basic theory of pulse width modulation control
b) Instruction on the layout of the variable frequency controller indicating the location and
purpose of each component
c) Instruction on troubleshooting problems related to controller
d) Installation and removal of printed circuit boards

e) Actions to take under failure of controller

f) Necessary cleaning of component parts.

ELECTRIC MOTORS
SECTION 16749
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for Engineer approval, shop drawings, factory test reports, manufacturer’s certified
reports and technical data for motors supplied with driven equipment to the extent required
in this Section and the Specification Sections for mechanical equipment.
B. Shop Drawings. In addition to information to be included in the shop drawings as specified
in Part 1, shop drawings shall include the following:
1) motor locked rotor and full load currents
2) power factors and efficiencies at full load, three quarters load and half load
3) motor housing material, winding material, ambient temperatures and maximum
elevations in which motor is designed to operate continuously, service factor, insulation
Class, temperature rise, type of enclosure, voltage, bearing life and dynamic balance;
all of which shall comply to the requirements of the specifications
4) nameplate data
5) dimensions, weights and mounting details of motors
6) motor construction details
7) speed torque/current at 100 % volts

8) wiring diagrams, internal and typical external connections.
C. Current Data. Submit eight copies to the Engineer of field recorded current data. The data
shall indicate the full load current for each motor, and current rating for the overload relay in
each motor starter and controller.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 2048 Dimensions for fractional horse-power motors

BS 4999 Winding terminations
BS 5000 Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications
1.4 MANUFACTURERS
ELECTRIC MOTORS January 2019 16749-1

Part 2 PRODUCTS
A. MOTOR ENCLOSURES
1) All motor enclosures shall satisfy and be selected from:
a) IP 54 for general purpose drives
b) IP 55 for outdoor use or machines subject to splashing or washing down
c) IP 68 for submersible machines.
2) Motor enclosures shall be suitable and certified for the zone of hazard in which they are
to be installed.
3) Outdoor motors shall be protected from direct sunlight.
B. INDUCTION MOTORS
1. General:
(a) Motors shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the driven equipment as specified
in this section, and specifically outlined in the driven equipment specifications
(b) All motors shall be suitable for operation on a 415V, 50 Hz 3 phase supply. Motors
rated for 380 V or 400 V with (+), (-) tolerances shall not be acceptable in any case
(c) All motors shall be capable of starting 10 times per hour. The stalled motor current
shall not exceed 6 times full load current
(d) The motors shall be commercially silent in operation and run free from vibration
and the rotors shall be perfectly balanced both statically and dynamically and shall
be tested and adjusted for dynamic balance in an approved manner
(e) The motors shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of a size to maintain the
temperature of the windings 5 ºC above ambient. Each heater shall be provided
with a switch and automatic control to disconnect it when its motor is in operation
(f) Terminal boxes shall be provided with glands suitable for XLPE or PVC armoured
cable. The motor stool base where appropriate shall be drilled at works vertically
below the terminal box gland for the passage of the cables and the edges of the
hole slightly countersunk or the hole bushed
(g) Arrangements shall be made with the manufacturer so that the Engineer may
witness motor tests
(h) The motors shall run in ball and/or roller bearings and the weight of the motor shall
be carried by thrust bearings incorporated in the motor body
(i) Bearings shall be grease lubricated using hydraulic type nipples which are freely
accessible without any dismantling, or otherwise piped out to a readily accessible
location
(j) “Sealed for Life” bearings shall not normally be used. However, for small motors
the engineer may allow the use of sealed for life bearings.
2. Motor Ratings:
(a) The efficiency and power factor of the motors shall be high over a wide
range of load conditions. The motors shall be designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with BS 4999 and BS 5000 (or BS 2048 and BS 5000

in the case of small horsepower motors) for continuously rated industrial

electric motors and Class “F” insulation but limited to Class ‘B’ temperature
rise. This shall be in addition to any adjustments necessary for high ambient
temperatures at site. The maximum continuous rating (MCR) of each motor
shall be as set out in Table 15.1 and shall be rated and designed to suit the
climatic conditions at site. This reserve power requirement shall be added to
the calculated power prior to any other adjustments e.g. high ambient
temperatures at site.
Table 15.1
MCR Ratings
Application Up to 75 kW drive Above 75 kW drive
All pump motors 10% above that required 5% above that required
(excluding positive under all conditions of under all conditions of
displacement type) operation operation
Positive displacement 25% above maximum 12.5% above maximum

pumps and compressors duty requirements duty requirements
(b) Motor starters shall be selected from the following to satisfy the stipulated
performance requirements and comply with QGEWC starting current restrictions:-
(i) motors up to 11 kW (15 hp) shall be squirrel cage suitable for DOL starting
having a starting current not greater than 6 x full load current (FLC)
(ii) motors between 11 kW (15 hp) and 37.5 kW shall have their starting current
restricted to 4 x FLC and shall use one of the following starting methods; as
indicated in the Project Drawings or the Project Documentation:-
 Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start with torque characteristics

 suitable for the application
 Korndorffer Auto Transformer
 Rotor Resistance
 Star - Delta
(iii) motor over 37.5 kW shall have their starting current restricted to 2.5 FLC and
shall use one of the following starting methods:
 Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start with torque characteristics
 suitable for the application
 Korndorffer Auto Transformer
 Rotor Resistance
(iv) submersible pump motors because of inherent design are to generally comply
with the foregoing. The starting method is to be restricted to DOL/ Star-delta
starting or soft start according to rating.

(c) Motors shall be suitable and certified for the zone of hazard in which they are to be
installed
(d) Where flywheels are fitted to the main pump set, the motors shall be capable of
starting and driving the pumps under these conditions.
Part 3 EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Provide all the equipment installations and wiring installations, including connections as
indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the
spaces as shown on the Drawings.
2. Motor:
(a) provide power, control, alarm and earthing installations for all motors
(b) check the connections to provide correct rotation for all motors
(c) record the full load current to each motor, and the overload relay rating in each motor
starter for the certified data submittal
(d) provide the wiring for heaters in the motor frames and the required controls to de-
energise the heater when the motor operates (if applicable)
(e) provide the required wiring for all equipment that shall be furnished and installed
according to other relevant Sections of the Specifications
(f) install the control stations and/or emergency stop units on steel stanchions or
building structures near motors, if specified and as shown on the Drawings. Control
stations, where required in accordance with the particular specification, shall
incorporate a “Local/Remote” switch, “On/Off” switch and the emergency stop unit
(g) field damaged factory finish on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal
in quality and colour to the original factory finish.
B. FACTORY TESTS
1. Factory tests shall be carried out as follows:
(a) All motors: - No load current
- High voltage on windings and auxiliary.
- Windings resistance
- Vibration
(b) One motor: - Full load heat run and temperature rise
- Efficiency at 100 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % load
- Power factor at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% load
- Noise
- Momentary overload
(c) Type test certificate shall be provided to cover the following:
- Locked rotor current

- Locked rotor torque

- Saturation curves
- Percent slip
2. The Contractor shall provide calculations to demonstrate motor power rating and bearing
life with derating factors taken into account.
C. FIELD CHECKS
1. Motor Installations shall be complete and correct.

2. Operation tests shall be performed to observe that motors start, run and stop satisfactorily
under design load.

OBSTRUCTION WARNING LIGHT

SECTION 16750
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes obstruction warning lights for installation on building.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. FAA AC-70/7460-1 (Federal Aviation Administration) - Obstruction Marking and

Lighting.
B. FAA AC-150/5345-43 (Federal Aviation Administration) - Obstruction Lighting

Equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to FAA AC70/7460-1G
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum three years [documented] experience.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide one replacement lamp for each lamp installed.
B. Refer to Section 16999 Lists of Approved and Recommended Manufacturers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
A. Flashing Red Beacon Lights: FAA AC-150/5345-43, Type L-866, weatherproof

duplex style.
B. Red Obstruction Lights: FAA AC-150/5345-43, Type L-810, [single] [double] fitting.
C. High Intensity White Obstruction Lights: FAA AC-150/5345-43, Type L-856.
D. Medium Intensity White Obstruction Lights: FAA AC-150/5345-43, Type L-866.
2.2 PHOTOELECTRIC CELL
A. Product Description: Twist lock spring base, 1500 watt, 120 volt, range of 377-646
lux.
B. Include weatherproof outlet box with receptacle to receive photo-electric cell.
OBSTRUCTION WARNING LIGHT January 2019 16750-1

2.3 FLASHER UNIT
A. Product Description: Electronic flasher module suitable for flashing lights at rate of 40
flashes per minute
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Install in accordance with FAA AC-150/5340-21.
B. Install obstruction lighting units on accessories provided by the Manufacturer.
C. Install photocell unit on receptacle base.
D. Extend power from nearest emergency supply distribution board on landlords, side
provided circuits breakers, conduits, cables, outlets as necessary.
A. Inspect and test obstruction lighting equipment to FAA AC-150/5340-21.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flash rate and photocell level set points to meet requirements of FAA.
OBSTRUCTION WARNING LIGHT January 2019 16750-2

LIGHTING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS

SECTION 16860
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the intelligent building control system to control and monitor lighting
of public areas, landscape and building facades of the project. The system shall be distrib-
uted thorough system type network comprising microprocessor based lighting control de-
vices. Intelligent system components, operating by distributed control, are coupled to this
communications network.

2. Division 16 Section “Conductors and Cables”.
3. Division 16 Section “Raceways and Boxes”.
4. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices".
5. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CSMA-CA: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance, a multiple access
method in local area networks that prevents any collisions during simultaneous transmis-
sions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for light-
ing controls.
B. Selection criteria for ratings of power supply units and uninterruptible power supply units.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific
application on Project. Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and
clearance and access requirements.
1. Riser Diagram: detailed single-line diagram of the system configuration.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiate be-
tween manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Operational Documentation: For software and firmware.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance re-
quirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting control equipment and system components to include in
maintenance manuals. Include software-operating manuals.
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS January 2019 16860-1

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

programmable lighting system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing programmable lighting

controls similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain KNX system components from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide total responsibility for compatibility of system components, including those pro-
vided in this Section and in Division 16 Sections “Wiring Devices” and "Lighting Control
Devices".
D. Codes and Standards:
1. All devices in the system shall comply with:

a. KNX norms and guidelines.
2. In addition, devices shall comply with one of the international standards listed below
regarding EMC guidelines and the low voltage guidelines where not in contradiction
with Local Power Authorities requirements:
a. CE Standards
b. British Standards BS
c. Underwriters Laboratories UL
d. National Fire Protection Association NFPA
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of equipment and system components to form an integrated system of

compatible components. Match components and interconnections for optimum perfor-
mance of specified functions.
B. Coordinate lighting controls specified in this Section with work specified in other Sections,
including the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices”.

2. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices".
3. Division 16 Section "Panelboards".
1.7 WARRANTY

repair, restore or replace any defective device specified in this section during the specified
warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion,
2. Warranty shall cover defects in materials and workmanship, labor to troubleshoot, re-
pair, reprogram, or replace system components and manufacturer’s software updates
introduced during the warranty period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Relays: 5 % of each installed type but not less than 2 of each.

2. Switches: 5 % of each installed type but not less than 2 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Expansion Capability of System: Adequate to increase the number of control functions in

the future by 25 percent more than those indicated. This applies to equipment ratings,
housing volumes, spare relays, terminals, and control cable conductor quantities.
B. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all line voltage solid-state equipment.
C. The lighting control system (LCS) shall control all lighting devices and lighting switch plate
with Infrared remote control bus system comprise a two-wire bus line and the connected
bus-compatible installation devices, such as sensors, actuators and system components.
D. The system major have two parts component which are sensors and actuators. The sen-
sors are lighting switch plate with scene function. The actuators are lighting actuator, cur-
tain shutter control and control media.
E. The two-wire bus line carries technology carrier power for the electronics of the bus devices
and also the data. The bus line is connected to every bus device. Sensors normally only
use the bus line, while actuators use the 230V mains supply to control
F. The lighting control system and product shall apply standard open protocol with compliance
to ISO/IEC 7498, EN50090 and CENELEC/C 205 or equivalent acceptable international
open standard. The corresponding programming and application tools software must be
open standard type and not only for particular manufacturer or product. The programming
tools shall not be any manufacturer or proprietary products. It can be available through
standard organization
G. The lighting control system shall be a distributed intelligence system type network compris-
ing microprocessor-based lighting control devices connected via a topology-free network
that employs specified cable to supply power and facilitate communications between net-
work devices
H. The lighting control system should have the ability to support up to 64 units per single net-
work, and all the units are connected through specified twisted pair cable, self-powered op-
erations under extra-low voltage of 24Vdc
2.3 FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The lighting control system protocol shall utilize communication algorithms based on Syn-
chronous Carrier Sense, Multiple Access with Collision Detection, implemented with Colli-
sion Avoidance (CSMA/CD-CA) standards (IEEE Standard 802).
B. The lighting system for the small rooms and as specified on the Drawings, which being con-
trolled locally by motion sensors, shall turn-off that area lighting when the area is unoccu-
pied.
C. The conference rooms and meeting rooms shall be provided with touch screen control unit.
Fully customizable graphics including bar graphs, sliders, percentage indicators, images,

gauges and clocks with any border and background style shall be included for user-friendly
controlling on lighting level and/or other controlling functions as specified.
D. The perimeter lighting in window area, as specified in the Drawing, provided with light level
sensors shall provide top-up control to maintain minimum 500 lux on working plan by dim-
ming the lights if the daylight can supplement the artificial lighting. The mounting location of
light level sensor shall be selected that the operation of the light level sensor shall not be
affected by the internal or external lighting systems. The sensors shall be designed to
measure ambient light levels in the range of 10 to 1000 lux.
E. Areas shall be divided into smaller zones, and installed with motion sensors for the
ON/OFF area lighting control. Time delay of 5 min. to 30 min. shall be allowed for the au-
tomatic turn-off of lighting system by the signal from motion detectors infrared receivers.
Central lighting control system software shall adjust the time delay of the sensors up to 18
hours.
F. Scheduling function shall be set according to end-user’s need and/or relevant require-
ments. Lighting control system module supports scheduling, logic engine, and code pro-
gramming shall be included in the system.
G. The lighting control system shall be provision for BMS to remote monitoring, ON/OFF con-
trol and dimming.
H. The lighting control system (LCS) shall be a specialist design system comprises occupancy
sensors, input buttons, light level sensors, motion sensors, touch screens, relay actuators,
dimmer actuators, and system accessories.
I. LCS includes lighting control, maximum-demand monitoring, temperature control, emer-

gency and standby power, ventilation control, control of blinds/shutters, time-dependent
control/remote control, display/logging as well as monitoring and reporting. Weather data
can be recorded and integrated in the building automation. With various gateways, it is
possible to establish a connection to the Internet, telephone network or subsystems such
as DALI or 1…10 V controllers.
J. All the sensors (push buttons, dimmers, shutter switches, brightness and temperature sen-
sors, movement detectors etc.) are linked to the actuators (relays, lighting control devices,
shutter motors etc.) via a KNX control cable either YCYM (2x2x0.8mm) or J-Y (St) Y
(2x2x0.8mm).
K. The programming of the system is carried out with the Engineering Tools Software (ETS)
parameterization software via an RS232 or USB interface. They can be used in any loca-
tion within the bus system. A programming of the KNX devices by the Ethernet is possible
via IP gateway.
L. Each bus device receives a physical address. The device is queried or programmed via this
address. The bus management is a multi-master operation i.e. each bus device has the
same rights. A control unit is not required. Collision detection and resolution is possible via
the central access procedure CSMA-CA without loss of telegrams.
M. Work on the KNX installation bus should only be carried out by specialist electricians with
the appropriate training. The specialist contractor should have KNX training certificate and
a current ETS license.
N. All items shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures up to 40oC and relative
humidity range between 10 – 95% with no degradation in performance.
O. All mains voltage equipment shall be suitable for operation normally on phase voltages,
400Vac 3-phase and 230Vac 1-phase. All extra low voltage equipment will operate on a
maximum of 34V dc.

P. The Contractor shall be responsible for provided conduits/ trunking, wiring and all neces-
sary accessories as described in this Specification and shown on the Drawings.
Q. As a minimum, submit the following for approval at the appropriate stages of the works.
a. Detailed schedule of equipment and components and manufacturer’s data.
b. Detailed design drawings.
c. Builder’s Works requirements.
.
R. The Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission the lighting control system
comprising ON/OFF switching units, dimming units, motion detectors, light level sensors,
key input units, and all necessary accessories in accordance with the specific requirements
stipulated in this Specification, Annex A, Electrical general Specification and the Drawings.
S. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and install of the intelligent light-
ing control system and selection of equipment and components including the matching with
other components to ensure that the system conforms to the specified performance re-
quirements.
T. The Contractor shall provide power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and the sched-
ule of connection of lighting control system to the satisfaction of the Architect. Both power
and control wirings shall be provided from all lighting control output modules to their re-
spective luminaries
U. The intelligent lighting control system shall capable to interface to a Building Management
System (BMS), and the Contractor shall supply the interface driver. The interface driver
shall use a common protocol to interface with OPC or BACnet.
V. The lighting control system network bus should support free wiring topology. Star, daisy
chain or any combination shall be possible.
W. Dimming control of fluorescent lighting shall be via the use of dimmable electronic ballasts.
The lighting control system shall accept and compatible with 1-10V analogy control and
Digital Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI) ballasts.
X. The luminaries shall be connected to and supplied from lighting control output unit modules
installed as indicated on the Drawings. All outputs and inputs shall be individually ad-
dressed and identified within the system. The output units can support either ON/OFF or
dimming control. The ON/OFF relay modules shall each be capable of controlling up to 24
independent loads. The dimmer modules shall each be capable of controlling up to 2/4 in-
dependent loads on the same mains phase. All output modules shall be DIN rail mountable
and fit into standard DIN switchboard enclosures. Each relay/dimmer’s channel shall have
an associated manual over-ride switch and operation indicator light.
Y. The perimeter lighting in office area, meeting room and as specified in the Drawings pro-
vided with light level sensors shall be turn-off automatically once the external lighting level
reach a preset value. The mounting location of light level sensor shall be selected that the
operation of the light level sensor shall not be affected by the internal or external lighting
systems.
Z.Manual ON/OFF controlling of motion detectors shall be provided for the Open/Public area
lighting. The maximum spacing between the motion detectors shall be no more than 5 me-
ters. Upon field detection by body motion, the lighting shall be turned-on automatically for

duration of 15 to 30 minutes software adjustable delay-off timer from the central lighting
control system.
AA. The motion sensor shall be flush mounted into a ceiling and have a 360-degree field of
view. Coverage shall be a minimum of 7 metres diameter circular at the working plane with
a minimum ceiling height of 3.0 metres. The motion sensors shall be with software pro-
grammable time delay function and adjustable sensitivity on the unit.
BB. The wall mounted button plate shall support 1-gang, 2-gang or 4-gang with LED, which is
used to indicate the operation status of each gang. The wall mounted button plate shall
have the ability to be controlled remotely via infrared hand held remote control units.
CC. Halt circuits of each basement parking lights to be controlled through a pre-determined
time, other half by presence detectors, or full part of the lighting to be controlled by either
time setting or presence detectors.
2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. ACTUATOR
1. Switching Actuator
a. The relay unit shall allow control of 1/2/4/8/12/16/24 independent loads, equipped
with a voltage free, magnetically latched relay per channel.
b. No de-rating shall be required for inductive lighting loads
1) 1, 2, 4, 8, 12-fold shall support up to 16A per channel
2) 16, 24-fold shall support up to 10A per channel
c. The unit shall be independent switching of each channel via either make or break
contacts
d. Readiness for operation is indicated by a green LED after the application has been
loaded
e. Each unit shall have the facility for connecting both ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ Remote Manual
Override push-button switches. It shall be possible to connect these overrides in
parallel to multiple units to allow manual override of multiple units from one push-
button location
f. Local ON/OFF toggle buttons shall allow individual channels to be manually over-
ridden at each unit
g. Logic states and relay interlocking features shall be software selectable
h. The individual relays shall be DIN rail mounted within the unit enclosure
2. Switching Actuator with Current Detection

a. The relay unit shall allow control of 2/4/8/12 independent loads, equipped with a
voltage free, magnetically latched relay per channel
b. The unit shall support up to 16A per channel. No de-rating shall be required for in-
ductive lighting loads
c. The actuator also has integrated current detection which measures the load cur-
rent of each channel
1) A possible failure is registered, as is a break in the electric circuit
2) The operating status is shown and controlled by threshold values
3) Pending maintenance work can be planned looking ahead
3. Universal Dimmer Actuator

a. The dimmer unit shall be capable of controlling 1/2/4 independent loads
b. The unit shall provide up to 1000W per channel from a single-phase mains volt-
age, frequency 50 Hz
c. The minimum loading shall be greater than 25W
d. As well as controlling 220V loads (e.g. incandescent lighting), the dimmer unit shall
be capable of controlling dimmable electronic ballasts
e. The dimmer unit shall have the facility to program a minimum level setting and
power-up delay time via the lighting control software

f. Local ON/OFF toggle buttons shall allow individual channels to be manually over-
ridden at each unit
g. Readiness for operation is indicated by a green LED after the application has been
loaded
h. Electrical isolation between the Extra Low (Bus) Voltage and the Low (mains) volt-
age side of the unit shall be provided with the use of optical isolators
i. Electricity input for each channel could be fed from different phases (MTN649325
only)
j. The individual dimmers shall be DIN rail mounted within the unit enclosure
4. Blind Actuator
a. The unit shall allow control up to 12 blind / roller shutter drives with limit switch in-
dependently of one another
b. The unit shall support up to 10A per channel
c. Readiness for operation is indicated by a green LED after the application has been
loaded
d. Local manual buttons shall allow individual channels to be manually overridden at
each unit
e. Logic states and relay interlocking features shall be software selectable
f. The individual relays shall be DIN rail mounted within the unit enclosure
5. Analogue Output Unit

a. The analogue actuator shall convert KNX telegrams into analogue output signals
b. These analogue output signals enable heating, air conditioning and ventilation sys-
tem actuators to adapt their output variables based on bus information and to par-
ticipate in control processes
c. The outputs are parameterized to voltage or current signals using software
1) Voltage outputs: 0 to 1 V DC, 0 to 10 V DC
2) Current outputs: 0 to 20 mA DC, 4 to 20 mA DC
B. SYSTEM DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

1. Power supply/ Power supply with emergency input
a. The Power Supply shall provide safe extra low voltage (SELV) of DC 30V for one
line with up to 64 devices
b. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus, as well as
switches to interrupt the power supply and reset the bus users connected to the
line
c. It is short-circuit resistant, and features a voltage and current limiter. Excessively
high output currents are indicated by a red display (over current)
d. The input power supply shall be rated at 20V AC frequency 50 Hz
2. USB Interface
a. The USB interface, either flush-mounted or DIN rail type shall allow linking to a PC
for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX components with USB1.1 or
USB2 interfaces
3. Logic Module
a. The logic module is used for logic and controlling functions in KNX system
b. Device module shall be contained logic features as follow
1) 10 logic modules (AND, OR, XOR)
2) 10 filter and time modules
3) 8 converter modules
4) 12 multiplexer modules for lighting control
5) 3 freely programmable push buttons
6) 3 status LED initiators
4. KNX IP Router
a. The KNX/IP router enables telegrams to be forwarded between different lines via a
LAN (IP) as a rapid backbone

b. The device can additionally serve as a programming interface in order to connect a

PC with the KNX bus. The IP address can be assigned via a DHCP server or via
manual configuration (ETS)
c. The Internet protocols ARP, ICMP, IGMP, UDP/IP and DHCP are supported. The
device operates in accordance with the KNXnet/IP specification using core, device
management, tunneling and routing
d. The green operating LED indicates that the interface is ready for operation
5. DALI Gateway
a. The KNX DALI gateway shall connect the cross-function KNX bus with the DALI
bus designed exclusively for lighting control. Luminaries with DALI electronic bal-
lasts can therefore be integrated into a KNX complete system in the form of a sub-
system and operated by a wide range of available KNX devices
b. The gateway shall serve as the DALI master and power supply for the connected
electronic ballasts. Up to a maximum of 64 electronic ballasts according to IEC
60926 in a total of 16 groups can be switched, dimmed or set to a defined value
c. Brightness values or error messages in the DALI devices can be sent to the KNX
and visualized on display units
d. The DALI is commissioned and configured with the integrated display and operator
buttons
e. DALI commissioning and configuration shall be performed as follows:
1) via the device
2) via a software tool (free of charge)
3) via the integrated web server
4) via a portable web panel or a PDA
5) via two binary inputs, e.g. for connecting push-buttons to the device (build-
ing site operation)
C. SENSORS
1. Push Button, 1/2/4 gang
a. Application module for KNX system design
b. Push buttons shall be available with 2/4/8 operating buttons, operating and status
display and labeling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation
light
c. Push buttons are freely parameterizable as push button pairs or as single push
buttons. Each button shall be capable of being programmed to achieve various
control functions including, setting a scene, toggling, switching, dimmer control and
blind control
d. Push buttons is free for plugging on coupling unit
2. Push Button Plus, 4 gang with IR receiver

b. Push buttons shall be available with 8 operating buttons, operating and status dis-
play and labeling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation
light
c. The functions of each keys can be triggered using an IR remote control
d. The push buttons are freely parameterizable as push button pairs or as single
push buttons. Each button shall be capable of being programmed to achieve vari-
ous control functions including, setting a scene, toggling, switching, dimmer control
and blind control
e. Push buttons is free for plugging on coupling unit
3. Multi-Function Push Button with room temperature control, 2/4 gang

b. All functions of respective buttons can be controlled via distance remote controls
c. Push buttons shall be available with 4/8 operating buttons, operating and status
display and labeling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation
light

d. The room temperature control unit shall be used for heating and cooling with infi-
nitely adjustable KNX valve drives or to trigger switch actuators and heating actua-
tors. With the display for showing date, time, temperature and operating mode
e. The push buttons are freely parameterizable as push button pairs or as single
push buttons. Each button shall be capable of being programmed to achieve vari-
ous control functions including, setting a scene, toggling, switching, dimmer con-
trol, blind control, fan control
4. Motion Sensor (KNX ARGUS)

a. Provide flush mounted PIR occupancy sensor as shown on the drawings
b. The motion sensor shall be a flush-mounted KNX presence detector for indoor in-
stallation
c. The unit shall detect moving heat sources, e.g. people, within a radius of 180° and
to a distance of approx. 8 m to the right and left and approx.12 m to the front
d. The unit shall be designed for installation at a height of 2.2 m
e. The unit shall incorporate dual PIR element detectors to minimize false triggering
5. Motion Sensor (ARGUS 220)
a. Provide surface mounted PIR occupancy sensor as shown on the drawings
b. The motion sensor shall be a surface-mounted KNX movement detector which can
be used indoors and outdoors due to its IP55 protection rating
c. The unit shall have a 220° detection pattern, a radius of 7m at a 2.5m mounted
above floor-level
d. The unit shall have 360° short-rang zone with a radius of 4m
e. The area of detection could be adapted to the local conditions due to the horizon-
tally, vertically and axially adjustable sensor head. Unwanted zones or sources of
interference (e.g. trees) from the area of detection could be blocked using the
masking segments provided
6. Motion Sensor (KNX ARGUS Presence)

a. Provide ceiling mount PIR occupancy sensor as shown on the drawings
b. The motion sensor shall be KNX presence detector for interior ceiling mounting
c. The unit shall have a 360° detection pattern, a radius of 7m at 2.5 meters mounted
above floor-level
d. Sensor should have lux adjustable from 10 to 2000
7. IP Touch Panel
a. The LCD screen shall be 10 inches in size (diagonal) and include a 800 x 600 pixel
SVGA. The touch overlay shall be a resistive membrane type
b. The Touch Panel interface shall be configurable to suit user requirements via the
Windows™ compatible configuration software. Required software shall download
from manufacturer website
c. The Touch Panel shall provide a wall mounted, colour interface to the automation
system. The Touch Screen shall include a touch sensitive LCD screen that can
display pages of graphical items, such as buttons, sliders and images. These
graphical items shall be programmed to perform control and monitoring related
functions
d. The Touch Panel shall be capable of controlling and monitoring via LAN (10/100 M
bit/s), RS-232 and USB connection
e. The touch panel shall be provided at the conference rooms, meeting rooms and
VIP rooms of 19th Floor and as shown in the drawings.
8. KNX Touch Screen 7”

a. The touch screen shall be a 7 inches TFT screen in size (diagonal) and include
800 x 480 pixels
b. Touch screen functionality shall be contained:
1) Week time switch
2) Website accessible
3) Scenes control
4) Slide show with personal photos via USB
5) Updates via plug-ins and USB

6) Horizontal or vertical installation

7) Minimum 8 frame colours and materials
8) Minimum 5 colour themes for user
9) Password protection
9. Brightness and Temperature sensor

a. The sensor shall be compatible for brightness and temperature measurement,
measured values are sent to the bus
b. Measurement range for brightness shall be adjustable from 1 to 100,000 lux with
+/- 20% or +/- 5 lux tolerance
c. Measurement range for temperature shall be adjustable from -25°C to +55°C with
+/- 5% or +/- 1°C tolerance
10. Weather Station with sensors

a. The weather sensor shall be incorporated with a wind sensor, precipitation sensor,
twilight sensor and brightness sensors
b. The measurement values for wind, temperature are transmitted directly to the bus
and are processed in the device
c. The sensors shall be IP65, suitable for external installation on a wall or on a mast
d. Measurement range for wind speed shall be adjustable from 1 to 40 m/s with +/-
0.5m/s tolerance
e. Measurement range for brightness shall be adjustable from 1 to 110,000 lux
f. Measurement range for temperature shall be adjustable from -40°C to +60°C
11. Analogue Input

a. The unit shall be processed measuring data from analogue sensors
b. Minimum four freely programmable analogy transducers can be connected to the
input
c. The unit shall evaluate both voltage signals and current signals as
1) Current signals: 0 to 20mA DC, 4 to 20mA DC
2) Voltage signals: 0 to 1V DC, 0 to 10V DC
3) The unit shall be monitored for wire breakage
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount control equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and require-

ments in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between control devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables" for low-voltage connections.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Race-
ways and Boxes."
C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D. Ground equipment in accordance with Division 16 “Grounding and Bonding”.
E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Label each system control module with a unique designation. Make designations on ele-
vated components readable from floor.
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

test, adjust, and program lighting control system.
B. Check, calibrate and test all system components to insure that the system performs in
accordance with the Specifications and the required sequence of operation. Demon-
strate:
1. group and pattern switching,

2. timer and delay functions,
3. scheduling function,
4. manual override commands,
5. And system man/machine interface functionality.
C. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
D. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state com-
ponents. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.

2. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and ca-
pabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating func-
tions.
a. Where light balancing or other control involving equipment provided under other
Sections is indicated, combine testing required by this Section with that required
by Sections specifying other equipment. Test programmable control related to
light balancing, occupancy sensing, and other controls under conditions that simu-
late actual operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and
functional observations.
E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified re-
quirements are met.
F. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and ma-
terials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-

sonnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and

maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of eight hours' training.

2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training
aid.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through the Engineer, with at least seven days' ad-
vance notice.
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up

to 4 Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes,
and adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

MASTER ANTENNA SYSTEM TELEVISION EQUIPMENT

SECTION 16870
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes master antenna television system complete including antennas, head
end switchers and distribution network comprising of cables, tap off units and outlets. The
signal source of the system consists of:
1. A satellite earth-station system of the receive-only type.
B. The scope is that every tenant within any apartment can bring his own Satellite Decoder and
watch free to air and paid channels according to what he has subscribed for based on the
reception provided. On the other hand all the other TV outlets within the apartment and
common areas will be provided with digital CATV known as QAM and will benefit from the 20
transponders with free to air channels without the need of buying any setop boxes. The latter
will be connected straight to the TV Input outlet. Channel list to be decided at time of the
project.
The system will be based on 3 antennas, 1.8m offset European Made, installed on the top of the
building configured on Hotbird, Nilesat and Astra which covers most of the sought after
channels. The antennas are to be installed with Fibre LNB units where the fibre optic cable
will be taken straight to the Main it Room where it will be then processed for the IF and QAM
signal Headend to be distributed throughout the network.
PART 1
PART 2 Both Signals will be combined in the Main It Room and then distributed via fibre optic
cables to each and every apartment and to the ELV for the Common Areas. Within the
Apartment the Fibre optic carrying the 13 polarities/signal, will be then fed to a receiver where
all the polarities are converted to copper. This copper is then fed to an amplified multiswitch
where the output will be taken to each and every TV outlet within the apartment. Same
transport will occur for the common area TV socket outlet but this time the Fibre optic from
Main It room is carried out to the ELV within Each Core and from there it will be converted to
copper and distributed to the outlets.
Copper cable to be used throughout the network is RG6, European made with specs as below.
Running distance from Multiswitch to the TV Socket outlet is not to exceed the 60m. Should
this happen RG11 is to be used and it is not to exceed the 85m so as to avoid any line
amplifiers.
Master Antenna System Television Equipment January 2019 16870-1

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MATV: Master antenna television.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component specified.
Include data on features, ratings, performance, catalogues and literature, sufficiently detailed
for engineering purposes, and with full description of component and operating parameters.
Submittals are to include also:
1. Reception distribution technique

2. System expandability.
3. Operating parameters and limitations, ambient conditions, heat dissipation, power
requirements, etc.
4. Recommended coaxial cable specifications and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures, and details of
control panels. Show access and workspace requirements.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring. Wiring diagrams are to bear manufacturer’s signature
indicating that they have reviewed the drawings and that they are correct in respect to sizes,
wiring and configuration and will operate in accordance with function, scope and intent of the
specifications.
3. Detailed system schematic diagram.
4. Exact camera Locations, layouts and mounting details.
5. Configuration and construction details for operating console and layouts.
6. Complete and detailed cable routing and layouts with calculation losses and signal levels.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of television

equipment. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Location of items requiring installation coordination including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grills,
speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural features.
D. Samples: Full size, for each outlet and finish plate, for colors and textures required.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of television equipment and components

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
requirements of installed systems.

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

television equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units required for
this Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Standards: System is to be in accordance to CCIR and/or EIA standards or other equal and
approved standards.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of television equipment and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 TELEVISION SYSTEMS
A. Components: Modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial- or commercial-grade units.
B. Equipment: Silicon-based, solid-state, integrated circuit devices.
C. Power Supply Characteristics: Devices shall be within specified parameters for ac supply
voltages within the range of 190 to 240 V.
D. Protect signal cables and connected components against transient-voltage surges by

suppressors and absorbers designed specifically for the purpose.
E. RF and Video Impedance Matching: Signal-handling components, including connecting cable,

shall have end-to-end impedance-matched signal paths. Match and balance devices used at
connections where it is impossible to avoid impedance mismatch or mismatch of balanced
circuits to unbalanced circuits.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Description: Signal-source components, signal-processing and amplifying equipment,

distribution components, and interconnecting wiring. System shall receive signals from
sources, amplify and process them, and distribute them to outlets for receiving sets. UHF
channels indicated to be received, are translated to VHF channels before distribution to
outlets.
B. Identification of Signal Sources and Channels Distributed:
1. A satellite earth-station system of the receive-only type.
C. MATV System Functional Description: System shall receive signals from sources, amplify and
process them, and distribute them to outlets for receiving sets. UHF channels indicated to be
received are translated to VHF channels before distribution to outlets.

D. MATV System Qualitative Performance Requirements: Reception quality of color-television

program transmissions at each system outlet from each designated channel and source shall
be equal to or superior than that obtained with performance checks specified in "Field Quality
Control" Article, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television receiver.
E. MATV System Quantitative Performance Requirements: Level and quality of signal at each
outlet from each designated channel and source shall ensure
1. A signal at TV receiver between 60 to 84 BuV.

2. Signal at TV receiver between 54 to 84 BuV.
3. AM/FM signal at all outlets between 40 to 80 BuV.
4. Signal to noise ratio greater or equal to 40 dB.
5. Hum modulation ratio greater or equal to 46 dB.
6. Minimum isolation between outlets 40 dB.
2.4 ANTENNAS
A. Off-Air, Mast-Mounted Antennas: Weatherproof single-channel or broadband type,

constructed of high-strength anodized aluminum and rated to survive in a 160-km/h wind,
minimum. Directional, with double director array and anti ghost reflector system, offering a
gain of 13 dB or higher. Dedicated antennas for each of band III VHF, and UHF is to be
provided. Provide adequate number to cover all local channels, without the need to rotate
antennas. Provide weather sealed connection for the coaxial fitting to antennas
1. Elements: Internally dampened against such mechanical vibration as may occur in service.
2. Ends of Cross arms and Elements: Sealed.
3. Mounting and Connecting Hardware: Corrosion proof.
4. Frequency Range: Matched to source frequencies.
5. Radio Antenna: Separate from the broadband antenna and omnidirectional type, with 2-dB
minimum gain.
B. Optic LNB Unit
The optical Ku-Band LNB should provide a 1310 nm wideband optical output. All four
polarities are stacked into one frequency range (950-5450 MHz) for distribution through one
single fibre optic cable. Single mode fibre cable is to be used and connection to be via an
FC/PC connector. Power to the Optical LNB is to be applied via an F-connector through an
indoor power supply.
Input frequency range 10.7 - 12.75 GHz

Band stacking, vertical 0.950 - 3.0 GHz
Band stacking, horizontal 3.4 - 5.45 GHz
Polarization Horizontal and vertical
Wavelength Optical 1310 nm
Optical power, (nominal @ 25°C ) 7.0dBm
Variation, output power, ± 0.2dBm
Equivalent split levels possible (max.) 32ways
Total loss (nominal) 18.3 dB
C. Satellite Earth-Station Antennas: Variable-alignment, receive-only, prime-focus, paraboloidal

type.
1. Materials: Corrosion resistance, suitable for marine and moderate industrial environments.
2. Mount Configuration and Finish: Integral type with epoxy-powder coating finish.
3. Minimum Satellite Coverage: Declination-corrected polar mount, for reception at Project
location of transmissions, from any satellite in the area.
4. Operating Frequency: 3.7 to 12.2 GHz.
5. Survival Wind Velocity: 160 km/h, minimum.
6. Feed Horn: Dual C and K (u) bands, dual-polarization type.

D. Steerable-Satellite Earth-Station Antenna: Programmable motorized variable alignment

throughout entire satellite coverage range.
E. Fixed-Satellite Earth-Station Antenna: Manually aligned (azimuth-elevation mount).
F. Low-Noise Block Converter, C Band: Weatherproof, with integral protection from surge
voltages and input frequency of 3.7 to 4.2 GHz.
G. Low-Noise Block Converter, K (u) Band: Weatherproof, with integral protection from surge
voltages and an input frequency range to suit signals specified to be received.
H. Antenna-Support Structures: Prefabricated, hot-dip galvanized steel units.
1. Strength of Structure and Attachments: Adequate to withstand 160-km/h winds while

supporting installed antennas.
2.5 COMPONENTS
A. Satellite Receivers for Use with Steerable-Satellite Earth-Station Antennas: Include the
following features:
1. C and K (u) band ready.

2. Automatic, programmable antenna positioning control and receiver tuning for a minimum of
40 channels, with manual override/fine tuning.
3. Intermediate frequency bandwidth individually adjustable per channel in increments from 17
to 36 MHz.
4. Stereo audio reception.
5. Manual and automatic, programmable channel selection.
6. Programmable timer for unattended system operation.
7. Digital indication of antenna position, channel selection, and signal strength.
8. Baseband video and stereo audio signal outputs.
9. Suitable for 483-mm electronic equipment rack mounting.
B. Satellite Receivers for Use with Fixed-Satellite Earth-Station Antennas: Include the following
features:
1. C and K (u) band ready.

2. Front panel channel selection control.
3. Intermediate frequency bandwidth switchable or field adjustable in increments from 17 to 36
MHz.
4. Digital indication of signal strength.
5. Baseband video and stereo audio signal outputs, plus a minimum of two outputs for use with
descramblers or decoders.
6. Suitable for 483-mm electronic equipment rack mounting.
Optical receiver fiber into DVB-S(2)
Conversion from fiber optics to up to 16 SAT IF lines and terrestrial

Minimum Optical input power -8 dBm
Maximum Optical input Power +10 dBm
Output level SAT / Terr. Is to be 74 dBμV ± 2 dB
C. Signal-Path Adaptation Components: Units consistent with specified levels of overall

system performance. Include the following where necessary for indicated functional
requirements whether shown in system diagrams or not:
1. Modulators.
2. Demodulators.
3. Processors.
4. Descramblers.

5. Decoders.
6. Converters.
D. Preamplifiers: Coaxial-down-lead-broadband or single-channel type, inherently protected

against lightning and voltage surges and enclosed in weatherproof housings. Use antenna
cable for power supply from external source.
E. Head-End Equipment: Include filters, processors, broadband and single-channel amplifiers

combining networks, power supplies, and other equipment as required to provide specified
performance. House units in standard 483mm electronic equipment cabinet.
SMATV (IF) Headend:

PART 3
PART 4 To convert Satellite and Terrestrial signals to single core fiber solution consisting of:
 19 inch rack mountable base unit with redundant switch mode power supply
 LNB remote power with 14/18V + 22 kHz or 12 V
 Configurable and monitoring via LAN/IP
 Distribution to 32 optical nodes possible
 Optical output connector type: SC/APC
 Redundant power supply
 Operating temperature -10 ... +55°C
 Input frequency range SAT 950 … 2150 MHz
 Input frequency range Terr. 47 - 862 MHz
 Optical output power 9 dBm
Professional Headend 8 / 16 / 24 / 32 x DVB-S(2) into QAM

 19 inch base unit with redundant switch mode power supply
 Modular expandable to up to 32 QAM transponder
 LNB remote power with 14/18V + 22 kHz or DiSEqC 1.0
 SCR (single cable system) control command for more flexibility
 Configuration and monitoring via LAN/IP
 Complete processing of the transport streams possible
 Each of up to 32 output channels can be placed individually in the spectrum
 Two independent input ports per 8 FTA TP’s or 4 CI TP’s
 Modular Card with 4 CI with 4 CI-Slots for the extension with Pay-TV programs
Technical Specifications of QAM Head End
Input Frequency range 950 … 2150 MHz

AFC range 1 MHz
AGC level range 64 … 94 dBμV
Through loss < 2,5 dB
LNB supply voltage 14 / 18 V (400 mA), DiSEqC 1.0
Modulation QPSK
Symbol rate 1 … 45 MSps
Code rate (Viterbi) 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Signal processing ETS 300 421 (DVB-S)
Modulation QPSK, 8PSK
Symbol rate 2 … 47 MSps (QPSK); 2 … 31,5 MSps (8PSK)
Code rate (LDPC) QPSK =1/4, 1/3, 2/5, 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
8 PSK = 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
Signal processing ETS 302 307 (DVB-S2) QAM-Output
Symbol rate 1,0 … 7,2 MSps
QAM constellation 64, 256 QAM
Output level max. 80 dBμV
Sum level setting 1 dB (+ 3dB)
Individual level setting 0,5 dB (+ 3 dB)

Channel allocation Adjacent channel compatible (IEDGE)

Connector F-jack, 75
Through loss 1 dB
Output frequency range 47 … 862 MHz
F. Signal Power Splitters and Isolation Taps: Metal-enclosed directional couplers with brass
connector parts. Where installed in signal circuits used to supply cable-powered amplifiers,
power throughput capacity shall exceed load by 25 percent minimum.
G. Signal Traps: Packaged filters tuned to interference frequencies encountered in Project.
H. Attenuators: Fixed to balance signal levels.
I. Terminating Resistors: Enclosed units rated 0.5 W and matched for coaxial impedance.
J. Outlets: Flush, female type with metallic parts of anodized brass, beryllium copper, or
phosphor bronze.
1. Wall Plates: Match materials and finish of power outlets in the same space.
2. Attenuation: Less than 0.1 dB.
3. Voltage Standing Wave Ratio: Less than 1.15 to 1.
2.6 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
A. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 75-ohms nominal impedance. Cables run in
environmental air spaces are listed for use in plenums.
1. Satellite Antenna Cable: RG-11/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, tinned-copper braid shield

with 100 percent shielding factor, No. 18 AWG solid copper conductor; and PVC jacket.
2. MATV Outdoor Antenna Cable: RG-59/U; solid polyethylene dielectric foil plus tinned-copper
braid shield with 100 percent shielding factor, No. 20 or No. 22 AWG solid copper or copper-
clad-steel conductor; and black PVC jacket.
3. MATV Indoor Trunk Cable: RG-11/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, bare-copper braid shield
with 95 percent minimum shielding factor, No. 14 AWG solid bare-copper conductor; and PVC
jacket.
4. MATV Indoor Branch Cable: RG-6/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, bare-copper braid shield
with 95 percent minimum shielding factor, No. 18 AWG solid copper-clad-steel conductor; and
PVC jacket.
5. Power Cables: 3-core, with copper conductors minimum 1.5 mm2 cross-section, PVC
insulated (70 degrees C insulation grade), and as described in Division 16 Section
“Conductors and Cables” of the Specification.
B. Coaxial Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms.
C. Power Cable Connectors: Crimp type with eye lugs, screwed to insulated connection bars at
racks or inside cabinets.
D. Cable Lengths: cables are to be supplied in minimum 400 in spool lengths.
E. Raceways for MATV cabling and distribution are to be as described in Division 16 Section
“Raceways and Boxes” of the Specification.
Coaxial RG6 Cable Specs:
Inner Conductor 1.13mm

Dielectric 4.80mm
Outer Sheet 6.70mm
Braid CUCN @ 40%
Anti-migrating Foil PET

Impedance @200Mhz 75 +/- 3

Capacitance pF/m 52
Velocity Ratio 85%
Min Bending Radius 35mm
Inner DC Resistance 18 Ohm/Km
Outer Dc Resistance 26 Ohm/Km
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways.
C. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install
bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation
and replace it with new cable.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
E. Grounding: Provide signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.
F. Equipment: install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to the approval of the
Engineer. Mount equipment in alignment with other building fixtures and fix firmly in place
with all supports and fastenings secured.
G. Interference Protection: equipment is to be installed to prevent electromagnetic,

electrostatic or other outside interference impairing system performance.
H. Accessibility: equipment is to be installed to be readily accessible for operation,

maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made, but no changes
are to be made without prior approval.
I. Make good surfaces of equipment damaged during installation, using touch-up paint
provided by equipment manufacturer, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
J. Routing of video signal cables, power and control cables, in general, is to be in separate
raceways.
3.2 MATV SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Head-End Equipment: Mount in electronic equipment the types of cabinets recommended

by manufacturer. Group related items in methodical sequence.
B. Satellite Receivers: Mount in head-end equipment racks.
C. Arrange equipment to facilitate access for maintenance and to preserve headroom and
passage space.
D. MATV Antennas: Align antenna elements to achieve maximum signal level and quality.

E. MATV Antenna-Supporting Structure: Increase antenna height as required to obtain signal

strength needed for specified system performance.
F. Antenna Cable Entrance: Use entrance fittings and seal and waterproof penetrations of the
building envelope.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pre-testing, testing,
and adjusting of television equipment.
B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
C. Record test results.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
E. System test is to include light box mylar test pattern for random camera locations, for
measurement of resolution, streaking, ringing, interlace, shading, scanning, aspect ratio and
gray scale.' H&V wedges of resolution chart are to be arranged to measure 200 to 1600 lines.
F. Test Equipment: provide diagnostic equipment required performing system tests and
measurements including function generator, Impedance Bridge, oscilloscope, frequency
spectrum analyzer, chart recorder, digital voltmeter, dB meter and wave form monitor.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
installation.

Electrical Specification MZ & Partners W.L.L. GP18022 – Al Waab Com’l and Res’l District ECQ
LIST OF APPROVED AND RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

SECTION 16999
The following list of manufacturers is given to show the minimum quality expected in each
equipment/product. Refer to the “List of Kahramaaa Approved Manufacturers” for additional products.
1. Grounding & Earthing System

a. Furse– UK
b. BICC – UK
2. Conductors/Cables (LV)
a. Doha Cables – Qatar
b. Oman Cables – Oman
3. MV Cables
a. Doha Cables - Qatar
b. Oman Cables - Oman
4. Conduits, Fiber Ducts, Wireways & Boxes

a. Lanric
b. Thomas & Betts
c. Afripipe
d. Stilink – Malaysia
e. Visiontek
5. Cable Trays
a. Thomas & Betts
b. Wibe
c. Cooper
d. Primetech
e. Tekompuk - Turkey
6. Wiring Devices
a. ABB – Germany
b. Vimar - Italy
LIST OF APPROVED AND RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS January 2019 16999-1

c. FEB – Portugal
d. AVE – Italy
7. Generators & Major Components

a. Caterpillar – USA
b. Cummins – USA/UK
c. Kohler – USA
d. Mitsubishi – Japan
8. Static UPS
a. GE- Switzerland
b. Eaton – EU
c. Hitachi
9. Emergency Central Battery System (Subject to QCDD Approval & UL Listing)

a. Emergi-Lite, Inc. – Canada/UK
b. Cooper - UK/USA
10. Transformer (Subject to Kahramaa Approval)

a. ABB – Spain
b. Tesar – Italy
11. Automatic Power Factor Capacitor Correction

a. ABB - Germany
b. Eaton – EU
12. Automatic Transfer Switch

a. Socomec - France
b. ABB–Germany
c. ASCO – USA
d. Eaton - EU
13. Switchboards & Major Components

a. ABB – Germany

b. Eaton - EU
14. Panel Boards (SMDB, DB, MCC) & Major Components

(Locally assembled by reputable panel board fabricators)
a. ABB – Germany
b. Eaton – EU
15. Bus Ducts (Steel Enclosure Only)

a. Translite – Malaysia
b. Powerduct – Malaysia
c. Link / Megaduct – Malaysia
16. Interior & Exterior Light Fixtures

a. Trilux – Germany
b. Hoffmeister - Germany
c. Cree - USA
d. Bega - Germany
e. Schreder - Belgium
f. Erco - Germany
g. Megabay – Australia
h. RSL – Germany
i. Wibre Lighting – Germany
j. Oktalite – Germany
17. Guest Room Management System – Not Applicable
18. Fire Alarm & Detection System (Subject to QCCD Approval, UL / EN54 Listing)
a. Edwards/UTC Fire and Security
b. Bosch
c. Cooper
19. Lightning Protection System (Shall be UL Listed)

a. Furse – UK
b. Erico – Australia

20. Structured Cabling & Blown Fiber

a. Panduit
b. VisionTek
c. Afripipe
d. Brandrex
21. IP CCTV System

a. Bosch - Portugal
b. Pelco - USA
c. Axis - Sweden
d. VisionTek - Canada
22. Motor Control Center

a. ABB - Germany
b. Eaton - EU
23. Motor Starters

a. ABB – Germany
b. Telemechanique – France
24. Variable Speed Controllers

a. Danfoss - USA
b. ABB – Germany
c. Vacon – Finland
d. Telemechanique – France
25. Electric Motors

a. ABB – Germany
b. Brooks – Crompton – UK
c. AEG – Germany
d. Leroy / Somer – France
26. Gate Barrier – Not Applicable

27. Electric Metering

a. All Kahramaa Approved Brands
28. Lighting Control System – Not Applicable
29. Music Broadcasting System / Background Music System
a. Bose
b. Yamaha
c. Bosch
30. Surge Suppression
a. DEHN Surge Suppression – Germany

b. ABB – Germany
c. Furse – UK
31. IP Voice & Data System
a. Hewlett Packard
b. Cisco
c. Alcatel Lucent
32. Access Control & Electronic Lock System
a. Kaba (Saflock/Ilco/Droma)
b. CISA / Ingersoll-Rand
c. ASSA ABLOY Hospitality (VingCard)
d. Bosch
33. Intrusion Detection / Alarm System – Not Applicable
34. Radio System (2 way) – Not Applicable
35. Internal Communication – Not Applicable
36. Wireless Emergency Notification System – Not Applicable

37. Inspection Tour Recording System – Not Applicable
38. Electronic Key Management
a. Morsch Watchman
b. Bosch
39. Active Components

a. Cisco (Routers, Switches and Wireless Access Points)
b. Hewlett Packard (Switches and Wireless Access Points)
c. Alcatel Lucent (Routers, Switches, Wireless Access Points and PABX)
40. Digital Display & Signage
a. Macnetix
b. MediaXstreme
c. MessageLink
41. SMATV System
a. Polytron - Germany
b. Fracaro - Italy
42. IPTV System
a. Docomo
b. Swisscom
c. Televis
d. Tripleplay
43. HSIA Service Provider
a. Docomo
b. Swisscom
c. Ibahn

Electrical Specs Jan. 2019

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Electrical Specs Jan. 2019

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

AL WAAB COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DISTRICT

AL WAAB COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DISTRICT

January 2019 MZ & Partners W.L.L. Page i of i

16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT

INDEX January 2019 Page 1 of 1

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT

B. This section generally specifies administrative and procedure requirements regarding

1.02 EXTENT OF WORK

This shall include installation, testing, pre-commissioning, commissioning, snags

The following builder’s work shall be considered as part of this work:

iv. Excavation and break filling, including compaction of trenches.

v. Painting items of equipment and exposed pipes and supports, including

v. Labeling and identification.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-1

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

C. HIGH AND LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

 High voltage works shall be as per KM-ENA Compound agreement.

1. Essential Standby Diesel Generators, providing emergency power supply to

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-2

F. EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION

1. Substation and MV room earthing in accordance with the latest KM regulations.

G. FIRE DETECTION, ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SERVICE

1. Fully automatic addressable fire alarm system is provided throughout including

H. BUILDING MANGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) AND CONTROLS

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-3

J. ACCESS ALARM AND CONTROL SYSTEM

 An Intrusion Detection System (IDS) and CCTV system comprising cameras

K. IP & SMATV TELEVISION SYSTEMS

 A centralized television distribution system is provided incorporating Cable television

L. IP TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND DISTRIBUTION

 Complete IP based System serving the Client.

N. ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY FOR VARIOUS MECHANICAL/OTHER

a. All HVAC Equipments - Electrical

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. State of Qatar “Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-4

e. Regulations, specification, guidelines, instruction and circulars dictated or

2. Comply with the latest applicable standards of the following:

1) ASME American Society of Engineers.

2. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval as described

4. Certificates shall include statements of applicability, certifying reports from governing

8. No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to site until the required

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-5

1.07 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS

1.08 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

1.09 SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

Catalogues, pamphlets or manufacturer’s drawings submitted for approval shall be clearly

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-6

1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-7

1.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS, SUPPLY OF SPARE PARTS AND LISTS

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.14 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP

1.15 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-8

Approval of a manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of his equipment as

Where such approved substitution requires a different quantity or arrangement of piping,

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-9

1.18 ACCESS DOORS

Requirements of access doors shall be submitted in sufficient advance time to be installed in

Each piece of equipment provided shall carry, at a conspicuous location, attached in a

Labels shall be attached to equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, etc. or to

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT January 2019 16010-10